2018 Nissan Titan And XD | Owner's Manual Maintenance Information USA Owner

User Manual: Pdf 2018 Nissan Titan Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 729 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2018 Nissan Titan Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information
OM18EA 0A61U1
Table of Contents
Owner's Manual Supplement
2018 Nissan Titan Diesel Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information Supplement
- OM18EA +A61U0
- Table of Contents

2018 TITAN

OWNER’S MANUAL

and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

CLICK HERE to view the 2018 Nissan Titan Diesel Owner's

Manual and Maintenance Information Supplement

Owner’s Manual Supplement

The information contained within this supplement updates the following

information in the 2017 NISSAN Titan and 2018 NISSAN Titan Owner’s

Manual.

In the “NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats)” and “Supplemental

air bag system” sections of the Owner’s Manual.

Read carefully and keep in vehicle.

Printing: October 2017

Publication No.: SU18EA 0A61U0

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag infla-

tors

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bags

3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

4. Supplemental front-impact air bag

modules

5. Crash zone sensor

6. Occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor)

7. Occupant classification system control

unit

8. Seat belt buckle switches

9. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

10. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag modules

11. Satellite sensor (if so equipped)

12. Satellite sensor

LRS3053

Supplemental air bag system

1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bags in-

flators

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bags

3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

4. Supplemental front-impact air bag

modules

5. Crash zone sensor

6. Seat belt buckle switches

7. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

8. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag modules

9. Satellite sensor (if so equipped)

10. Satellite sensor

LRS3052

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

WARNING

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger

vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to

chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,

phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects or other

reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid

breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as

necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area

and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when

servicing your vehicle. For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

This manual was prepared to help you un-

derstand the operation and maintenance

of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many

miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.

Please read through this manual before

operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Book-

let explains details about the warranties

covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance

and schedules” section of this manual

explains details about maintaining and

servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a

separate Customer Care/Lemon Law

Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re-

solve any concerns you may have with

your vehicle, and clarify your rights un-

der your state’s lemon law.

A NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle

best. When you require any service or have

any questions, they will be glad to assist

you with the extensive resources available

to them.

In addition to factory-installed options,

your vehicle may also be equipped with

additional accessories installed prior to de-

livery. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for details concerning the

particular accessories with which you ve-

hicle is equipped. It is important that you

familiarize yourself with all disclosures,

warnings, cautions and instructions con-

cerning proper use of such accessories

prior to operating the vehicle and/or ac-

cessory. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for details concerning the

particular accessories with which your ve-

hicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this

Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure

familiarity with controls and maintenance

requirements assisting you in the safe op-

eration of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

REMINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

∙ NEVER drive under the influence of al-

cohol or drugs.

∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for

conditions.

∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle fea-

tures or taking other actions that

could distract you.

∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap-

propriate child restraint systems. Pre-

teen children should be seated in the

rear seat (if so equipped).

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

∙ ALWAYS provide information about

the proper use of vehicle safety fea-

tures to all occupants of the vehicle.

∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

For descriptions specified for 4-wheel drive

models, a mark is placed at the be-

ginning of the applicable sections/items.

As with other vehicles with features for

off-road use, failure to operate 4-wheel

drive models correctly may result in loss

of control or a collision. For additional

information, refer to “Driving safety pre-

cautions” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING

This vehicle will handle and maneuver

differently from an ordinary passen-

ger car because it has a higher center

of gravity for off-road use. As with

other vehicles with features of this

type, failure to operate this vehicle

correctly may result in loss of control

or an accident.

For additional information, refer to

“On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions”, “Avoiding collision and

rollover” and “Driving safety precau-

tions” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its

performance, safety, emissions or du-

rability and may even violate govern-

mental regulations. In addition, dam-

age or performance problems

resulting from modifications may not

be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di-

agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses

the port during normal driving, for ex-

ample remote insurance company

monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,

telematics or engine reprogramming,

may cause interference or damage to

vehicle systems. We do not recommend

or endorse the use of any aftermarket

OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically

approved by NISSAN. The vehicle war-

ranty may not cover damage caused by

any aftermarket plug-in device.

This manual includes information for all

features and equipment available on this

model. Features and equipment in your ve-

hicle may vary depending on model, trim

level, options selected, order, date of pro-

duction, region or availability. Therefore,

you may find information about features or

equipment that are not included or in-

stalled on your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustra-

tions in this manual are those in effect at the

time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to

change specifications, performance, design

or component suppliers without notice and

without obligation. From time to time,

NISSAN may update or revise this manual to

provide Owners with the most accurate in-

formation currently available. Please care-

fully read and retain with this manual all re-

vision updates sent to you by NISSAN to

ensure you have access to accurate and up-

to-date information regarding your vehicle.

Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals

and any updates can also be found in the

Owner section of the NISSAN website at

https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/

navigation/manualsGuide. If you have

questions concerning any information in

your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Con-

sumer Affairs. For contact information, refer

to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

page in this Owner’s Manual.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual.

They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause death or seri-

ous personal injury. To avoid or reduce

the risk, the procedures must be fol-

lowed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause minor or

moderate personal injury or damage to

your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,

the procedures must be followed

carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do

this” or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an

illustration, it means the arrow points to

the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

these indicate movement or action.

APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

these call attention to an item in the illus-

tration.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-

teries, may contain perchlorate material.

The following advisory is provided: “Per-

chlorate Material – special handling may

apply. For additional information, refer to

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and licensed

to Visteon and

Bosch.

SiriusXM® services

require a subscrip-

tion after trial pe-

riod and are sold

separately or as a

package. The

satellite service is

available only in

the 48 contiguous

USA and DC.

SiriusXM® satellite

service is also

available in

Canada; see

www.siriusxm.ca.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a

retrieval system, or transmitted in any

form, or by any means, electronic, me-

chanical, photocopying, recording or oth-

erwise, without the prior written permis-

sion of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your

NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service

needs.

However, if there is something that your

NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or

you would like to provide NISSAN directly

with comments or questions, please con-

tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask

for the following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone

number

– Vehicle identification number (attached

to the top of the instrument panel on the

driver’s side)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the informa-

tion at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancanada.com

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..........0-2

Exterior front ....................................0-3

Exterior rear .....................................0-4

Passenger compartment........................0-5

Instrument panel................................0-6

Engine compartment check locations...........0-8

Warning and indicator lights.....................0-11

1. Rear seat belts (Crew and King Cab®

models only) (if so equipped) (P. 1-17)

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag

(P. 1-55)

3. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-12)

4. Front seat belts with pretensioner(s)

and shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-17,

1-55)

5. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-55)

6. Occupant classification sensors

(weight sensors) (if so equipped)

(P. 1-55)

7. Front seats (P. 1-3)

8. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-55)

9. Rear seats (Crew and King Cab®

models only) (if so equipped) (P. 1-3)

10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) system (Crew and King

Cab® models only) (if so equipped)

(P. 1-28)

11. Top tether strap anchor (Crew and

King Cab® models only) (if so

equipped) (P. 1-28)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

NOTE:

Crew Cab model shown, Single and King

Cab® models similar.

LII2479

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD

RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Power windows (P. 2-86)

2. Windshield (P. 8-20)

3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-50)

4. Engine hood (P. 3-25)

5. Front view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-18)

6. Front fog lights (if so equipped)

(P. 2-59)

Daytime Running Light (DRL)

system (if so equipped) (P. 2-54)

7. Headlight and turn signal switches

(P. 2-54, 2-58)

Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)

Daytime Running Light (DRL)

system (P. 2-54)

8. Tire pressure (P. 8-34)

Flat tire (P. 6-3)

Tire chains (P. 8-34)

9. Mirrors (P. 3-32)

Side view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-18)

10. Door locks (P. 3-5)

NISSAN Intelligent Key® (P. 3-10)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

NOTE:

Crew Cab model shown, Single and King

Cab® models similar.

LIC3769

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Antenna (P. 4-89)

2. Cargo lamp (P. 2-59)

3. Rear sliding window (P. 2-86)

4. Bed liner storage bins

(if so equipped) (P. 2-75)

5. Under rail bed lamps

(if so equipped) (P. 2-59)

6. Truck box (P. 3-37)

Tailgate (P. 3-37)

Rearview camera (P. 4-10)

7. Towing (P. 10-36)

8. Rear sonar sensors (if so equipped)

(P. 5-64)

9. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)

10. Fuel-filler cap* (P. 3-25)

Fuel-filler door* (P. 3-25)

Fuel recommendation* (P. 10-2)

11. Child safety rear door lock

(Crew Cab models only) (P. 3-5)

*: For diesel models, refer to the separate

Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual.

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

NOTE:

Crew Cab model shown, Single and King

Cab® models similar.

LII2416

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Interior lights (if so equipped)

(P. 2-90)

2. Map lights (if so equipped) (P. 2-90)

Console light (if so equipped)

(P. 2-90)

3. Sun visors (P. 3-30)

4. Rearview mirror (P. 3-32)

5. Glove box (P. 2-75)

6. Console box (if so equipped)

(P. 2-75)

Cup holders (P. 2-75)

7. Spare tire tools location (Crew and

King Cab® models only) (P. 6-3)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

NOTE:

Crew Cab model shown, Single and King

Cab® models similar.

LII2480

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. Vents (P. 4-35)

2. Turn signal switch (P. 2-58)

Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-50)

3. Steering wheel switch for audio

control (P. 4-88)

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System (P. 4-88, 4-135)

Vehicle information display

controls (P. 2-33)

4. Driver supplemental air bag

(P. 1-55)

Horn (P. 2-59)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-6)

Warning and indicator lights

(P. 2-21)

6. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-41)

7. Shift lever (P. 5-16)

Tow mode switch (P. 2-69)

8. Audio controls (P. 4-49)

9. Center display (P. 4-4)

10. Climate controls (P. 4-35)

11. Front passenger supplemental air

bag (P. 1-55)

12. Glove box (P. 2-75)

13. Front passenger air bag status

light (if so equipped) (P. 1-55)

14. Power outlet (P. 2-71)

LII2352

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

15. Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-63)

Warning Systems switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-64)

16. Power outlet (P. 2-71)

17. Auxiliary jack (P. 4-49)

USB port (P. 4-49)

18. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P. 6-2)

19. Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU)

(if so equipped) (P. 2-70)

20. Climate control seat switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-60)

Heated front seat switches

(if so equipped) (P. 2-61)

21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-65)

Front and rear sonar system OFF

switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-64)

22. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-45)

23. Push-button ignition switch

(P. 5-11)

24. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel

control (P. 3-29)

25. Headlight aiming control

(if so equipped) (P. 2-54)

Power inverter switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-68)

Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-59)

Electronic locking rear differential

(E-Lock) system switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-67)

Hill descent control system switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-65)

26. Headlight switch (P. 2-54)

Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-59)

Instrument brightness control

switches (P. 2-54)

Trip reset switch (P. 2-6)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parenthesis for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

Cummins 5.0 L engine

1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-14)

2. Fuse box (P. 8-22)

3. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-22)

4. Engine coolant reservoir*

5. Fuel filter (Stage 2)*

6. Engine oil filler cap*

7. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)

8. Air cleaner*

9. Battery (P. 8-15)

10. Power steering fluid reservoir

(P. 8-12)

11. Radiator cap*

12. Engine oil dipstick*

13. Drive belt location*

14. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-22)

15. Battery (P. 8-15)

*: Refer to the separate Titan Diesel Owner’s

Manual.

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LDI2870

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

VK56VD engine (non-XD model)

1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-14)

2. Fuse box (P. 8-22)

3. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)

4. Power steering fluid reservoir

(P. 8-12)

5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)

6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)

7. Air cleaner (P. 8-19)

8. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-22)

9. Drive belt location (P. 8-17)

10. Radiator cap (P. 8-5)

11. Battery (P. 8-15)

12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LDI3056

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

VK56VD engine (XD model)

1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-14)

2. Fuse box (P. 8-22)

3. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)

4. Power steering fluid reservoir

(P. 8-12)

5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)

6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)

7. Air cleaner (P. 8-19)

8. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-22)

9. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)

10. Drive belt location (P. 8-17)

11. Battery (P. 8-15)

12. Radiator cap (P. 8-5)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LDI2973

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Warning

light

Name Page

4–Wheel Drive

(4WD) warning

light (if so

equipped)

2-22

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

2-23

Automatic Trans-

mission check

warning light

2-23

Automatic Trans-

mission oil tem-

perature warning

light

2-23

Automatic Trans-

mission park

warning light

(model)

2-23

Warning

light

Name Page

Brake warning

light

2-24

Charge warning

light

2-25

Diesel Particulate

Filter (DPF) warn-

ing light (if so

equipped)

2-25

Door open warn-

ing light

2-25

Driver seat belt

warning and

chime

2-25

Engine oil pres-

sure warning light

2-25

Warning

light

Name Page

Low DEF warning

light (if so

equipped)

2-25

Low fuel warning

light (if so

equipped)

2-25

Low tire pressure

warning light

2-26

Low windshield

washer fluid

warning light (if so

equipped)

2-27

Malfunction

warning light (red)

(if so equipped)

2-27

Master warning

light (if so

equipped)

2-28

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

Warning

light

Name Page

NISSAN Intelligent

Key® warning

light (if so

equipped)

2-28

P position select-

ing warning light

(if so equipped)

2-28

Passenger seat

belt warning light

(if so equipped)

2-28

Supplemental air

bag warning light

2-29

Water in Fuel

warning light (if so

equipped)

2-29

Indicator

light

Name Page

Electronic locking

rear differential

(E-Lock) system

ON indicator light

(if so equipped)

2-29

Engine start op-

eration indicator

(if so equipped)

2-30

Front fog light in-

dicator light (if so

equipped)

2-30

Front passenger

air bag status

light (if so

equipped)

2-30

High beam indi-

cator light (blue)

2-30

Hill descent con-

trol system ON

indicator light (if

so equipped)

2-30

Indicator

light

Name Page

Malfunction Indi-

cator Light (MIL)

(yellow)

2-30

Security indicator

light

2-31

Side light and

headlight indica-

tor light (green) (if

so equipped)

2-31

Slip indicator light 2-31

TOW mode ON

indicator light

2-31

Turn signal/

hazard indicator

lights

2-31

Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light

2-32

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system

Seats.............................................1-3

Front manual bench seat adjustment

(Single Cab models and if so equipped

for King Cab® and Crew Cab models) .........1-4

Front manual captain’s chair seat

adjustment (if so equipped for

passenger seat for King Cab® and Crew

Cab models).................................. 1-5

Front power captain’s chair seat

adjustment (if so equipped for Crew

Cab and King Cab® models) ...................1-7

Front armrests (if so equipped) ...............1-8

Rear armrests (Crew Cab models and if

so equipped for King Cab® models)........... 1-9

Flexible seating ...............................1-9

Head restraints/Headrests ......................1-12

Adjustable head restraint/headrest

components .................................1-13

Non-adjustable head restraint/

headrest components........................1-14

Remove......................................1-14

Removable (without Dual Head

Restraint/Headrest DVD System only) ........1-15

Install.........................................1-15

Adjust ........................................1-15

Seatbelts.......................................1-17

Precautions on seat belt usage...............1-17

Seat belt warning light.......................1-20

Pregnant women............................1-20

Injured persons..............................1-20

Three-point type seat belt with

retractor ....................................1-20

Seat belt extenders..........................1-25

Seat belt maintenance ......................1-25

Child safety.....................................1-26

Infants ......................................1-26

Small children ...............................1-27

Larger children ..............................1-27

Child restraints .................................1-28

Precautions on child restraints ..............1-28

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (Crew Cab models

and King Cab® models with rear bench

seat) .........................................1-31

Top tether anchor point locations ...........1-33

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH (Crew Cab models and

King Cab® models with rear bench

seat) ........................................1-34

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts (Crew Cab models

and King Cab® models with rear bench

seat) ........................................1-36

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts (Single Cab models

and King Cab® Rear Seat Delete

models) .....................................1-38

Forward-facing child restraint

installation using LATCH (Crew Cab

models and King Cab® models with

rear bench seat).............................1-39

Forward-facing child restraint

installation using the seat belts — rear

bench seat (Crew Cab models and King

Cab® models with rear bench seat)..........1-42

Forward-facing child restraint

installation using the seat belts —

passenger seat and center seat (Single

Cab models and King Cab® Rear Seat

Delete models) ..............................1-46

Booster seats ................................1-51

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)...........1-55

Precautions on SRS (with NISSAN

Advanced Air Bag System)

(if so equipped) ..............................1-55

Precautions on SRS (without NISSAN

Advanced Air Bag System) (if so

equipped) ...................................1-70

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag systems ......1-80

Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats) ........................................1-81

Supplemental air bag warning labels ........1-82

Supplemental air bag warning light..........1-83

WARNING

∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well

back and upright in the seat with both

feet on the floor and adjust the seat

properly. For additional information,

refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section.

∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the

seat to make sure it is securely locked.

∙ Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or controls or

make the vehicle move. Unattended

children could become involved in se-

rious accidents.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation. The seat may

move suddenly and could cause loss

of control of the vehicle.

∙ The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort.

Seat belts are most effective when the

passenger sits well back and straight

up in the seat. If the seatback is re-

clined, the risk of sliding under the lap

belt and being injured is increased.

ARS1152

SEATS

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL BENCH SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (Single Cab models

and if so equipped for King Cab®

and Crew Cab models)

Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-

ally. For additional information about ad-

justing the seats, refer to the steps outlined

in this section.

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide

the seat forward or backward to the de-

sired position. Release the lever to lock the

seat in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up

and lean back. To bring the seatback for-

ward, pull the lever up and lean your body

forward. Release the lever to lock the seat-

back in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help obtain

proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section. Also, the seatback can

be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in the P (Park) position.

LRS2559 LRS2560

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front center bench seat

adjustment

The front center bench seat folds down by

pulling on the strap. It does not have ad-

justments in between the upright and the

folded down positions. It is either in seating

position or armrest position.

FRONT MANUAL CAPTAIN’S CHAIR

SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped

for passenger seat for King Cab®

and Crew Cab models)

Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-

ally. For additional information about ad-

justing the seats, refer to the steps outlined

in this section.

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide

the seat forward or backward to the de-

sired position. Release the lever to lock the

seat in position.

LRS2787 LRS2160

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up

and lean back. To bring the seatback for-

ward, pull the lever up and lean your body

forward. Release the lever to lock the seat-

back in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help obtain

proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section. Also, the seatback can

be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in the P (Park) position.

LRS2161

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FRONT POWER CAPTAIN’S CHAIR

SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped

for Crew Cab and King Cab®

models)

Operating tips

∙ The power seat motor has an auto-

reset overload protection circuit. If the

motor stops during operation, wait

30 seconds then reactivate the switch.

∙ Do not operate the power seat switch

for a long period of time when the en-

gine is off. This will discharge the bat-

tery.

For additional information, refer to “Auto-

matic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving

checks and adjustments” section of this

manual.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch as shown will slide the

seat forward or backward to the desired

position.

Reclining

Move the recline switch as shown until the

desired angle is obtained.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help obtain

proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section. Also, the seatback can

be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in P (Park).

LRS2743

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Move the switch as shown to adjust the

angle and height of the seat cushion.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides ad-

justable lower back support to the driver.

Push the switch as shown to adjust the

seatback lumbar area.

FRONT ARMRESTS (if so equipped)

To use the center armrest on the front

bench seat, pull on the strap in between

the front passenger and center seats and

fold it down to the resting position.

LRS2744 LRS2745 LRS0425

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

REAR ARMRESTS (Crew Cab

models and if so equipped for

King Cab® models)

To use the center armrest on the bench

seats, pull on the tab in the center of the

seat and fold it down as shown.

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seats (if so

equipped) when they are in the fold-

down position. In a collision, people

riding in these areas without proper

restraints are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped

with seats and seat belts. Be sure ev-

eryone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

∙ Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

∙ Do not fold down the rear seats when

the occupants are in the rear seat area

or any luggage is on the rear seats.

– Make sure that the seat path is

clear before moving the seat.

– Be careful not to allow hands or

feet to get caught or pinched in the

seat.

∙ Head restraints/headrests should be

adjusted properly as they may pro-

vide significant protection against in-

jury in an accident. Always replace

and adjust them properly if they have

been removed for any reason.

∙ If the head restraints/headrests are

removed for any reason, they should

be securely stored to prevent them

from causing injury to passengers or

damage to the vehicle in case of sud-

den braking or an accident.

∙ When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched po-

sition. If they are not completely se-

cured, passengers may be injured in

an accident or sudden stop.

∙ Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause per-

sonal injury.

LRS2748

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

Folding the rear bench seat up

(Crew Cab models and King Cab®

models with rear bench seat)

To fold the rear bench seat up for storage

capacity behind the front seats or to re-

move the jacking tools from the storage

area:

1. Lift the front of the seat cushion up.

2. Fold the bottom of the seat cushion

toward the back of the vehicle until it

locks in place.

3. Repeat this process to raise and secure

the seat cushion on the other side of

the vehicle for maximum storage ca-

pacity.

To return the rear bench seat to a seating

position, pull the latch on the bottom of the

seat cushions to release the seat from the

locked position. Make sure to properly

push the seat cushion down into place.

LRS2766 LRS2767 LRS2768

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ When the vehicle is being used to

carry cargo, properly secure all cargo

to help prevent it from sliding or shift-

ing. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped

with seats and seat belts. Be sure ev-

eryone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly. Never ride

in the rear seat unless the seat bot-

tom cushions are in place.

∙ When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched po-

sition. If they are not completely se-

cured, passengers may be injured in

an accident or sudden stop.

Folding the rear bench seat down

(Crew Cab models and King Cab®

models with rear bench seat)

The rear bench seat can be tilted forward

to access the child restraint anchor point

locations.

To tilt the seatback forward, pull the strap

up 䊊

1and tilt the seatback. The child re-

straint anchor points 䊊

2can be accessed

behind the rear bench seatback.

WARNING

Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seat when it is in the

fold-down position. Use of these areas

by passengers without proper re-

straints could result in serious injury or

death in an accident or sudden stop.

WRS0920

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supplement

the other vehicle safety systems. They

may provide additional protection

against injury in certain rear end colli-

sions. Adjustable head

restraints/headrests must be adjusted

properly, as specified in this section.

Check the adjustment after someone

else uses the seat. Do not attach any-

thing to the head restraint/headrest

stalks or remove the head

restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat

if the head restraint/headrest has been

removed. If the head restraint/headrest

was removed, reinstall and properly ad-

just the head restraint/headrest before

an occupant uses the seating position.

Failure to follow these instructions can

reduce the effectiveness of the head

restraints/headrests. This may in-

crease the risk of serious injury or death

in a collision.

Front bucket seat

LRS2020

Front bench seat

LRS2633

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The illustration shows the seating posi-

tions equipped with head

restraints/headrests.

䉱Indicates the seating position is

equipped with a head restraint.

䡲Indicates the seating position is equipped

with a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not

equipped with a head restraint or headrest

(if applicable).

∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head

restraint/headrest that may be inte-

grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests

have multiple notches along the stalk(s)

to lock them in a desired adjustment

position.

∙ The non-adjustable head

restraints/headrests have a single lock-

ing notch to secure them to the seat

frame.

∙ Proper Adjustment:

– For the adjustable type, align the

head restraint/headrest so the cen-

ter of your ear is approximately level

with the center of the head

restraint/headrest.

– If your ear position is still higher than

the recommended alignment, place

the head restraint/headrest at the

highest position.

∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been

removed, ensure that it is reinstalled

and locked in place before riding in that

designated seating position.

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

Front bench seat only

LRS2818 LRS2300

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD

RESTRAINT/HEADREST

COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove the

head restraint/headrest:

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to

the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest

from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest

properly in a secure place so it is not

loose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant

uses the seating position.

LRS2299 LRS2302

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

REMOVABLE (without Dual Head

Restraint/Headrest DVD System

only)

CAUTION

Do not remove head restraint/headrest

from vehicles equipped with Dual Head

Restraint/Headrest DVD System. Re-

moval may damage the system wiring.

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest

stalks with the holes in the seat. Make

sure that the head restraint/headrest is

facing the correct direction. The stalk

with the notch (notches) 䊊

1must be

installed in the hole with the lock knob

䊊

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/

headrest before an occupant uses the

seating position.

ADJUST

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the

center is level with the center of your ears. If

your ear position is still higher than the

recommended alignment, place the head

restraint/headrest at the highest position.

LRS2302 LRS2303 WRS0134

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

For non-adjustable head restraint/

headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it

up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and

push the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

LRS2351 LRS2305 LRS2306

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly

adjusted and you are sitting upright and

well back in your seat with both feet on the

floor, your chances of being injured or killed

in a collision and/or the severity of injury

may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly

encourages you and all of your passengers

to buckle up every time you drive, even if

your seating position includes a supple-

mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories specify that seat belts be

worn at all times when a vehicle is being

driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

WARNING

∙ Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times. Children should be in the

rear seats (if so equipped) and in an

appropriate restraint.

WARNING

∙ The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so

may reduce the effectiveness of the

entire restraint system and increase

the chance or severity of injury in an

accident. Serious injury or death can

occur if the seat belt is not worn

properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never put the belt behind your back,

under your arm or across your neck.

The belt should be away from your

face and neck, but not falling off your

shoulder.

∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug

as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT

THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high

could increase the risk of internal inju-

ries in an accident.

∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-

curely fastened to the proper buckle.

∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

∙ Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

∙ If the seat belt warning light glows

continuously while the ignition is

turned ON with all doors closed and all

seat belts fastened, it may indicate a

malfunction in the system. Have the

system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ No changes should be made to the

seat belt system. For example, do not

modify the seat belt, add material, or

install devices that may change the

seat belt routing or tension. Doing so

may affect the operation of the seat

belt system. Modifying or tampering

with the seat belt system may result

in serious personal injury.

∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have

activated, they cannot be reused and

must be replaced together with the

retractor. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any colli-

sion. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NISSAN recommends that all seat belt

assemblies in use during a collision be

replaced unless the collision was mi-

nor and the belts show no damage

and continue to operate properly.

Seat belt assemblies not in use during

a collision should also be inspected

and replaced if either damage or im-

proper operation is noted.

∙ All child restraints and attaching

hardware should be inspected after

any collision. Always follow the re-

straint manufacturer’s inspection in-

structions and replacement recom-

mendations. The child restraints

should be replaced if they are

damaged.

SSS0014

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT

Both the driver’s and passenger’s front

seats are equipped with a seat belt warn-

ing light. The warning light, located on the

instrument panel, will show the status of

the driver and passenger seat belt.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warning

light will illuminate for a period of time. If

the seat is occupied and seat belt is

latched within that period of time, the

light will go out.

For additional information, refer to “Warn-

ing lights, indicator lights and audible re-

minders” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant

women use seat belts. The seat belt should

be worn snug and always position the lap

belt as low as possible around the hips, not

the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your

shoulder and across your chest. Never run

the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal

area. Contact your doctor for specific rec-

ommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons

use seat belts. Check with your doctor for

specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

∙ Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times. Children should be in the

rear seats (if so equipped) and in an

appropriate restraint.

∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well

back and upright in the seat with both

feet on the floor and adjust the seat

belt properly.

LRS0786

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the

seat belt becomes wrapped around a

child’s neck with the ALR mode acti-

vated, the child can be seriously in-

jured or killed if the seat belt retracts

and becomes tight. This can occur

even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle

the seat belt to release the child. If the

seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is

already unbuckled, release the child

by cutting the seat belt with a suitable

tool (such as a knife or scissors) to

release the seat belt.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Seats” in this section.

Manual front seat shown (Single Cab

models and if so equipped for King Cab®

and Crew Cab models)

LRS2559

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-

tractor and insert the tongue into the

buckle 䊊

Auntil you hear and feel the

latch engage.

∙The retractor is designed to lock

during a sudden stop or on impact.

A slow pulling motion permits the

seat belt to move and allows you

some freedom of movement in the

seat.

∙If the seat belt cannot be pulled

from its fully retracted position,

firmly pull the belt and release it.

Then smoothly pull the belt out of

the retractor.

Front power captain’s chair seat shown (if so equipped for King Cab® and Crew Cab

models)

LRS2743 LRS2674

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. Position the lap belt portion low and

snug on the hips 䊊

Bas shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward

the retractor to take up extra slack 䊊

Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over

your shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat, front center seat

(if so equipped), and the rear seating posi-

tions’ (if so equipped) three-point seat belts

have two modes of operation:

∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex-

tend and retract to allow the driver and

passengers some freedom of movement

in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt

when the vehicle slows down rapidly or

during certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks

the seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat

belt cannot be extended again until the

seat belt tongue is detached from the

buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-

turns to the ELR mode after the seat belt

fully retracts. For additional information, re-

fer to “Child restraints” in this section.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During nor-

mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR

mode should not be activated. If it is ac-

tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seat

belt tension. It can also change the op-

eration of the front passenger air bag.

For additional information, refer to

“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)”

in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be cer-

tain that the seatbacks are completely

secured in the latched position. If they

are not completely secured, passengers

may be injured in an accident or sudden

stop.

LRS2675

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button

on the buckle 䊊

1. The seat belt automati-

cally retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock

seat belt movement by two separate

methods:

∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from

the retractor

∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly

To increase your confidence in the seat

belts, check the operation as follows:

∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull for-

ward quickly. The retractor should lock

and restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this

check, get the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service, or to learn more about seat

belt operation.

Shoulder belt height adjustment

(front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best for you. For

additional information, refer to “Precau-

tions on seat belt usage” in this section. To

adjust, pull out the adjustment button 䊊

and move the shoulder belt anchor to the

desired position 䊊

2, so the belt passes over

the center of the shoulder. The belt should

be away from your face and neck, but not

falling off your shoulder. Release the ad-

justment button to lock the shoulder belt

anchor into position.

WRS0139 LRS0242

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the

shoulder belt anchor up and down to

make sure it is securely fixed in

position.

∙ The shoulder belt anchor height

should be adjusted to the position

best for you. Failure to do so may re-

duce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an

accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it

is not possible to properly fit the

lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender

that is compatible with the installed seat

belts is available for purchase. The ex-

tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)

of length and may be used for either the

driver or front passenger seating position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for assistance with purchasing an

extender if an extender is required.

WARNING

∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,

made by the same company which

made the original equipment seat

belts, should be used with NISSAN

seat belts.

∙ Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use

could result in serious personal injury

in the event of an accident.

∙ Never use seat belt extenders to in-

stall child restraints. If the child re-

straint is not secured properly, the

child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

∙To clean the seat belt webbing, apply

a mild soap solution or any solution rec-

ommended for cleaning upholstery or

carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow

the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not

allow the seat belts to retract until they

are completely dry.

∙If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the

seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the

shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry

cloth.

∙Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such

as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible

wires and anchors, work properly. If

loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other

damage on the webbing is found, the

entire seat belt assembly should be re-

placed.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat

belt becomes wrapped around a child’s

neck with the ALR mode activated, the

child can be seriously injured or killed if

the seat belt retracts and becomes

tight. This can occur even if the vehicle

is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re-

lease the child. If the seat belt cannot be

unbuckled or is already unbuckled, re-

lease the child by cutting the seat belt

with a suitable tool (such as a knife or

scissors) to release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in

this manual, child safety information is

available from many other sources, includ-

ing doctors, teachers, government traffic

safety offices, and community organiza-

tions. Every child is different, so be sure to

learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child re-

straint systems:

∙ Rear-facing child restraints

∙ Forward-facing child restraints

∙ Booster seats

The proper restraint depends on the child’s

size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year

and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed

in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-

facing child restraints are available for chil-

dren who outgrow rear-facing child re-

straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster

seats are used to help position a vehicle

lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no

longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special pro-

tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not

fit them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The

lap belt may not fit over their small hip

bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-

ting seat belt could cause serious or fa-

tal injury. Always use appropriate child

restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require the use of approved child

restraints for infants and small children.For

additional information, refer to “Child re-

straints” in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the ve-

hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An-

chors and Tethers for CHildren) system or

with the vehicle seat belt. For additional

information, refer to “Child restraints” in this

section.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear

seat (if so equipped). Studies show that

children are safer when properly re-

strained in the rear seat than in the front

seat.

This is especially important because

your vehicle has a supplemental re-

straint system (air bag system) for the

front passenger. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS)” in this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be

placed in a rear-facing child restraint.

NISSAN recommends that infants be

placed in child restraints that comply with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

You should choose a child restraint that fits

your vehicle and always follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation and

use.

CHILD SAFETY

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh

at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a

rear-facing child restraint as long as pos-

sible up to the height or weight limit of the

child restraint. Children who outgrow the

height or weight limit of the rear-facing

child restraint and are at least 1 year old

should be secured in a forward-facing child

restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu-

facturer’s instructions for minimum and

maximum weight and height recommen-

dations. NISSAN recommends that small

children be placed in child restraints that

comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards. You should choose a

child restraint that fits your vehicle and al-

ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing

child restraint with a harness until they

reach the maximum height or weight limit

allowed by the child restraint manufac-

turer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight

limit of the harness-equipped forward-

facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends

that the child be placed in a commercially

available booster seat to obtain proper

seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the

booster seat should raise the child so that

the shoulder belt is properly positioned

across the chest and the top, middle por-

tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt

should not cross the neck or face and

should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt

should lie snugly across the lower hips or

upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster

seat can only be used in seating positions

that have a three-point type seat belt. The

booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and

have a label certifying that it complies with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

A booster seat should be used until the

child can pass the seat belt fit test below:

∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the

vehicle seatback?

∙ Is the child able to sit without slouch-

ing?

∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over

the front edge of the seat with feet flat

on the floor?

∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt

(lap belt low and snug across the hips

and shoulder belt across mid-chest

and shoulder)?

∙ Is the child able to use the properly ad-

justed head restraint/headrest?

∙ Will the child be able to stay in position

for the entire ride?

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

If you answered no to any of these ques-

tions, the child should remain in a booster

seat using a three-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow

different guidelines. Check local and

state regulations to confirm your child is

using the correct restraint system before

traveling.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any

seat and do not allow a child in the

cargo area. The child could be seriously

injured or killed in a sudden stop or

collision.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

LRS2690 ARS1098

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

– The child restraint must be used

and installed properly. Always fol-

low all of the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for installa-

tion and use.

– Infants and children should never

be held on anyone’s lap. Even the

strongest adult cannot resist the

forces of a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both

a child and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all child

restraints be installed in the rear

seat (if so equipped). Studies show

that children are safer when prop-

erly restrained in the rear seat (if so

equipped) than in the front seat. If

you must install a forward-facing

child restraint in the front seat, re-

fer to “Forward-facing child re-

straint installation using the seat

belts — passenger seat and center

seat (Single Cab models and King

Cab® Rear Seat Delete models)” in

this section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System (if so equipped), never

install a rear-facing child restraint

in the front seat. An inflating air

bag could seriously injure or kill a

child. A rear-facing child restraint

must only be used in the rear seat

(if so equipped).

– Be sure to purchase a child re-

straint that will fit the child and ve-

hicle. Some child restraints may

not fit properly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items

or equipment to the vehicle. Doing

so could damage the child re-

straint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly in-

stalled using the damaged

anchorage, and a child could be se-

riously injured or killed in a

collision.

– Never use the anchor points for

adult seat belts, or other items.

– A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the

front passenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-

sible after fitting the child

restraint.

– Infants and children should always

be placed in an appropriate child

restraint while in the vehicle.

WRS0256

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

∙ When the child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH system

or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, loose objects can injure occu-

pants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating

surface and buckles before placing a

child in the child restraint.

Vehicles equipped with rear seats are

equipped with a universal child restraint

anchor system, referred to as the LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)

system. Some child restraints include rigid

or webbing-mounted attachments that

can be connected to these anchors. For

additional information, refer to “LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)

system (Crew Cab models and King Cab®

models with rear bench seat)” in this sec-

tion.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible

child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be

used.

Several manufacturers offer child re-

straints for infants and children of various

sizes. When selecting any child restraint,

keep the following points in mind:

∙ Choose only a restraint with a label cer-

tifying that it complies with Federal Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Cana-

dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle

to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-

cle’s seat and seat belt system.

∙ If the child restraint is compatible with

your vehicle, place your child in the child

restraint and check the various adjust-

ments to be sure the child restraint is

compatible with your child. Choose a

child restraint that is designed for your

child’s height and weight. Always follow

all recommended procedures.

∙ If the combined weight of the child and

child restraint is less than 65 lbs.

(29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH

anchors or the seat belt to install the

child restraint (not both at the same

time).

∙ If the combined weight of the child and

child restraint is greater than 65 lbs.

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not

the lower anchors) to install the child

restraint.

∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for installa-

tion.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved

child restraint at all times while the ve-

hicle is being operated. Canadian law re-

quires the top tether strap on forward-

facing child restraints be secured to the

designated anchor point on the vehicle.

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM

(Crew Cab models and King Cab®

models with rear bench seat)

Your vehicle is equipped with special an-

chor points that are used with LATCH sys-

tem compatible child restraints. This sys-

tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX

or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys-

tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat

belt to secure the child restraint unless the

combined weight of the child and child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and child restraint

is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehi-

cle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to

install the child restraint. Be sure to follow

the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to

install child restraints in the rear outboard

seating positions only. Do not attempt to

install a child restraint in the center position

using the LATCH anchors.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the loca-

tions shown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in

the center rear seating position us-

ing the LATCH lower anchors. The

child restraint will not be secured

properly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by in-

serting your fingers into the lower

anchor area. Feel to make sure

there are no obstructions over the

anchors such as seat belt webbing

or seat cushion material. The child

restraint will not be secured prop-

erly if the lower anchors are

obstructed.

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

LATCH system lower anchor locations

LRS2859

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchors are located as

shown. A label is attached to the seatback

to help you locate the LATCH lower an-

chors.

Installing child restraint LATCH

lower anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include

two rigid or webbing-mounted attach-

ments that can be connected to two an-

chors located at certain seating positions

in your vehicle. With this system, you do not

have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the

child restraint. Check your child restraint for

a label stating that it is compatible with

LATCH. This information may also be in the

instructions provided by the child restraint

manufacturer.

LATCH lower anchor location

LRS0748

LATCH lower anchor point locations

LRS2869

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

LRS0661

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

When installing a child restraint, carefully

read and follow the instructions in this

manual and those supplied with the child

restraint.

TOP TETHER ANCHOR POINT

LOCATIONS

Anchor points are located in the following

locations:

∙ Under the rear window behind the

bench seat (Single Cab models) or be-

hind the rear bench seat (Crew Cab

models and King Cab® models with rear

bench seat) as shown.

∙ On the back of the passenger and cen-

ter seats (King Cab® Rear Seat Delete

models) as shown.

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

LRS0662

Crew Cab models and King Cab® models

with rear bench seat

LRS0393

Single Cab models

LRS2819

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH (Crew

Cab models and King Cab®

models with rear bench seat)

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint in the rear bench seats using

the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an-

chors. Check to make sure the LATCH

attachment is properly attached to the

lower anchors.

King Cab® Rear Seat Delete models

LRS2879

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

WRS0801

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your hand to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

4. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it

again. You may need to try a different

child restraint or try installing by using

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0802

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS0673

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS0674

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not

all child restraints fit in all types of ve-

hicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 2 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS (Crew Cab models and King

Cab® models with rear bench

seat)

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result in

the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in

the rear seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the

front seat. Position the child restraint

on the seat. Always follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions.

Rear-facing – step 1

WRS0256

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode). It reverts to the ELR

mode when the seat belt is fully re-

tracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack

in the belt.

Rear-facing – step 2

WRS0761

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS2395

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS2396

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

5. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint to compress the vehicle seat

cushion and seatback while pulling up

on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The

child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.

Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the belt holds the restraint in place. If

the restraint is not secure, tighten the

seat belt as necessary, or put the re-

straint in another seat and test it again.

You may need to try a different child

restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child re-

straint is properly secured prior to each

use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 1 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS (Single Cab models and

King Cab® Rear Seat Delete

models)

WARNING

∙ Never install a rear-facing child re-

straint in the front seat. An inflating

supplemental air bag could seriously

injure or kill your child.

∙ Never let an infant who requires the

use of a rear-facing child restraint ride

in this vehicle.

Rear-facing – step 5

WRS0762

Rear-facing – step 6

LRS2397

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH (Crew Cab models and

King Cab® models with rear

bench seat)

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint in the rear bench

seats using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an-

chors. Check to make sure the LATCH

attachment is properly attached to the

lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point. For additional

information, refer to “Installing top

tether strap” in this section.

Do not install child restraints that re-

quire the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have a

top tether anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect child restraint fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the child restraint is removed. For ad-

Forward-facing webbing-mounted –

step 2

LRS2398

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

LRS2399

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

ditional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

child restraint fit, try another seating

position or a different child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your knee to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it

again. You may need to try a different

child restraint. Not all child restraints fit

in all types of vehicles.

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0697

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

7. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 3 through 6.

䊊

AAnchor points

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

the LATCH lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the

LATCH lower anchors (rear bench out-

boarding seating positions only).

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest

and store it in a secure place. Be sure to

reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section for

head restraint/headrest adjustment,

removal and installation information.

2. Position the top tether strap over the

seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

Rear bench seat

LRS2769

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS — REAR BENCH

SEAT (Crew Cab models and King

Cab® models with rear bench

seat)

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result in

the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the vehicle seat

belt in the rear seats:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move

the seat to the rearmost position.

Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the

front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect child restraint fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the child restraint is removed. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

child restraint fit, try another seating

position or a different child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point (rear seat in-

stallation only). For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Installing top tether strap”

in this section.

Do not install child restraints that re-

quire the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have a

top tether anchor.

Forward-facing – step 3

WRS0680

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode). It reverts to ELR mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack

in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint with your knee to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback

while pulling up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0667

Forward-facing – step 5

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0681

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

8. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The

child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.

Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the seat belt holds the restraint in

place. If the restraint is not secure,

tighten the seat belt as necessary, or

put the restraint in another seat and

test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child re-

straints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 3 through 8.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

䊊

AAnchor points

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat

belt.

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest

and store it in a secure place. Be sure to

reinstall the head restraint/headrest

Forward-facing – step 8

WRS0698 LRS2769

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap as shown.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

CENTER SEATING POSITION

1. Position the top tether strap as shown.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point as shown.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS — PASSENGER

SEAT AND CENTER SEAT (Single

Cab models and King Cab® Rear

Seat Delete models)

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result in

the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the vehicle seat

belt:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move

the seat to the rearmost position.

Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the

front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect child restraint fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the child restraint is removed. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

child restraint fit, try another seating

position or a different child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point. For additional

information, refer to “Installing top

tether strap” in this section.

Forward-facing – step 3

WRS0680

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

Do not install child restraints that re-

quire the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have a

top tether anchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode). It reverts to ELR mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack

in the belt.

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0667

Forward-facing – step 5

LRS0668

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

6. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint with your knee to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback

while pulling up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The

child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.

Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the seat belt holds the restraint in

place. If the restraint is not secure,

tighten the seat belt as necessary, or

put the restraint in another seat and

test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child re-

straints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 3 through 8.

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0681

Forward-facing – step 8

WRS0698

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

10. If the child restraint is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the ignition

switch in the ON position. The front

passenger air bag status light (if

so equipped) may or may not illumi-

nate, depending on the size of the child

and the type of child restraint being

used. For additional information, refer

to “Front passenger air bag and status

light” in this section.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat

belt.

䊊

AAnchor points

Forward-facing — step 10

WRS0475

Single Cab models

LRS2769

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

䊊

ATop tether straps

䊊

BAnchor points

Bench seat

PASSENGER SEATING POSITION

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest

and store it in a secure place. Be sure to

reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap over the

seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

CENTER SEATING POSITION

1. Position the top tether strap over the

seatback.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point as shown.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

BOOSTER SEATS

For additional information on installing a

booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in-

structions outlined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not

used properly, the risk of a child being

injured or killed in a sudden stop or col-

lision greatly increases:

King Cab® Rear Seat Delete models

LRS2880

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

– Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s

face and neck and the lap portion

of the belt does not cross the

stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the

child’s arm.

– A booster seat must only be in-

stalled in a seating position that

has a lap/shoulder belt.

A. Low back booster seat

B. High back booster seat

Booster seats of various sizes are offered

by several manufacturers. When selecting

any booster seat, keep the following points

in mind:

∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard 213.

∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle

to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-

cle’s seat and seat belt system.

LRS2479 LRS0453

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Make sure the child’s head will be prop-

erly supported by the booster seat or

vehicle seat. The seatback must be at

or above the center of the child’s ears.

For example, if a low back booster seat

is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be

at or above the center of the child’s ears.

If the seatback is lower than the center

of the child’s ears, a high back booster

seat should be used.

∙ If the booster seat is compatible with

your vehicle, place the child in the

booster seat and check the various ad-

justments to be sure the booster seat is

compatible with the child. Always follow

all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved

child restraint at all times while the ve-

hicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to

booster seat installation in the rear seats (if

so equipped) or the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

WARNING

To avoid injury to child, do not use the

lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when us-

ing a booster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety”,

“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec-

tions of this manual before installing a child

restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat

in the rear seat (if so equipped) or in the

front passenger seat:

LRS0464

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

1. If you must install a booster seat in

the front seat, move the seat to the

rearmost position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.

Only place it in a front-facing direction.

Always follow the booster seat manu-

facturer’s instructions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned

on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect booster seat fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the booster seat is removed. For ad-

ditional information, refer to "Head

restraints/headrests" in this section.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

booster seat fit, try another seating

position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt

low and snug on the child’s hips. Be

sure to follow the booster seat manu-

facturer’s instructions for adjusting the

seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the

seat belt toward the retractor to take

up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder

belt is positioned across the top,

middle portion of the child’s shoulder.

Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjust-

ing the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-

structions for properly fastening a seat

belt shown in “Three-point type seat

belt with retractor” in this section.

WRS0699

Front passenger position

LRS0454

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

7. If the booster seat is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the ignition

switch in the ON position. The front pas-

senger air bag status light (if so

equipped) may or may not illuminate,

depending on the size of the child and

the type of booster seat being used. For

additional information, refer to “Front

passenger air bag and status light” in

this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS (with

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)

(if so equipped)

This SRS section contains important infor-

mation concerning the following systems:

∙ Driver and front passenger supplemen-

tal front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System)

∙ Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag

∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag

∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag system

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can

help cushion the impact force to the head

and chest of the driver and right front pas-

senger in certain frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the chest area of the driver and right

front passenger in certain side impact colli-

sions. The side air bag is designed to inflate

on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the head of occupants in front and

rear outboard seating positions (if so

equipped) in certain side impact or rollover

collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air

bags are designed to inflate on the side

where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover,

curtain air bags are designed to inflate and

remain inflated for a short time.

The SRS is designed to supplement the

crash protection provided by the seat belts

and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts

should always be correctly worn and the

occupant seated a suitable distance away

from the steering wheel, instrument panel

and door finishers. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Seat belts” in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON or

START position.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warn-

ing light illuminates. The supplemental

air bag warning light will turn off after

about 7 seconds if the system is opera-

tional.

WRS0475

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

(SRS)

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

WARNING

∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact,

rear impact, rollover, or lower severity

frontal collision. Always wear your

seat belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents.

∙ The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status

light is lit or if the front passenger seat

is unoccupied. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section.

∙ The seat belts and the front air bags

are most effective when you are sit-

ting well back and upright in the seat.

The front air bags inflate with great

force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced

Air Bag System, if you are unre-

strained, leaning forward, sitting side-

ways or out of position in any way, you

are at greater risk of injury or death in

a crash. You may also receive serious

or fatal injuries from the front air bag

if you are up against it when it inflates.

Always sit back against the seatback

and as far away as practical from the

steering wheel or instrument panel.

Always properly use the seat belts.

∙ The driver and front passenger seat

belt buckles are equipped with sen-

sors that detect if the seat belts are

fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System monitors the severity of a

collision and inflates the air bags as

needed. Failure to properly wear seat

belts can increase the risk or severity

of injury in an accident.

∙ The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sen-

sor (weight sensor) that turns the

front passenger air bag OFF under

some conditions. This sensor is only

used in this seat. Failure to be properly

seated and wearing the seat belt can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

∙ Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside

the steering wheel rim could increase

the risk that they are injured when the

front air bag inflates.

WRS0031

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ The air bag system monitors the se-

verity of a collision and then inflates

the air bags as needed. Failure to

properly wear seat belts can increase

the risk or severity of injury in an

accident.

ARS1133

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

WARNING

∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them

in your lap or arms. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

WARNING

∙ Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained. Pre-teens

and children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat (if so

equipped), if possible.

ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front seat.

An inflating air bag could seriously in-

jure or kill a child. A rear-facing child

restraint must only be used in the rear

seat (if so equipped).

ARS1044 ARS1045 WRS0256

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bags:

∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event

of a frontal impact, rear impact, or

lower severity side collision. Always

wear your seat belts to help reduce

the risk or severity of injury in various

kinds of accidents.

Do not lean against doors or windows.

WRS0431

Do not lean against doors or windows.

LRS0396

Do not lean against doors or windows.

SSS0162

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective

when you are sitting well back and

upright in the seat. The side air bag

and curtain air bag inflate with great

force. Do not allow anyone to place

their hand, leg or face near the side air

bag on the side of the seatback of the

front seat or near the side roof rails.

Do not allow anyone sitting in the

front seats or rear outboard seats (if

so equipped) to extend their hand out

of the window or lean against the

door. Some examples of dangerous

riding positions are shown in the pre-

vious illustrations.

WARNING

∙ When sitting in the rear seat (if so

equipped), do not hold onto the seat-

back of the front seat. If the side air

bag inflates, you may be seriously in-

jured. Be especially careful with chil-

dren, who should always be properly

restrained. Some examples of dan-

gerous riding positions are shown in

the illustrations.

∙ Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

side air bag inflation.

LRS0421 SSS0159

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag infla-

tors

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bags

3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

4. Supplemental front-impact air bag

modules

5. Crash zone sensor

6. Occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor)

7. Occupant classification system control

unit

8. Seat belt buckle switches

9. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

10. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag modules

11. Satellite sensor (if so equipped)

12. Satellite sensor

LRS3053

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the pas-

senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, please observe the following

items.

∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear

bench seats (if so equipped) to push

or pull on the seatback pocket.

∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than

1 kg (2.2 lbs.) on the seatback, head

restraint or in the seatback pocket.

∙ Do not store luggage behind the seat

that can press into the seatback.

∙ Do not position the front passenger

seat so it contacts the rear bench

seats (if so equipped). If the front seat

does contact the rear bench seats (if

so equipped), the air bag system may

determine a sensor malfunction has

occurred and the front passenger air

bag status light may illuminate and

the supplemental air bag warning

light may flash.

∙ If a forward-facing child restraint is

installed in the front passenger seat,

do not position the front passenger

seat so the child restraint contacts the

instrument panel. If the child restraint

does contact the instrument panel,

the system may determine the seat as

occupied and the passenger air bag

may deploy in a collision. Also the

front passenger air bag status light

may not illuminate. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Child restraints” in

this section.

∙ Confirm the operating condition with

the front passenger air bag status

light.

∙ If you notice that the front passenger

air bag status light is not operating as

described in this section, get the oc-

cupant classification system checked.

It is recommended that you take your

vehicle to a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ Until you have confirmed with a

dealer that your passenger seat occu-

pant classification system is working

properly, position the occupants in

the rear seating positions (if so

equipped). Do not use the front seat or

transport a child in the vehicle (Single

Cab and King Cab® Rear Seat Delete

models only).

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN

Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and

front passenger seats. All of the informa-

tion, cautions and warnings in this

manual still apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air

bag is located in the center of the steering

wheel. The front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag is mounted in the

dashboard above the glove box. The front

air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity frontal collisions, although they

may inflate if the forces in another type of

collision are similar to those of a higher

severity frontal impact. They may not in-

flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle

damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi-

cation of proper front air bag system op-

eration.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

monitors information from the crash zone

sensor and the Air bag Control Unit (ACU).

Inflator operation is based on the severity

of a collision and seat belt usage for the

driver. For the front passenger, the occu-

pant classification sensor is also moni-

tored. Based upon the information from

the sensor, only one front air bag may in-

flate in a crash, depending on the crash

severity. Additionally, the front passenger

air bag may be automatically turned off

under some conditions, depending on the

weight detected on the front passenger

seat and how the seat belt is used. If the

front passenger air bag is OFF, the front

passenger air bag status light will be illumi-

nated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light

will not be illuminated, but the air bag will

be off). For additional information, refer to

“Front passenger air bag and status light” in

this section. One front air bag inflating does

not indicate improper performance of the

system.

If you have any questions about your air

bag system, it is recommended that you

contact NISSAN or a NISSAN dealer. If you

are considering modification of your ve-

hicle due to a disability, you may also con-

tact NISSAN. Contact information is con-

tained in the front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud

noise may be heard, followed by the re-

lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should be

taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita-

tion and choking. Those with a history of a

breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the face and chest of the front occupants.

They can help save lives and reduce seri-

ous injuries. However, an inflating front air

bag may cause facial abrasions or other

injuries. Front air bags do not provide re-

straint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and front passenger seated upright

as far as practical away from the steering

wheel or instrument panel. The front air

bags inflate quickly in order to help protect

the front occupants. Because of this, the

force of the front air bag inflating can in-

crease the risk of injury if the occupant is

too close to, or is against, the front air bag

module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a

collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed

to automatically turn OFF under some

conditions. Read this section carefully

to learn how it operates. Proper use of

the seat, seat belt and child restraints is

necessary for most effective protec-

tion. Failure to follow all instructions in

this manual concerning the use of

seats, seat belts and child restraints can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

Status light

The front passenger seat is equipped with

an occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor) that turns the front passenger air

bag on or off depending on the weight ap-

plied to the front passenger seat. The sta-

tus of the front passenger air bag (ON or

OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air

bag status light which is located on

the instrument panel.

After the ignition switch is placed in the

"ON" position, the front passenger air bag

status light on the instrument panel illumi-

nates for about 7 seconds and then turns

off or remains illuminated depending on

the front passenger seat occupied status.

The light operates as follows:

∙ Unoccupied front passenger’s seat:

The light is OFF and the front pas-

senger air bag is OFF and will not inflate

in a crash.

∙ Front passenger seat occupied by a

small adult, child or child restraint as

outlined in this section: The light

may or may not illuminate, depending

on the size of the occupant or the type

of child restraint being used. When

the light is illuminated, the front

passenger air bag is OFF and will not

inflate in a crash. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Front passenger air

bag” in this section.

∙ Occupied front passenger seat and the

passenger meets the conditions as

outlined in this section: The light is

OFF to indicate that the front passen-

ger air bag is operational.

In addition to the above, certain objects

placed on the front passenger seat may

also cause the light to operate as de-

scribed above depending on their weight.

For additional information, refer to “Normal

operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this

section.

WRS0475

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

operated under some conditions as de-

scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu-

lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,

it will not inflate in a crash.The driver air bag

and other air bags in your vehicle are not

part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help

reduce the risk of injury or death from an

inflating air bag to certain front passenger

seat occupants, such as children, by requir-

ing the air bag to be automatically turned

OFF under some conditions. Certain sen-

sors are used to meet the requirements.

The occupant classification sensor in this

vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to

detect an occupant and objects on the seat

by weight. For example, if a child up to the

approximate size and weight of a one year

old is properly restrained in the front passen-

ger seat, the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem is designed to turn the front passenger

air bag OFF. For a properly restrained child

who is larger than the approximate size and

weight of a one year old, the front passenger

air bag may or may not be automatically

turned OFF, depending on the size of the

child and the type of child restraint being

used. After installing the child restraint and

positioning the child, place the ignition

switch in the ON position: if the front passen-

ger air bag status light is illuminated, the air

bag is OFF. If the front passenger air bag

status light is not illuminated, the air bag will

inflate in a crash.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who

are properly seated and using the seat belt

as outlined in this manual should not

cause the front passenger air bag to be

automatically turned OFF. For small adults

it may be turned OFF, however if the occu-

pant takes his/her weight off the seat

cushion (for example, by not sitting upright,

by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by

otherwise being out of position), this could

cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.

Always be sure to be seated and wearing

the seat belt properly for the most effective

protection by the seat belt and supple-

mental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and

children be properly restrained in a rear

seat (if so equipped). NISSAN also recom-

mends that appropriate child restraints

and booster seats be properly installed in a

rear seat (if so equipped). If this is not pos-

sible, the occupant classification sensor is

designed to operate as described above to

turn the front passenger air bag OFF for

specified child restraints as required by the

regulations. Failing to properly secure child

restraints and to use the ALR mode may

allow the restraint to tip or move in a colli-

sion or sudden stop. This can also result in

the passenger air bag inflating in a crash

instead of being OFF. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Child restraints” in this sec-

tion.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied,

the front passenger air bag is designed not

to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects

placed on the seat could result in air bag

inflation, because of the object’s weight de-

tected by the occupant classification sen-

sor. Other conditions could also result in air

bag inflation, such as if a child is standing

on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this

manual. Always be sure that you and all

vehicle occupants are seated and re-

strained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status

light, you can monitor when the front pas-

senger air bag is automatically turned OFF

with the seat occupied. The light will not

illuminate when the front passenger seat is

unoccupied.

1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the

front passenger air bag status light is illu-

minated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),

it could be that the person is a small adult,

or is not sitting on the seat properly or not

using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front

seat, the front passenger air bag status

light may or may not be illuminated, de-

pending on the size of the child and the

type of child restraint being used. Always

make sure that the child restraint is in-

stalled properly, the seat belt is used prop-

erly and the occupant is positioned prop-

erly.

If necessary, a NISSAN dealer can check

system operation by using a special tool.

Until you have confirmed with a dealer that

your air bag is working properly, reposition

the occupant or child restraint in a rear

seat (if so equipped). Do not use the front

seat or transport a child in the vehicle

(Single Cab and King Cab® Rear Seat Delete

models only).

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and

front passenger air bag status light will

take a few seconds to register a change in

the front passenger seat status. For ex-

ample, if a large adult who is sitting in the

front passenger seat exits the vehicle, the

front passenger air bag status light will go

from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then

to OFF. This is normal system operation

and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-

ger air bag system, the supplemental air

bag warning light , located in the me-

ter and gauges area of the instrument

panel, will blink.Have the system checked.It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Normal operation

In order for the occupant classification

sensor system to classify the front passen-

ger based on weight, please follow the pre-

cautions and steps outlined below:

Precautions

∙ Make sure that there are no objects

weighing over 2.2 lbs. (1 kg) hanging on

the seat or placed in the seatback

pocket.

∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other

object is not pressing against the rear

of the seatback.

∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not

pushing or pulling on the back of the

front passenger seat.

∙ Make sure that the front passenger

seat or seatback is not forced back

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ Make sure that there is no object placed

under the front passenger seat.

Steps

1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”

section of this manual. Sit upright, lean-

ing against the seatback, and centered

on the seat cushion with your feet com-

fortably extended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on your

lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the

“Seat belts” section of this manual.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds

allowing the system to classify the

front passenger before the vehicle is

put into motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by check-

ing the front passenger air bag status

light.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67

NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classification

sensor system locks the classification

during driving so it is important that you

confirm that the front passenger is prop-

erly classified prior to driving. Also, the

occupant classification sensor system

may recalculate the weight of the occu-

pant when the vehicle comes to a stop

(i.e. stop light, stop sign, etc.), so front

passenger seat occupants should con-

tinue to remain seated as outlined

above.

Troubleshooting

If you think the front passenger air bag

status light is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with no front passenger

and no objects on the front passenger

seat:

This may be due to the following condi-

tions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

∙ An object weighing over 1 kg (2.2 lbs.)

hanging on the seat or placed in the

seatback pocket.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger seat.

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ An object placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

∙ An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console or between

the seat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions. Re-

start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the vehicle

should be checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

2. If the light is ON with an adult occupy-

ing the front passenger seat:

∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag

light is functioning as intended. The

front passenger air bag is suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small

adult, then this may be due to the following

conditions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered on

the seat cushion with his/her feet com-

fortably extended to the floor.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger seat.

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ An object placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

∙ An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console or between

the seat cushion and the door.

1-68 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions. Re-

start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the person

should be advised not to ride in the front

passenger seat and the vehicle should be

checked as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Other supplemental front-impact air

bag precautions

WARNING

∙ Do not place any objects on the steer-

ing wheel pad or on the instrument

panel. Also, do not place any objects

between any occupant and the steer-

ing wheel or instrument panel. Such

objects may become dangerous pro-

jectiles and cause injury if the front air

bags inflate.

∙ Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will

be hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This

is to prevent accidental inflation of

the supplemental air bag or damage

to the supplemental air bag system.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or front end struc-

ture. This could affect proper opera-

tion of the front air bag system.

∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys-

tem may result in serious personal in-

jury. Tampering includes changes to

the steering wheel and the instru-

ment panel assembly by placing ma-

terial over the steering wheel pad and

above the instrument panel or by in-

stalling additional trim material

around the air bag system.

∙ Removing or modifying the front pas-

senger seat may affect the function of

the air bag system and result in seri-

ous personal injury.

∙ Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing ma-

terial on the seat cushion or by install-

ing additional trim material, such as

seat covers, on the seat that are not

specifically designed to assure proper

air bag operation. Additionally, do not

stow any objects under the front pas-

senger seat or the seat cushion and

seatback. Such objects may interfere

with the proper operation of the occu-

pant classification sensor (weight

sensor).

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect

the front air bag system. Tampering

with the seat belt system may result

in serious personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the front air bag. It is also recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for installation of electrical equip-

ment. The Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) wiring harnesses*

should not be modified or discon-

nected. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the air bag

system.

∙ A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified re-

pair facility. A cracked windshield

could affect the function of the

supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the front air

bag system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS (without

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)

(if so equipped)

This SRS section contains important infor-

mation concerning the following systems:

∙ Driver and front passenger supplemen-

tal front-impact air bag

∙ Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag

∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag

∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the head and chest of the driver

and right front passenger in certain frontal

collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the chest area of the driver and

right front passenger in certain side impact

collisions. The side air bag is designed to

inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-

pacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the head of occupants in front and

rear outboard seating positions in certain

side impact or rollover collisions. In a side

impact, the curtain air bags are designed

to inflate on the side where the vehicle is

impacted. In a rollover, curtain air bags are

designed to inflate and remain inflated for

a short time.

The SRS is designed to supplement the

crash protection provided by the seat belts

and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts

should always be correctly worn and the

occupant seated a suitable distance away

from the steering wheel, instrument panel

and door finishers. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Seat belts” in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON or

START position.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warn-

ing light illuminates. The supplemental

air bag warning light will turn off after

about 7 seconds if the system is opera-

tional.

1-70 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact,

rear impact, rollover, or lower severity

frontal collision. Always wear your

seat belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents.

∙ The seat belts and the front air bags

are most effective when you are sit-

ting well back and upright in the seat.

The front air bags inflate with great

force. If you are unrestrained, leaning

forward, sitting sideways or out of po-

sition in any way, you are at greater

risk of injury or death in a crash. You

may also receive serious or fatal inju-

ries from the front air bag if you are up

against it when it inflates. Always sit

back against the seatback and as far

away as practical from the steering

wheel or instrument panel. Always

properly use the seat belts.

∙ The driver and front passenger seat

belt buckles are equipped with sen-

sors that detect if the seat belts are

fastened. The air bag system moni-

tors the severity of a collision and in-

flates the air bags as needed. Failure

to properly wear seat belts can in-

crease the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

∙ Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside

the steering wheel rim could increase

the risk that they are injured when the

front air bag inflates.

∙ The air bag system monitors the se-

verity of a collision and then inflates

the air bags as needed. Failure to

properly wear seat belts can increase

the risk or severity of injury in an

accident.

WRS0031

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-71

WARNING

∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them

in your lap or arms. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041

1-72 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained. Pre-teens

and children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat, if possible.

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-73

WARNING

∙ Even with the air bag system, never

install a rear-facing child restraint in

the front seat. An inflating air bag

could seriously injure or kill a child. A

rear-facing child restraint must only

be used in the rear seat.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bags:

∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event

of a frontal impact, rear impact, or

lower severity side collision. Always

wear your seat belts to help reduce

the risk or severity of injury in various

kinds of accidents.

ARS1045 WRS0256

Do not lean against doors or windows.

WRS0431

1-74 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective

when you are sitting well back and

upright in the seat. The side air bag

and curtain air bag inflate with great

force. Do not allow anyone to place

their hand, leg or face near the side air

bag on the side of the seatback of the

front seat or near the side roof rails.

Do not allow anyone sitting in the

front seats or rear outboard seats to

extend their hand out of the window

or lean against the door. Some ex-

amples of dangerous riding positions

are shown in the previous

illustrations.

Do not lean against doors or windows.

LRS0396

Do not lean against doors or windows.

SSS0162

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-75

WARNING

∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front

seat. If the side air bag inflates, you

may be seriously injured. Be espe-

cially careful with children, who

should always be properly restrained.

Some examples of dangerous riding

positions are shown in the

illustrations.

∙ Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

side air bag inflation.

LRS0421 SSS0159

1-76 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Supplemental air bag system

1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bags in-

flators

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bags

3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

4. Supplemental front-impact air bag

modules

5. Crash zone sensor

6. Seat belt buckle switches

7. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

8. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag modules

9. Satellite sensor (if so equipped)

10. Satellite sensor

This vehicle is equipped with supplemental

front air bag system for the driver and right

front passenger seats. This system is de-

signed to meet certification requirements

under U.S.regulations. It is also permitted in

Canada. However, all of the information,

cautions and warnings in this manual

still apply and must be followed.

LRS3052

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-77

The driver supplemental front-impact air

bag is located in the center of the steering

wheel. The front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag is mounted in the

dashboard above the glove box. The

supplemental front air bags are designed

to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions,

although they may inflate if the forces in

another type of collision are similar to

those of a higher severity frontal impact.

They may not inflate in certain frontal colli-

sions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not

always an indication of proper front air bag

system operation.

The supplemental air bag system moni-

tors information from the crash zone sen-

sor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU) and seat

belt buckle sensors that detect if the seat

belts are fastened. Inflator operation is

based on the severity of a collision and

whether the seat belts are being used. Only

one front air bag may inflate in a crash,

depending on the crash severity and

whether the front occupants are belted or

unbelted. This does not indicate improper

performance of the system. If you have any

questions about the performance of your

air bag system, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information

about the system.

If you have any questions about your air

bag system, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information

about the system. If you are considering

modification of your vehicle due to a dis-

ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con-

tact information is contained in the begin-

ning of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud

noise may be heard, followed by the re-

lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should be

taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita-

tion and choking. Those with a history of a

breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the face and chest of the driver and right

front passenger. They can help save lives

and reduce serious injuries. However, an

inflating front air bag may cause facial

abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags

do not provide restraint to the lower body.

Seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as far

as practical away from the steering wheel

or instrument panel. The front air bags in-

flate quickly in order to help protect the

front occupants. Because of this, the force

of the front air bag inflating can increase

the risk of injury if the occupant is too close

to, or is against, the front air bag module

during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a

collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ON or START po-

sition.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warn-

ing light illuminates. The supplemental

air bag warning light will turn off after

about 7 seconds if the system is opera-

tional.

WARNING

∙ Do not place any objects on the steer-

ing wheel pad or on the instrument

panel. Also, do not place any objects

between any occupant and the steer-

ing wheel or instrument panel. Such

objects may become dangerous pro-

jectiles and cause injury if the front air

bag inflates.

1-78 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will

be hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This

is to prevent accidental inflation of

the supplemental air bag or damage

to the supplemental air bag system.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or front end struc-

ture. This could affect proper opera-

tion of the front air bag system.

∙ If your vehicle has front recovery

hooks as original factory equipment

do not remove or modify them. If it

was not equipped with front recovery

hooks do not install them. Either ac-

tion could affect proper operation of

the front air bag system resulting in

injury or death.

∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys-

tem may result in serious personal in-

jury. Tampering includes changes to

the steering wheel and the instru-

ment panel assembly by placing ma-

terial over the steering wheel pad and

above the instrument panel or by in-

stalling additional trim material

around the air bag system.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect

the front air bag system. Tampering

with the seat belt system may result

in serious personal injury.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the front air bag. It is also recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for installation of electrical equip-

ment. The Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) wiring harness* should

not be modified or disconnected. Un-

authorized electrical test equipment

and probing devices should not be

used on the air bag system.

∙ A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified re-

pair facility. A cracked windshield

could affect the function of the

supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the front air

bag system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-79

FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-

IMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

AND ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN

SIDE-IMPACT AND ROLLOVER

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

The side air bags are located in the outside

of the seatback of the front seats. The cur-

tain air bags are located in the side roof

rails. All of the information, cautions and

warnings in this manual must be fol-

lowed. The side air bags and curtain air

bags are designed to inflate in higher se-

verity side collisions, although they may in-

flate if the forces in another type of collision

are similar to those of a higher severity

impact. They are designed to inflate on the

side where the vehicle is impacted. They

may not inflate in certain side collisions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate

in certain types of rollover collisions or near

rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move-

ments (for example, during severe off-

roading) may cause the curtain air bags to

inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always

an indication of proper side air bag and

curtain air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,

followed by release of smoke.This smoke is

not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those

with a history of a breathing condition

should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the chest of the front occupants. Curtain

air bags help to cushion the impact force to

the head of occupants in the front and rear

outboard seating positions. They can help

save lives and reduce serious injuries. How-

ever, an inflating side air bag or curtain air

bag may cause abrasions or other injuries.

Side air bags and curtain air bags do not

provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn

and the driver and front passenger seated

upright as far as practical away from the

side air bag. Rear seat passengers should

be seated as far away as practical from the

door finishers and side roof rails. The side

air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly

in order to help protect the occupants. Be-

cause of this, the force of the side air bag

and curtain air bag inflating can increase

the risk of injury if the occupant is too close

to, or is against, these air bag modules dur-

ing inflation. The side air bag will deflate

quickly after the collision is over.

The curtain air bags will remain inflated for

a short time.

The side air bags and curtain air bags

operate only when the ignition switch is

in the ON or START position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

LRS2094

1-80 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also, do

not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door fin-

isher and the front seat. Such objects

may become dangerous projectiles

and cause injury if a side air bag

inflates.

∙ Right after inflation, several side air

bag and curtain air bag system com-

ponents will be hot. Do not touch

them; you may severely burn yourself.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the side air bag and curtain air bag

systems. This is to prevent damage to

or accidental inflation of the side air

bag and curtain air bag systems.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or side panel. This

could affect proper operation of the

curtain air bag systems.

∙ Tampering with the side air bag sys-

tem may result in serious personal in-

jury. For example, do not change the

front seats by placing material near

the seatbacks or by installing addi-

tional trim material, such as seat cov-

ers, around the side air bag.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the side air bag and curtain air bag. It

is also recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for installation of elec-

trical equipment. The SRS wiring har-

nesses* should not be modified or dis-

connected. Unauthorized electrical

test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the side air bag

or curtain air bag systems.

*The SRS wiring harness or connectors

are yellow or orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems and guide the

buyer to the appropriate sections in this

Owner’s Manual.

SEAT BELT WITH PRETENSIONER(s)

(front seats)

WARNING

∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused

after activation. They must be re-

placed together with the retractor

and buckle as a unit.

∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a

collision but pretensioner(s) are not

activated, be sure to have the preten-

sioner system checked and, if neces-

sary, replaced. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pretensioner system. This is to

prevent damage to or accidental acti-

vation of the pretensioner(s). Tamper-

ing with the pretensioner system may

result in serious personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-81

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the pretensioner system. It is also rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for installation of electrical

equipment. Unauthorized electrical

test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the preten-

sioner system.

∙ If you need to dispose of the preten-

sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Incorrect dis-

posal procedures could cause per-

sonal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate

with the supplemental air bag system in

certain types of collisions. Working with the

seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help

tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-

comes involved in certain types of colli-

sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-

pants.

The pretensioner(s) are encased within the

seat belt retractor and to the seat belt an-

chor affixed to the floor of the vehicle.

These seat belts are used the same way as

conventional seat belts.

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indi-

cate a fire. Care should be taken not to

inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breath-

ing condition should get fresh air promptly.

After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load

limiters allow the seat belt to release web-

bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against

the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning

light is used to indicate malfunctions

in the pretensioner system. For additional

information, refer to "Supplemental air bag

warning light" in this section. If the opera-

tion of the supplemental air bag warning

light indicates there is a malfunction, have

the system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the preten-

sioner system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

1. SRS Air bag warning labels

The warning labels are located on the

surface of the sun visor.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental

front-impact air bag system are placed in

the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WRS0885

1-82 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

Do not use a rear-facing child restraint

on a seat protected by an air bag in

front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may

cause serious injury or death.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying in the instrument panel,

monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-

tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates for about 7 seconds and

then turns off. This means the system is

operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and pretensioner systems need servicing:

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec-

onds.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner

systems may not operate properly. They

must be checked and repaired. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

LRS0100

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-83

Repair and replacement

procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air

bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to

inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a re-

minder, unless it is damaged, the supple-

mental air bag warning light remains illu-

minated after inflation has occurred.These

systems should be repaired and/or re-

placed as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,

curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and re-

lated parts should be pointed out to the

person performing the maintenance. The

ignition switch should always be placed in

the LOCK position when working under the

hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air

bag module will not function again

and must be replaced. Additionally,

the activated pretensioner(s) must

also be replaced. The air bag module

and pretensioner(s) should be re-

placed. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

However, the air bag module and pre-

tensioner(s) cannot be repaired.

∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain

air bag systems and the pretensioner

system should be inspected if there is

any damage to the front end or side

portion of the vehicle. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

∙ If you need to dispose of the supple-

mental air bag or pretensioner sys-

tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures

could cause personal injury.

∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle

from any direction, your Occupant

Classification Sensor (OCS) (if so

equipped) should be checked to verify

it is still functioning correctly. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. The OCS

(weight sensor) (if so equipped)

should be checked even if no air bags

deploy as a result of the impact. Fail-

ure to verify proper OCS (weight sen-

sor) (if so equipped) function may re-

sult in an improper air bag

deployment resulting in injury or

death.

1-84 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel................................2-4

Meters and gauges..............................2-6

Speedometer and odometer .................2-7

Tachometer ..................................2-9

Engine coolant temperature gauge ..........2-9

Fuel gauge ..................................2-10

Auxiliary gauges (if so equipped)..............2-11

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Level

(if so equipped) ..............................2-12

Off-road monitor (if so equipped) ............2-13

Trip computer (if so equipped) ...............2-13

Compass (if so equipped) ......................2-18

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders ......................................2-21

Checking lights..............................2-22

Warning lights ...............................2-22

Indicator lights ..............................2-29

Audible reminders ...........................2-32

Vehicle information display (if so equipped).....2-32

How to use the vehicle information

display ......................................2-33

Startup display ..............................2-33

Settings .....................................2-34

Vehicle information display warnings

and indicators...............................2-41

Diesel warnings and indicators

(if so equipped) ..............................2-47

Security systems ...............................2-48

Vehicle security system .....................2-48

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .........2-49

Wiper and washer switch .......................2-50

Switch operation ............................2-50

Rain-sensing auto wiper system

(if so equipped) ..............................2-52

Rear window and/or outside mirror defroster

switch (if so equipped)..........................2-53

Headlight switch ...............................2-54

Headlight control switch.....................2-54

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system

(Type A) (if so equipped) .....................2-57

LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

system (Type B) (if so equipped) .............2-57

Instrument brightness control...............2-58

Turn signal switch ...........................2-58

Fog light switch (if so equipped) ................2-59

Horn ...........................................2-59

Cargo lamp switch .............................2-59

Climate controlled seat switches

(if so equipped) .................................2-60

Heated seat switches (if so equipped) ..........2-61

Heated rear seat switches (if so equipped)......2-62

Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . 2-63

Warning systems switch (if so equipped) .......2-64

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch......2-65

Hill descent control switch (if so equipped)......2-65

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

system switch (if so equipped)..................2-67

Power inverter switch (if so equipped) ..........2-68

Front and rear sonar system OFF switch

(if so equipped) .................................2-69

Tow mode switch ..............................2-69

E-call (SOS) switch (if so equipped)..............2-70

Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU)

(if so equipped) .................................2-70

Power outlets ..................................2-71

12v Outlets ..................................2-71

120v outlets (if so equipped) .................2-73

Extended storage switch .......................2-74

Storage ........................................2-75

Front-door pockets..........................2-75

Rear-door pockets (if so equipped) ..........2-75

Console side pockets (if so equipped)........2-76

Seatback pockets (if so equipped) ...........2-76

Under-seat storage (if so equipped) .........2-77

Console box storage trays

(if so equipped) ..............................2-78

Glovebox....................................2-78

Console box (if so equipped).................2-78

Center armrest storage (if so equipped) .....2-79

Under front seat storage bin

(if so equipped) ..............................2-80

Overhead sunglasses storage

(if so equipped) ..............................2-80

Cup holders .................................2-81

Grocery hooks (if so equipped)...............2-84

Bed liner storage bins (if so equipped) .......2-84

Cargo hooks (if so equipped) ................2-85

C-Channel cargo hooks (if so equipped) .....2-85

Windows .......................................2-86

Power windows .............................2-86

Rear power window switch

(if so equipped) ..............................2-88

Rear sliding window (if so equipped) .........2-89

Interior lights ...................................2-90

Console light (if so equipped) ................2-91

Map lights (if so equipped) ...................2-91

Personal Lights (if so equipped)..............2-92

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver

(if so equipped) .................................2-92

Programming HomeLink® ...................2-93

Programming HomeLink® for Canadian

customers and gate openers................2-94

Operating the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver ..................................2-95

Programming trouble-diagnosis ............2-95

Clearing the programmed information ......2-95

Reprogramming a single HomeLink®

button.......................................2-96

If your vehicle is stolen.......................2-96

1. Vents (P. 4-35)

2. Turn signal switch (P. 2-58)

Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-50)

3. Steering wheel switch for audio

control (P. 4-88)

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System (P. 4-88, 4-135)

Vehicle information display

controls (P. 2-33)

4. Driver supplemental air bag

(P. 1-55)

Horn (P. 2-59)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-6)

Warning and indicator lights

(P. 2-21)

6. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-41)

7. Shift lever (P. 5-16)

Tow mode switch (P. 2-69)

8. Audio controls (P. 4-49)

9. Center display (P. 4-4)

10. Climate controls (P. 4-35)

11. Front passenger supplemental air

bag (P. 1-55)

12. Glove box (P. 2-75)

13. Front passenger air bag status

light (if so equipped) (P. 1-55)

14. Power outlet (P. 2-71)

LII2352

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-4 Instruments and controls

15. Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-63)

Warning Systems switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-64)

16. Power outlet (P. 2-71)

17. Auxiliary jack (P. 4-49)

USB port (P. 4-49)

18. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P. 6-2)

19. Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU)

(if so equipped) (P. 2-70)

20. Climate control seat switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-60)

Heated front seat switches

(if so equipped) (P. 2-61)

21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-65)

Front and rear sonar system OFF

switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-64)

22. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-45)

23. Push-button ignition switch

(P. 5-11)

24. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel

control (P. 3-29)

25. Headlight aiming control

(if so equipped) (P. 2-54)

Power inverter switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-68)

Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-59)

Electronic locking rear differential

(E-Lock) system switch (if so

equipped) (P. 2-67)

Hill descent control system switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-65)

26. Headlight switch (P. 2-54)

Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-59)

Instrument brightness control

switches (P. 2-54)

Trip reset switch (P. 2-6)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parenthesis for operating details.

Instruments and controls 2-5

1. Tachometer

2. Warning and indicator lights

3. Vehicle information display

Odometer

Outside temperature display

4. Speedometer

5. Fuel gauge

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3100

METERS AND GAUGES

2-6 Instruments and controls

1. Tachometer

2. Warning and indicator lights

3. Speedometer

4. Fuel gauge

5. Trip computer

Odometer

Outside temperature display

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

This vehicle is equipped with a speedom-

eter and odometer. The speedometer is

located on the right side of the meter clus-

ter. The odometer is located in the vehicle

information display (Type A) (if so equipped)

or the trip computer (Type B) (if so

equipped) to the left of the speedometer

and can be accessed with the vehicle in the

ON position.

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3497

Instruments and controls 2-7

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the vehicle

speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer and the twin trip odometer

䊊

1are displayed in the vehicle information

display (Type A) (if so equipped) or the trip

computer (Type B) (if so equipped) when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-

sition.

The odometer records the total distance

the vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the dis-

tance of individual trips.

Changing the display

Push the TRIP RESET switch 䊊

2on the left

side of the instrument panel to change the

display as follows:

ODO →Trip →Trip →ODO

Resetting the trip odometer

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 䊊

2for about

2 seconds resets the currently displayed

trip odometer to zero.

LIC2255

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3727

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3728

2-8 Instruments and controls

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in

revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev

engine into the red zone 䊊

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, reduce engine speed. Operating

the engine in the red zone may cause

serious engine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant

temperature. The engine coolant tempera-

ture is within the normal range 䊊

1when

the gauge needle points within the zone

shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies

with the outside air temperature and driv-

ing conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-

ture near the hot (H) end of the normal

range,reduce vehicle speed to decrease

temperature. If the gauge is over the

normal range, stop the vehicle as soon

as safely possible. If the engine is over-

heated, continued operation of the ve-

hicle may seriously damage the engine.

For additional information, refer to “If

your vehicle overheats” in the “In case

of emergency” section of this manual

for immediate action required.

LIC3543 LIC2220

Instruments and controls 2-9

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel

level in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during brak-

ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or

down hills.

The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) af-

ter the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

The low fuel warning light comes on when

the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg-

isters 0 (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler

door is located on the driver’s side of the

vehicle.

CAUTION

∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may

come on. Refuel as soon as possible. If

the vehicle has run out of fuel, the sys-

tem will need to be primed. Turn the

key switch to ON for 20–30 seconds

and then back OFF. Repeat 3–4 times

or until the fuel pressure builds. Once

primed, start the vehicle. After a few

driving trips. the light should

turn off. If the light remains on after a

few driving trips, have the vehicle in-

spected. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

this section.

LIC2222

2-10 Instruments and controls

AUXILIARY GAUGES (if so

equipped)

1. Exhaust temperature gauge (if so

equipped)

2. Automatic Transmission fluid tem-

perature gauge

3. Turbo meter (if so equipped)

4. Engine oil pressure gauge

5. Engine oil temperature gauge

6. Voltmeter

Exhaust temperature gauge (if so

equipped)

For additional information, refer to the “Ti-

tan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

Automatic Transmission fluid tempera-

ture gauge

This gauge indicates the temperature of

the automatic transmission fluid.

CAUTION

∙ This gauge is not designed to indicate

low automatic transmission fluid

level. Use the dipstick to check the

fluid level. For additional information,

refer to “6- speed automatic trans-

mission fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

∙ If the gauge indicates automatic

transmission fluid temperature over

the normal range, stop the vehicle as

soon as safely possible. It is recom-

mended that you have the vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer. Contin-

ued operation of the vehicle may seri-

ously damage the transmission.

Turbo meter (if so equipped)

For additional information, refer to the “Ti-

tan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

Engine oil pressure gauge

The gauge indicates the engine lubrication

system oil pressure while the engine is run-

ning. The bar should be in the middle of the

gauge when the engine is running.

LIC3390

Instruments and controls 2-11

CAUTION

∙ This gauge is not designed to indicate

low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to

check the oil level. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Engine oil” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

∙ If the gauge needle does not move

with the proper amount of engine oil,

it is recommended that you have the

vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Continued vehicle operation in such a

condition could cause serious dam-

age to the engine.

Engine oil temperature gauge

This gauge measures the temperature of

the engine oil.

Voltmeter

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the voltmeter indicates the bat-

tery voltage. When the engine is running, it

indicates the generator voltage.

While cranking the engine, the volts drop

below the normal range. If the range is not

within the normal range (11 – 15 volts) while

the engine is running, it may indicate that

the charging system is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF)

LEVEL (if so equipped)

This gauge measures the DEF level re-

maining in the vehicle. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Fuel and refueling” in the

“Titan Diesel Owner’s Supplement”.

LIC3479

2-12 Instruments and controls

OFF-ROAD MONITOR (if so

equipped)

The off-road monitor displays the various

slopes of the vehicle.

The Pitch Gauge (left) indicates the angle of

the vehicle position up or down. The value

will be displayed below the gauge while the

vehicle graphic will rotate to indicate con-

dition pointed up or down.

The Tire Angle (center) indicates the angle

of the tires based on turning of the steering

wheel. The graphic image will show the ac-

tual vehicle tire position while the angle is

to be displayed below as reference.

The Roll Gauge (right) indicates the angle of

the vehicle position left and right. The value

will be displayed below the gauge while the

vehicle graphic will rotate to indicate con-

dition of the vehicle leaning to the left or

right.

TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the modes of the trip computer

can be selected by pressing the

buttons on the steering wheel. The follow-

ing modes can be selected:

∙ Range

∙ Average fuel economy

∙ Average speed

∙ Time

∙ Tire info

∙ Settings

Range

The range mode provides you with an esti-

mation of the distance that can be driven

before refueling. The range is constantly

being calculated, based on the amount of

fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel

economy which will depend on driving

conditions. Dashes (—) indicate that fuel re-

maining volume cannot be read by the fuel

pump and should be refilled as soon as

possible.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

LIC3417 LIC3504

Instruments and controls 2-13

NOTE:

When driving uphill or rounding curves,

the fuel in the tank shifts, which may

momentarily change the display.

Average fuel economy

The average fuel economy mode shows

the average fuel economy since the last

reset. Resetting is done by pressing the EN-

TER button on the steering wheel for more

than approximately 1 second. The display is

updated every 30 seconds. At about the

first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the dis-

play shows (----).

Average speed

The average speed mode shows the aver-

age vehicle speed since last reset. Reset-

ting is done by pressing the ENTER button

on the steering wheel for more than ap-

proximately 1 second. The display is up-

dated every 30 seconds. The first 30 sec-

onds after a reset, the display shows (----).

LIC3505 LIC3506

2-14 Instruments and controls

Time

The time mode shows the time the vehicle

has been on since the last reset. The dis-

played time can be reset by pressing the

ENTER button on the steering wheel for

more than approximately 1 second.

Tire info

The tire info mode shows the pressure of

each tire. To see the individual tire pres-

sures, press the ENTER button when the

desired tire is shown. The tire pressures are

displayed as follows:

∙ FL (Front Left)

∙ FR (Front Right)

∙ RL (Rear Left)

∙ RR (Rear Right)

To return to the main menu selections,

scroll to “EXIT” and press ENTER.

Settings

The settings mode allows the user to

change the trip computer display units and

set maintenance reminders. To select the

desired menu item, press the ENTER but-

ton when it is shown. The menu items are

displayed as follows:

∙ Engine Oil

∙ Oil Filter

∙ Rotation

∙ Other

∙ Units

LIC3507 LIC3508 LIC3509

Instruments and controls 2-15

To return to the main menu selections,

scroll to “EXIT” and press ENTER.

Engine oil

The engine oil menu item allows the user

to set a maintenance reminder at a spe-

cific interval. To set the reminder, press the

ENTER button when “ENGINE OIL” is shown.

Using the buttons, set the desired

interval to receive a maintenance re-

minder.

To reset the mileage, press and hold the

ENTER button for approximately 1 second.

To return to the main menu selections,

scroll to “EXIT” and press ENTER.

For additional information, refer to “Mainte-

nance schedules” in the “Maintenance and

schedules” section of this manual.

Oil filter

The oil filter menu item allows the user to

set a maintenance reminder at a specific

interval. To set the reminder, press the EN-

TER button when “OIL FILTER” is shown. Us-

ing the buttons, set the desired in-

terval to receive a maintenance reminder.

To reset the mileage, press and hold the

ENTER button for approximately 1 second.

To return to the main menu selections,

scroll to “EXIT” and press ENTER.

For additional information, refer to “Mainte-

nance schedules” in the “Maintenance and

schedules” section of this manual.

Rotation

The rotation menu item allows the user to

set a maintenance reminder at a specific

interval. To set the reminder, press the EN-

TER button when “ROTATION” is shown. Us-

ing the buttons, set the desired in-

terval to receive a maintenance reminder.

To reset the mileage, press and hold the

ENTER button for approximately 1 second.

To return to the main menu selections,

scroll to “EXIT” and press ENTER.

For additional information, refer to “Mainte-

nance schedules” in the “Maintenance and

schedules” section of this manual.

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not a

substitute for regular tire checks, in-

cluding tire pressure checks. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing

wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual. Many factors in-

cluding tire inflation, alignment, driving

habits and road conditions affect tire

wear and when tires should be re-

placed. Setting the tire replacement in-

dicator for a certain driving distance

does not mean your tires will last that

long. Use the tire replacement indicator

as a guide only and always perform

regular tire checks. Failure to perform

regular tire checks, including tire pres-

sure checks could result in tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to a collision, which could

result in serious personal injury or

death.

2-16 Instruments and controls

Other

The other menu item allows the user to set

a maintenance reminder at a specific inter-

val to check various other maintenance

items (ie. air filter, brakes, coolant). To set

the reminder, press the ENTER button

when “OTHER” is shown. Using the

buttons, set the desired interval to receive

a maintenance reminder.

To reset the mileage, press and hold the

ENTER button for approximately 1 second.

To return to the main menu selections,

scroll to “EXIT” and press ENTER.

For additional information, refer to “Mainte-

nance schedules” in the “Maintenance and

schedules” section of this manual.

Units

The units menu item allows the user to

change the trip computer units to US or

METRIC. To select the units, press the EN-

TER button when desired unit is shown.

To return to the main menu selections,

scroll to “EXIT” and press ENTER.

4WD error

The “4WD ERROR” message appears in the

center of the trip computer when there is a

malfunction with the 4–wheel drive sys-

tem. For additional information, refer to

“4–Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light” in this

section.

4WD tires

The “4WD TIRES” message appears in the

center of the trip computer when there is a

large difference in wheel rotation. If this

messages appears, switch the vehicle into

2WD mode. For additional information, re-

fer to “Using 4–Wheel Drive (4WD)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

LIC3544 LIC3545

Instruments and controls 2-17

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism

and indicates the direction of the vehicle’s

heading.

With the ignition switch placed in the ON

position, press the button as de-

scribed in the chart below to activate vari-

ous features of the automatic anti-glare

rearview mirror.

Press and hold

the

button for

about:

Feature:

(Press button again for about

1 second to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

5 seconds

Compass zone can be changed

to correct false compass read-

ings

9 seconds Compass enters calibration

mode

For information about the automatic anti-

glare feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare

rearview mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section of this manual.

Press the button for about 1 second

when the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position to toggle the compass display 䊊

on or off. The display will indicate the direc-

tion of the vehicle’s heading.

N: North

E: East

S: South

W: West

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the com-

pass by driving the vehicle in three com-

plete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by driv-

ing your vehicle on your everyday route.

The compass will be calibrated once it has

tracked three complete circles.

LIC1487

COMPASS (if so equipped)

2-18 Instruments and controls

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north

and geographical north is known as vari-

ance. In some areas, this difference can

sometimes be great enough to cause false

compass readings. Follow these instruc-

tions to set the variance for your particular

location if this happens:

1. Press and hold the button for

about 11 seconds or the button

for about 8 seconds. The current zone

number will appear in the display. Re-

lease the button.

2. Find your current location on the zone

map. Refer to the illustration.

3. Press the or the button re-

peatedly to toggle through the zone

numbers until the desired number ap-

pears in the display. Once you have se-

lected a zone number, the display will

show a compass direction within a few

seconds.

NOTE:

Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

WIC0355

Instruments and controls 2-19

Inaccurate compass direction

The compass display is equipped with au-

tomatic correction function. If the correct

direction is not shown, follow this proce-

dure.

1. With the display turned on, press and

hold the for about 10 seconds.

The “C” icon in the compass display will

illuminate.

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the

vehicle in three complete circles at a

maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles, the display

should return to normal.

CAUTION

∙ Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,

which are attached to the vehicle by

means of a magnet. They affect the

operation of the compass.

∙ When cleaning the mirror, use a paper

towel or similar material dampened

with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass

cleaner directly on the mirror as it

may cause the liquid cleaner to enter

the mirror housing.

2-20 Instruments and controls

4–Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light

(if so equipped)

Low fuel warning light (if so equipped) Front fog light indicator light

(if so equipped)

or Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light

Low tire pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light

(if so equipped)

Automatic Transmission check warning

light

Low windshield washer fluid warning light

(if so equipped)

High beam indicator light (blue)

Automatic Transmission oil temperature

warning light

Malfunction warning light (red) (if so

equipped)

Hill descent control system ON indicator

light (if so equipped)

Automatic Transmission park warning

light ( model)

Master warning light (if so equipped) Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) (yellow)

or Brake warning light NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light

(if so equipped)

Security indicator light

Charge warning light P position selecting warning light

(if so equipped)

Side light and headlight indicator light

(green) (if so equipped)

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) warning

light (if so equipped)

Passenger seat belt warning light

(if so equipped)

Slip indicator light

Door open warning light Supplemental air bag warning light TOW mode ON indicator light

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS

AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Instruments and controls 2-21

Driver seat belt warning light and chime Water in Fuel warning light (if so

equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure warning light Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

system ON indicator light (if so equipped)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light

Low DEF warning light (if so equipped) Engine start operation indicator light

(if so equipped)

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking

brake, fasten the seat belts and place the

ignition switch in the ON position without

starting the engine. The following lights (if

so equipped) will come on:

, , , or

The following lights (if so equipped) will

come on briefly and then go off:

or , , , , ,

, , ATP ,

If any light does not come on or operate in

a way other than described, it may indicate

a burned-out bulb and/or a system mal-

function. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Some indicators and warnings are also dis-

played on the vehicle information display

between the speedometer and tachom-

eter. For additional information,refer to “Ve-

hicle information display” in this section.

WARNING LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in this section.

4–Wheel Drive (4WD)

warning light (if so

equipped)

The 4WD warning light comes on when the

key switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon

after the engine is started.

If the engine or vehicle is not functioning

properly, the warning light will either re-

main illuminated or blink. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Using 4–Wheel Drive

(4WD)” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

CAUTION

∙ If the warning light comes on or blinks

during operation, have your vehicle

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Do not drive on dry hard surface roads

in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD

warning light turns on when you are

driving on dry hard surface roads:

– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD

shift switch to 2WD.

2-22 Instruments and controls

– in the 4LO position, stop the ve-

hicle, move the shift lever to the N

(Neutral) position with the brake

pedal depressed, and shift the

4WD shift switch to 2WD.

∙ If the warning light is still on after the

above operation, have your vehicle

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service as

soon as possible.

or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the ABS warning light illuminates

and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is

operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while

the engine is running or while driving, it

may indicate the ABS is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock

function is turned off. The brake system

then operates normally but without anti-

lock assistance. For additional information,

refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Automatic Transmission

check warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light comes on for about

2 seconds. If the light comes on at any

other time, it may indicate the automatic

transmission system is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Automatic Transmission oil

temperature warning light

This light comes on when the automatic

transmission oil temperature is too high. If

the light comes on while driving, reduce the

vehicle speed as soon as safely possible

until the light turns off.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation when the

A/T oil temperature warning light is on

may damage the automatic

transmission.

Automatic Transmission

park warning light (

model)

WARNING

∙ If the 4WD mode indicator is off or the

ATP warning light is on, this indicates

that the automatic transmission P

(Park) position will not function and

could result in the vehicle moving un-

expectedly, causing serious personal

injury or property damage. Always set

the parking brake. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Using 4–wheel

drive (4WD)” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

∙ If the ATP light is on, this indicates that

the automatic transmission P (Park)

position will not function and the

transfer case is in neutral.

∙ When parking, always make sure that

the 4WD shift indicator light illumi-

nates and the parking brake is set.

Failure to engage the transfer posi-

tion in 2WD, 4H or 4LO could result in

the vehicle moving unexpectedly, re-

sulting in serious personal injury or

property damage.

Instruments and controls 2-23

∙ Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD, 4H

or 4LO position again to turn off the

ATP warning light when the shift lever

is in the P position and the ATP warn-

ing light is on. (Before shifting the

4WD switch into the 4LO position,

move the shift lever to the N position

once, shift the shift lever into P again

and make sure the ATP warning light

is off.)

This light indicates that the automatic

transmission parking function is not en-

gaged. If the transfer control is not secured

in any drive position while the shift lever is

in the P (Park) position,the transmission will

disengage and the drive wheels will not

lock.

or Brake warning

light

This light functions for both the parking

brake and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light comes on when the park-

ing brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light warns of a low brake fluid

level. If the light comes on while the engine

is running, with the parking brake not ap-

plied, stop the vehicle and perform the fol-

lowing:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake

fluid as necessary. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have

the warning system checked. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

WARNING

∙ Your brake system may not be work-

ing properly if the warning light is on.

Driving could be dangerous. If you

judge it to be safe, drive carefully to

the nearest service station for repairs.

Otherwise, have your vehicle towed

because driving it could be

dangerous.

∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the en-

gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid

level may increase your stopping dis-

tance and braking will require greater

pedal effort and pedal travel.

∙ If the brake fluid level is below the

MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

indicator

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the

brake warning light and the ABS warning

light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is

not functioning properly. Have the brake

system checked and, if necessary, repaired.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Avoid high-speed

driving and abrupt braking. For additional

information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking Sys-

tem (ABS) warning light” in this section.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is

running, it may indicate the charging sys-

tem is not functioning properly. Turn the

engine off and check the generator belt. If

the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the

light remains on, have the system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

CAUTION

∙ Do not ground electrical accessories

directly to the battery terminal. Doing

so will bypass the variable voltage

control system (if so equipped) and

the vehicle battery may not charge

completely. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Variable voltage control

system” in the “Do-it-yourself” sec-

tion of this manual.

∙ Do not continue driving if the genera-

tor belt is loose, broken or missing.

Diesel Particulate Filter

(DPF) warning light (if so

equipped)

For additional information, refer to the “Ti-

tan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors

are not closed securely while the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

Driver seat belt warning

light and chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten

your seat belt. The light illuminates when-

ever the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position and remains illuminated until the

driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the same

time, the chime sounds for about 6 sec-

onds unless the driver’s seat belt is se-

curely fastened.

For additional information, refer to “Seat

belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of

this manual.

Engine oil pressure

warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If

the light flickers or comes on during nor-

mal driving, pull off the road in a safe area,

stop the engine immediately, and call a

NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair

shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is

not designed to indicate a low oil level.

Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For

additional information, refer to “Engine oil”

in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil

pressure warning light on could cause

serious damage to the engine almost

immediately. Such damage is not cov-

ered by warranty. Turn off the engine as

soon as it is safe to do so.

Low DEF warning light (if so

equipped)

For additional information, refer to the “Ti-

tan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

Low fuel warning light (if so

equipped)

This light comes on when the fuel level in

the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon

as it is convenient, preferably before the

fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be

a small reserve of fuel in the tank when

the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty).

Instruments and controls 2-25

Low tire pressure warning

light

Your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS that

monitors the tire pressure of all tires except

the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns

of low tire pressure or indicates that the

TPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light illuminates for about

1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illumi-

nate. A “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”

warning also appears in the vehicle in-

formation display (if so equipped).

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust

the tire pressure of all four tires to the

recommended COLD tire pressure shown

on the Tire and Loading Information la-

bel located in the driver’s door opening.

The low tire pressure warning light does

not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-

flated to the recommended pressure,

the vehicle must be driven at speeds

above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the

TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure

warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge

to check the tire pressure.

For vehicles with a vehicle information dis-

play, the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn-

ing appears each time the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position as long as the low

tire pressure warning light remains illumi-

nated.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in this section, “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” and “In case of emer-

gency” sections of this manual.

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the

low tire pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. The

light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the

system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

The "Tire Pressure Low — Add Air" warning

does not appear if the low tire pressure

warning light illuminates to indicate a

TPMS malfunction.

For additional information, refer to “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section and “Tire

pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙ If the light does not illuminate with

the ignition switch placed in the ON

position, have the vehicle checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

2-26 Instruments and controls

∙ If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-

rious vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could re-

sult in serious personal injury or

death. Check the tire pressure for all

four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pressure

show on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label located in the driver’s

door opening to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light off. If the light still

illuminates while driving after adjust-

ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat

or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If

you have a flat tire, replace it with a

spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire

is flat and all tires are properly in-

flated, have the vehicle checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

will not function and the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash for ap-

proximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after 1 minute. Have your

tires replaced and/or TPMS system

reset as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for these services.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly.

∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds

of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the

TPMS may not operate correctly.

∙ Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the four wheels correctly.

Low windshield-washer

fluid warning light (if so

equipped)

This light comes on when the windshield-

washer fluid is at a low level. Add

windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For

additional information,refer to “Windshield-

washer fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

Malfunction warning light

(red) (if so equipped)

If this warning light illuminates this indi-

cates either the coolant temperature is

above a critical threshold or the exhaust

temperatures are above a critical thresh-

old. When illuminated this lamp indicates

the need to stop the engine as soon as it

can be safely done. The engine must re-

main shut down until the engine can be

repaired. For additional information, refer

to the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

Instruments and controls 2-27

CAUTION

∙ Continuing vehicle operation without

proper servicing of the engine control

system could lead to poor driveability,

reduced fuel economy, and damage

to the engine control system, which

may affect the vehicle’s warranty

coverage.

∙ Failure to drain the water from the

fuel filter can cause serious damage

to the engine. It is recommended that

you contact a NISSAN dealer as soon

as possible.

Master warning light (if so

equipped)

This light comes on when various vehicle

information display warnings appear.

∙ No key warning

∙ Low fuel warning

∙ Low windshield-washer fluid warning

∙ Parking brake release warning

∙ Door open warning

∙ Loose fuel cap warning

∙ Check tire pressure warning

∙ 4WD error (if so equipped)

∙ Front & rear tire size differences (if so

equipped)

NISSAN Intelligent Key®

warning light (if so

equipped)

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light comes on for about

2 seconds and then turns off. This light illu-

minates or blinks as follows:

∙ The light blinks in yellow when the door

is closed with the Intelligent Key left out-

side the vehicle and the ignition switch

in the ACC or ON position. Make sure

that the Intelligent Key is inside the ve-

hicle.

∙ The light blinks in green when the Intel-

ligent Key battery is running out of

power. Replace the battery with a new

one. For additional information, refer to

“Battery” in the “Do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

∙ The light illuminates in yellow when it

warns of a malfunction with the Intelli-

gent Key system.

If the warning light illuminates in yellow

while the engine is stopped, it may be im-

possible to start the engine. If the light

comes on while the engine is running, you

can drive the vehicle. Have the system

checked.It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section of this manual.

P position selecting

warning light (if so

equipped)

The light blinks red and the warning buzzer

sounds if you are outside of the vehicle with

the Intelligent Key and the engine is off, but

the shift lever is not in the P (Park) position.

When the warning light blinks, place the

ignition switch in the ON position, move the

shift lever to the P (Park) position, then

place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion.

Passenger seat belt

warning light (if so

equipped)

The light reminds you to notify the passen-

ger to fasten their seat belt. The light illumi-

nates whenever the ignition is placed in the

2-28 Instruments and controls

ON or START position and remains illumi-

nated until the passenger’s seat belt is fas-

tened.

The light will remain on for a period of time

when the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park)

and the passenger seat belt is unfastened.

If the passenger seat belt is fastened, the

light will turn off.

For additional information, refer to “Seat

belts” in the “Safety-Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of

this manual for precautions on seat belt

usage.

Supplemental air bag

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

or START position, the supplemental air

bag warning light illuminates for about

7 seconds and then turns off. This means

the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,

and pretensioner seat belt systems need

servicing:

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec-

onds.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these services.

Unless checked and repaired, the supple-

mental restraint system (air bag system)

and/or the pretensioner(s) may not func-

tion properly. For additional information,re-

fer to “Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of

this manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Water in Fuel warning light

(if so equipped)

For additional information, refer to the “Ti-

tan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in this section.

Electronic locking rear

differential (E-Lock) system

ON indicator light (if so

equipped)

This light comes on when the electronic

locking rear differential (E-Lock) system

clutch is fully engaged.

The indicator light flashes when the sys-

tem is first turned on.When the system fully

engages, the light remains on. If the switch

is on and the indicator light continues to

flash, the system is not engaged.

For additional information, refer to “Elec-

tronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) sys-

tem switch” in this section and “Electronic

locking rear differential (E-Lock) system” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Instruments and controls 2-29

Engine start operation

indicator light (if so

equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the ignition

switch is in the ACC or ON position with the

shift lever in the P (Park) position.

Automatic transmission models: This in-

dicator means that the engine will start by

pushing the push-button ignition switch

with the brake pedal depressed.

Front fog light indicator

light (if so equipped)

The front fog light indicator light illumi-

nates when the front fog lights are on. For

additional information, refer to “Fog light

switch” in this section.

Front passenger air bag

status light (if so equipped)

The front passenger air bag status light will

be lit and the passenger front air bag will be

off depending on how the front passenger

seat is being used.

For additional information, refer to “Front

passenger air bag and status light” in the

“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

(blue)

This blue light comes on when the head-

light high beams are on and goes out when

the low beams are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes

on when the passing signal is activated.

Hill descent control system

ON indicator light (if so

equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light comes on briefly and

then turns off.

The light comes on when the hill descent

control system is activated.

If the hill descent control switch is on and

the indicator light blinks, the system may

be disabled.

You may feel or hear the system working;

this is normal.

If the indicator light does not come on

when the hill descent switch is on, the sys-

tem may not be functioning properly. Have

the system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

For additional information, refer to “Hill de-

scent control system ON indicator light” in

this section and “Hill descent control sys-

tem” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) (yellow)

If this indicator light comes on steady or

blinks while the engine is running, it may

indicate a potential emission control mal-

function.

If this indicator light comes on steady for

20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds

when the engine is not running, it indicates

that the vehicle is not ready for an emission

control system inspection/maintenance

test. For additional information, refer to

“Readiness for inspection/maintenance

(I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

2-30 Instruments and controls

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

∙ MIL on steady — An emission control

system malfunction has been de-

tected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the

Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the

vehicle information display (if so

equipped) or the trip computer (if so

equipped). If the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle. The

light should turn off after a few driving

trips. If the light does not turn off

after a few driving trips, have the vehicle

inspected. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.You

do not need to have your vehicle towed

to the dealer.

∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has

been detected which may damage the

emission control system. To reduce or

avoid emission control system dam-

age:

– do not drive at speeds above

45 mph (72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or decelera-

tion.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled or towed.

The MIL may stop blinking and come on

steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service. You do not need to have

your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without

having the emission control system

checked and repaired as necessary

could lead to poor driveability, reduced

fuel economy, and possible damage to

the emission control system.

Security indicator light

This light blinks whenever the ignition

switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC

position. This function indicates the secu-

rity system equipped on the vehicle is op-

erational.

For additional information, refer to “Security

systems” in this section.

Side light and headlight

indicator light (green) (if so

equipped)

The side light and headlight indicator light

illuminates when the side light or headlight

position is selected. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Headlight switch” in this sec-

tion.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system is operat-

ing, thus alerting that the vehicle is nearing

its traction limits. The road surface may be

slippery.

TOW mode ON indicator

light

This light comes on when the tow mode

function is on.

Turn signal/hazard

indicator lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn

signal switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is

turned on.

Instruments and controls 2-31

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the

VDC OFF switch is pushed to off. This indi-

cates the VDC system is not operating.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

the engine and the system will operate

normally. For additional information, refer

to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

The VDC light also comes on when you

place the ignition switch in the ON position.

The light will turn off after about 2 seconds

if the system is operational.If the light stays

on or comes on along with the indi-

cator light while you are driving, have the

VDC system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

While the VDC system is operating, you

might feel a slight vibration or hear the sys-

tem working when starting the vehicle or

accelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear

warnings. When a disc brake pad requires

replacement, it makes a high pitched

scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-

tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de-

pressed. Have the brakes checked as soon

as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF

position, a chime sounds when the driver’s

door is opened if the headlights or parking

lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before

leaving the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key® door

buzzer

The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if

the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle

when locking the doors. When the buzzer

sounds, be sure to check both the vehicle

and the Intelligent Key. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in

the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments”

section of this manual.

The vehicle information display is located

to the left of the speedometer. It displays

such items as:

∙ Vehicle settings

∙ Trip computer information

∙ Drive system warnings and settings (if

so equipped)

∙ Cruise control system information

∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system (if so

equipped)

∙ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system (if

so equipped)

LIC2630

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY (if

so equipped)

2-32 Instruments and controls

∙ NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation infor-

mation

∙ Indicators and warnings

∙ Tire Pressure information

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE

INFORMATION DISPLAY

The vehicle information display can be

navigated using the ENTER and but-

tons located on the steering wheel.

1. ENTER — press to select the vehicle in-

formation menu items. Additionally, use

the UP/DOWN function to navi-

gate the menu items

2. — move LEFT/RIGHT to navigate

through the items in the vehicle infor-

mation display

The ENTER button also controls audio

functions. For additional information, refer

to “Steering wheel switch for audio control”

in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and

voice recognition systems” section of this

manual.

STARTUP DISPLAY

When the vehicle is placed in the ON or ACC

(if so equipped) position, the vehicle infor-

mation display may display the following

screens:

∙ Home

∙ Off Road

∙ Auxiliary Gauges (if so equipped)

∙ DEF Level (if so equipped)

∙ Trip

∙ Fuel Economy

∙ Navigation (if so equipped)

∙ Audio

∙ Driving Aids (if so equipped)

∙ Tire Pressures

∙ Warning Confirmation

∙ Settings

LIC3391

Instruments and controls 2-33

Warning Confirmation will only display if

there are any warnings present. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display warnings and indicators” in

this section.

To control which items display in the ve-

hicle information display, refer to “Settings”

in this section.

SETTINGS

The setting mode allows you to change the

information displayed in the vehicle infor-

mation display:

∙ Driver Assistance (if so equipped)

∙ Meter Settings

∙ Vehicle Settings

∙ Towing Settings (if so equipped)

∙ Alarm (if so equipped)

∙ Maintenance

∙ Unit

∙ Language

∙ Factory Reset

Driver Assistance (if so equipped)

The driver assistance menu allows the user

to change the various driving and parking

aids.

Menu item Result

Driving Aids (if so equipped) Displays available driving aids. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traf-

fic Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Blind Spot (BSW) Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems on or off. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

Parking Aids (if so equipped) Displays available parking aids. For additional information, refer to “Front and rear sonar system” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Moving Object (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Moving Object Detection (MOD) on or off. For additional information, refer to “Moving Ob-

ject Detection (MOD)” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual.

Sensor (if so equipped) Allows the user to turn the sensors on, off, or front only.

Display Allows user to turn the display on or off in the vehicle information display.

Volume Allows user to adjust the volume of warning chimes.

Range Allows user to set a specific range for the sensors to engage.

2-34 Instruments and controls

Meter Settings

The meter settings allow the user to

change the settings for the vehicle infor-

mation display.

Menu item Result

Main Menu Selection Allows user to customize the screens shown in the vehicle information display.

Home Allows user to turn the home screen on or off in the vehicle information display.

Off Road Allows user to turn the off road monitor on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional

information, refer to “Off Road Monitor” in this section.

Auxiliary Gauges Allows user to turn the auxiliary gauges on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional

information, refer to “Auxiliary gauges” in this section.

DEF Level (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the DEF LEVEL meter on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional

information, refer to the separate “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

4x4–i (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the 4x4–i screen on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information,

refer to “Using 4–wheel drive (4WD)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Trip Allows user to turn the trip on or off in the vehicle information display.

Fuel Economy (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the fuel economy on or off in the vehicle information display.

Navigation (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the navigation on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer

to the separate “NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual”.

Audio Allows user to turn the audio screen on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information,

refer to “Audio” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual.

Driving Aids (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the driving aids on or off in the vehicle information display.

Tire Pressures Allows user to turn the tire pressures screen on or off in the vehicle information display.

TPMS (if so equipped) Allows user to set tire pressure targets.

Body Color Allows user to change the color of the vehicle shown in the vehicle information display.

ECO Drive Report Allows user to access the ECO drive report.

Display Allows user to turn the ECO drive report on or off.

View History Allows user to view and reset ECO drive report history.

Welcome Effect Allows user to customize the available welcome effects.

Instruments and controls 2-35

Vehicle Settings

The vehicle settings allow the user to

change the settings for lights, wipers, lock-

ing, keys, and other vehicle settings.

Menu item Result

Lighting Displays available lighting features of the vehicle.

Welcome Light (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off.

Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp feature on or off.

Light Sensitivity (if so equipped) Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle.

Light Off Delay (if so equipped) Allows user to change the duration of time that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off.

Turn indicator Displays available turn indicator options.

3 Flash Pass Allows user to turn the 3 flash pass on or off.

Locking Displays available locking options.

I-Key Door Lock (if so equipped) Allows user to turn I-key door lock on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated.

Selective Unlock Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked after the

door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is

pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the

door unlock operation is performed again within 1 minute. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be

unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.

Answer Bk. Horn Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off.

Auto Door Unlock (if so equipped) Displays available options for the auto door unlock.

Off Doors will have to be manually unlocked.

IGN Off Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off.

Shift into P Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Wipers Displays available wiper options.

Rain Sensor (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the rain sensor feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Wiper and washer

switch” in this section.

Speed Dependent (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the speed dependent feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Wiper and

washer switch” in this section.

2-36 Instruments and controls

Menu item Result

Memory Seat (ADP) (if so equipped) Displays available memory seat options.

Exit Seat Slide Allows the user to turn the exit seat slide on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the driver’s seat

backward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into

the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position, the driver’s seat will move to the previous set

position. For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and ad-

justments” section of this manual.

Exit Steering Up Allows the user to turn the exit steering up feature on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the steer-

ing wheel upward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After get-

ting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position, the steering wheel moves to the pre-

vious position. For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

Reverse Tilt Mirror (if so equipped) Displays reverse tilt mirror information.

Towing Settings (if so equipped) Displays available towing settings options.

Trailer light check Allows user to select a mode in which the vehicle will test various lights that could affect a trailer if con-

nected properly. This feature can also be activated using the NISSAN Intelligent Key®. For additional

information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” and “Towing a

trailer” in the Technical and consumer information” sections of this manual.

Alarm

The alarm menu allows the user to set spe-

cific alarms for various items on the vehicle.

Menu item Result

Outside Temp. Allows user to turn the outside temp. alarm on or off.

Timer Alert Allows user to set the timer alert alarm.

Navigation (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the navigation alarm on or off.

Phone Allows user to turn the phone alarm on or off.

Mail Allows user to turn the mail alarm on or off.

Instruments and controls 2-37

Maintenance

The maintenance menu allows the user to

set reminders for various vehicle mainte-

nance items.

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not a

substitute for regular tire checks, in-

cluding tire pressure checks. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing

wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual. Many factors in-

cluding tire inflation, alignment, driving

habits and road conditions affect tire

wear and when tires should be re-

placed. Setting the tire replacement in-

dicator for a certain driving distance

does not mean your tires will last that

long. Use the tire replacement indicator

as a guide only and always perform

regular tire checks. Failure to perform

regular tire checks, including tire pres-

sure checks could result in tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to a collision, which could

result in serious personal injury or

death.

Menu item Result

Maintenance Allows user to cycle through various maintenance items and set reminders to perform maintenance at spe-

cific intervals.

Oil Control System (if so equipped) Allows user to view the oil control system maintenance interval.

Oil Filter (if so equipped) Allows user to set an oil filter reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Oil and Filter (if so equipped) Allows user to set an oil and filter reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Air Filter Allows user to set an air filter reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Tire Allows user to set a tire reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Brake Pad Allows user to set a brake pad reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Brake Fluid Allows user to set a brake fluid reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Battery Allows user to set a battery reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Transmission Fluid Allows user to set a transmission fluid reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Engine Coolant Allows user to set an engine coolant reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

DEF Level (if so equipped) Allows user to set a DEF level reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Spark Plug (if so equipped) Allows user to set a spark plug reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Other Allows user to set a reminder, other than for the maintenance items listed above, at a specific interval or re-

set the current one.

2-38 Instruments and controls

Unit

The units menu allows the user to change

the units shown in the vehicle information

display.

Menu item Result

Mileage Displays available mileage display units.

Pressure Displays available pressure display units.

Temperature Displays available temperature display units.

Language

The language menu allows the user to

change the languages displayed in the ve-

hicle information display.

Menu item Result

Language Displays available language options for the vehicle information display.

Factory Reset

The factory reset menu allows the user to

restore the vehicle information display set-

tings to factory status.

Menu item Result

Factory Reset Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected,

the user can confirm or deny the reset.

Instruments and controls 2-39

LIC3761

2-40 Instruments and controls

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

1. Door Open

2. Release Parking Brake

3. Range XX miles

4. Low Fuel

5. Oil Level Low (For Diesel engines only)

6. Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle (For Die-

sel engines only)

7. Oil Level Sensor Fault (For Diesel en-

gines only)

8. AT (Automatic Transmission) CHECK

9. AT (Automatic Transmission) Error: See

Owner’s Manual

10. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

11. Low Tire Pressure Error — Info

12. Flat Tire

13. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

14. Push brake and start button to drive

15. Remote Engine Start Mode (if so

equipped)

16. Brightness indicator

17. Low Outside Temperature

18. Shift to Park

19. Low fuel Pressure: See Owner’s Manual

20. Low Washer Fluid

21. Cruise control indicator

22. 4WD shift indicators (if so equipped)

23. FRT & RR tire size difference: See Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped)

24. Push Ignition to OFF

25. Headlight System Error: See Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

26. Key ID Incorrect

27. No Key Detected

28. Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual

29. Key Battery Low

30. Power will turn off to save the battery

31. Power turned off to save the battery

32. Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights

33. 4WD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

34. Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery

35. Maintenance indicators

36. Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

37. TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual

38. 4WD MODE SHIFTING (if so equipped)

39. Loose Fuel Cap (if so equipped)

40. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear

Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so

equipped)

41. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

42. Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)

Door Open

This warning illuminates when a door has

been opened.

Release Parking Brake

This warning illuminates in the message

area of the vehicle information display

when the parking brake is set and the ve-

hicle is driven. Press the brake pedal to re-

lease the parking brake.

Range XX miles

This warning illuminates to indicate the ap-

proximate distance remaining before the

fuel reaches 0 (Empty).

Instruments and controls 2-41

Low Fuel

This warning illuminates when the fuel level

in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as

soon as it is convenient, preferably before

the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There

will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank

when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0

(Empty).

Oil Level Low (For Diesel engines only)

If the Oil Level Low indicator is displayed,

the engine oil level is low. If the low level

reminder is displayed, check the level using

the engine oil dipstick.

CAUTION

The oil level should be checked regu-

larly using the engine oil dipstick. Oper-

ating with an insufficient amount of oil

can damage the engine and such dam-

age is not covered by the warranty.

Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle (For Diesel

engines only)

This warning appears in the message area

of the vehicle information display if low oil

pressure is detected. This gauge is not de-

signed to indicate low oil level. The low oil

pressure warning is not designed to indi-

cate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to

check the oil level. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Oil Level Sensor Fault (For Diesel en-

gines only)

This warning appears in the message area

of the vehicle information display if the oil

level sensor malfunctions. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to

have this system checked.

AT (Automatic Transmission) CHECK

If the AT Check warning appears while the

engine is running, or while driving, it may

indicate that the AT is not functioning prop-

erly and may need servicing. Have the sys-

tem checked, and if necessary, repaired

promptly. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

AT (Automatic Transmission) Error: See

Owner’s Manual

If this message appears while the engine is

running, or while driving, it may indicate

that the AT is not functioning properly and

may need servicing. Have the system

checked, and if necessary, repaired

promptly. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

This warning appears when the low tire

pressure warning light in the meter illumi-

nates and low tire pressure is detected.The

warning appears each time the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position as long

as the low tire pressure warning light re-

mains illuminated. If this warning appears,

stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pres-

sures of all four tires to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label. For additional

information, refer to “Low tire pressure

warning light” in this section and “Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Low Tire Pressure Error — Info

This warning appears when the low tire

pressure warning light in the meter illumi-

nates and low tire pressure is detected.

Press the button for information

about the low tire pressure. For additional

information, refer to “Low tire pressure

warning light” in this section and “Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

2-42 Instruments and controls

Flat Tire

This warning appears when the low tire

pressure warning light in the meter illumi-

nates and one or more flat tires are de-

tected while driving.

Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

This warning may appear if the extended

storage switch is not pushed in. When this

warning appears, push in the extended

storage switch to turn off the warning. For

additional information, refer to “Extended

storage switch” in this section.

Push brake and start button to drive

This indicator appears when the shift lever

is in the P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will

start by pushing the ignition switch with

the brake pedal depressed. You can start

the engine from any position of the ignition

switch.

Remote Engine Start Mode (if so

equipped)

This warning appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display when the vehicle has been

started using the remote start function. To

start the vehicle, apply the brake and place

the ignition switch in the ON position.

Brightness indicator

This indicator appears when the vehicle

information display screen brightness is

being adjusted.

Low Outside Temperature

This warning appears if the outside tem-

perature is below 37°F (3°C). The tempera-

ture can be changed to display in Celsius or

Fahrenheit. For additional information, re-

fer to “Settings” in this section.

Shift to Park

This warning illuminates when the ignition

switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the

shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also,

a chime sounds when the ignition switch is

in the ACC or OFF position.

If this warning illuminates, move the shift

lever to the P (Park) position and start the

engine.

Low fuel Pressure: See Owner’s Manual

This warning appears when the fuel pres-

sure is low. Check the fuel level and refuel if

needed. If the warning remains illuminated,

have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service. For additional information, re-

fer to “Diesel fuel system” in the “Introduc-

tion” of the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

CAUTION

Since the fuel pump is lubricated by the

fuel itself, prolonged driving with low

fuel levels may cause progressive dam-

age to the fuel pump. This may cause

the pump to fail.

Low Washer Fluid

This warning illuminates when the

windshield-washer fluid is at a low level.

Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary.

For additional information, refer to

“Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Cruise control indicator

This indicator shows the cruise control sys-

tem status.

For additional information, refer to “Cruise

control” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

4WD shift indicators (if so equipped)

These indicators show which 4WD mode is

selected. For additional information, refer

to “Using 4–wheel drive (4WD)” in the “Start-

ing and driving” section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-43

FRT & RR tire size difference: See Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped)

This warning may appear if there is a large

difference between the diameters of the

front and rear wheels. Pull off the road in a

safe area, with the engine idling. Check that

all the tire sizes are the same, that the tire

pressure is correct and that the tires are

not excessively worn. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the

“Technical and consumer information” of

this manual.

Push Ignition to OFF

After the Push ignition to OFF warning illu-

minates, the warning will illuminate if the

ignition switch is placed in the ACC position

when the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

To turn off the Push warning, place the ig-

nition switch in the ON position and then in

the LOCK position.

Headlight System Error: See Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the LED head-

lights are not functioning properly.

If this warning appears, have your system

checked.It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Key ID Incorrect

This warning appears when the ignition

switch is placed from the OFF position and

the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the

system. You cannot start the engine with

an unregistered key.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section of this manual.

No Key Detected

This warning appears when the Intelligent

Key is left outside the vehicle with the igni-

tion switch in the ON position. Make sure

the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section of this manual.

Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual

After the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position, this light comes on for a period

of time and then turns off.

The Key System Error message warns of a

malfunction with the Intelligent Key sys-

tem. If the light comes on while the engine

is stopped, it may be impossible to start

the engine.

If the light comes on while the engine is

running, you can drive the vehicle. However,

in these cases, have the system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Key Battery Low

This indicator illuminates when the Intelli-

gent Key battery is running out of power.

If this indicator illuminates, replace the bat-

tery with a new one. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Battery replacement” in

the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Power will turn off to save the battery

This message appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display after a period of time if the

ignition switch is in the ACC or the ON posi-

tion and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For addi-

tional information, refer to “Push-button igni-

tion switch positions” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Power turned off to save the battery

This warning appears after the ignition

switch is automatically turned off to save

the battery.

2-44 Instruments and controls

Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights

This warning appears when the headlights

are left in the ON position when exiting the

vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the

OFF or AUTO position. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Headlight switch” in this

section.

4WD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

This warning appears when the 4-wheel

drive system is not functioning properly

while the engine is running.

Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery

This warning appears when the battery is

low and needs to be charged.

Maintenance indicators

When engine oil service is due, one or more

of these icons will appear automatically to

remind you. For additional information, re-

fer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-it-yourself” sec-

tion of this manual.

These will also appear when the user-set

reminders are met. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Vehicle information display” in

this section.

Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

This warning illuminates when there is an

error with the system. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Front and rear sonar sys-

tem” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual

This warning appears when there is an er-

ror with your TPMS. If this warning comes

on, have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

4WD MODE SHIFTING (if so equipped)

This message appears when the vehicle is

shifting into 4WD. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Using 4–wheel drive (4WD)” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Loose Fuel Cap (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the fuel-filler

cap is not tightened correctly after the ve-

hicle has been refueled. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Fuel-filler door” in the

“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-

tion of this manual.

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear

Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so

equipped)

This indicator shows when the BSW and

RCTA systems are engaged.

For additional information, refer to “Blind

Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic

Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

This warning appears when one or more of

the following systems (if so equipped) is

not functioning properly:

∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

∙ Rear Cross Traffic alert (RCTA)

If one or more of these warning appears,

have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Instruments and controls 2-45

Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)

This message appears when the Blind

Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic

Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable

because a radar blockage is detected. For

additional information, refer to “Blind Spot

Warning (BSW)” or “Rear Cross Traffic Alert

(RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

2-46 Instruments and controls

DIESEL WARNINGS AND

INDICATORS (if so equipped)

These warning and indicators apply to the

diesel-only models. For additional informa-

tion, refer to the “Titan Diesel Owner’s

Manual.”

LIC3708

Instruments and controls 2-47

Your vehicle has two types of security sys-

tems:

∙ Vehicle security system

∙ NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual

and audible alarm signals if someone

opens the doors or hood when the system

is armed. It is not, however, a motion

detection-type system that activates

when a vehicle is moved or when a vibra-

tion occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but

cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the

theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-

nents in all situations. Always secure your

vehicle even if parking for a brief period.

Never leave your keys in the ignition, and

always lock the vehicle when unattended.

Be aware of your surroundings, and park in

secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protec-

tion, such as component locks, identifica-

tion markers, and tracking systems, are

available at auto supply stores and spe-

cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer

such equipment. Check with your insur-

ance company to see if you may be eligible

for discounts for various theft protection

features.

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows. (The system can be

armed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the ve-

hicle.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The

doors can be locked with the Intelligent

Key, door handle request switch,or me-

chanical key.

4. Confirm that the security indica-

tor light stays on for about 30 seconds.

The vehicle security system is now pre-

armed. The vehicle security system will

automatically shift into the armed

phase. The security light begins

to flash once every three seconds. If

during the pre-armed phase one of the

following occurs, the system will not

arm:

∙ Any door is unlocked with the mechani-

cal key, the Intelligent Key or door re-

quest switch.

∙ Ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON

position.

∙If the key is turned slowly when lock-

ing the door, the system may not arm.

Furthermore, if the key is turned be-

yond the vertical position toward the

unlock position to remove the key,

the system may be disarmed when

the key is removed. If the indicator

light fails to glow for a period of time,

unlock the door once and lock it

again.

LIC0359

SECURITY SYSTEMS

2-48 Instruments and controls

∙Even when the driver and/or passen-

gers are in the vehicle, the system will

activate with all the doors, hood and

locked with the ignition switch placed

in the LOCK position. When placing

the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, the system will be released.

∙The lockable bedside storage com-

partment (if so equipped) is not pro-

tected by the vehicle security system.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the

following alarm:

∙ The headlights blink and the horn

sounds intermittently.

∙ The alarm automatically turns off after

a period of time. However, the alarm

reactivates if the vehicle is tampered

with again. The alarm can be shut off by

unlocking the driver’s door with the key

or by pressing the button on the

key fob.

The alarm is activated by:

∙ Opening a door without using the key or

key fob (even if the door is unlocked by

using the inside lock knob or the power

door lock switch).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking the driv-

er’s door with the key or by pressing

the button on the key fob.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

will not allow the engine to start without

the use of a registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered

key (for example, when interference is

caused by another registered key, an auto-

mated toll road device or automatic pay-

ment device on the key ring), restart the

engine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the

ON position for approximately 5 sec-

onds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the

device (which may have caused the in-

terference) separate from the regis-

tered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN

recommends placing the registered key on

a separate key ring to avoid interference

from other devices.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

Instruments and controls 2-49

Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever

the ignition switch is placed in the OFF,

LOCK or ACC position.

This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is

malfunctioning, the light will remain on

while the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

If the light still remains on and/or the

engine will not start, seek service for the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System as

soon as possible. Please bring all regis-

tered keys that you have. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

SWITCH OPERATION

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer

solution may freeze on the windshield

and obscure your vision which may lead

to an accident. Warm the windshield

with the defroster before you wash the

windshield.

LIC0474

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3445

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

2-50 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

∙ Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

∙ Do not operate the washer if the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir is

empty.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with windshield-washer

fluid concentrates at full strength.

Some methyl alcohol based

windshield-washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufac-

turer’s recommended levels before

pouring the fluid into the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir to

mix the windshield-washer fluid con-

centrate and water.

NOTE:

If the windshield wiper operation is in-

terrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may

stop moving to protect its motor. If this

occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF

position and remove the snow or ice that

is on and around the wiper arms. In ap-

proximately 1 minute, turn the switch on

again to operate the wiper.

The windshield wiper and washer operates

when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

Rotate the end of the lever to operate the

wiper at the following speed:

䊊

1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent op-

eration can be adjusted by turning the

knob toward 䊊

A(Slower) or 䊊

B(Faster).

Also, the intermittent operation speed

varies in accordance with the vehicle

speed. (For example, when the vehicle

speed is high, the intermittent opera-

tion speed will be faster.)

䊊

2Low (LO) — continuous low speed op-

eration

䊊

3High (HI) — continuous high speed op-

eration

Rotate the lever the opposite direction 䊊

to have one sweep operation (MIST) of the

wiper.

Press the button on the end of the lever 䊊

to operate the washer. The wiper will also

operate several times.

NOTE:

The Speed Dependent feature may be

disabled. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in

this section.

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3035

Instruments and controls 2-51

RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

CAUTION

∙ Do not touch the rain sensor and

around it when the wiper switch is in

the AUTO position and the ignition

switch is in the ON position. The wip-

ers may operate unexpectedly and

cause an injury or may damage a

wiper.

∙ The rain-sensing auto wipers are in-

tended for use during rain. If the

switch is left in the AUTO position, the

wipers may operate unexpectedly

when dirt, fingerprints, oil film or in-

sects are stuck on or around the sen-

sor. The wipers may also operate

when exhaust gas or moisture affect

the rain sensor.

∙ When the windshield glass is coated

with water repellent, the speed of the

rain-sensing auto wipers may be

higher even though the amount of the

rainfall is small.

∙ Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing

auto wiper system when you use a car

wash.

∙ The rain-sensing auto wipers may not

operate if rain does not hit the rain

sensor even if it is raining.

∙ Using Genuine NISSAN wiper blades is

recommended for proper operation

of the rain-sensing auto wiper sys-

tem. For additional information, refer

to “Windshield wiper blades” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

The rain-sensing auto wiper system can

automatically turn on the wipers and ad-

just the wiper speed depending on the

rainfall and the vehicle speed by using the

rain sensor located on the upper part of

the windshield.

To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system,

rotate the lever to the AUTO position 䊊

The wiper will sweep once while the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

The rain sensor sensitivity level can be ad-

justed by turning the knob toward the front

䊊

B(High) or toward the rear 䊊

A(Low).

– High — High sensitive operation

– Low — Low sensitive operation

To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system

off, rotate the lever to the OFF position, or

rotate the lever to the LO or HI position.

NOTE:

The Rain Sensor feature may be dis-

abled. For additional information, refer

to “Vehicle information display” in this

section.

LIC3446

2-52 Instruments and controls

To defrost the rear window glass and/or

outside mirrors, start the engine and push

the rear window/outside mirror defroster

switch on. The indicator light on the switch

will illuminate. Push the switch again to

turn the defroster off.

The defroster automatically turns off after

approximately 15 minutes.

NOTE:

If the rear power window (if so equipped)

is open while the defroster switch is on,

the rear window defroster will automati-

cally shut off. The heated outside mirrors

(if so equipped) will remain on. The rear

window defroster will automatically turn

on when the rear power window is fully

closed if the switch is on.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window defroster.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2325

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3542

REAR WINDOW AND/OR OUTSIDE

MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH (if so

equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-53

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

䊊

1Rotate the switch to the position,

and the front parking, tail, license plate,

map lights (if so equipped), and instru-

ment panel lights will come on.

䊊

2Rotate the switch to the position,

and the headlights will come on. All

other lights, except the map lights (if so

equipped), will remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3379

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2049

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

2-54 Instruments and controls

Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the headlights

to be set so they turn on and off automati-

cally. The autolight system can:

∙ Turn on the headlights, front parking,

tail, license plate and instrument panel

lights automatically when it is dark.

∙ Turn off all the lights when it is light.

∙ Keep all the lights on for a period of time

after you place the ignition switch in the

OFF position and all doors are closed.

NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and the

time delay for autolight shutoff can be

adjusted. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in

this section.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO

position 䊊

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition.

3. The autolight system automatically

turns the headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position and a door is opened and left

open, the headlights remain on for a period

of time. If another door is opened while the

headlights are on, then the timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the

switch to the OFF, ,or position.

Be sure you do not put anything on top

of the autolight sensor 䊊

1located on the

top side of the instrument panel. The au-

tolight sensor controls the autolight; if it

is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as

if it is dark out and the headlights will

illuminate. If this occurs while parked

with the engine off and the ignition

switch placed in the ON position, your

vehicle’s battery could become dis-

charged.

LIC3380 LIC3487

Instruments and controls 2-55

Headlight beam select

䊊

1To select the high beam function, en-

sure the low beams are on using the

headlight control switch, then push the

lever forward. The high beam lights

come on and the blue indicator

light illuminates.

䊊

2Pull the lever back to return to the low

beam.

䊊

3Pulling and releasing the lever flashes

the headlight high beams on and off.

The low beams need not be engaged

for this function.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position while the headlight switch is in

the or position, the headlights

will turn off after a period of time.

After the headlights automatically turn off

with the headlight switch in the

or position, the headlights will illumi-

nate again if the headlight switch is moved

to the OFF position and then turned to

the or position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature

automatically turns off the headlights

after a period of time, you should turn

the headlight switch to the OFF position

when the engine is not running to avoid

discharging the vehicle battery.

Manual headlight aiming control

(if so equipped)

Depending on the number of occupants in

the vehicle and the load it is carrying, the

headlight axis may be higher than desired.

If the vehicle is traveling on a hilly road, the

headlights may directly hit the rearview

mirror of the vehicle ahead or the wind-

shield of the oncoming vehicle. The light

axis can be lowered with the operation of

the switch.

The larger the number designated on the

switch, the lower the axis.

LIC3060 LIC2230

2-56 Instruments and controls

When traveling without a heavy load or on a

flat road, select position 0.

Select the switch position by referring to

the following sample.

Vehicle Load Switch

Position

Driver only or Driver/front

passenger 0

Driver/front seat passenger/

rear seat passengers 1

Driver/front seat passenger/

rear seat passengers/cargo

or driver/cargo/no trailer

Fully loaded/no trailer 3

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL)

SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped)

The lights in the fog light area automati-

cally illuminate at 100% intensity when the

engine is started and the parking brake

released. The Daytime Running Lights

(DRL) operate with the headlight switch in

the OFF position.

If the parking brake is applied before the

engine is started, the DRL do not illuminate.

The DRL illuminate when the parking brake

is released. The DRL remain on while the

engine is running.

It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight

switch on for interior controls and switches

to illuminate, as those remain off while the

switch is in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the DRL system is active, tail

lights on your vehicle are not on. It is

necessary at dusk to turn on your head-

lights. Failure to do so could cause an

accident injuring yourself and others.

LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS

(DRL) SYSTEM (Type B) (if so

equipped)

The LED portion of the headlights auto-

matically illuminates at 100% intensity

when the engine is started and the parking

brake released. The LED Daytime Running

Lights (LED DRL) operate with the headlight

switch in the OFF position. When you turn

the headlight switch to the position

for full illumination, the LED lights switch

from LED DRL to the park function.

If the parking brake is applied before the

engine is started, the LED DRL do not illumi-

nate. The LED DRL illuminate when the

parking brake is released. The LED DRL re-

main on while the engine is running.

It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight

switch ON for interior controls and

switches to illuminate, as those remain off

while the switch is in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the LED DRL system is active, tail

lights on your vehicle are not on. It is

necessary at dusk to turn on your head-

lights. Failure to do so could cause an

accident injuring yourself and others.

Instruments and controls 2-57

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

Press the “+” button to increase the bright-

ness of instrument panel lights.

Press the “-” button to decrease the bright-

ness of instrument panel lights.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

䊊

1Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is

completed, the turn signal cancels au-

tomatically.

Lane change signal

䊊

2Move the lever up or down until the

turn signal begins to flash, but the lever

does not latch, to signal a lane change.

Hold the lever until the lane change is

completed.

Move the lever up or down until the

turn signal begins to flash, but the lever

does not latch, and release the lever.

The turn signal will automatically flash

three times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal

a lane change based on road and traffic

conditions.

NOTE:

The 3 flash pass turn indicator may be

disabled. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in

this section.

LIC3176 LIC3061

2-58 Instruments and controls

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight

switch to the position, then push the

fog light switch 䊊

1on.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight

switch in the AUTO position (if so equipped),

the headlights must be on, then push the

fog light switch on.

To turn the fog lights off, push the fog light

switch again.

The headlights must be on and the low

beams selected for the fog lights to oper-

ate. The fog lights automatically turn off

when the high beam headlights are se-

lected.

To sound the horn, push near the horn icon

on the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system.

Tampering with the supplemental front

air bag system may result in serious

personal injury.

To turn on the cargo lamp and the under

rail bed lamps (if so equipped) push the

switch down to the ON position. The tail-

gate lights (if so equipped) will also illumi-

nate when the cargo lamp switch is in the

ON position.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could re-

sult in a discharged battery.

LIC2197 LIC2051 LIC0616

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped) HORN CARGO LAMP SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-59

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use

the climate controlled seats if you or the

occupants cannot monitor seat tem-

peratures or have an inability to feel

pain in those body parts in contact with

the seat. Use of the climate controlled

seats by such people could result in se-

rious injury.

CAUTION

∙ The battery could run down if the cli-

mate control seat is operated while

the engine is not running.

∙ Do not use the climate control seat for

extended periods or when no one is

using the seat.

∙ Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket,

cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise,

the seat may become overheated.

∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy

on the seat or pierce it with a pin or

similar objects. This may result in

damage to the climate controlled

seat.

∙ Any liquid spilled on the seat should

be removed immediately with a dry

cloth.

∙ The climate controlled seat has an air

filter. Do not operate the climate con-

trolled seat without an air filter. This

may result in damage to the system.

∙ When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any

similar materials.

∙ If any malfunctions are found or the

climate controlled seat does not oper-

ate, turn the switch off and have the

system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

The climate controlled seat warms up or

cools down the front seat by blowing warm

or cool air from under the surface of the

seat. The climate control switch is located

on the center console.

The climate controlled seat can be oper-

ated as follows:

1. Start the engine.

2. Turn the control knob 䊊

Ato the heat

side 䊊

1or the cool side 䊊

2. The indica-

tor light 䊊

Bon the control knob will illu-

minate.

SIC4334

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT

SWITCHES (if so equipped)

2-60 Instruments and controls

3. Adjust the desired amount of air using

the control knob. The climate con-

trolled seat blower remains on low

speed for approximately 60 seconds

after turning the switch on or selecting

the desired temperature.

4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed

or cooled, or before you leave the ve-

hicle, be sure to turn the control knob

to the Off (center) position. The indica-

tor light 䊊

Bon the control knob goes off

with the switch in the off (center) posi-

tion.

To check the air filter for the climate con-

trolled seat, it is recommended that you

contact a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use

the seat heater if you or the occupants

cannot monitor elevated seat tempera-

tures or have an inability to feel pain in

body parts that contact the seat. Use of

the seat heater by such people could

result in serious injury.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use the seat heater for ex-

tended periods or when no one is us-

ing the seat.

∙ Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket,

cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise,

the seat may become overheated.

∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy

on the seat or pierce it with a pin or

similar object. This may result in dam-

age to the heater.

∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with

a dry cloth.

∙ When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any

similar materials.

∙ If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn

the switch off and have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is

not running.

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so

equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-61

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,

as desired, depending on the tempera-

ture. The indicator light in the switch

will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermo-

stat, automatically turning the heater

on and off. The indicator light will re-

main on as long as the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you

leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the

switch off.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use

the seat heater if you or the occupants

cannot monitor elevated seat tempera-

tures or have an inability to feel pain in

body parts that contact the seat. Use of

the seat heater by such people could

result in serious injury.

CAUTION

∙ The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is

not running.

∙ Do not use the seat heater for ex-

tended periods or when no one is us-

ing the seat.

∙ Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket,

cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise,

the seat may become overheated.

∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy

on the seat or pierce it with a pin or

similar object. This may result in dam-

age to the heater.

∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with

a dry cloth.

∙ When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any

similar materials.

∙ If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn

the switch off and have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LIC3037

HEATED REAR SEAT SWITCHES (if so

equipped)

2-62 Instruments and controls

The rear seats are warmed by built-in heat-

ers. The switches are located on the rear of

the front center console and can be oper-

ated independently of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,

as desired. The indicator light in the

switch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermo-

stat, automatically turning the heater

on and off. The indicator light will re-

main on as long as the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you

leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the

switch off.

The heated steering wheel system is de-

signed to operate only when the surface

temperature of the steering wheel is below

68°F (20°C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to

warm the steering wheel after the engine

starts. The indicator light will come on.

If the surface temperature of the steering

wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will

heat the steering wheel and cycle off and

on to maintain a temperature above 68°F

(20°C). The indicator light will remain on as

long as the system is on.

LIC3037 LIC3476

HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH (if

so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-63

Push the switch again to turn the heated

steering wheel system off manually. The

indicator light will go off. The switch will turn

off automatically 30 minutes after activa-

tion, once this happens the switch will need

to be pressed again to restart the cycle.

NOTE:

If the surface temperature of the steer-

ing wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the

switch is turned on, the system will not

heat the steering wheel. This is not a

malfunction.

The warning systems switch is used to turn

on and off the Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

system that is activated using the settings

menu on the vehicle information display.

When the warning systems switch is

turned off, the indicator 䊊

1on the switch is

off. The indicator will also be off if the warn-

ing system is deactivated using the set-

tings menu.

The BSW system will turn on the BSW/RCTA

indicator light, located next to the outside

mirrors, if the radar detects a vehicle in the

detection zone. If the turn signal is acti-

vated in the direction of the detected ve-

hicle, a chime sounds twice and the

BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Blind Spot

Warning (BSW)” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

LSD2208

WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH (if so

equipped)

2-64 Instruments and controls

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC

system on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the

VDC system reduces the engine output to

reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will

be reduced even if the accelerator is de-

pressed to the floor. If maximum engine

power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,

turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC

OFF switch. The indicator will come

on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

the engine to turn on the system. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-

namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start-

ing and driving” section of this manual.

WARNING

∙ Never rely solely on the hill descent

control system to control vehicle

speed when driving on steep downhill

grades. Always drive carefully when

using the hill descent control system

and decelerate the vehicle speed by

depressing the brake pedal if neces-

sary. Be especially careful when driv-

ing on frozen, muddy or extremely

steep downhill roads. Failure to con-

trol vehicle speed may result in a loss

of control of the vehicle and possible

serious injury or death.

LIC3344 LIC3447

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (if

so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-65

∙ The hill descent control may not con-

trol the vehicle speed on a hill under

all load or road conditions. Always be

prepared to depress the brake pedal

to control vehicle speed. Failure to do

so may result in a collision or serious

personal injury.

CAUTION

When the hill descent control system

operates continuously for a long time,

the temperature of the brake pads may

increase and the hill descent control

system may be temporarily disabled

(the indicator light will blink). If the indi-

cator light does not come on continu-

ously after blinking, stop using the

system.

The hill descent control system is designed

to reduce driver workload when going

down steep hills. The hill descent control

system helps to control vehicle speed so

the driver can concentrate on steering the

vehicle.

To activate the hill descent control system:

∙ activate the 4H or 4LO switch,

∙ the transmission shift lever must be in

forward or reverse gear,

∙ the hill descent control system switch

must be ON.

The vehicle speed must be kept below

15 mph (25 km/h).

The hill descent control indicator light will

come on when the system is activated.

Also, the stop/tail lights illuminate while the

hill descent control system applies the

brakes to control vehicle speed.

You may hear a noise from under the hood

or feel a vibration from the actuator when it

is operating. This is normal and indicates

the hill descent control system is working

properly.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is de-

pressed while the hill descent control sys-

tem is on, the system will stop operating

temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or

brake pedal is released, the hill descent

control system begins to function again if

the hill descent control operating condi-

tions are fulfilled.

The hill descent control indicator light

blinks if the switch is on and all conditions

for system activation are not met or if the

system becomes disengaged for any rea-

son.

To turn off the hill descent control system,

push the switch to the OFF position.

For additional information, refer to “Hill de-

scent control system ON indicator light” in

this section and “Hill descent control sys-

tem” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

2-66 Instruments and controls

The E-Lock system can help provide added

traction if the vehicle is stuck or becoming

stuck.

To activate the E-Lock system:

∙ the 4WD switch must be in the 4LO po-

sition (4-wheel drive vehicles),

∙ the vehicle must be stopped or moving

at 4 mph (7 km/h) or less, and

∙ the E-Lock system switch must be

turned ON.

When the E-Lock system switch is turned

ON, the indicator light will flash until the

system engages. However, if all operation

conditions listed above are not met or the

system becomes disengaged, the indica-

tor light will continue to flash.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) system

is disabled and the ABS light illuminates

when the E-Lock system is on.

For additional information, refer to “Elec-

tronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) sys-

tem” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual for further explanation and

system limitations.

WARNING

∙ Never leave the E-Lock system ON

when driving on paved or hard-

surfaced roads. Turning the vehicle

may result in the rear wheels slipping

and result in an accident and personal

injury. After using the E-Lock system

to free the vehicle, turn the system

OFF.

∙ Use the E-lock system only in an

emergency when it is not possible to

free a stuck vehicle even using 4LO.

Never use the E-Lock system on a slip-

pery road surface such as snow or ice

surface. Using the E-Lock system

when driving in these road conditions

may cause unexpected movement of

the vehicle during engine braking, ac-

celerating or turning, which may re-

sult in an accident and serious per-

sonal injury.

∙ Observe the above warnings. Other-

wise, loss of normal steering control

may result. This may result in an acci-

dent and serious personal injury.

CAUTION

∙ After using the E-Lock system, or dur-

ing normal driving, turn the switch

OFF to prevent possible damage to

drivetrain components from ex-

tended use.

∙ When the E-Lock system is in opera-

tion, turning the vehicle becomes dif-

ficult. This can be dangerous, espe-

cially at high speeds. Doing so could

damage drivetrain components.

LIC3157

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR

DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM

SWITCH (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-67

∙ Do not operate the E-Lock system

when the vehicle is turning or when

one side wheel is rotating. Otherwise,

the drivetrain components could be

damaged.

∙ The E-Lock system operates only

when the engine is running.

∙ In 4H mode, the E-Lock system does

not operate when the E-Lock system

switch is turned to the ON position.

(The E-Lock system indicator light will

flash.)

∙ Avoid quick starts while the E-Lock

system is in operation. Otherwise the

drivetrain components could be

damaged.

∙ Observe the above cautions. Other-

wise, loss of normal steering may

result.

To use the outlets for devices that require

120v power, place the ignition in the ON

position and push the power inverter

switch.

The 400W or 150W on the switch will illumi-

nate according to the mode selected. Only

the 150W is available when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position and the

vehicle is being driven. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “120v outlets” in this section

regarding using devices that require the

power inverter switch activated.

CAUTION

∙ Use power outlets with the engine

running to avoid discharging the ve-

hicle battery.

∙ Do not attempt to use this while

driving.

∙ Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory, doing

so could significantly drain the bat-

tery of your vehicle.

LIC2075

POWER INVERTER SWITCH (if so

equipped)

2-68 Instruments and controls

The Front and rear sonar system OFF

switch on the instrument panel allows the

driver to turn the Front and rear sonar sys-

tem, Moving Object Detection (MOD), and

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system on

and off. To turn the systems on and off, the

ignition switch must be in the ON position.

The indicator light on the switch will illumi-

nate when the systems are turned on.

If the indicator light flashes when the Front

and rear sonar system, MOD, or RCTA sys-

tems are not turned off, it may indicate a

malfunction in one or more of these sys-

tems.

The Front and rear sonar system, MOD, or

RCTA systems will be turned on automati-

cally under the following conditions:

∙ When the ignition switch is switched

from the OFF position to the ON posi-

tion.

∙ When the shift lever is shifted into the R

(Reverse) position.

∙ When the vehicle speed increases to

6 mph (10 km/h) and decreases.

The automatic turning on function can be

turned on and off for these systems in the

vehicle information display (if so equipped).

For additional information, refer to “Set-

tings” in the “Instrument and controls” sec-

tion of this manual.

For additional information, refer to “Front

and rear sonar system” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual, or the “Mov-

ing Object Detection (MOD)” in the “Monitor,

climate, audio, phone and voice recogni-

tion systems” section of this manual.

Tow mode should be used when pulling a

heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driv-

ing the vehicle in the tow mode with no

trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not

cause any damage. However, fuel

economy may be reduced, and the

transmission/engine driving characteris-

tics may feel unusual.

Push the tow mode switch to activate tow

mode. The TOW indicator light illuminates

when tow mode is selected. Push the tow

mode switch again to turn tow mode off.

Tow mode is automatically canceled when

the ignition switch is placed in the OFF po-

sition.

LIC3596 LIC3381

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM

OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

TOW MODE SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-69

For additional information, refer to “Tow

mode” in the “Technical and consumer in-

formation” section of this manual.

The E-call (SOS) system switch is used in

combination with a NissanConnect® Ser-

vices subscription to call for assistance in

case of an emergency.

Pushing the switch will (with a paid sub-

scription) reach a Response Specialist that

will provide assistance based on the situa-

tion described by the vehicle’s occupant.

For additional information, or to enroll your

vehicle, refer to

www.NissanUSA.com/connect or call

855–426–6628.

The TBCU on the instrument panel allows

the driver to adjust the braking force ap-

plied to the trailer brakes.

For additional information, refer to “Towing

a trailer” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

LIC3376 LIC3382

E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH (if so

equipped)

TRAILER BRAKE CONTROLLER UNIT

(TBCU) (if so equipped)

2-70 Instruments and controls

12V OUTLETS

The power outlets are for powering electri-

cal accessories such as cellular tele-

phones.

The power outlets located on the instru-

ment panel, inside the center armrest (if so

equipped), and on the back of the center

console (if so equipped) are powered only

when the ignition switch is placed in the

ACC or ON position.

Open the cap to use a power outlet.

CAUTION

∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

∙ Only certain power outlets are de-

signed for use with a cigarette lighter

unit. Do not use any other power out-

let for an accessory lighter. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for additional information.

∙ Do not use with accessories that ex-

ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

∙ Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory.

∙ Use power outlets with the engine

running to avoid discharging the ve-

hicle battery.

∙ Avoid using power outlets when the

air conditioner, headlights, or rear

window defroster (if so equipped) is

on.

∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned OFF.

Instrument panel

LIC3383

Inside center console (if so equipped)

LIC3385

Rear center console (if so equipped)

LIC3784

POWER OUTLETS

Instruments and controls 2-71

∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug

may overheat or the internal tem-

perature fuse may open.

∙ When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water or any other

liquid to contact the outlet.

In truck box (if so equipped)

LIC0617

Center console (if so equipped)

LIC3384

2-72 Instruments and controls

120V OUTLETS (if so equipped)

Before Drive (idling) (Park) When shifting out of Park When shifting back to

(idling) (Park)

Switch Reset

Options What is plugged IN Indicator Inverter

Status

Indicator Inverter

Status

Indicator Inverter

Status

Indicator Inverter

Status

Nothing plugged but switch is

on 150 and 400 ON 150 ON 150 and 400 ON NOT

NECESSARY NOT

NECESSARY

Device<150W 150 and 400 ON 150 ON 150 and 400 ON NOT

NECESSARY NOT

NECESSARY

150W>device<400W 150 and 400 ON OFF OFF ON ON 150 and 400 ON

Device>400W 150 and 400 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF** OFF**

** OFF means that the inverter system cannot be reset until a device that is within the specified range of operation is plugged in. Therefore, the switch indicators

and inverter would remain OFF. There may be a very short period of time where the switch indicators are on, but once the inverter reaches its peak saturation

point (temp and power level). it will shut off both the inverter and the switch indicators.

Instruments and controls 2-73

Do not use the outlet located in the truck

box with accessories that exceed 120 volt.

Do not use double adapters or more than

one electrical accessory. When the dual

wall bed liner is installed (if so equipped),

the power outlet is still accessible through

the access door in the bed liner.

CAUTION

∙ Operation of the 120 volt system with

the ignition in the ON position and the

engine not running (idle) will drain the

battery charge. This could lead to a

dead battery or no start condition.

∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

∙ Use power outlets with the engine

running to avoid discharging the ve-

hicle battery.

∙ Do not use double adaptors or more

than one electrical accessory.

∙ Avoid using power outlets when the

air conditioner, headlights or rear win-

dow defroster is on.

∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned OFF.

∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug

may overheat or the internal tem-

perature fuse may open.

∙ When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water or any other

liquid to contact the outlet.

The extended storage switch is used when

shipping the vehicle. It is located in the fuse

panel inside the glove box. To reach it, open

the glove box 䊊

1on the instrument panel,

then open the fuse panel cover 䊊

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, ensure the extended storage switch is

ON by pushing it fully in place, as shown.

LIC3502

EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

2-74 Instruments and controls

FRONT-DOOR POCKETS REAR-DOOR POCKETS (if so

equipped)

Pulled position

LIC3266

Pushed position

LIC3268 LIC3397

STORAGE

Instruments and controls 2-75

CONSOLE SIDE POCKETS (if so

equipped) SEATBACK POCKETS (if so

equipped)

The seatback pocket(s) may be located on

the back of the driver’s and/or passenger’s

seat, there may be one or two pockets

equipped. The pockets can be used to

store maps.

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the pas-

senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, please observe the following

items:

∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback

pocket or head restraint/headrest.

∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than

2.2 lbs. (1 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint/headrest or in the seatback

pocket.

LIC3213 LIC2392 LIC0575

2-76 Instruments and controls

UNDER-SEAT STORAGE (if so

equipped)

To access the storage bin, lift the bench

seat toward the rear of the vehicle, then lift

the cover the same direction. The cover

may be locked 䊊

1if so equipped.

CAUTION

To avoid damaging the tray under the

seat, cargo in the trays should not ex-

ceed 20 lbs. (9.08kg).

To adjust the divider 䊊

1, pull it straight up

and reposition it to the desired location,

sliding it straight down.

Both sides of the storage bin, under the

rear seat on the driver’s and passenger’s

sides, operate similarly. They can be ac-

cessed simultaneously or independently of

each other.

Further, to create a flat floor space for stor-

age, rather than access the storage bin, lift

the bench seat as before, then lift the tab

䊊

2and rotate the bin cover toward the

front of the vehicle. Use the tab as a leg to

support the cover as the new floor space.

Cargo can be secured to the extended

floor with bungee cords. Secure the bun-

gee cords to the loops in the extended

floor.

CAUTION

∙ To avoid damaging the extended

floor, the weight secured should not

exceed 247 lbs. (112 kg).

∙ To avoid damaging the bungee hook

loops, do not exceed 35 lbs. (16 kg) of

force to any given loop.

Rear seat (driver’s side shown)

LIC3407 LIC3408

Instruments and controls 2-77

CONSOLE BOX STORAGE TRAYS (if

so equipped) GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle.

Use the master key to lock or unlock the

glove box lock. The valet key cannot be

used to lock or unlock the glove box lock.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving

to help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX (if so equipped)

WARNING

The center console box should not be

used while driving so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

LIC3406 LIC3386 LIC3399

2-78 Instruments and controls

CENTER ARMREST STORAGE (if so

equipped)

To access the center armrest storage area,

lower the center armrest and lift the lid.

CAUTION

The center armrest storage should not

be used while driving so full attention

may be given to vehicle operation.

LIC3400 LIC0621

Instruments and controls 2-79

UNDER FRONT SEAT STORAGE BIN

(if so equipped)

To access the storage bin, lift the center of

the front bench seat toward the front of the

vehicle.

CAUTION

∙ To avoid damaging the tray under the

seat, cargo in the tray should not ex-

ceed 20 lbs. (9.08 kg).

∙ The cushion storage bin should not be

used while driving so full attention

may be given to vehicle operation.

OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES

STORAGE (if so equipped)

To open the sunglasses holder, push and

release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the

holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed

while driving to avoid obstructing the

driver’s view and to help prevent an

accident.

Bench seat (center)

LIC3437 LIC3387

2-80 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

∙ Do not use for anything other than

sunglasses.

∙ Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in direct

sunlight. The heat may damage the

sunglasses.

CUP HOLDERS

WARNING

Avoid abrupt starting and braking

when the cup holder is being used to

prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is

hot, it can scald you or your passenger.

CAUTION

Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

Front — Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3401

Front — Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3512

Instruments and controls 2-81

Armrest (if so equipped)

LIC0622

2nd row (rear of front console)

(if so equipped)

LIC3402

2nd row (door armrest) (if so equipped)

LIC3724

2-82 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

∙ Do not use bottle holder for any other

objects that could be thrown about in

the vehicle and possibly injure people

during sudden braking or an accident.

∙ Do not use bottle holder for open liq-

uid containers.

2nd row bench (if so equipped)

LIC0556

Front bottle holder

LIC3396

Rear bottle holder (if so equipped)

LIC3707

Instruments and controls 2-83

GROCERY HOOKS (if so equipped)

The grocery hooks allow for standard size

plastic grocery bags to hang side by side.

To access the grocery hooks, fold up the

rear bench seat. For additional information,

refer to “Folding the rear bench seat up” in

the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-

mental restraint system” section of this

manual.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than

18 lbs. (8 kg) to a single grocery hook.

BED LINER STORAGE BINS (if so

equipped)

To open the bed liner storage bins on the

top of the wheel wells, unlock the bin and

lift the lid toward the inside of the truck bed.

To close, replace the lid and lock the bin.

To open the bed liner storage bins on the

tail gate end of the bed liner, lift the tab

away from the truck bed, pull the lid up and

away from the truck.

LIC3389 LIC3449 LIC3450

2-84 Instruments and controls

CARGO HOOKS (if so equipped)

When securing items using cargo hooks,

located on the rear door pillars, do not ap-

ply a load more than 110 lbs. (490 N) to a

single hook.

The cargo hooks that are located on the

floor should have loads less than 110 lbs.

(490 N) to a single hook.

The cargo hooks can be used to secure

cargo with ropes or other types of straps.

WARNING

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

∙ Use suitable ropes and hooks to se-

cure cargo.

∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area. It is extremely dangerous

to ride in a cargo area inside of a ve-

hicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped

with seats and seat belts.

∙ The child restraint top tether strap

may be damaged by contact with

items in the cargo area. Secure any

items in the cargo area. Your child

could be seriously injured or killed in a

collision if the top tether strap is

damaged.

∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

C-CHANNEL CARGO HOOKS (if so

equipped)

The C-Channel cargo hooks,located on the

back panel, can be used to secure cargo

with ropes or other types of straps.

When securing items using C-Channel

cargo hooks, located on the back panel, do

not apply a load more than 110 lbs. (490 N)

to a single hook.

LIC3709 LIC3710

Instruments and controls 2-85

WARNING

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

∙ Use suitable ropes and hooks to se-

cure cargo.

∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area. It is extremely dangerous

to ride in a cargo area inside of a ve-

hicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped

with seats and seat belts.

∙ The child restraint top tether strap

may be damaged by contact with

items in the cargo area. Secure any

items in the cargo area. Your child

could be seriously injured or killed in a

collision if the top tether strap is

damaged.

∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

∙ Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc., inside the vehicle

while it is in motion and before closing

the windows. Use the window lock

switch to prevent unexpected use of

the power windows.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadver-

tent door lock activation, do not leave

children, people who require the as-

sistance of others or pets unattended

in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-

perature inside a closed vehicle on a

warm day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk of

injury or death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ig-

nition switch is placed in the ON position, or

for a period of time after the ignition switch

is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s

or passenger’s door is opened during this

period of time, the power to the windows is

canceled.

1. Window lock button

2. Power door lock switch

3. Front passenger side automatic

window switch

4. Right rear passenger window

switch (if so equipped)

5. Left rear passenger window switch

(if so equipped)

6. Driver side automatic window

switch

WIC1124

WINDOWS

2-86 Instruments and controls

Driver’s side power window

switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped

with switches to open or close the front

and rear (if so equipped) passenger win-

dows.

To open a window, push the switch and

hold it down. To close a window, pull the

switch and hold it up. To stop the opening

or closing function at any time, simply re-

lease the switch.

Front passenger’s power window

switch

The passenger’s window switch operates

only the corresponding passenger’s win-

dow. To open the window, push the switch

and hold it down 䊊

1. To close the window,

pull the switch up 䊊

Rear power window switch (if so

equipped)

The rear power window switches open or

close only the corresponding windows. To

open the window, push the switch and hold

it down 䊊

1. To close the window, pull the

switch up 䊊

Locking passengers’ windows

When the window lock switch is depressed,

only the driver’s side window can be

opened or closed. Push it again to cancel

the window lock function.

WIC1125 WIC0261

Instruments and controls 2-87

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with au-

tomatic operation, push the window

switch down to the second detent and re-

lease it; it need not be held. The window

automatically opens all the way. To stop

the window, lift the switch up while the win-

dow is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with au-

tomatic operation, pull the switch up to the

second detent and release it; it need not be

held. To stop the window, push the switch

down while the window is closing.

Auto-reverse function

The auto-reverse function can be acti-

vated when a window is closed by auto-

matic operation.

Depending on the environment or driv-

ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-

tion may be activated if an impact or

load similar to something being caught

in the window occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., in-

side the vehicle before closing the

window.

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, re-

placed, or jump started, the power window

auto-reverse function may not operate

properly. Have the power window auto-

reverse system re-initialized. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

If the control unit detects something

caught in a window equipped with auto-

matic operation as it is closing, the window

will be immediately lowered.

REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH (if

so equipped)

WARNING

∙ You must ensure all occupants and

objects are free of the rear window

area prior to and during operation.

Failure to do so may result in injury

and/or damage to the rear window

system.

∙ The rear window is not designed to

carry long items through it.

LIC0410 LIC3448

2-88 Instruments and controls

∙ Do not place objects through the

opened rear window. Do not use the

rear window as a cargo area pass-

through. This may result in damage to

the rear window system, or personal

injury.

WARNING

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadver-

tent door lock activation, do not leave

children, people who require the as-

sistance of others or pets unattended

in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-

perature inside a closed vehicle on a

warm day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk of

injury or death to people and pets.

To open the rear power window, push in

and hold the switch.

To close the rear power window, pull out

and hold the switch.

To stop the opening or closing function at

any time, simply release the switch.

NOTE:

If the rear power window is opened while

the defroster switch is on, the rear win-

dow defroster (if so equipped) will auto-

matically shut off. The heated outside

mirrors (if so equipped) will remain on.

The rear window defroster will auto-

matically turn on when the rear power

window is fully closed if the switch is on.

REAR SLIDING WINDOW (if so

equipped)

WARNING

∙ You must ensure all occupants and

objects are free of the rear window

area prior to and during operation.

Failure to do so may result in injury

and/or damage to the rear window

system.

∙ The rear window is not designed to

carry long items through it.

LIC3488

Instruments and controls 2-89

∙ Do not place objects through the

opened rear window. Do not use the

rear window as a cargo area pass-

through. This may result in damage to

the rear window system, or personal

injury.

Squeeze the handles of the lever 䊊

1, then

slide the window open 䊊

The interior light has a three-position

switch and operates regardless of ignition

switch position.

When the switch is in the ON position 䊊

the interior lights illuminate, regardless of

door position. The lights will go off after a

period of time unless the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

When the switch is in the DOOR or normal

operation position 䊊

2, the interior lights,

puddle lights (if so equipped), and cargo

light will stay on for a period of time when:

∙ The doors are unlocked by the key fob, a

key or the power door lock switch while

all doors are closed and the ignition

switch is in the OFF position.

∙ The driver’s door is opened and then

closed while the key is removed from

the ignition switch.

∙ The key is removed from the ignition

switch while all doors are closed.

The lights will turn off while the timer is

activated when:

∙ The driver’s door is locked by the key

fob, a key, or the power door lock switch.

∙ The ignition switch is turned ON.

When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊

the interior lights do not illuminate, regard-

less of door position. The puddle lights (if so

equipped) and cargo light come on when

any front or rear passenger door is opened.

The lights will turn off automatically after a

period of time while doors are open to pre-

vent the battery from becoming dis-

charged.

LIC0792

INTERIOR LIGHTS

2-90 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could re-

sult in a discharged battery.

CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)

The console light will turn on whenever the

parking lights or headlights are illuminated.

The console light brightness can be ad-

justed with the illumination brightness

control.

MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped)

To turn the map lights on, push the

switches. To turn them off, push the

switches again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could re-

sult in a discharged battery.

LIC3405 LIC0790

Instruments and controls 2-91

PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped)

To turn the rear personal lights on, push the

switch. To turn them off, push the switch

again.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver pro-

vides a convenient way to consolidate the

functions of up to three individual hand-

held transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:

∙ Will operate most radio frequency de-

vices such as garage doors, gates,

home and office lighting, entry door

locks and security systems.

∙ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the

vehicle’s battery is discharged or is dis-

connected, HomeLink® will retain all

programming.

When the HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver is programmed, retain the original

transmitter for future programming pro-

cedures (Example: new vehicle pur-

chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the

programmed HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver buttons should be erased for

security purposes. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Programming

HomeLink®” in this section.

WARNING

∙ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and re-

verse features as required by federal

safety standards. (These standards

became effective for opener models

manufactured after April 1, 1982). A

garage door opener which cannot de-

tect an object in the path of a closing

garage door and then automatically

stop and reverse, does not meet cur-

rent federal safety standards. Using a

garage door opener without these

features increases the risk of serious

injury or death.

∙ During the programming procedure

your garage door or security gate will

open and close (if the transmitter is

within range). Make sure that people

or objects are clear of the garage door,

gate, etc. that you are programming.

Rear personal lights

LIC0790

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

2-92 Instruments and controls

∙ Your vehicle’s engine should be

turned off while programming the

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. Do

not breathe exhaust gases; they con-

tain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-

gerous. It can cause unconsciousness

or death.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink®

buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC posi-

tion when programming HomeLink®. It is

also recommended that a new battery

be placed in the hand-held transmitter

of the device being programmed to

HomeLink® for quicker programming

and accurate transmission of the radio

frequency.

1. Position the end of your hand-held

transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from

the HomeLink® surface, keeping the

HomeLink® indicator light 䊊

1in view.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously

press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button and hand-held transmitter but-

ton. DO NOT release until the

HomeLink® indicator light 䊊

1flashes

slowly and then rapidly. When the indi-

cator light flashes rapidly, both buttons

may be released. (The rapid flashing

indicates successful programming.)

LIC2365 LIC2366

Instruments and controls 2-93

NOTE:

Some devices may require you to replace

Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted

in “Programming HomeLink® for Cana-

dian customers and gate openers” in this

section.

3. Press and hold the programmed

HomeLink® button and observe the in-

dicator light.

∙ If the indicator light 䊊

1is

solid/continuous, programming is

complete and your device should

activate when the HomeLink® button

is pressed and released.

∙ If the indicator light 䊊

1blinks rapidly

for 2 seconds and then turns to a

solid/continuous light, continue

with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code de-

vice. A second person may make the

following steps easier. Use a ladder or

other device. Do not stand on your

vehicle to perform the next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage

door opener motor in the garage, lo-

cate the “learn” or “smart” button (the

name and color of the button may vary

by manufacturer but it is usually lo-

cated near where the hanging an-

tenna wire is attached to the unit). If

there is difficulty locating the button,

reference the garage door opener’s

manual.

5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”

button.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press

and hold the trained HomeLink® but-

ton for 2 seconds and release. Repeat

the “press/hold/release” sequence up

to three times to complete the training

process. HomeLink® should now acti-

vate your rolling code equipped device.

7. If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your

HomeLink® buttons, refer to the

HomeLink® web site at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE

OPENERS

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)

after several seconds of transmission –

which may not be long enough for

HomeLink® to pick up the signal during

training. Similar to this Canadian law, some

U.S. gate operators are designed to “tim-

eout” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-

culties training a gate operator or garage

door opener by using the “Training” proce-

dures, replace “Programming HomeLink®”

Step 2 with the following:

NOTE:

When programming a garage door

opener, etc., unplug the device during

the “cycling” process to prevent possible

damage to the garage door opener com-

ponents.

1. For additional information, refer to “Pro-

gramming HomeLink®” step 1 in this

section.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously

press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button and the hand-held transmitter

button. During training, your hand-held

transmitter may automatically stop

transmitting. Continue to press and

hold the desired HomeLink® button

while you press and re-press (“cycle”)

your hand-held transmitter every

2 seconds until the frequency signal

has been learned. The HomeLink® indi-

cator light will flash slowly and then

2-94 Instruments and controls

rapidly after several seconds upon

successful training.DO NOT release un-

til the HomeLink® indicator light flashes

slowly and then rapidly. When the indi-

cator light flashes rapidly, both buttons

may be released. The rapid flashing in-

dicates successful training.

Proceed with “Programming

HomeLink®” step 3 to complete.

If the device was unplugged during the

programming procedure, remember

to plug it back in when programming is

completed.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after

it is programmed, can be used to activate

the programmed device. To operate, sim-

ply press and release the appropriate pro-

grammed HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver button. The amber indicator light will

illuminate while the signal is being trans-

mitted.

For convenience, the hand-held transmit-

ter of the device may also be used at any

time.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-

DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the

hand-held transmitter information:

∙ Replace the hand-held transmitter bat-

teries with new batteries.

∙ Position the hand-held transmitter with

its battery area facing away from the

HomeLink® surface.

∙ Press and hold both the HomeLink®

and hand-held transmitter buttons

without interruption.

∙ Position the hand-held transmitter 1 -

3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the

HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmit-

ter in that position for up to 15 seconds.

If HomeLink® is not programmed within

that time, try holding the transmitter in

another position – keeping the indicator

light in view at all times.

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink®

buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

The following procedure clears the pro-

grammed information from both buttons.

Individual buttons cannot be cleared. How-

ever, individual buttons can be repro-

grammed. For additional information, refer

to “Reprogramming a single HomeLink®

button” in this section.

To clear all programming:

1. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink® buttons until the indicator

light begins to flash in approximately

10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than

20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the programming

mode and can be programmed at any

time beginning with “Programming

HomeLink®” - Step 1.

Instruments and controls 2-95

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HOMELINK® BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver button, complete the following:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash

after 20 seconds. Without releasing the

HomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro-

gramming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contact

HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or

1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico).

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver but-

ton has now been reprogrammed. The

new device can be activated by pressing

the HomeLink® button that was just pro-

grammed. This procedure will not affect

any other programmed HomeLink® but-

tons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change

the codes of any non-rolling code device

that has been programmed into

HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual of

each device or call the manufacturer or

dealer of those devices for additional infor-

mation.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni-

versal Transceiver with your new trans-

mitter information.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

2-96 Instruments and controls

MEMO

Instruments and controls 2-97

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys.............................................3-2

NISSAN Intelligent Key® .......................3-2

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

keys..........................................3-4

Doors ...........................................3-5

Locking with key..............................3-6

Locking with inside lock knob.................3-6

Locking with power door lock switch .........3-6

Rear doors (King Cab® models) ...............3-7

Automatic door locks (if so equipped) ........3-8

Child safety rear door lock (if so

equipped) ....................................3-9

NISSAN Intelligent Key® .........................3-10

Operating range..............................3-11

Door locks/unlocks precaution ..............3-12

NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation ...........3-12

How to use the remote keyless entry

function .....................................3-15

Warning signals .............................3-20

Troubleshooting guide ......................3-20

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ...........3-22

Remote Engine Start operating range .......3-22

Remote starting the vehicle .................3-23

Extending engine run time ..................3-23

Canceling a Remote Engine Start............3-23

Conditions the Remote Engine Start will

notwork....................................3-24

Hood ...........................................3-25

Fuel-filler door ..................................3-25

Diesel fuel engines ..........................3-26

Gasoline fuel engines........................3-26

Steering wheel .................................3-29

Manual operation (if so equipped) ...........3-29

Automatic operation (if so equipped) ........3-29

Sun visors ......................................3-30

Vanity mirrors (if so equipped) ...............3-31

Card holder (driver’s side only) ...............3-31

Mirrors .........................................3-32

Manual anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) ..............................3-32

Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) ..............................3-32

Outside mirrors .............................3-33

Truck box.......................................3-37

Tailgate......................................3-37

Tie down hooks .............................3-41

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) .....3-41

Memory storage function ...................3-42

Entry/exit function ..........................3-43

System operation ...........................3-43

1. Master key

2. Transponder chip

3. Key number plate

A key number plate is supplied with your

keys. Record the key number and keep it in

a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the

vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

duplicates by using the key number.

NISSAN does not record key numbers so it

is very important to keep track of your key

number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you

have lost all your keys. If you still have a key,

it can be duplicated without knowing the

key number.

1. Intelligent Key (two sets)

2. Mechanical key

3. Key number plate (one plate)

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Your vehicle can only be driven with the

Intelligent Keys which are registered to

your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system com-

ponents and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System components.

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2130

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD0350

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Never leave the keys in the vehicle.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be

registered and used with one vehicle. The

new keys must be registered prior to the

use with the Intelligent Key system and

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your

vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service. Since the

registration process requires erasing all

memory in the Intelligent Key components

when registering new keys, be sure to take

all Intelligent Keys that you have to the

NISSAN dealer.

A key number plate is supplied with your

keys. Record the key number and keep it in

a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the

vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

duplicates by using the key number.

NISSAN does not record key numbers so it

is very important to keep track of your key

number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you

have lost all keys and do not have one to

duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can

be duplicated without knowing the key

number.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the Intelli-

gent Key:

∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.

∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli-

gent Key.

∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely

dry.

∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where

temperatures exceed 60°C (140°F).

∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with

a key holder that contains a magnet.

∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment

and personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that

Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may

prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli-

gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor-

mation regarding the erasing procedure, it

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer.

Type C (if so equipped)

LPD2279

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechani-

cal key.

To remove the mechanical key, release the

lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it

into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob

returns to the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock

the driver’s door or tailgate.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key in-

stalled in the Intelligent Key slot.

For additional information, refer to “Doors”

or “Tailgate” in this section.

Valet hand-off

When you have to leave a key with a valet,

give them the Intelligent Key itself, keep the

mechanical key and master key with you to

protect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box from being

opened during valet hand-off, follow the

procedures below:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the

Intelligent Key.

2. Lock the glove box with the mechani-

cal key or master key.

3. Hand the Intelligent Key without the

mechanical key to the valet, keep the

mechanical and master key with you.

For additional information, refer to “Stor-

age” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion of this manual and “Tailgate” in this

section.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the

Intelligent Keys which are registered to the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System com-

ponents in your vehicle.

The mechanical key can be used for all the

locks.

Never leave the keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your ex-

isting key can be duplicated without know-

ing the key number. As many as four

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys

can be used with one vehicle. You should

bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem keys that you have to the NISSAN

dealer for registration. This is because the

registration process will erase the memory

of all key codes previously registered into

the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. Af-

ter the registration process, these compo-

nents will only recognize keys coded into

the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

during registration. Any key that is not

SPA1951

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

given to the dealer at the time of registra-

tion will no longer be able to start your

vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not allow the immobilizer system

key, which contains an electrical tran-

sponder, to come into contact with wa-

ter or salt water. This could affect sys-

tem function.

When the doors are locked using one of the

following methods, the doors cannot be

opened using the inside or outside door

handles. The doors must be unlocked to

open the doors.

WARNING

∙ Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat

belts, this provides greater safety in

the event of an accident by helping to

prevent persons from being thrown

from the vehicle. This also helps keep

children and others from unintention-

ally opening the doors, and will help

keep out intruders.

∙ Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, including

entrapment in windows and/or inad-

vertent door lock activation, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others and/or pets un-

attended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and/or pets.

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

LOCKING WITH KEY

To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as

shown.

Manual

To lock a door, turn the key toward the front

of the vehicle 䊊

1. To unlock, turn the key

toward the rear of the vehicle 䊊

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the

inside lock to the lock position 䊊

1, then

close the door.

To unlock the door without the key, move

the inside lock knob to the unlock position

䊊

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors and the tailgate lock (if

so equipped) without a key, push the door

lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s

side) to the lock position 䊊

1. When locking

the door this way, be certain not to leave

the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock all the doors and the tailgate lock

(if so equipped) without a key, push the

door lock switch (driver’s or front passen-

ger’s side) to the unlock position 䊊

Driver’s side

WPD0311

Inside lock

LPD2092 WPD0381

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Lockout protection

With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle, if

all doors are closed, a chime will sound

after the last door is closed and all doors

will unlock automatically.

These functions help to prevent the Intelli-

gent Key from being accidentally locked

inside the vehicle.

REAR DOORS (King Cab® models)

1. Open the driver’s or passenger’s door.

2. From the outside, pull the door handle

䊊

Atoward you.

LPD0278 LPD2591

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

3. Open the door to the desired position. CAUTION

Be careful when opening and exiting

the driver’s side rear door if the fuel-

filler door is open. This may cause dam-

age to the driver’s side rear door or fuel-

filler door if you open fully and they

make contact.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so

equipped)

∙ All doors lock automatically when the

vehicle speed reaches 15 mph

(24 km/h).

LPD2592 LPD2593 LPD2594

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

The automatic door unlock function can

be changed (if so equipped) using the

“Vehicle Settings” of the vehicle informa-

tion display. For additional information

refer to “Vehicle information display” in

the “Instruments and Controls” section

of this manual.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

(if so equipped)

Child safety locks help prevent the rear

doors from being opened accidentally, es-

pecially when small children are in the ve-

hicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on

the edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the unlock position 䊊

the door can be opened from the outside

or the inside.

When the lever is in the LOCK position 䊊

the door can be opened only from the

outside.

LPD2433

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙ The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are pressed.

The FAA advises the radio waves may

affect aircraft navigation and com-

munication systems. Do not operate

the Intelligent Key while on an air-

plane. Make sure the buttons are not

operated unintentionally when the

unit is stored for a flight.

∙ Never leave the Intelligent Key in the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all

the door locks using the remote control

function or pushing the request switch on

the vehicle without taking the key out from

a pocket or purse. The operating environ-

ment and/or conditions may affect the In-

telligent Key system operation.

Be sure to read the following before using

the Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with

you when operating the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is capable of receiving

and transmitting radio waves. The Intelli-

gent Key system transmits weak radio

waves from various distances. Environ-

mental conditions may interfere with the

operation of the Intelligent Key system un-

der the following operating conditions:

∙ When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted,

such as a TV tower, power station and

broadcasting station.

∙ When in possession of wireless equip-

ment, such as a cellular telephone,

transceiver, or a CB radio.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is in contact

with or covered by metallic materials.

∙ When any type of radio wave remote

control is used nearby.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed near

an electric appliance such as a personal

computer.

∙ When the vehicle is parked near a park-

ing meter.

In such cases, correct the operating condi-

tions before using the Intelligent Key func-

tion or use the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies de-

pending on the operating conditions, the

battery’s life is approximately two years. If

the battery is discharged, replace it with a

new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, a

yellow indicator illuminates with the mes-

sage “Warning, Key ID Incorrect” in the ve-

hicle information display (if so equipped).

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the

NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light (if so

equipped) will blink green. For additional

information, refer to “Vehicle information

display warnings and indicators” in the “In-

struments and controls” section of this

manual.

Since the Intelligent Key is capable of re-

ceiving radio waves, if the key is left near

equipment which transmits strong radio

waves, such as signals from a TV and per-

sonal computer, the battery life may be-

come shorter.

For additional information, refer to “Battery

replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be

registered and used with one vehicle. For

information about the purchase and use of

additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be

used when the Intelligent Key is within the

specified operating range from the request

switch 䊊

1(if so equipped).

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged or strong radio waves are present

near the operating location, the Intelligent

Key operating range becomes narrower,

and the Intelligent Key may not function

properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in

(80 cm) from each request switch 䊊

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door

glass or handle, the request switches may

not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the oper-

ating range, it is possible for anyone, even

someone who does not carry the Intelli-

gent Key, to push the request switch to

lock/unlock the doors.

LPD2338

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS

PRECAUTION

∙ Do not push the door handle request

switch with the Intelligent Key held in

your hand as illustrated. The close dis-

tance to the door handle will cause the

Intelligent Key system to have difficulty

recognizing that the Intelligent Key is

outside the vehicle.

∙ After locking with the door handle re-

quest switch, verify the doors are se-

curely locked by testing them.

∙ To prevent the Intelligent Key from be-

ing left inside the vehicle, make sure you

carry the Intelligent Key with you and

then lock the doors.

∙ Do not pull the door handle before

pushing the door handle request

switch. The door will be unlocked but

will not open. Release the door handle

once and pull it again to open the door.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without

taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket

or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,

you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing

the door handle request switch within the

range of operation.

LPD2554 LPD2382

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Locking doors

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion, place the ignition switch in the

LOCK position and make sure you carry

the Intelligent Key with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push the door handle request switch (if

so equipped) while carrying the Intelli-

gent Key with you.

4. All doors and the tailgate lock (if so

equipped) will lock.

5. The hazard indicator lights flash twice,

the outside chirp sounds twice, and the

front and tail lights may turn on for

10 seconds.

NOTE:

∙Request switches (if so equipped) for

all doors can be deactivated when the

“I-Key Door Lock” setting is switched

to OFF in the Vehicle Settings of the

vehicle information display (if so

equipped). For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Vehicle information dis-

play” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

∙Doors and the tailgate lock (if so

equipped) will lock with the door

handle request switch 䊊

1while the

ignition switch is not in the LOCK po-

sition.

∙Doors and the tailgate lock (if so

equipped) will not lock by pushing the

door handle request switch if any

door is open. However, doors will lock

with the mechanical key even if any

door is open.

∙Doors and the tailgate lock (if so

equipped) do not lock with the door

handle request switch if the Intelli-

gent Key is inside the vehicle. A beep

will sound to warn you. However,

when an Intelligent Key is inside the

vehicle, doors can be locked with an-

other Intelligent Key.

LPD2383 LPD2579

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

CAUTION

∙ After locking the doors using the re-

quest switch (if so equipped), make

sure that the doors have been se-

curely locked by operating the door

handles.

∙ When locking the doors using the re-

quest switch (if so equipped), make

sure to have the Intelligent Key in your

possession before operating the re-

quest switch (if so equipped) to pre-

vent the Intelligent Key from being

left in the vehicle.

∙ The request switch is operational only

when the Intelligent Key has been de-

tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being

accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout

protection is equipped with the Intelligent

Key system.

When any door is open, the doors are

locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put

inside the vehicle and all the doors are

closed; a chime will sound and the lock will

automatically unlock.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli-

gent Key is in the same hand that is op-

erating the request switch to lock the

door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse,

pocket or your other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not func-

tion under the following conditions:

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on

top of the instrument panel.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the glove box or a storage bin.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the door pockets.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side or near metallic materials.

Unlocking doors

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch (if

so equipped).

3. The door will unlock and the hazard

indicator lights flash once, the outside

chirp sounds once, and the front and

tail lights may turn on for 30 seconds.

4. Push the door handle request switch

again within one minute.

5. The outside chirp will sound once and

the remaining doors and tailgate lock

(if so equipped) will unlock.

LPD2383

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

∙If “Selective Unlock” is turned OFF in

the Vehicle Settings, all doors and

tailgate lock (if so equipped) will un-

lock upon the first request switch 䊊

press.

∙The request switch can be deacti-

vated when the “I-Key Door Lock” is

switched to OFF in the Vehicle Set-

tings of the vehicle information dis-

play (if so equipped). For additional

information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking

the doors, that door may not be unlocked.

Returning the door handle to its original

position will unlock the door. If the door

does not unlock after returning the door

handle, push the door handle request

switch to unlock the door.

All doors will be locked automatically un-

less one of the following operations is per-

formed within one minute after pushing

the request switch.

∙ Opening any door.

∙ Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light timer illuminates for a pe-

riod of time when a door is unlocked and

the room light switch is in the DOOR posi-

tion.

The interior light can be turned off without

waiting by performing one of the following

operations:

∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition.

∙ Locking the doors and tailgate lock (if so

equipped) with the remote control.

∙ Switching the room light switch to the

OFF position.

∙ Switching the “Auto Room Lamp” to the

OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the

vehicle information display (if so

equipped). For additional information,

refer to “Vehicle information display” in

the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE

KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

The remote keyless entry function can op-

erate all door locks using the remote key-

less function of the Intelligent Key. The re-

mote keyless function can operate at a

distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the ve-

hicle. The operating distance depends

upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not

function under the following conditions:

∙ When the Intelligent Key is not within the

operational range.

∙ When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged.

∙ When the doors are open or not closed

securely.

LPD2579

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intel-

ligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in

the vehicle.

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

2. Close all doors and tailgate.

3. Press the button on the Intelli-

gent Key.

4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice,

the horn beeps once, and the front and

tail lights may turn on for 10 seconds.

5. All doors and tailgate lock (if so

equipped) will be locked.

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intel-

ligent Key, be sure that the doors have

been securely locked by operating the

door handles.

LPD2257

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Unlocking doors

1. Press the button on the Intelligent

Key.

2. The driver’s door will unlock, the hazard

indicator light flash once, and the front

and tail lights may turn on for 30 sec-

onds.

3. Press the button again within

one minute.

4. The remaining doors and tailgate lock

(if so equipped) will unlock.

NOTE:

If Selective Unlock is turned off in the

Vehicle Settings, all doors and tailgate

lock (if so equipped) will unlock upon the

first press of the Intelligent Key re-

mote. For additional information, refer to

“Vehicle information display” in the “In-

struments and controls” section of this

manual.

All doors and tailgate lock (if so equipped)

will be locked automatically unless one of

the following operations is performed

within one minute after pressing the

button:

∙ Opening any doors.

∙ Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light illuminates for a period of

time when a door is unlocked and the

room light switch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting

by performing one of the following opera-

tions:

∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition.

∙ Locking the doors with the Intelligent

Key.

∙ Switching the room light switch to the

OFF position.

∙ Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the

OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the

vehicle information display (if so

equipped). For additional information,

refer to “Vehicle information display” in

the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

Opening windows (if so equipped)

The Intelligent Key allows you to simultane-

ously open windows equipped with auto-

matic operation.

∙ To open the windows, press the

button on the Intelligent Key for longer

than 3 seconds after all doors are un-

locked.

The door windows will open while pressing

the button on the Intelligent Key.

The door windows cannot be closed by

using the Intelligent Key.

LPD2258

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-

ened, you may activate the panic alarm to

call attention by pressing and holding

the button on the Intelligent Key for

longer than 1 second.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on

for a period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

∙ It has run for a period of time, or

∙ Any button is pressed on the Intelligent

Key.

∙ The request switch (if so equipped) on

the driver’s door is pushed and the In-

telligent Key is in range of the door

handle.

Trailer light check (if so equipped)

This functionality allows the customer to

confirm trailer light operation, without the

need of a second person to press the brake

pedal or activate each turn signal light. The

trailer light check can be performed by the

Intelligent Key or through the Vehicle Set-

tings in the vehicle information display (if so

equipped). For additional information, refer

to “Vehicle information display” in the “In-

struments and controls” section of this

manual.

WPD0374 LPD2257

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

To activate the trailer light check function

with your Intelligent Key, perform the fol-

lowing:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the LOCK

button.

3. Within 2 seconds, press and hold

the LOCK button again for at

least 2 seconds, until the horn beeps

once and the park lights turn on.

The following events will occur:

∙ The left turn signal light on the vehicle

and the trailer will flash for 5 seconds.

∙ The right turn signal light on the vehicle

and the trailer will flash for 5 seconds.

∙ The brake lights on the vehicle and the

trailer will turn ON for 5 seconds.

NOTE:

If the ignition switch is in the OFF posi-

tion, the park lights will turn off after the

events above occur. If ignition switch is

in the ON position, lights will stay on for

45 seconds after trailer light check. If the

trailer lights do not work properly, check

the connections and bulbs. If the vehicle

lights do not turn on, check the bulbs. If

the trailer light check routine fails to

start, ensure the following vehicle condi-

tions:

∙ The vehicle is NOT moving, 0 mph

(0 km/h)

∙ Brake switch is NOT depressed

∙ Left or right flasher is OFF

∙ Trailer light check configuration is NOT

disabled and available in the meter

towing settings

∙ The hazard switch is NOT turned ON

∙ The shift position is fully in P (Park) posi-

tion

∙ Vehicle is within Remote Keyless Entry

range

Answer back horn feature

If desired, the answer back horn feature

can be deactivated using the Intelligent

Key. When it is deactivated and the

LOCK button is pressed, the hazard

indicator lights flash twice. When the

UNLOCK button is pressed, neither

the hazard indicator lights nor the horn

operates.

LPD2259

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

NOTE:

If you change the answer back horn and

light flash feature with the Intelligent

Key while the ignition is in the ON posi-

tion, the vehicle information display

screen (if so equipped) will show the pre-

vious mode. The vehicle information dis-

play screen (if so equipped) will show the

current mode after the ignition switch

has been cycled from the OFF to the ON

position. The vehicle information display

screen (if so equipped) can also be used

to change the answer back horn mode.

For additional information refer to “Ve-

hicle information display” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this

manual.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard indicator lights will flash three

times to confirm that the answer back

horn feature has been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds

once more.

The hazard indicator lights will flash once

and the horn will sound once to confirm

that the horn beep feature has been reac-

tivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does

not silence the horn if the alarm is trig-

gered.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving

unexpectedly by erroneous operation of

the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the

vehicle from being stolen, a chime or chirp

sounds from inside and outside the vehicle

and a warning is displayed in the instru-

ment panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning

is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle

and the Intelligent Key.

For additional information, refer to

“Troubleshooting guide” in this section and

“Vehicle information display” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that

are programmed for the vehicle. If another

Intelligent Key is in range or inside the ve-

hicle, the vehicle system may respond dif-

ferently than expected.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the ignition switch to

stop the engine

The red “Shift to Park” warning ap-

pears on the vehicle information dis-

play (if so equipped) and the inside

warning chime sounds continuously.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park)

position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

When opening the driver’s door to get

out of the vehicle

The door open warning appears on

the display and the inside warning

chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC

position.

Place the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition or close the driver’s door.

When closing the door after getting

out of the vehicle

The yellow “No Key Detected” warning

appears on the vehicle information

display (if so equipped), the outside

chime sounds three times and the in-

side warning chime sounds for ap-

proximately three seconds.

The Intelligent Key is not detected in-

side of the vehicle.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

The red “Shift to Park” warning ap-

pears on the vehicle information dis-

play (if so equipped) and the inside

and outside chimes sound

continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or

OFF position and the shift lever is not

in the P (Park) position.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When closing the door with the inside

lock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approxi-

mately three seconds and all the

doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle re-

quest switch or the button on

the Intelligent Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approxi-

mately three seconds. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the ignition switch to

start the engine

The Intelligent Key battery indicator

appears on the display. The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one.

For additional information, refer to

“Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

The yellow “Key ID Incorrect” warning

appears on the vehicle information

display (if so equipped).

The Intelligent Key is not detected in-

side of the vehicle.

Carry the registered Intelligent Key

with you.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

The button will be on the NISSAN In-

telligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote En-

gine Start. This feature allows the engine to

start from outside the vehicle.

The following features may be affected

when the Remote Engine Start feature is

used:

∙ Vehicles with a manual climate control

system (if so equipped) will default to

the last used heating or cooling mode.

∙ Vehicles with an automatic climate

control system (if so equipped) will de-

fault to either heating or cooling mode.

For additional information, refer to “Re-

mote Engine Start with Intelligent Cli-

mate Control” in the “Monitor, climate,

audio, phone and voice recognition sys-

tems” section of this manual.

Laws in some local communities may re-

strict the use of remote starters. For ex-

ample, some laws require a person using

Remote Engine Start to have the vehicle in

view. Check local regulations for any re-

quirements.

Other conditions may affect the function of

the Remote Engine Start feature. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Conditions the

Remote Engine Start will not work” in this

section.

Other conditions can affect the perfor-

mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Intelligent Key®” in this section.

REMOTE ENGINE START

OPERATING RANGE

WARNING

To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadvertent

door lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the assistance

of others or pets unattended in your ve-

hicle. Additionally, the temperature in-

side a closed vehicle on a warm day can

quickly become high enough to cause a

significant risk of injury or death to

people and pets.

CAUTION

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged or other strong radio wave

sources are present near the operating

location, the Intelligent Key operating

range becomes narrower, and the Intel-

ligent Key may not function properly.

The Remote Engine Start function can only

be used when the Intelligent Key is within the

specified operating range from the vehicle.

LPD2293

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so

equipped)

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The Remote Engine Start operating range is

approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE

To use the Remote Engine Start feature to

start the engine perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press the button to lock all

doors.

3. Within 5 seconds press and hold

the button until the turn signal

lights flash and the tail lamps turn on. If

the vehicle is not within view press and

hold the button for at least 2 sec-

onds.

The following events will occur when the

engine starts:

∙

The parking lights will turn on and remain

on as long as the engine is running.

∙ The doors will be locked and the climate

control system may come on.

∙ The engine will continue to run for

10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend

the time for an additional 10 minutes.

For additional information, refer to “Ex-

tending engine run time” in this section.

Depress and hold the brake then push the

push-button ignition switch to the ON po-

sition before driving. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME

The Remote Engine Start feature can be

extended one time by performing the

steps listed in “Remote starting the vehicle”

in this section. Run time will be calculated

as follows:

∙ The first 10 minute run time will start

when the Remote Engine Start function

is performed.

∙ The second 10 minutes will start imme-

diately when the Remote Engine Start

function is performed again. For ex-

ample, if the engine has been running

for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are

added, the engine will run for a total of

15 minutes.

∙ Extending engine run time will count to-

wards the two Remote Engine Start

limit.

A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts,

or a single Remote Engine Start with an

extension, are allowed between ignition

cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled

to the ON position and then back to the

OFF position before the Remote Engine

Start procedure can be used again.

CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE

START

To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform

one of the following:

∙ Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle

and press until the parking lights

turn off.

∙ Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

∙ Cycle the ignition switch on and then

off.

∙ The extended engine run time has ex-

pired.

∙ The first 10 minute timer has expired.

∙ The engine hood has been opened.

∙ The shift lever is moved out of park.

∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry

into the vehicle.

∙ The ignition switch is pushed without

an Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

∙ The ignition switch is pushed with an

Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the

brake pedal is not depressed.

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE

START WILL NOT WORK

The Remote Engine Start will not operate if

any of the following conditions are present:

∙ “Remote Engine Start” is turned off in

the “Locking” section of the Vehicle Set-

tings menu.

∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

∙ The hood is not securely closed.

∙ The hazard warning lights are on.

∙ The engine is still running. The engine

must be completely stopped. Wait at

least 6 seconds if the engine goes from

running to off. This is not applicable

when extending engine run time.

∙ The button is not pressed and

held for at least 2 seconds.

∙ The button is not pressed and

held within 5 seconds of pressing the

lock button.

∙ The brake is pressed.

∙ The doors are not closed and locked.

∙ The I-Key Indicator Light remains solid

in the vehicle information display (if so

equipped).

∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry

into the vehicle.

∙ Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single

Remote Engine Start with an extension,

have already been used.

∙ The vehicle is not in P (Park).

∙ There is a detected registered key al-

ready inside of the vehicle.

∙ The remote start function has been

switched to the OFF position in Vehicle

Settings of the vehicle information dis-

play (if so equipped). For additional in-

formation, refer to “Vehicle information

display” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

The Remote Engine Start may display a

warning or indicator in the vehicle informa-

tion display (if so equipped). For additional

information, refer to “Vehicle information

display” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊

located below the driver side instru-

ment panel. The hood will spring up

slightly.

2. Push the lever at the front of the hood

to the side 䊊

2as illustrated with your

fingertips and raise the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and

make sure it locks into place.

WARNING

∙ Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving.

Failure to do so could cause the hood

to fly open and result in an accident.

∙ If you see steam or smoke coming

from the engine compartment, to

avoid injury do not open the hood.

LPD0244

King Cab® models only

LPD2593

HOOD FUEL-FILLER DOOR

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

CAUTION

Be careful when opening and exiting

the driver’s side rear door if the fuel-

filler door is open. This may cause dam-

age to the driver’s side rear door or fuel-

filler door if you open fully and they

make contact.

DIESEL FUEL ENGINES

For additional information, refer to the

separate Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual.

GASOLINE FUEL ENGINES

WARNING

∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seri-

ously injured if it is misused or mis-

handled. Always stop the engine and

do not smoke or allow open flames or

sparks near the vehicle when

refueling.

King Cab® models only

LPD2594 LPD2434

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off

automatically. Continued refueling

may cause fuel overflow, resulting in

fuel spray and possibly a fire.

∙ Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has

a built-in safety valve needed for

proper operation of the fuel system

and emission control system. An in-

correct cap can result in a serious mal-

function and possible injury. It could

also cause the Malfunction Indi-

cator Light (MIL) to come on.

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body

to attempt to start your vehicle.

∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable

fuel containers:

– Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when

filling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are

filling it.

– Use only approved portable fuel

containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. For additional information,

refer to “Fuel recommendation” in the

“Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

∙ The Loose Fuel Cap warning message

will appear if the fuel-filler cap is not

properly tightened. It may take a few

driving trips for the message to be

displayed. Failure to tighten the fuel-

filler cap properly after the Loose Fuel

Cap warning message appears may

cause the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) to illuminate.

∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-

nate. If the light illuminates be-

cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light does

not turn off after a few driving trips,

have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion of this manual.

∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid paint

damage.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock-

wise to remove.

2. Loop the tether strap around the hook

䊊

1while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the

fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a

single click is heard.

Loose Fuel Cap warning

The Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the

vehicle information display (if so equipped)

or trip computer 䊊

A(if so equipped) when

the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly

after the vehicle has been refueled. It may

take a few driving trips for the message to

be displayed. To turn off the warning, per-

form the following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as

previously described as soon as pos-

sible.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until a single

click is heard.

LPD2435

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2652

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD2611

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING

∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel any

closer to you than is necessary for

proper steering operation and com-

fort. The driver’s air bag inflates with

great force. If you are unrestrained,

leaning forward, sitting sideways or

out of position in any way, you are at

greater risk of injury or death in a

crash. You may also receive serious or

fatal injuries from the air bag if you

are up against it when it inflates. Al-

ways sit back against the seatback

and as far away as practical from the

steering wheel. Always use the seat

belts.

MANUAL OPERATION (if so

equipped)

Tilt and telescopic operation

Pull the lock lever 䊊

1down:

∙ Adjust the steering wheel up or down in

direction 䊊

2to the desired position.

∙ Adjust the steering wheel forward or

backward in direction 䊊

3to the desired

position.

Push the lock lever 䊊

1up firmly to lock the

steering wheel in place.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if so

equipped)

Tilt and telescopic operation

To adjust the steering wheel move the

switch 䊊

1in the following directions:

∙ Adjust the steering wheel up or down in

direction 䊊

2to the desired tilt position.

∙ Adjust the steering wheel forward or

backward in direction 䊊

3to the desired

telescopic position.

LPD2597 LPD2580

STEERING WHEEL

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

CAUTION

For vehicles with automatic drive posi-

tioner: Failure to reset the tilt and tele-

scoping functions of the steering

wheel, after the vehicle’s battery has

been discharged, may prevent the

steering wheel position from being

adjusted.

For vehicles with automatic drive posi-

tioner: Both the tilt and telescopic steering

operation must be reset after the vehicle’s

battery has been discharged in order to

prevent the tilt and telescopic operation

from locking in one position. When the bat-

tery has been recharged or replaced, per-

form the following:

∙ For tilt operation: Adjust the switch 䊊

so the steering wheel moves to the

highest position 䊊

2that can be

reached.

∙ For telescopic operation: Adjust the

switch 䊊

1so the steering wheel moves

to the most forward and backward po-

sition 䊊

3that can be reached.

Performing these operations resets the

range of the steering wheel’s tilt and tele-

scopic function.

Entry/Exit function (if so

equipped)

The automatic drive positioner system (if

so equipped) will make the steering wheel

move up automatically when the driver’s

door is opened and the ignition switch is in

the LOCK position. This lets the driver get

into and out of the seat more easily. The

steering wheel moves back into position

when the driver’s door is closed and the

ignition switch is pushed.

For additional information, refer to “Auto-

matic drive positioner” in this section.

WPD0344

SUN VISORS

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

1. To block glare from the front, swing

down 䊊

1the sun visor.

2. To block glare from the side, remove

the sun visor from the center mount

and swing the visor to the side 䊊

3. To extend the sun visor, slide 䊊

3in or

out as needed.

CAUTION

∙ Do not store the sun visor before re-

turning the extension to its original

position.

∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor

forcedly downward. VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun

visor down and flip open the mirror cover.

Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and

turn on when the mirror cover is open.

CARD HOLDER (driver’s side only)

To access the card holder, slide card in the

card holder. Do not view information while

operating the vehicle.

LPD2583 LPD2436

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW

MIRROR (if so equipped)

Use the night position 䊊

1to reduce glare

from the headlights of vehicles behind you

at night.

Use the day position 䊊

2when driving in

daylight hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-

sary, because it reduces rear view

clarity.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it au-

tomatically dims during night time condi-

tions and according to the intensity of the

headlights of the vehicle following you. The

automatic anti-glare feature is activated

when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

The indicator light 䊊

2will illuminate when

the automatic anti-glare feature is operat-

ing.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sen-

sors 䊊

1or apply glass cleaner to the sen-

sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity

of the sensors, resulting in improper op-

eration.

Type A (if so equipped)

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature,

press the O button. The indicator light

will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature

again, press the | button. The indicator

light will turn on.

For additional information, refer to the

“HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

WPD0126

Type A - Without compass

(if so equipped)

LPD0469

MIRRORS

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Type B (if so equipped)

∙ To turn off the anti-glare feature, press

the button. The indicator light will

turn off.

∙ To turn on the anti-glare feature, press

the button again. The indicator

light will turn on.

For additional information about the com-

pass and compass features 䊊

3, refer to

“Compass” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

For additional information, refer to the

“HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror

on the passenger side are closer than

they appear. Be careful when moving

to the right. Using only this mirror

could cause an accident. Use the in-

side mirror or glance over your shoul-

der to properly judge distances to

other objects.

∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driv-

ing. You could lose control of your ve-

hicle and cause an accident.

Manual control type (if so

equipped)

The outside mirrors can be moved in any

direction for a better rear view.

Type B - With compass (if so equipped)

LPD2419 LPD2581

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

Electric control type (if so

equipped)

The outside mirror remote control will op-

erate only when the ignition switch is

placed in the ACC or ON position.

Rotate the control dial to select the right or

left mirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired

position by moving the control dial.

Return the control dial to the center (neu-

tral) position to prevent accidentally mov-

ing the mirror.

Trailer tow mirrors (if so equipped)

WARNING

Objects viewed in the convex portion of

the trailer tow mirror are closer than

they appear. Be careful when changing

lanes or turning. Using only the convex

mirror could cause an accident. Use the

other mirrors or glance over your shoul-

der to properly judge distances to other

objects.

Use the outside mirror remote control to

adjust the top portion of the trailer tow

mirror.

The lower portion of the trailer tow mirror

can be moved manually in any direction for

a better rear view.

LPD0346 LPD2474

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Pull the trailer tow mirror outward to ex-

tend it to the desired position for better

visibility while towing a trailer.

WARNING

Do not extend or retract mirrors while

driving. You may lose control of your ve-

hicle and cause an accident.

CAUTION

Driving in tight spaces with mirrors ex-

tended may cause damage to the

vehicle.

Power folding outside mirrors (if

so equipped)

CAUTION

Do not manually fold the power folding

mirrors. Manually folding the mirrors

can damage the mirrors.

Push the switch to open or close the mir-

rors.

If one of the mirrors are manually operated

or bumped, the mirror body can become

loose at the pivot point. To correct elec-

tronic mirror operation, cycle the mirrors by

pushing the “CLOSE” switch until com-

pletely closed, then push the “OPEN” switch

until the mirrors are in the open position.

LPD0268 LPD0417

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35

Manual folding outside mirrors (if

so equipped)

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to

fold it.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if so

equipped)

The reverse tilt-down feature will turn both

outside mirror surfaces downward to pro-

vide better rear visibility close to the vehicle

when the mirror control switch is in either

the L or R position.

The mirrors automatically return to their

original position when you shift out of R

(Reverse).

The outside mirror surfaces will return to

their original position when one of the fol-

lowing conditions has occurred:

∙ The shift lever is moved to any position

other than R (Reverse).

∙ The outside mirror control switch is set

to the neutral or center position.

∙ The ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

NOTE:

If the outside mirror control switch is in

the center position, the mirror surface

will NOT turn downward when the shift

lever is moved to R (Reverse).

For additional information, refer to “Auto-

matic drive positioner” in this section.

Automatic anti-glare outside

mirror (if so equipped)

The outside mirror will automatically dim

during nighttime conditions to reduce the

glare from the headlights of trailing ve-

hicles. The automatic anti-glare feature

operates only when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

The automatic anti-glare feature will be on

when starting the vehicle. The indicator

light on the automatic anti-glare rearview

mirror will illuminate when the automatic

anti-glare feature is operating.

To turn off the anti-glare feature, press

the button on the rearview mirror.

The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the anti-glare feature again,

press the button on the rearview mir-

ror. The indicator light will turn on.

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2634

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD0269

3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

For additional information on the auto-

matic anti-glare rearview mirror, refer to

“Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror” in

this section.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

Some outside mirrors can be heated to

defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved vis-

ibility. For additional information, refer to

“Rear window and/or outside mirror de-

froster switch” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

TAILGATE

Opening the tailgate

Pull the tailgate handle upward and lower

the tailgate. The support cables hold the

tailgate open.

When closing the tailgate, make sure the

latches are securely locked.

Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgate

down, unless equipped with NISSAN’s

Bed Extender (accessory) or equivalent

in the extended position.

For additional information on proper truck

box loading, refer to “Vehicle loading infor-

mation” in the “Technical and consumer in-

formation” section of this manual.

WARNING

∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seat (if so

equipped) when it is in the folded po-

sition. Use of these areas by passen-

gers without proper restraints could

result in serious injury or death in an

accident or sudden stop.

∙ It is extremely dangerous to ride in a

cargo area inside a vehicle. In a colli-

sion, people riding in these areas are

more likely to be seriously injured or

killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped

with seats and seat belts.

∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

LPD2334

TRUCK BOX

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37

Disconnecting the rear camera

Before removing the tailgate disconnect

the rear camera by performing the follow-

ing:

1. Open the tailgate to access the rear

camera connector bracket 䊊

1located

on the rear sill.

2. Remove the connector bracket 䊊

from the sill by pressing the locking tab

inward, in the direction shown, while

pulling the bracket apart.

3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness

䊊

3by pressing inward on the locking

tab, in the direction shown, while pulling

the connectors apart. Hold the con-

nector firmly to prevent the connector

in the chassis harness from falling into

the sill.

4. Use the supplied chassis plug and

bracket and connect them to the

chassis wiring harness to avoid con-

tamination to the terminals which will

lead to malfunction of the rear camera.

5. Insert the bracket back into the sill.

6. Take the tailgate plug from the glove

box and connect it to the tailgate wir-

ing harness to avoid contamination

which will lead to malfunction of the

rear camera.

7. Remove the tailgate. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Removing the tail-

gate” in this section.

LPD2582

3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Removing the tailgate

1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the

rear camera (if so equipped). For addi-

tional information, refer to “Disconnect-

ing the rear camera” in this section.

2. Release the tailgate support cables.

CAUTION

∙ The tailgate is heavy. Two people

should remove or install it. Be careful

not to drop it during removal.

∙ After releasing the support cables, do

not let the tailgate rest on the

bumper.

3. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle.

4. Pull the tailgate out from the left side

hinge.

5. Slide the tailgate out of the right side

hinge.

Installing the tailgate

1. Insert the tailgate into the right side

hinge.

2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle

and insert into the left side hinge.

3. Continue to hold the tailgate at a 45

degree angle and attach the tailgate

support cables.

4. For vehicles with rear camera: Be sure

the tailgate harness is not hanging be-

low the tailgate and keep the tailgate

open. For additional information, refer

to “Connecting the rear camera” in this

section before closing the tailgate.

5. For vehicles without rear camera: Close

the tailgate securely.

LPD0271

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39

Connecting the rear camera

Before closing the tailgate reconnect the

rear camera by performing the following:

1. After attaching the rear tailgate to the

truck, keep the tailgate open and check

that the tailgate harness is not hanging

below the tailgate.

2. Remove the connector bracket 䊊

from the sill by pressing the locking tab

inward, in the direction shown, while

pulling the bracket apart.

3. Disconnect the chassis plug and

bracket from the chassis wiring har-

ness 䊊

3. Keep the connector and

bracket in a safe place such as the

glove box.

4. Disconnect the tailgate plug from the

tailgate wiring harness. Keep the tail-

gate plug in a safe place such as the

glove box.

5. Connect the tailgate wiring harness to

the chassis wiring harness.

6. Securely fix the rear camera connector

bracket 䊊

1to the rear sill.

7. Close the tailgate securely.

Locking the Tailgate

To unlock the tailgate, turn the key toward

the passenger side of the vehicle䊊

1.To

lock, turn the key toward the driver side 䊊

If your vehicle is equipped with an elec-

tronic tailgate, you may use the door

handle request switch or I-key to lock or

unlock the tailgate. For additional informa-

tion please refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®

Operation” in the this section of the

manual.

LPD2582

3-40 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

TIE DOWN HOOKS

For your convenience, tie down hooks are

placed at each corner of the truck box.

These may be used to help secure cargo

loaded into the truck box.

∙ The weight of the cargo load must be

evenly distributed over the rear axles.

∙ All cargo should be securely fastened

with ropes or straps to prevent it from

shifting or sliding within the vehicle.

WARNING

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

The automatic drive positioner system has

two features:

∙ Memory storage function

∙ Entry/exit function

LPD2393

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so

equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-41

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering

column, and outside mirrors (if so

equipped) can be stored in the automatic

drive positioner memory. Follow these pro-

cedures to use the memory system.

1. Place the ignition in the ON or ACC po-

sition (the vehicle should be stopped

while setting the memory).

2. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering col-

umn, and outside mirrors (if so

equipped) to the desired positions by

manually operating each adjusting

switch. For additional information, refer

to “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section of this manual, and “Steer-

ing wheel” and “Outside mirrors” in this

section.

3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec-

onds, push the memory switch (1 or 2).

4. The indicator light for the pushed

memory switch will come on and stay

on for approximately 5 seconds.

5. The chime will sound if the memory

has been stored.

NOTE:

If a NEW memory position is stored in the

same memory switch, the previous

memory position will be overwritten by

the new stored position.

Confirming memory storage

∙ Push the SET switch.

∙ If a memory position has been stored in

the switch (1 or 2) then the indicator light

for the respective switch will stay on for

approximately 5 seconds.

Linking a key fob to a stored

memory position

Each key fob can be linked to a stored

memory position (memory switch 1 or 2)

with the following procedure.

1. Follow steps 1-3 in the “Memory storage

function” section for storing the

memory position.

2. The indicator light for the pushed

memory switch will come on. While the

indicator light is on for 5 seconds, press

the button on the key fob. The

hazard lights will flash twice. The indi-

cator light of the linked memory switch

will blink and click twice. After the indi-

cator light goes off, the key fob is linked

to that memory setting.

Once it is linked, when the ignition switch is

in the OFF position, pressing the but-

ton on the key fob will move the driver’s

seat, steering wheel and outside mirrors to

the linked memory switch position.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is stored in the

linked memory switch, then the key fob

will link the new position and overwrites

the previous position.

LPD2302

3-42 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the driver’s

seat and automatic operation steering col-

umn will automatically move when the

shift lever is in the P (Park) position. This

allows the driver to get into and out of the

driver’s seat more easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward and

the steering column will move up:

∙ When the driver’s door is opened with

the ignition switch placed in the OFF

position.

∙ When the ignition switch is changed

from ACC to OFF with the driver’s door

open.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel will

return to the previous position:

∙ When the ignition switch is changed

from ACC or ON while the shift lever is in

the P (Park) position.

The entry/exit function can be adjusted or

canceled through the vehicle settings in

the vehicle information display (if so

equipped) by performing the following:

∙ Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to

OFF.

∙ Switch the Exit Steering UP from ON to

OFF.

Restarting the entry/exit function

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the

fuse opens, the stored memory positions

will be lost and some of the functions will

be restricted:

1. Drive the vehicle over 25 mph (40 km/h).

2. Open and close the driver’s door more

than two times with the ignition switch

in the OFF position.

The entry/exit function should now work

properly.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will

not work or will stop operating under the

following conditions:

∙ When the vehicle speed is above 4 mph

(7km/h).

∙ When any of the memory switches are

pushed while the automatic drive posi-

tioner is operating.

∙ When the switch for the driver’s seat

and steering column is pushed while

the automatic drive positioner is oper-

ating.

∙ When the seat has already been moved

to the memorized position.

∙ When no seat position is stored in the

memory switch.

∙ When the shift lever is moved from P

(Park) to any other position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-43

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and

voice recognition systems

Control panel buttons — color screen with

Navigation System (if so equipped) ..............4-4

How to use the touch-screen.................4-5

How to use the BACKbutton............4-7

How to use the [ ]button...............4-7

button..................................4-9

How to use the CAMERA button ..............4-9

RearView Monitor (if so equipped) ..............4-10

RearView Monitor system operation ..........4-11

How to read the displayed lines..............4-12

Difference between predicted and

actual distances.............................4-12

Adjusting the screen ........................4-14

RearView Monitor system limitations ........4-15

System maintenance........................4-17

Intelligent Around View Monitor

(if so equipped) .................................4-18

Intelligent Around View Monitor system

operation....................................4-19

Difference between predicted and

actual distances.............................4-23

How to park with predicted course

lines .........................................4-24

How to switch the display ...................4-26

Adjusting the screen ........................4-26

Intelligent Around View Monitor system

limitations...................................4-27

System maintenance........................4-29

Moving Object Detection (MOD)

(if so equipped) .................................4-30

MOD system operation ......................4-31

Turning MOD on and off .....................4-33

MOD system limitations .....................4-33

System maintenance........................4-34

Vents...........................................4-35

Heater and air conditioner (manual)

(if so equipped) .................................4-35

Controls .....................................4-36

Heater operation ............................4-37

Air conditioner operation ....................4-39

Air flow charts ...............................4-40

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)

(if so equipped) .................................4-44

Automatic operation ........................4-45

Manual operation ...........................4-46

Operating tips ...............................4-48

Servicing air conditioner........................4-49

Audio system...................................4-49

Radio........................................4-49

FM radio reception ..........................4-50

AM radio reception ..........................4-50

Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) .....4-50

Audio operation precautions ................4-51

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player (if so equipped) .......................4-58

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc

(CD) player (Type A) (if so equipped) ..........4-62

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc

(CD) player (Type B) (if so equipped) ..........4-68

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection

Port (models without Navigation

System) (if so equipped) .....................4-75

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection

Port (models with Navigation System)

(if so equipped) ..............................4-77

iPod®* player operation without

Navigation System (if so equipped) ..........4-79

iPod®* player operation with Navigation

System (if so equipped)......................4-82

Bluetooth® streaming audio without

Navigation System (if so equipped) ..........4-85

Bluetooth® streaming audio with

Navigation System (if so equipped) ..........4-86

CD care and cleaning........................4-87

Steering wheel switch for audio control......4-88

Antenna.....................................4-89

NissanConnect® Mobile Apps (if so equipped). . .4-89

NissanConnect® Services (if so equipped) ......4-90

Siri® Eyes Free ..................................4-90

Requirements ...............................4-90

Siri® Activation...............................4-91

Operating Siri® Eyes Free ....................4-91

Changing Siri® Eyes Free settings

(models without Navigation System) ........4-92

Changing Siri® Eyes Free settings

(models with Navigation System) ............4-92

Troubleshooting guide ......................4-93

NISSAN Mobile Entertainment System (MES)

(if so equipped) .................................4-94

Front panel buttons .........................4-95

Front panel buttons operation...............4-97

Wireless headphone operation ..............4-98

Remote control operation ...................4-99

Remote control buttons ....................4-100

General operating instructions .............4-103

How to use the DVD OSD menu ............4-104

How to use the Monitor OSD menu .........4-110

PlayingaCD................................4-112

Playing audio files ..........................4-113

Playing image files..........................4-114

Playing video files...........................4-115

Charging a USB device .....................4-116

Connecting an External Auxiliary A/V

Source — input .............................4-116

Connecting an External A/V Monitor —

output...................................... 4-117

Selecting Monitor A or B as the source...... 4-117

Troubleshooting guide ..................... 4-117

Specifications ..............................4-118

FCC Notice .................................4-119

FCC Warning ...............................4-119

ITE Notice ..................................4-119

WEEE Notice................................4-120

Macrovision Notice .........................4-120

Dolby Digital ................................4-120

Car phone or CB radio .........................4-121

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

without Navigation System (if so equipped)....4-121

Regulatory information.....................4-123

Using the system...........................4-124

Control buttons ............................4-125

Connecting procedure .....................4-126

Voice commands ..........................4-127

Making a call ...............................4-128

Receiving a call .............................4-129

During a call ................................4-129

Ending a call................................4-129

Text messaging ............................4-129

Bluetooth® settings ........................ 4-131

Manual control .............................4-133

Troubleshooting guide .....................4-134

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with

Navigation System (if so equipped) ............4-135

Regulatory information.....................4-137

Voice commands ..........................4-137

Connecting procedure .....................4-138

Vehicle phonebook.........................4-138

Making a call ...............................4-139

Receiving a call .............................4-139

During a call ................................4-139

Ending a call................................4-139

Text messaging ............................4-139

Bluetooth® settings ........................4-142

Phone settings .............................4-143

Troubleshooting guide .....................4-144

NISSAN Voice Recognition System (if so

equipped) .....................................4-145

Using the system...........................4-145

System features ............................4-146

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

voice commands...........................4-147

Navigation system voice commands .......4-148

Audio system voice commands ............4-148

Information voice commands ..............4-149

My Apps voice commands .................4-149

Help voice commands......................4-149

Troubleshooting guide .....................4-150

WARNING

∙ Positioning of the heating or air con-

ditioning controls and display con-

trols should not be done while driving

in order that full attention may be

given to the driving operation.

∙ Do not disassemble or modify this

system. If you do, it may result in acci-

dents, fire, or electrical shock.

∙ Do not use this system if you notice

any abnormality, such as a frozen

screen or lack of sound. Continued

use of the system may result in acci-

dent, fire or electric shock.

∙ In case you notice any foreign object

in the system hardware, spill liquid on

it, or notice smoke or smell coming

from it, stop using the system imme-

diately. Ignoring such conditions may

lead to accidents, fire or electrical

shock. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

1. POWER button/VOLUME control knob

2. Display screen

3. ENTER/AUDIO button / TUNE-SCROLL

knob

4. BACK button

5. button

6. (brightness control) button

7. button**

8. MAP button*

LHA3904

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — COLOR

SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

9. CAMERA button

10. NAV button*

* For additional information regarding the

navigation system control buttons, refer to

the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s

Manual.

** For additional information regarding the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

control button, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System with Navigation Sys-

tem” in this section.

When you use this system, make sure the

engine is running.

If you use the system with the engine not

running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long

time, it will discharge the battery, and

the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer

to a key shown only on the display. These

keys can be selected by touching the

screen.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN

CAUTION

∙ The glass display screen may break if

it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If

the glass screen breaks, do not touch

it. Doing so could result in an injury.

∙ To clean the display, never use a rough

cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any

kind of solvent or paper towel with a

chemical cleaning agent. They will

scratch or deteriorate the panel.

∙ Do not splash any liquid such as water

or car fragrance on the display. Con-

tact with liquid will cause the system

to malfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functions

cannot be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not avail-

able while driving will be “grayed out” or

muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then

operate the navigation system.

WARNING

∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving.

∙ Avoid using vehicle features that

could distract you. If distracted, you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

Touch-screen operation

Menu Item Result

Selecting the item Touch an item to select . To select the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key on the screen. Press the BACK

button to return to the previous screen.

Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one

item at a time. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time.

Inputting characters Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.

123/ABC Changes the available character set to numbers.

Space Inserts a space.

Delete Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the

characters.

OK Completes the character input.

LHA3712

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Touch-screen maintenance

If you clean the display screen, use a dry,

soft cloth. If additional cleaning is neces-

sary, use a small amount of neutral deter-

gent with a soft cloth. Never spray the

screen with water or detergent. Dampen

the cloth first and then wipe the screen.

HOW TO USE THE BACK

BUTTON

Press the BACK button to return to

the previous screen.

HOW TO USE THE [ ] BUTTON

For additional information about the

“SiriusXM Travel Link”, and “Traffic” features,

refer to the separate NissanConnect®

Owner’s Manual.

For additional information about the “My

Apps” key, refer to “NissanConnect® Mobile

Apps” in this section.

For additional information about the “Voice

Commands” key, refer to “NISSAN Voice

Recognition System” in this section.

To select and/or adjust several functions,

features and modes that are available for

your vehicle:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the desired item.

LHA3711 LHA3712

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

Menu item Result

Audio For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.

Phone & Bluetooth For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this

section.

System Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will

appear.

Display Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display.

Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the display.

Display Mode Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes

are suited for the respective times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically.

Scroll Direction Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down.

Clock /Date Touch this key to adjust the time.

Time Format The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.

Date Format Select from five possible formats for displaying the day, month, and year.

Clock Mode Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” al-

lows you to set the clock using the “Set Clock Manually” key. “Time Zone” will be selected from the option

below.

Set Clock / Date Manually Adjust the clock manually, Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or

down. “Clock Mode” must be set to manual for this option to be available.

Daylight Savings Time Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off.

Time Zone Choose the applicable time zone from the list.

Language Touch this key to change the language on the display.

NissanConnect Services Settings

(if so equipped)

Touch this key to connect to NissanConnect® Service.

Camera Settings Touch this key to change the camera settings.

Display Mode Touch this key to select the touch-screen display mode (day, night, or automatic).

Brightness Adjust touch-screen brightness using the TUNE-SCROLL knob/ ENTER button.

Contrast Adjust touch-screen contrast using the TUNE-SCROLL knob/ ENTER button.

Color Adjust touch-screen color using the TUNE-SCROLL knob/ ENTER button.

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Menu item Result

Temperature Unit Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius).

Touchscreen Click Toggles the touch-screen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key

on the screen is touched.

System Beeps Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up

message appears on the screen or a button on the unit (such as the button) is pressed and held for

2 seconds.

Return to Factory Settings/Clear

Memory

Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.

Software Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information.

Minimize Voice Feedback Touch this key to turn ON or OFF to control the voice feedback.

System Software Version Touch this key to display software version information.

Traffic Touch this key to display traffic settings. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect®

Owner’s Manual.

Navigation For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

SXM Touch this key to start SiriusXM® radio. For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.

BUTTON

To change the display brightness, press

the button and use the TUNE-

SCROLL knob / ENTER-AUDIO button to ad-

just the brightness. Pressing the button

again will change the display to day or

night display mode.

If no operation is performed within 5 sec-

onds, the display will return to the previous

display.

Press and hold the button for more

than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press

the button again to turn the display on.

HOW TO USE THE CAMERA

BUTTON

For additional information, refer to “Rear-

View Monitor” or “Intelligent Around View

Monitor” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

1. CAMERA button (if so equipped)

LHA4485

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so

equipped)

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the Rear-

View Monitor system could result in

serious injury or death.

∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience

feature and is not a substitute for

proper backing. Always turn and look

out the windows and check mirrors to

be sure that it is safe to move before

operating the vehicle. Always back up

slowly.

∙ The system is designed as an aid to

the driver in showing large stationary

objects directly behind the vehicle, to

help avoid damaging the vehicle.

∙ The distance guide line and the ve-

hicle width line should be used as a

reference only when the vehicle is on a

level paved surface. The distance

viewed on the monitor is for reference

only and may be different than the

actual distance between the vehicle

and displayed objects.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of

the camera.

The RearView Monitor system automati-

cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when

the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)

position. While in R (Reverse), pressing the

CAMERA button (if so equipped) will cycle

through guideline options. The radio can

still be heard while the RearView Monitor is

active.

To display the rear view, the RearView Moni-

tor system uses a camera located just

above the vehicle’s license plate 䊊

1on the

tailgate.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position,

move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-

sition to operate the RearView Monitor.

LHA3671

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle

width and distances to objects with refer-

ence to the vehicle body line 䊊

Aare dis-

played on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

∙ Red line 䊊

1: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

∙ Yellow line 䊊

2: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

∙ Green line 䊊

3: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

∙ Green line 䊊

4: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing

up.

Center guide lines (if so equipped) 䊊

Indicates the vehicle’s center to improve

trailer hitching guidance.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED

AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their loca-

tions on the ground are for approximate

reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill

surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-

ally located at distances different from

those displayed in the monitor relative to

the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When

in doubt, turn around and view the objects

as you are backing up, or park and exit the

vehicle to view the positioning of objects

behind the vehicle. Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

further than it appears on the monitor.

LHA3907

LHA3672

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill,

the distance guide lines and the vehicle

width guide lines are shown farther than

the actual distance. Note that any object

on the hill is closer than it appears on the

monitor.

Backing up near a projecting

object

The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the

object in the display. However, the vehicle

may hit the object if it projects over the

actual backing up course.

LHA3673 LHA4542

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

Backing up behind a projecting

object

The position 䊊

Cis shown farther than the

position 䊊

Bin the display. However, the po-

sition 䊊

Cis actually at the same distance as

the position 䊊

A. The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position 䊊

if the object projects over the actual back-

ing up course.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

The procedure for adjusting the display

settings of the screen differs depending on

the type of screen present on the vehicle.

For vehicles without navigation system

1. Firmly apply the brake and place the

shift lever in R (Reverse)

2. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

3. The screen will display the Brightness

settings.

LHA3674

Models without navigation system

LHA3639

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER or

TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the set-

ting up or down.

5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button

again to display the Contrast settings.

6. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER or

TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the set-

ting up or down.

7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button to

complete the adjustment.

∙ Do not adjust the display settings of the

RearView Monitor while the vehicle is

moving.

For vehicles with navigation system

1. Firmly apply the brake and place the

shift lever in R (Reverse)

2. Press the button on the control

panel.

3. The screen will display the Night set-

tings.

4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust

the setting up or down.

5. Press the button again to access

the Auto settings.

6. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust

the setting up or down.

∙ Do not adjust the display settings of the

RearView Monitor while the vehicle is

moving.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ The system cannot completely elimi-

nate blind spots and may not show

every object.

∙ Underneath the bumper and the cor-

ner areas of the bumper cannot be

viewed on the RearView Monitor be-

cause of its monitoring range limita-

tion. The system will not show small

objects below the bumper, and may

not show objects close to the bumper

or on the ground.

∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-

tor differ from actual distance be-

cause a wide-angle lens is used.

Models with navigation system

LHA4296

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will

appear visually opposite compared to

when viewed in the rearview and out-

side mirrors.

∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.

The lines are highly affected by the

number of occupants, fuel level, ve-

hicle position, road conditions and

road grade.

∙ Make sure that the tailgate is securely

closed when backing up.

∙ Do not put anything on the rearview

camera. The rearview camera is in-

stalled on the tailgate.

∙ When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the camera. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing

water condensation on the lens, a

malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-

sion instrument. Otherwise, it may

malfunction or cause damage result-

ing in a fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations and

do not represent a system malfunction:

∙ When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not clearly

display objects.

∙ When strong light directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on

the screen. This is due to strong re-

flected light from the bumper.

∙ The screen may flicker under fluores-

cent light.

∙ The colors of objects on the RearView

Monitor may differ somewhat from the

actual color of objects.

∙ Objects on the monitor may not be

clear in a dark environment.

∙ There may be a delay when switching

between views.

∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the

camera, RearView Monitor may not dis-

play objects clearly. Clean the camera.

∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.

Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth

dampened with a diluted mild cleaning

agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

∙ Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the

camera 䊊

1, the RearView Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the camera

by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a

diluted mild cleaning agent and then wip-

ing it with a dry cloth.

LHA3671

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

1. CAMERA button

LHA4092

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW

MONITOR (if so equipped)

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for the proper use of the

Intelligent Around View Monitor sys-

tem could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ The Intelligent Around View Monitor is

a convenience feature and is not a

substitute for proper vehicle opera-

tion because it has areas where ob-

jects cannot be viewed. The four cor-

ners of the vehicle in particular, are

areas where objects do not always

appear in the bird’s-eye, front, or rear

views. Always check your surround-

ings to be sure that it is safe to move

before operating the vehicle. Always

operate the vehicle slowly.

∙ The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other

maneuvers.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of

the camera.

The Intelligent Around View Monitor sys-

tem is designed as an aid to the driver in

situations such as slot parking or parallel

parking.

The monitor displays various views of the

position of the vehicle in a split screen for-

mat. Not all views are available at all times.

Available views:

∙ Front View

An approximately 150–degree view of

the front of the vehicle.

∙ Rear View

An approximately 150–degree view of

the rear of the vehicle.

∙ Bird’s-Eye View

The surrounding views of the vehicle

from above.

∙ Front-Side View

The view around and ahead of the front

passenger’s side wheel.

∙ Rear-Wide View

An approximately 180–degree view of

the rear of the vehicle.

To display the multiple views, the Intelligent

Around View Monitor system uses cam-

eras located in the front grille, on the vehi-

cle’s outside mirrors and one on the tail-

gate 䊊

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW

MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position,

move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-

sition to operate the Intelligent Around

View Monitor.

LHA3909

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

When the camera is first activated with the

bird’s-eye view in the display, a red icon (if so

equipped) will flash on the screen. This in-

dicates that the sonar system (if so

equipped) is activated. For additional infor-

mation on the front and rear sonar system

(if so equipped), refer to “Front and rear so-

nar system” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

The screen displayed on the Intelligent

Around View Monitor will automatically re-

turn to the previous screen 3 minutes after

the CAMERA button has been pressed with

the shift lever in a position other than the R

(Reverse) position.

Available views

WARNING

∙ The distance guide lines and the ve-

hicle width lines should be used as a

reference only when the vehicle is on a

paved, level surface. The apparent

distance viewed on the monitor may

be different than the actual distance

between the vehicle and displayed

objects.

∙ Use the displayed lines and the bird’s-

eye view as a reference. The lines and

the bird’s-eye view are greatly af-

fected by the number of occupants,

cargo, fuel level, vehicle position, road

condition and road grade.

∙ If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

and the bird’s-eye view may be dis-

played incorrectly.

∙ When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob-

jects viewed in the monitor are fur-

ther than they appear. When driving

the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed

in the monitor are closer than they

appear.

∙ Objects in the rear view will appear

visually opposite compared to when

viewed in the monitor and outside

mirrors.

∙ Use the mirrors or actually look to

properly judge distances to other

objects.

∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between

the predicted course lines and the ac-

tual course line.

∙ The vehicle width and predicted

course lines are wider than the actual

width and course.

∙ The displayed lines will appear

slightly off to the right, because the

rearview camera is not installed in the

rear center of the vehicle.

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Front and rear view

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate

vehicle width and distance to objects with

reference to the vehicle body line 䊊

Aare

displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the vehicle body:

∙ Red line 䊊

1: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

∙ Yellow line 䊊

2: approximately 3 ft (1 m)

∙ Green line 䊊

3: approximately 7 ft (2 m)

∙ Green line 䊊

4: approximately 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the approximate vehicle width

when backing up.

Predicted course lines 䊊

Indicate the predicted course when oper-

ating the vehicle. The predicted course

lines will be displayed on the monitor when

the steering wheel is turned. The predicted

course lines will move depending on how

much the steering wheel is turned and will

not be displayed while the steering wheel is

in the straight-ahead position.

Center guide lines 䊊

Indicates the vehicle’s center to improve

trailer hitching guidance.

The front view will not be displayed when

the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE:

When the monitor displays the front

view and the steering wheel turns about

90 degrees or less from the straight-

ahead position, both the right and left

predicted course lines 䊊

6are displayed.

When the steering wheel turns about 90

degrees or more, a line is displayed only

on the opposite side of the turn.

Front view

SAA1840

Rear view

LHA3920

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

Bird’s-eye view

The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead

view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the

vehicle position and the predicted course

to a parking space.

The vehicle icon 䊊

1shows the position of

the vehicle. Note that the apparent dis-

tance between objects viewed in the bird’s-

eye view may differ somewhat from the

actual distance to the vehicle.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover

䊊

2are indicated in black.

The non-viewable area 䊊

2is highlighted in

yellow for several seconds after the bird’s-

eye view is displayed. It will be shown only

the first time after the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

WARNING

∙ Objects in the bird’s-eye view will ap-

pear further than the actual distance.

∙ Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,

may be misaligned or not displayed at

the seam of the views.

∙ Objects that are above the camera

cannot be displayed.

∙ The view of the bird’s-eye view may be

misaligned when the camera position

alters.

∙ A line on the ground may be mis-

aligned and is not seen as being

straight at the seam of the views. The

misalignment will increase as the line

proceeds away from the vehicle.

Front-side view

Guiding lines

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate

width and the front end of the vehicle are

displayed on the monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line 䊊

1shows the front

part of the vehicle.

The side-of-vehicle line 䊊

2shows the ap-

proximate vehicle width including the out-

side mirrors.

The extensions 䊊

3of both the front 䊊

1and

side 䊊

2lines are shown with a green dotted

line.

LHA4394 LHA2652

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED

AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their loca-

tions on the ground are for approximate

reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill

surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-

ally located at distances different from

those displayed in the monitor relative to

the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When

in doubt, turn around and view the objects

as you are backing up, or park and exit the

vehicle to view the positioning of objects

behind the vehicle.

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

further than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown farther than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

closer than it appears on the monitor.

LHA3672 LHA3673

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

Backing up near a projecting

object

The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the

object in the display. However, the vehicle

may hit the object if it projects over the

actual backing up course.

Backing up behind a projecting

object

The position 䊊

Cis shown farther than the

position 䊊

Bin the display. However, the po-

sition 䊊

Cis actually at the same distance as

the position 䊊

A. The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position 䊊

if the object projects over the actual back-

ing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED

COURSE LINES

WARNING

∙ If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

may be displayed incorrectly.

∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between

the predicted course line and the ac-

tual course line.

∙ If the battery is disconnected or be-

comes discharged, the predicted

course lines may be displayed incor-

rectly. If this occurs, please perform

the following procedures:

– Turn the steering wheel from lock

to lock while the engine is running.

– Drive the vehicle on a straight road

for more than 5 minutes.

∙ When the steering wheel is turned

with the ignition switch in the ACC po-

sition, the predicted course lines may

be displayed incorrectly.

LHA3912 LHA3674

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ There is the possibility that when the

vehicle mirrors are extended for tow-

ing, the mirrors may be shown in the

bird’s-eye view and front side view.

1. Visually check that the parking space is

safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed

on the screen 䊊

Awhen the shift lever is

moved to the R (Reverse) position.

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting

the steering wheel so that the pre-

dicted course lines 䊊

Benter the park-

ing space 䊊

LHA3910 LHA3911

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make

the vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Dparallel

to the parking space 䊊

Cwhile referring

to the predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the shift lever to the

P (Park) position and apply the parking

brake.

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY

With the ignition switch in the ON position,

press the CAMERA button or move the shift

lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate

the Intelligent Around View Monitor.

The Intelligent Around View Monitor dis-

plays different split screen views depend-

ing on the position of the shift lever. Press

the CAMERA button to switch between the

available views.

If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position,

the available views are:

∙ Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen

∙ Rear view/front-side view split screen

If the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the

available views are:

∙ Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen

∙ Front view/front-side view split screen

If the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position,

the only available view is front view/front-

side view split screen.

The display will switch from the Intelligent

Around View Monitor screen when:

∙ The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position

and the vehicle speed increases above

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)

∙ A different screen is selected.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

1. Firmly apply brake and place the shift

lever in R (Reverse).

2. Press the button on the control

panel.

3. The screen will display the Night set-

tings.

4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust

the setting up or down.

5. Press the button again to access

the Auto settings.

LHA4295

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

6. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust

the setting up or down.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings

of the Intelligent Around View Monitor

while the vehicle is moving. Make sure

the parking brake is firmly applied.

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW

MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for Intelligent Around View Monitor.

Failure to operate the vehicle in accor-

dance with these system limitations

could result in serious injury or death.

∙ Do not use the Intelligent Around View

Monitor with the outside mirrors in

the stored position, and make sure

that the tailgate is securely closed

when operating the vehicle using the

Intelligent Around View Monitor.

∙ The apparent distance between ob-

jects viewed on the Intelligent Around

View Monitor differs from the actual

distance.

∙ The cameras are installed on the front

grille, the outside mirrors and above

the rear license plate. Do not put any-

thing on the vehicle that covers the

cameras.

∙ When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the cameras. Otherwise, wa-

ter may enter the camera unit causing

water condensation on the lens, a

malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

LHA3807

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

∙ Do not strike the cameras. They are

precision instruments. Doing so could

cause a malfunction or cause damage

resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

There are some areas where the system

will not show objects and the system does

not warn of moving objects. When in the

front or rear view display, an object below

the bumper or on the ground may not be

viewed 䊊

1. When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall

object near the seam 䊊

2of the camera

viewing areas will not appear in the moni-

tor.

The following are operating limitations and

do not represent a system malfunction:

∙ There may be a delay when switching

between views.

∙ When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not display

objects clearly.

∙ When strong light directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

∙ The screen may flicker under fluores-

cent light.

∙ The colors of objects on the Intelligent

Around View Monitor may differ some-

what from the actual color of objects.

∙ Objects on the Intelligent Around View

Monitor may not be clear and the color

of the object may differ in a dark envi-

ronment.

∙ There may be differences in sharpness

between each camera view of the

bird’s-eye view.

∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.

Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that

has been dampened with a diluted mild

cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry

cloth. System temporarily unavailable

When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen,

there are abnormal conditions in the Intel-

ligent Around View Monitor. This will not

hinder normal driving operation but it is

recommended that the system be in-

spected. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

LHA3591

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the

screen, the camera image may be receiv-

ing temporary electronic disturbances

from surrounding devices. This will not hin-

der normal driving operation but it is rec-

ommended that the system be inspected

if it occurs frequently. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

∙ Do not damage the cameras as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of

the cameras 䊊

1, the Intelligent Around View

Monitor may not display objects clearly.

Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth

dampened with a diluted mild cleaning

agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

LHA3592 LHA3909

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

1. CAMERA button

LHA4092

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)

(if so equipped)

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the Mov-

ing Object Detection system could re-

sult in serious injury or death.

∙ The MOD system is not a substitute

for proper vehicle operation and is not

designed to prevent contact with ob-

jects surrounding the vehicle. When

maneuvering, always use the outside

mirrors and rearview mirror and turn

and check the surroundings to ensure

it is safe to maneuver.

∙ The system is deactivated at speeds

above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reacti-

vated at lower speeds.

∙ The MOD system is not designed to

detect surrounding stationary

objects.

The MOD system can inform the driver of

moving objects near the vehicle when

backing out of garages, maneuvering in

parking lots and in other such instances.

The MOD system detects moving objects

by using image processing technology on

the image shown in the display.

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION

The MOD system will turn on automatically

under the following conditions:

∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position.

∙ When vehicle speed decreases below

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and the

camera screen is displayed.

The MOD system operates in the following

conditions when the camera view is dis-

played:

∙ When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position and the vehicle is

stopped, the MOD system detects mov-

ing objects in the bird’s-eye view. The

MOD system will not operate if the out-

side mirrors are moving in or out, in the

stowed position, or if either front door is

opened.

Front and bird’s-eye views

LHA4190

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

∙ When the shift lever is in the D (Drive)

position and the vehicle speed is below

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the

MOD system detects moving objects in

the front view.

∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position and the vehicle speed is below

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the

MOD system detects moving objects in

the rear view. The MOD system will not

operate if the tailgate is open.

The MOD system does not detect moving

objects in the front-side view. The MOD

icon is not displayed on the screen when in

this view.

When the MOD system detects moving ob-

jects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard

and a yellow frame will be displayed on the

view where the objects are detected. While

the MOD system continues to detect mov-

ing objects, the yellow frame continues to

be displayed.

NOTE:

While the RCTA chime (if so equipped) is

beeping, the MOD system will not chime.

In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame 䊊

1is

displayed on each camera image (front,

rear, right, left) depending on where mov-

ing objects are detected.

The yellow frame 䊊

2is displayed on each

view in the front view and rear view modes.

Rear and bird’s-eye views

LHA4200

Rear and front-side views

LHA4201

Rear-wide view

LHA4242

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

A blue MOD icon 䊊

3is displayed in the view

where the MOD system is operative. A gray

MOD icon is displayed in the view where the

MOD system is not operative.

If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD

icon 䊊

3is not displayed.

TURNING MOD ON AND OFF

Some vehicles include the option to allow

the MOD system to be turned on or off in

the vehicle information display.

To turn the MOD system on or off:

1. Using buttons on the steer-

ing wheel to select “Settings”.

2. Select “Driver Assistance” and press the

ENTER button.

3. Select “Parking Aids”.

4. Toggle ON or OFF “Moving Object” us-

ing the ENTER button.

MOD can also be turned on or off by using

the Parking Sensor (sonar) System OFF

Switch. For additional information, refer to

“Parking Sensor (sonar) System OFF

Switch” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle

in accordance with these system limita-

tions could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ Do not use the MOD system when

towing a trailer. The system may not

function properly.

∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume or open vehicle win-

dow) will interfere with the chime

sound, and it may not be heard.

∙ The MOD system performance will be

limited according to environmental

conditions and surrounding objects

such as:

– When there is low contrast be-

tween background and the moving

objects.

– When there is a blinking source of

light.

– When strong light such as another

vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is

present.

– When camera orientation is not in

its usual position, such as when a

mirror is folded.

– When there is dirt, water drops or

snow on the camera lens.

– When the position of the moving

objects in the display is not

changed.

∙ The MOD system might detect flowing

water droplets on the camera lens,

white smoke from the muffler, mov-

ing shadows, etc.

∙ The MOD system may not function

properly depending on the speed, di-

rection, distance or shape of the mov-

ing objects.

∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the

parts where the camera is installed,

leaving it misaligned or bent, the

sensing zone may be altered and the

MOD system may not detect objects

properly.

∙ When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not dis-

play objects clearly. This is not a

malfunction.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

NOTE:

The blue MOD icon will change to orange

if one of the following has occurred:

∙ When the system is malfunctioning.

∙ When the component temperature

reaches a high level (icon will blink).

∙ When the Rear View camera has de-

tected a blockage (icon will blink).

If the icon light continues to illuminate

orange, have the MOD system checked. It

is recommended that you visit an

NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

∙ Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of

the cameras 䊊

1, the MOD system may not

operate properly. Clean the camera by wip-

ing with a cloth dampened with a diluted

mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a

dry cloth.

LHA3909

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Adjust air flow direction for the driver’s and

passenger’s side vents 䊊

1, center vents 䊊

and rear passengers’ vents (if so equipped)

䊊

3by moving the vent slide and/or vent

assemblies.

WARNING

∙ The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is

running.

∙ Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-

tance of others alone in your vehicle.

Pets should also not be left alone.

They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadvertent

operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the inte-

rior air to become stale and the win-

dows to fog up.

NOTE:

∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-

hicle can build up in the air conditioner

unit. Odor can enter the passenger

compartment through the vents.

LHA3772

VENTS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(manual) (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

∙ When parking, set the heater and air

conditioner controls to turn off air recir-

culation to allow fresh air into the pas-

senger compartment. This should help

reduce odors inside the vehicle.

CONTROLS

1. Fan speed control / system OFF

dial / air conditioning (A/C) button

2. Air flow control buttons

3. Temperature control dial / MAX A/C

button

4. Air recirculation button

5. Outside mirror (if so equipped) de-

froster switch

6. Front windshield defrost button

LHA4127

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on

and off, and controls fan speed.

Fan control dial — OFF Mode

Setting the fan control dial to the off

position will turn off the fan and the air

recirculation indicator light will turn on. To

get fresh air in fan off mode, press

the air recirculation button to turn off

the indicator. In fan off mode, the mode

buttons can be selected to change the air

vent distribution (if the air recirculation

mode is off).

Air flow control buttons

The air flow control buttons allow you to

select the air flow outlets.

MAX

A/C

— Air flows from center and side

vents with maximum cooling.

— Air flows from center and side

vents.

— Air flows from center and side

vents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot

outlets.

— Air flows from defroster out-

lets and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from de-

froster outlets.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to

adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To

lower the temperature, turn the dial to the

left. To increase the temperature, turn the

dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

ON position (Indicator light on)

Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Press the button to the ON position

when:

∙ driving on a dusty road.

∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering

passenger compartment.

∙ for maximum cooling when using the

air conditioner.

OFF position (Indicator light off)

If outside air is desired in off mode, press

the recirculation button until the indicator

turns off.

If fogging occurs, press the front

windshield defrost button.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan control

dial to the desired position and press

the button to turn on the air condi-

tioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press

the button again.

The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Outside mirror defroster (if so

equipped)

For additional information, refer to “Rear

window and / or outside mirror (if so

equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to

the foot outlets. Some air also flows from

the defrost outlets.

1. Press the button to the OFF posi-

tion for normal heating. The indicator

light on the button will go off.

2. Press the air flow control button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side

and center vents.

1. Press the button to the OFF posi-

tion. The indicator light on the

button will go off.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost

outlets to defrost/defog the windows.

1. Press the defrost/defog button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot position.

∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the

windows, turn the fan control dial

to the highest setting and the tempera-

ture control to the full HOT position.

∙ When the position is selected, the

air conditioner automatically turns on if

the outside temperature is more than

36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air

which helps defog the windshield.

The mode automatically turns off,

allowing outside air to be drawn into the

passenger compartment to further im-

prove the defogging performance. Un-

der this condition, the indicator light on

the A/C button indicator will not turn on

if the user had selected the A/C off.

Turning off the air conditioning via the

A/C button is not allowed In this mode. If

the A/C button indicator was on when

entering this mode, and the A/C button

is selected in this mode, the A/C button

indicator will turn off, but the A/C com-

pressor will still be automatically en-

abled. The recirculation button indica-

tor will not illuminate if the button is

pressed in this mode.

Bi-level heating

The bi-level mode directs warmed air to

the side and center vents and to the front

and rear floor outlets.

1. Press the button to the OFF posi-

tion. The indicator light on

the button will go off.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the de-

sired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs

the windshield.

1. Press the air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the de-

sired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot position.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ When the position is selected, the

air conditioner automatically turns on if

the outside temperature is more than

36°F (2°C). If the air flow control

button is selected for more than 1 min-

ute, the air conditioning system will

continue to operate until the fan

control dial is turned to OFF, the vehicle

is shut off, or the A/C button is used to

turn off the compressor even if the air

flow control dial is turned to a position

other than the position. This de-

humidifies the air which helps defog the

windshield. Under this condition, the in-

dicator light on the A/C button indicator

will not turn on if the user had selected

A/C off. Turning off the air conditioning

via the A/C button is not allowed in this

mode. If the A/C button indicator was

on when entering this mode, and the

A/C button is selected in this mode, the

A/C compressor will still be automati-

cally enabled. It is recommended

that mode be turned off for maxi-

mum defogging. The recirculation but-

ton can be selected in this mode to

block outside odors. However, for maxi-

mum defogging in this mode, it is rec-

ommended to turn recirculation off

when possible.

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades

and air inlet in front of the windshield.

This improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, turn the fan control

dial to the desired position, and press

the button to activate the air condi-

tioner. When the air conditioner is on, cool-

ing and dehumidifying functions are

added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify

the air.

1. Press the button to the OFF posi-

tion.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Press the button.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the cold position.

∙ For quick cooling when the outside

temperature is high, press the

button to the ON position. Be sure to

return the to the OFF position for

normal cooling. The indicator light on

the button will go off. You may

also select MAX A/C for quick cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify

the air.

1. Press the button to the OFF posi-

tion. The indicator light on the

button will go off.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the de-

sired position.

4. Press the button on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows

and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the front defroster button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the de-

sired position.

When the or positions are se-

lected, the air conditioner automatically

turns on if the outside temperature is more

than 36°F (2°C). The air conditioning system

will continue to operate until the fan

control dial is turned to OFF, the air condi-

tioner is turned OFF, or the vehicle is shut

off, even if a position other than the

air flow control button is selected. Under

this condition, the indicator light on the A/C

button indicator will not turn off if the user

had selected A/C off. Turning off the air

conditioning via the A/C button is not al-

lowed in this mode. If the A/C button indi-

cator was on when entering this mode,and

the A/C button is selected in this mode, the

A/C button indicator will turn off, but the

A/C compressor will still be automatically

enabled. This dehumidifies the air which

helps defog the windshield. The

mode automatically turns off, allowing out-

side air to be drawn into the passenger

compartment to further improve the de-

fogging performance.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Operating tips

∙ Keep the windows closed while the air

conditioner is in operation.

∙ After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or

3 minutes with the windows open to

vent hot air from the passenger com-

partment. Then, close the windows.

This allows the air conditioner to cool

the interior more quickly.

∙The air conditioning system should

be operated for approximately

10 minutes at least once a month.

This helps prevent damage to the

system due to lack of lubrication.

∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from

the ventilators in hot, humid conditions

as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not

indicate a malfunction.

∙If the engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates engine coolant tem-

perature over the normal range, turn

the air conditioner off. For additional

information, refer to “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTS

The following charts show the button and

dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK

heating, cooling or defrosting. For addi-

tional information on heating and cooling,

refer to “Heater and air conditioner

(manual)” in this section. The air recircula-

tion ( ) button should always be in

the OFF position for heating and defrost-

ing.

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4486 LHA4487

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

LHA4488 LHA4489

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4490

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

1. Front defroster button

2. Temperature control dial (driver’s

side)/AUTO button

3. Display screen

4. Temperature control dial (passen-

ger’s side)/DUAL button

5. Fresh air intake button

6. Air recirculation button

7. A/C air conditioner button

8. MODE (manual air flow control)

button

9. Fan speed control buttons

10. ON-OFF button

11. Rear window

and/or outside mirror (if so

equipped) defroster switch

WARNING

∙ The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is

running.

∙ Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-

tance of others alone in your vehicle.

Pets should also not be left alone.

They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadvertent

operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the inte-

rior air to become stale and the win-

dows to fog up.

LHA3575

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(automatic) (if so equipped)

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-

hicle can build up in the air conditioner

unit. Odor can enter the passenger

compartment through the vents.

∙ When parking, set the heater and air

conditioner controls to turn off air recir-

culation to allow fresh air into the pas-

senger compartment. This should help

reduce odors inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling or heating (auto)

This mode may be normally used all year

round as the system automatically works

to keep a constant temperature. Air flow

distribution and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

1. Press the AUTO button on.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or

right to set the desired temperature.

Driver and passenger temperatures

can be set independently. Press the

DUAL button to activate dual climate

control functions. Turn the passenger’s

side temperature control dial to the left

or right to set the desired passenger’s

temperature.

∙ Adjust the temperature dial to about

75°F (24°C) for normal operation.

∙ The temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained auto-

matically. Air flow distribution, fan speed

and A/C on/off are also controlled auto-

matically. The A/C button indicator will

remain in the last user setting. Under

this condition, the indicator light on the

A/C button indicator will not turn on if

the user had not selected the A/C but-

ton off. Turning off the air conditioning

via the A/C button is not allowed in this

mode. If the A/C button indicator was

on when entering this mode, and the

A/C button is selected in this mode, the

A/C button indicator will turn off, but the

A/C compressor will still be automati-

cally enabled. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Air flow control” in this sec-

tion.

To turn off the compressor, turn off auto

mode, then turn the A/C on then off

until the A/C button indicator is not lit.

∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from

the vents in hot, humid conditions as

the air is cooled rapidly. This does not

indicate a malfunction.

Heating (A/C OFF)

The air conditioner does not activate.When

you need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to

the left or the right to set the desired

temperature. Driver and passenger

temperatures can be set indepen-

dently. Press the DUAL button to acti-

vate dual climate control functions.

Turn the passenger’s side temperature

control dial to the left or right to set the

desired passenger’s temperature.

∙ The temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained auto-

matically. Air flow distribution and fan

speed are also controlled automatically.

∙ Do not set the temperature lower than

the outside air temperature. Otherwise,

the system may not work properly.

∙ Not recommended if windows fog up.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

Dehumidified defrosting or

defogging

1. Press the defroster control but-

ton to turn the system on. The indicator

light in the button will illuminate.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or

right to set the desired temperature.

∙ To quickly remove ice from the outside

of the windows, press the fan

speed control button to the maximum

position.

∙ As soon as possible after the wind-

shield is clean, press the AUTO button to

return to the auto mode.

∙ When the control is activated, the

air conditioner will automatically be

turned on at outside temperatures

above 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the

air which helps defog the windshield.

Under this condition, the indicator light

on the A/C button indicator will not turn

on if the user had selected A/C off. Turn-

ing off the air condition via the A/C but-

ton is not allowed in this mode. If the

A/C button indicator was on when en-

tering this mode, and the A/C button is

selected in this mode, the A/C com-

pressor will still be automatically en-

abled. The air recirculation mode auto-

matically turns off, allowing outside air

to be drawn into the passenger com-

partment to further improve the defog-

ging performance.

Remote Engine Start with

Intelligent Climate Control (if so

equipped)

Vehicles equipped with automatic climate

controls and Remote Engine Start function

may go into automatic heating or cooling

mode when Remote Engine Start is acti-

vated depending on outside and cabin

temperatures. During this period, the cli-

mate control display and buttons will be

inoperable until the ignition switch is

turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrost-

ing mode, the rear window defroster and

heated steering wheel (if so equipped) may

be activated automatically.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Press the fan speed control buttons

to manually control the fan speed.

Press the AUTO button to return to auto-

matic control of the fan speed.

When adjusting the manual fan from auto

mode, the outlet direction (floor,

floor/defrost, vent, bi-level) will still auto-

matically change. To fix the outlet to a

manual mode, select the desired air flow

location using the MODE button.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to

adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To

lower the temperature, turn the dial to the

left. To increase the temperature, turn the

dial to the right. Temperature can be ad-

justed on the driver’s and passenger’s side.

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Air recirculation

Press the air recirculation button to

recirculate interior air inside the vehicle

when:

∙ driving on a dusty road

∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering

passenger compartment.

∙ for maximum cooling when using the

air conditioning system.

Press the AUTO button to return to auto-

matic mode.

The air recirculation button will not be acti-

vated when the air conditioner is in

mode.

When the outside temperature exceeds

70°F (21°C), the air conditioning system may

default to air recirculation mode automati-

cally to reduce overall power consumption.

To exit air recirculation mode, select the

fresh air intake button to enter fresh air

mode.

In Floor/Defrost mode, the recirculation

button can be selected to block outside

odors. However, for maximum defogging in

this mode, it is recommended to turn recir-

culation off when possible.

Fresh air intake

Press the fresh air intake button to

draw outside air into the passenger com-

partment.

Automatic intake air control

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be

controlled automatically. When the outside

temperature exceeds 70°F (21°C), the air

conditioning system may default to air re-

circulation mode automatically to reduce

overall power consumption. To exit air re-

circulation mode, select the fresh air intake

button to enter fresh air mode. The air re-

circulation indicator will turn off, the fresh

air indicator will turn on.

To manually control the intake air, press

the fresh air intake button. To return

to the automatic control mode if

the fresh air indicator is illuminated,

press and hold the fresh air intake

button for about 2 seconds. The fresh air

indicator and air recirculation indicator

lights will flash twice,and then the intake air

will be controlled automatically. To return

to the automatic control mode if

the air recirculation icon is illumi-

nated, press and hold the air recircu-

lation button for about 2 seconds.

The air recirculation indicator

and fresh air intake indicator lights

will flash twice and the intake air will be

controlled automatically.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan speed

control dial to the desired position and

press the button to turn on the air

conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,

press the button again.

The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Air flow control

Press the MODE button to manually control

air flow and select the air outlet.

— Air flows from center and side

vents.

— Air flows from center and side

vents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot

outlets.

— Air flows from defroster and

foot outlets.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

To turn system off

Press the ON-OFF button.

Rear window and / or outside

mirror (if so equipped) defroster

switch

For additional information, refer to “Rear

window and / or outside mirror (if so

equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

OPERATING TIPS

The sunload sensor (if so equipped) 䊊

1, lo-

cated on the top center of the instrument

panel, helps the system maintain a con-

stant temperature. Do not put anything on

or around this sensor.

∙ When the climate system is in auto-

matic operation and the engine coolant

temperature and outside air tempera-

ture are low, the air flow outlet may de-

fault to defroster mode for a maximum

of 2 minutes 30 seconds. This is not a

malfunction. After the engine coolant

temperature warms up, the air flow out-

let will return to foot mode and opera-

tion will continue normally.

∙ When the outside and interior cabin

temperatures are moderate to high, the

intake setting may default to turn off air

recirculation to allow fresh air into the

passenger compartment. You may no-

tice air flow from the foot mode, bi-level

mode, or side demist vent outlets for a

maximum of 15 seconds. This may oc-

cur when previous climate setting was

system off. This is not a malfunction.

After the initial warm air is expelled, the

intake will return to automatic control,

air flow outlet will return to previous set-

tings, and operation will continue nor-

mally. To exit, press any climate control

button.

∙ Keep the windows closed while the air

conditioner is in operation.

LHA4126

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ If you feel that the air flow mode you

have selected and the outlets the air is

coming out do not match, select

the mode.

∙ When you change the air flow mode,

you may feel air flow from the feet vents

for just a moment. This is not a mal-

function.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN

vehicle is charged with a refrigerant de-

signed with the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the

earth’s ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant

is required when servicing your NISSAN air

conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or

lubricants will cause severe damage to

your air conditioner system. For additional

information, refer to “Air conditioner sys-

tem refrigerant and oil recommendations”

in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer to service your “environmentally

friendly” air conditioner system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-

frigerant under high pressure. To avoid

personal injury, any air conditioner ser-

vice should be done only by an experi-

enced technician with proper

equipment.

RADIO

With the ignition is placed in the ACC or ON

position, press the or POWER button

to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio

with the engine not running, the ignition

should be placed in the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station sig-

nal strength, distance from radio transmit-

ter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other

external influences. Intermittent changes

in reception quality normally are caused by

these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-

hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to en-

hance radio reception. These circuits are

designed to extend reception range, and to

enhance the quality of that reception.

However, there are some general charac-

teristics of both FM and AM radio signals

that can affect radio reception quality in a

moving vehicle, even when the finest

equipment is used. These characteristics

are completely normal in a given reception

area and do not indicate any malfunction

in your NISSAN radio system.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

Reception conditions will constantly

change because of vehicle movement.

Buildings, terrain, signal distance and inter-

ference from other vehicles can work

against ideal reception. Described below

are some of the factors that can affect your

radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location

may reduce or eliminate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 –

30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single

channel) FM having slightly more range

than stereo FM. External influences may

sometimes interfere with FM station re-

ception even if the FM station is within 25

mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is

directly related to the distance between

the transmitter and receiver. FM signals fol-

low a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of

the same characteristics as light. For ex-

ample, they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away

from a station transmitter, the signals will

tend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interfer-

ence from buildings, large hills or due to

antenna position (usually in conjunction

with increased distance from the station

transmitter), static or flutter can be heard.

This can be reduced by adjusting the treble

control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflec-

tive characteristics of FM signals,direct and

reflected signals reach the receiver at the

same time. The signals may cancel each

other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss

of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency,

can bend around objects and skip along

the ground. In addition, the signals can be

bounced off the ionosphere and bent back

to earth. Because of these characteristics,

AM signals are also subject to interference

as they travel from transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas

with many tall buildings. It can also occur

for several seconds during ionospheric tur-

bulence even in areas where no obstacles

exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic

lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so

equipped)

When the satellite radio is used for the first

time or the battery has been replaced, the

satellite radio may not work properly. This

is not a malfunction. Wait more than

10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the

vehicle outside of any metal or large build-

ing for satellite radio to receive all of the

necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available and

“NO SAT” is displayed when the SAT band

option is selected unless optional satellite

receiver and antenna are installed and a

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscrip-

tion is active. Satellite radio is not available

in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be af-

fected if cargo carried on the roof blocks

the satellite radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satel-

lite antenna.

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

A build up of ice on the satellite radio an-

tenna can affect satellite radio perfor-

mance. Remove the ice to restore satellite

radio reception.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

∙ Do not force a compact disc into the

CD insert slot. This could damage the

CD and/or CD player.

∙ Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or

CD player.

∙ Only one CD can be loaded into the CD

player at a time.

∙Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc

or packaging.

∙During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the

humidity. If this occurs, remove the

CD and dehumidify or ventilate the

player completely.

∙The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

∙The CD player sometimes cannot

function when the compartment

temperature is extremely high or low.

Decrease/increase the temperature

before use.

LHA0099

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

∙Do not expose the CD to direct sun-

light.

∙CDs that are in poor condition or are

dirty, scratched or covered with fin-

gerprints may not work properly.

∙The following CDs may not work

properly:

∙Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

∙Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

∙Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

∙Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunc-

tion:

∙3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

∙CDs that are not round

∙CDs with a paper label

∙CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

∙This audio system can only play pre-

recorded CDs. It has no capability to

record or burn CDs.

∙If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC

∙Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-

rectly (the label side is facing up,

etc.).

∙Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT

This is an error due to excessive tem-

perature inside the player. Remove

the CD by pressing the EJECT button.

After a short time, reinsert the CD.

The CD can be played when the tem-

perature of the player returns to nor-

mal.

UNPLAYABLE

The file is unplayable in this audio

system (only MP3 or WMA CD).

Compact disc with MP3 or WMA

Terms

∙ MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well-known compressed digital

audio file format. This format allows for

near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction

of the size of normal audio files. MP3

conversion of an audio track from CD-

ROM can reduce the file size by approxi-

mately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no per-

ceptible loss in quality. MP3

compression removes the redundant

and irrelevant parts of a sound signal

that the human ear doesn’t hear.

∙

WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a

compressed audio format created by Mi-

crosoft as an alternative to MP3. TheWMA

codec offers greater file compression

than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of

more digital audio tracks in the same

amount of space when compared to

MP3s at the same level of quality.

∙ Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number

of bits per second used by a digital mu-

sic file. The size and quality of a com-

pressed digital audio file is determined

by the bit rate used when encoding the

file.

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ Sampling frequency — Sampling fre-

quency is the rate at which the samples

of a signal are converted from analog to

digital (A/D conversion) per second.

∙ Multisession — Multisession is one of

the methods for writing data to media.

Writing data once to the media is called

a single session, and writing more than

once is called a multisession.

∙ ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file

that contains information about the

digital music file such as song title, art-

ist, encoding bit rate, track time dura-

tion, etc.ID3 tag information is displayed

on the Artist/song title line on the dis-

play.

* Windows® and Windows Media® are reg-

istered trademarks and trademarks in the

United States of America and other coun-

tries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.

Playback order

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or

WMA files is as illustrated.

∙ The names of folders not containing

MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the

display.

∙ If there is a file in the top level of the disc,

“Root Folder” is displayed.

∙ The playback order is the order in which

the files were written by the writing soft-

ware. Therefore, the files might not play

in the desired order.

Playback order chart

WHA1078

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

Specification chart

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not

supported.

Supported

versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*2 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big

Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of char-

acters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long

time before the music

starts playing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music

starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not

match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit

rate files

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to

the next song when play-

ing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright

protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back

in the desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the de-

sired order.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

Connection Port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

∙ Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB port.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the

port.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB de-

vice. USB devices should be purchased

separately as necessary.

This system cannot be used to format USB

devices. To format a USB device, use a per-

sonal computer.

In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the

front seats plays only sound without im-

ages for regulatory reasons, even when the

vehicle is parked.

This system supports various USB

memory devices, USB hard drives and

iPod® players. Some USB devices may not

be supported by this system.

∙ Partitioned USB devices may not play

correctly.

∙ Some characters used in other lan-

guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may

not appear properly in the display. Using

English language characters with a USB

device is recommended.

General notes for USB use

∙ For additional information, refer to your

device manufacturer’s owner informa-

tion regarding the proper use and care

of the device.

Notes for iPod® use

iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.

∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may

cause a checkmark to be displayed on

and off (flickering). Always make sure

that the iPod® is connected properly.

∙ An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may re-

main in fast forward or rewind mode if it

is connected during a seek operation. In

this case, please manually reset the

iPod®.

∙ An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will

continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is

disconnected during a seek operation.

∙ An incorrect song title may appear

when the Play Mode is changed while

using an iPod® nano (2nd Generation).

∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same

order as they appear on an iPod®.

∙ Large video files cause slow responses

in an iPod®. The vehicle center display

may momentarily black out, but will

soon recover.

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ If an iPod® automatically selects large

video files while in the shuffle mode, the

vehicle center display may momen-

tarily black out, but will soon recover.

Bluetooth® streaming audio

∙ Some Bluetooth® audio devices may

not be recognized by the in-vehicle au-

dio system.

∙ It is necessary to set up the wireless

connection between a compatible

Bluetooth® audio device and the in-

vehicle Bluetooth® module before using

the Bluetooth® audio.

∙ Operating procedure of the Bluetooth®

audio will vary depending on the de-

vices. Make sure how to operate your

audio device before using it with this

system.

∙ The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped

under the following conditions:

∙ Receiving a call on the Hands-Free

Phone System.

∙ Checking the connection to the

hands-free phone.

∙ Do not place the Bluetooth® audio de-

vice in an area surrounded by metal or

far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth®

module to prevent tone quality degra-

dation and wireless connection disrup-

tion.

∙ While an audio device is connected

through the Bluetooth® wireless con-

nection, the battery power of the device

may discharge quicker than usual.

∙ This system supports the Bluetooth®

Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and licensed

to Visteon and

Bosch.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)

For additional information, refer to “Audio

operation precautions” in this section.

1. CD eject button

2. CD button

3. Display screen

4. CD insert slot

5. SEEK button

6. SCAN button

7. TRACK button

8. BACK button

9. iPod MENU button

10. ENTER/SETTING button /

TUNE/FOLDER knob

11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

12. RDM (random) button

13. RPT (repeat) button

14. (power) button / VOL (volume)

control knob

15. DISP (display) button

16. MEDIA button

17. FM•AM button

Audio main operation

(power) button / VOL (volume)

control knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the (power) but-

ton while the system is off to call up the

mode (radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio,

USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately

before the system was turned off.

LHA4290

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

To turn the system off, press the

(power) button.

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to ad-

just the volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed

Sensitive Volume. When this feature is ac-

tive, the audio volume changes as the driv-

ing speed changes.

ENTER/SETTING button

Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show

the Settings screen on the display. Turn the

TUNE/FOLDER knob to navigate the op-

tions and then press the ENTER/SETTING

button to make a selection.

Audio

Bluetooth Adjusts Bluetooth® settings.

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Brightness and Contrast Adjust the brightness or contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Clock adjust Press the ENTER/SETTING button to highlight the hours or minutes and then use the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the value.

Press the ENTER/SETTING button again to set the value.

On-Screen Clock Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.

RDS Display Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.

Speed Sensitive Vol. (vol-

ume) Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the vehicle

increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle

speed.

AUX Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0 provides no additional

boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.

Language select Select the desired language for the system from the available options.

Auto Source Change Select ON or OFF for Auto Source Change. With Auto Source Change ON: when device is plugged into USB port, radio will auto-

matically switch to USB source. With Auto Source Change OFF: when device is plugged into USB port, radio will stay on cur-

rently selected source.

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/FOLDER control knob

to select the item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING

button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

iPod MENU button

This button can only be used for iPod® op-

erations.For additional information, refer to

“iPod® player operation (models without

navigation system)” in this section.

DISP (display) button

The DISP (display) button turns the display

screen on or off.

BACK button

Press the BACK button to return to

the previous menu screen.

FM/AM radio operation

FM·AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change the

band as follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source

playing will automatically be turned off and

the last radio station played will begin play-

ing.

The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown

on the screen during FM stereo reception.

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,

the radio automatically changes from ste-

reo to monaural reception.

TUNE/FOLDER knob (Tuning)

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to the left or

right for manual tuning.

SEEK tuning

Press the or SEEK buttons to

tune from low to high or high to low fre-

quencies and to stop at the next broad-

casting station.

SCAN tuning

Press the SCAN button to stop at each

broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN

will appear on the screen while the radio is

scan tuning.

Pressing the SCAN button again during this

5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and

the radio will remain tuned to that station. If

the SCAN button is not pressed within

5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Six stations can be set for the AM band.

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band

(six for FM1, six for FM2).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the FM·AM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using

the SEEK button or the

TRACK button. Press and hold any of

the desired station memory buttons (1

– 6) until the preset number is updated

on the display and a beep is heard.

3. Programming is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the

fuse opens, the radio memory will be can-

celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-

tions.

Compact disc (CD) player

operation

If the radio is already operating,it automati-

cally turns off and the compact disc begins

to play.

MEDIA button

With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button

until the CD mode is displayed on the

screen.

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain

text may be displayed on the screen if the

CD has been encoded with text informa-

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

tion. Depending on how the MP3/WMA CD

is encoded, information such as Artist,

Song and Folder will be displayed.

The track number and the total number of

tracks in the current folder or on the cur-

rent disc are displayed on the screen as

well.

SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or

Fast Forward) button

Press and hold the or

SEEK/TRACK button for 1.5 seconds while

the compact disc is playing to reverse or

fast forward the track being played. The

compact disc plays at an increased speed

while reversing or fast forwarding. When

the button is released, the compact disc

returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/TRACK button

Press the SEEK/TRACK button while a

CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to

the beginning of the current track. Press

the SEEK/TRACK button several times

to skip backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/TRACK button while a

CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance

one track. Press the SEEK/TRACK but-

ton several times to skip forward several

tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped,

the first track on the disc is played. If the last

track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is

skipped, the first track of the next folder is

played.

TUNE/FOLDER knob (MP3/WMA CD only)

If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is

playing, turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to

change folders. Turn the knob to the left to

skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right

to skip ahead a folder.

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT (repeat) button is pressed

while a compact disc is playing, the play

pattern can be changed as follows:

CD:

1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →OFF

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be

repeated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be

repeated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is dis-

played on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

RDM (random) button

When the RDM (random) button is pressed

while a compact disc is playing, the play

pattern can be changed as follows:

CD:

1 Disc Random ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Disc Random →1 Folder Random →OFF

1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be

played randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current

folder will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is dis-

played on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

CD EJECT button

When the CD EJECT button is pressed

with a compact disc loaded, the compact

disc will eject and the last source will be

played.

When the CD EJECT button is pressed

twice with a compact disc loaded, the

compact disc will be ejected further for

easier CD removal. If the disc is not re-

moved within 20 seconds, the disc will re-

load.

Additional features

For additional information, refer to “iPod®

player operation without Navigation Sys-

tem” regarding the iPod® player available

with this system in this section.

For additional information, refer to “USB

(Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port

(models without Navigation System)” re-

garding the USB connection port available

with this system in this section.

For additional information, refer to

“Bluetooth® streaming audio without Navi-

gation System” about the Bluetooth® audio

interface available with this system in this

section.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type

A) (if so equipped)

For all operation precautions, refer to “Au-

dio operation precautions” in this section.

1. CD eject button

2. XM button*

3. Display screen

4. CD insert slot

LHA4300

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5. SEEK button

6. SCAN button

7. CAT button

8. BACK button

9. iPod MENU button

10. ENTER/SETTING button /

TUNE/SCROLL knob

11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

12. RDM (random) button

13. RPT (repeat) button

14. (power) button / VOL (volume)

control knob

15. DISP (display) button

16. MEDIA button

17. FM•AM button

*No satellite radio reception is available

when the XM button is pressed to access

satellite radio stations unless optional sat-

ellite receiver and antenna are installed

and an SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service

subscription is active. Satellite radio is not

available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Audio main operation

(power) button / VOL (volume)

control knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the (power) but-

ton while the system is off to call up the

mode (radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio,

USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately

before the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the

(power) button.

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to ad-

just the volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed

Sensitive Volume. When this feature is ac-

tive, the audio volume changes as the driv-

ing speed changes.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

ENTER/SETTING button

Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show

the Settings screen on the display. Turn the

TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the op-

tions and then press the ENTER/SETTING

button to make a selection.

Audio

Bluetooth Adjusts Bluetooth® settings

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right

speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear

speakers.

Brightness Adjust the brightness to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Contrast Adjust the contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Clock adjust Press the ENTER/SETTING button to highlight the hours or minutes and then use the TUNE/

SCROLL knob to adjust the value. Press the ENTER/SETTING button again to set the value.

On-Screen Clock Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.

RDS Display Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.

Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as

the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the

more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.

AUX Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of

0 provides no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.

Language Select Select the desired language for the system from the available options.

Auto Source Change Select ON or OFF for Auto Source Change. With Auto Source Change ON: when device is plugged

into USB port, radio will automatically switch to USB source. With Auto Source Change OFF: when

device is plugged into USB port, radio will stay on currently selected source.

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob

to select the item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING

button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display

will automatically reappear.

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

iPod MENU button

This button can only be used for iPod® op-

erations.For additional information, refer to

“iPod® player operation (models without

navigation system)” in this section.

DISP (display) button

The DISP (display) button turns the display

screen on or off.

BACK button

Press the BACK button to return to

the previous menu screen.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM·AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change the

band as follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source

playing will automatically be turned off and

the last radio station played will begin play-

ing.

The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown

on the screen during FM stereo reception.

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,

the radio automatically changes from ste-

reo to monaural reception.

XM band select

Press the XM button to change the band as

follows:

XM1* →XM2* →XM3* →XM1 (satellite, if so

equipped)

When the XM button is pressed while the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,

the radio will come on at the station last

played.

The last station played will also come on

when the VOL (volume)/ (power) con-

trol knob/button is pressed on.

*When the XM button is pressed, the satel-

lite radio reception will not be available un-

less an optional satellite receiver and an-

tenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite

Radio service subscription is active. Satel-

lite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii

and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the XM

button is pressed, the compact disc will

automatically be turned off and the last

radio station played will come on.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning)

Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or

right for manual tuning.

SEEK tuning

Press the SEEK button or CAT

button to tune from low to high or high to

low frequencies and to stop at the next

broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning

Press the SCAN button to stop at each

broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN

will appear on the screen while the radio is

scan tuning.

Pressing the SCAN button again during this

5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and

the radio will remain tuned to that station. If

the SCAN button is not pressed within

5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Six stations can be set for the AM band.

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band

(six for FM1, six for FM2).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the FM·AM button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

2. Tune to the desired station using

the or SEEK/CAT button.

Press and hold any of the desired sta-

tion memory buttons (1 – 6) until the

preset number is updated on the dis-

play and a beep is heard.

3. Programming is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the

fuse opens, the radio memory will be can-

celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-

tions.

Compact disc (CD) player

operation

If the radio is already operating,it automati-

cally turns off and the compact disc begins

to play.

MEDIA button

With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button

until the CD mode is displayed on the

screen.

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain

text may be displayed on the screen if the

CD has been encoded with text informa-

tion. Depending on how the MP3/WMA CD

is encoded, information such as Artist,

Song and Folder will be displayed.

The track number and the total number of

tracks in the current folder or on the cur-

rent disc are displayed on the screen as

well.

SEEK/CAT (Reverse or

Fast Forward) button

Press and hold the or

SEEK/CAT button for 1.5 seconds while the

compact disc is playing to reverse or fast

forward the track being played. The com-

pact disc plays at an increased speed while

reversing or fast forwarding. When the but-

ton is released, the compact disc returns to

normal play speed.

SEEK/CAT button

Press the SEEK/CAT button while a

CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to

the beginning of the current track. Press

the SEEK/CAT button several times to

skip backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CAT button while a

CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance

one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button

several times to skip forward several

tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped,

the first track on the disc is played. If the last

track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is

skipped, the first track of the next folder is

played.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only)

If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is

playing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to

change folders. Turn the knob to the left to

skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right

to skip ahead a folder.

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT (repeat) button is pressed

while a compact disc is playing, the play

pattern can be changed as follows:

CD:

1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →OFF

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be

repeated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be

repeated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is dis-

played on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

RDM (random) button

When the RDM (random) button is pressed

while a compact disc is playing, the play

pattern can be changed as follows:

CD:

1 Disc Random ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Disc Random →1 Folder Random →OFF

1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be

played randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current

folder will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is dis-

played on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

CD EJECT button

When the CD EJECT button is pressed

with a compact disc loaded, the compact

disc will eject and the last source will be

played.

When the CD EJECT button is pressed

twice with a compact disc loaded, the

compact disc will be ejected further for

easier CD removal. If the disc is not re-

moved within 20 seconds, the disc will re-

load.

Additional features

For additional information, refer to “iPod®

player operation without Navigation Sys-

tem” regarding the iPod® player available

with this system in this section.

For additional information, refer to “USB

(Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port

(models without Navigation System)” re-

garding the USB connection port available

with this system in this section.

For additional information, refer to

“Bluetooth® streaming audio without Navi-

gation System” about the Bluetooth® audio

interface available with this system in this

section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type

B) (if so equipped)

1. POWER button / VOLUME control knob

2. CD eject button

3. CD insert slot

4. ENTER/AUDIO button/TUNE/SCROLL

knob

5. BACK button

6. button

7. TRACK button

8. SEEK button

9. Display screen

10. AUX button

11. CD button

12. FM-AM button

13. SXM button*

The [ ] button launches the Smart-

phone Integration Mode. For additional in-

formation, refer to “NissanConnect® Mobile

Apps” in this section.

*No satellite radio reception is available

when the SXM button is pressed to access

satellite radio stations unless optional sat-

ellite receiver and antenna are installed

and an SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service

subscription is active. Satellite radio is not

available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

For additional information, refer to “Audio

operation precautions” in this section.

LHA3906

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Audio main operation

POWER button/VOLUME control knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, and then press the POWER button

while the system is off to call up the mode

(radio or CD) which was playing immedi-

ately before the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the POWER

button.

Turn the VOLUME control knob to adjust

the volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed

Sensitive Volume for audio. The audio vol-

ume changes as the driving speed

changes.

Audio settings

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Audio” key.

Use the touch-screen to adjust the follow-

ing items to the desired setting:

Audio

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right

speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Speed Sensitive Vol. Adjusts the Speed Sensitive Volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the

speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the

volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.

AUX Volume Level Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Avail-

able options are Low (Quiet), Medium, and High (Loud).

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/AUDIO button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

the item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/AUDIO button until

the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will

automatically reappear.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

SXM settings

To view the SXM settings:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “SXM” key.

The signal strength, activation status and

other information are displayed on the

screen.

AUX button

The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any

standard analog audio input such as from

a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3

player or a laptop computer. Press the AUX

button to play a compatible device

plugged into the AUX IN jack.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM·AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change the

band as follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source

playing will automatically be turned off and

the last radio station played will begin play-

ing.

SXM band select

Pressing the SXM button will change the

band as follows:

SXM1* →SXM2*→SXM3* →SXM1* (satellite, if

so equipped)

When the SXM button is pressed while the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,

the radio will come on at the last station

played.

The last station played will also come on

when the VOL (volume) control knob is

pressed to turn the radio on.

*When the SXM button is pressed, the sat-

ellite radio mode will be skipped unless an

optional satellite receiver and antenna are

installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radio

service subscription is active. Satellite radio

is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the SXM

button is pressed, the compact disc will

automatically be turned off and the last

radio station played will come on.

While the radio is in SXM mode, the opera-

tion can be controlled through the touch-

screen. Touch the “Channels” key to display

a list of channels. Touch a channel dis-

played on the list to change to that chan-

nel. Touch the “Categories” key to display a

list of categories. Touch a category dis-

played on the list to display options within

that category.

Tuning with the touch-screen

When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be

tuned using the touch-screen. To bring up

the visual tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the

lower right corner of the screen. A screen

appears with a bar running from low fre-

quencies on the left to high frequencies on

the right. Touch the screen at the location

of the frequency you wish to tune and the

station will change to that frequency. To

return to the regular radio display screen,

touch the “OK” key.

Tuning with the TUNE knob

The radio can also be manually tuned us-

ing the TUNE knob. When in FM or AM mode,

turn the TUNE knob to the left for lower

frequencies or to the right for higher fre-

quencies. When in SXM mode, turn the

TUNE knob to change the channel.

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SEEK/TRACK tuning

When in FM or AM mode, press the

SEEK button or TRACK button to tune

from low to high or high to low frequencies

and to stop at the next broadcasting sta-

tion.

When in SXM mode, press the SEEK

button or TRACK button to change

the category.

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band

(6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be

set for the AM band. Eighteen stations can

be set for the SXM band (6 for SXM1, 6 for

SXM2 and 6 for SXM3).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the FM·AM select button or

choose the radio band SXM1, SXM2 and

SXM3 using the SXM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using

manual or seek tuning. Press and hold

any of the desired station memory but-

tons (1 – 6) until a beep sound is heard.

3. The channel indicator will then come

on and the sound will resume. Pro-

gramming is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the

fuse opens, the radio memory will be can-

celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-

tions.

Presets can also be selected by touching

the desired preset number on the screen.

LHA2899

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

Smart Favorites Preset Setup (if

so equipped)

The Smart Favorites feature allows the

user to designate presets, within the SXM1,

SXM2 and SXM3 bands, as their Smart Fa-

vorites. When any of the Smart Favorite

presets are selected, the current track on

that station will play from the beginning of

the song.

To program a Smart Favorite preset:

1. Press the SXM button.

2. Touch the “Setup” key.

3. Touch the “Tune Start” key to activate

(ON) or deactivate (OFF) Smart Favor-

ites.

4. Touch the “Add Preset” key to select an

available preset.

For additional information, refer to “1 to 6

Station memory operations” in this section.

NOTE:

• Smart Favorites will start functioning

only after the audio unit is turned on for

a few minutes.

• Tune Start is supported for music chan-

nels only.

Replay Screen

The Replay Screen gives the user the ability

to replay, skip, pause or rewind the cur-

rently aired track.

When the “Replay” key is touched, the Re-

play Screen is prompted.

LHA3085 LHA3087

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REPLAY To replay a track from

the beginning, press

the seek button.

The user can continue to

press the seek but-

ton to replay previous

songs, but can only go

back as far as the sys-

tem permits. The system

will warn the user when

they cannot skip any fur-

ther back by displaying

“At the End” in the bot-

tom left corner of the

screen.

SKIP To skip a track, press

the track button.

“Live” will appear in the

bottom left corner of the

screen indicating the dif-

ference from play time to

live audio.

PAUSE To pause a track, press

the pause button.

REWIND/

FAST

FORWARD

To rewind/ fast forward a

track, hold the

or seek/track

button.

Compact disc (CD) player

operation

If the radio is already operating,it automati-

cally turns off and the compact disc begins

to play.

CD button

When the CD button is pressed with the

system off and the compact disc loaded,

the system will turn on and the compact

disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with a com-

pact disc loaded and the radio playing, the

radio will automatically be turned off and

the compact disc will start to play.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

CD/MP3 display mode

Menu item

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded

with text is being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is dis-

played listing the artist, album and song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen when

aCDisplaying:

Random

Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touch-

ing “Random” key alternates between the Random Folder and Random All. This text will appear on

the display. To cancel random mode, touch the “Random” key until the key is no longer

highlighted.

Repeat

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching

“Repeat” alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. This text

will appear on the display. To cancel repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longer

highlighted

Browse

Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in the

list to begin playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list the

folders on the disc. Follow the procedure for selecting a song with the touch-screen to choose a

folder.

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or

Fast Forward) buttons

Press and hold the SEEK button

or TRACK button for 1.5 seconds while

the compact disc is playing to reverse or

fast forward the track being played. The

compact disc plays at an increased speed

while reversing or fast forwarding. When

the button is released, the compact disc

returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/TRACK buttons

Press the SEEK button while a CD or

MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the

beginning of the current track. Press

the SEEK button several times to skip

backward several tracks.

Press the TRACK button while a CD or

MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one

track. Press the TRACK button several

times to skip forward several tracks. If the

last track on a CD is skipped, the first track

on the disc is played. If the last track in a

folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the

first track of the next folder is played.

CD EJECT button

When the CD eject button is pressed

with a compact disc loaded, the compact

disc will eject and the last source will be

played.

If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds,

the disc will reload.

Additional features

For additional information, refer to “iPod®

player operation with Navigation System”

in this section.

For additional information, refer to “USB

(Universal Serial Bus) connection port

(models with Navigation System)” in this

section.

For additional information, refer to

“Bluetooth® streaming audio with Naviga-

tion System” in this section.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

CONNECTION PORT (models

without Navigation System) (if so

equipped)

Connecting a device to the USB

Connection Port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

LHA3794

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

CAUTION

∙ To avoid damage and loss of function

when using a USB device, note the fol-

lowing precautions.

∙ Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB port.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the

port.

For additional information, refer to your de-

vice manufacturer’s owner information re-

garding the proper use and care of the

device.

The USB port is located on the instrument

panel beneath the heater and air condi-

tioner controls. Insert the USB device into

the connection port.

When a compatible storage device is

plugged into the connection port, compat-

ible audio files on the storage device can be

played through the vehicle’s audio system.

Audio file operation

MEDIA button

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC

position and press the MEDIA button to

switch to the USB input mode. If a CD is

playing or another audio source is plugged

in through the AUX IN jack located on the

instrument panel, the MEDIA button

toggles between the three sources.

Play information

Information about the audio files being

played can be displayed on the display

screen of the vehicle’s audio system. De-

pending on how the audio files are en-

coded, information such as Folder, Song

and Artist will be displayed.

The track number and number of total

tracks in the folder are displayed on the

screen as well.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

(Reverse or Fast

Forward) button

Press and hold the or SEEK/CAT

and TRACK buttons for 1.5 seconds while an

audio file on the USB device is playing to

reverse or fast forward the track being

played. The track plays at an increased

speed while reversing or fast forwarding.

When the button is released, the audio file

returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

buttons

Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button

while an audio file on the USB device is

playing to return to the beginning of the

current track. Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK

button several times to skip back-

ward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button

while an audio file on the USB device is

playing to advance one track. Press the

SEEK/CAT or TRACK button several

times to skip forward several tracks. If the

last track in a folder on the USB device is

skipped, the first track of the next folder is

played.

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

RDM (random) button

When the RDM (random) button is pressed

while an audio file on the USB device is

playing, the play pattern can be changed

as follows:

All Random →1 Folder Random →OFF

All Random: all tracks on the USB device will

be played randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current

folder will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device

is displayed on the screen unless no pat-

tern is applied.

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT (repeat) button is pressed

while an audio file on the USB device is

playing, the play pattern can be changed

as follows:

1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →OFF

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be

repeated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be

repeated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device

is displayed on the screen unless no pat-

tern is applied.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (If so equipped)

If there are multiple folders with audio files

on the USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL

knob to change folders. Turn the knob to

the left to skip back a folder. Turn the knob

to the right to skip ahead a folder. If there is

only one folder of audio files on the USB

device, turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob in

either direction will return to the first track

on the USB device.

TUNE/FOLDER knob (if so equipped)

If there are multiple folders with audio files

on the USB device, turn the TUNE/FOLDER

knob to change folders. Turn the knob to

the left to skip back a folder. Turn the knob

to the right to skip ahead a folder. If there is

only one folder of audio files on the USB

device, turning the TUNE/FOLDER knob in

either direction will return to the first track

on the USB device.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

CONNECTION PORT (models with

Navigation System) (if so

equipped)

Connecting a device to the USB

Connection Port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

LHA3794

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

CAUTION

∙ To avoid damage and loss of function

when using a USB device, note the fol-

lowing precautions.

∙ Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB port.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the

port.

For additional information, refer to your de-

vice manufacturer’s owner information re-

garding the proper use and care of the

device.

The USB port is located on the instrument

panel beneath the heater and air condi-

tioner controls. Insert the USB device into

the connection port.

When a compatible storage device is

plugged into the connection port, compat-

ible audio files on the storage device can be

played through the vehicle’s audio system.

Audio file operation

AUX button

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC

position and press the AUX button to

switch to the USB input mode. If another

audio source is playing and a USB memory

device is inserted, press the AUX button

until the center display changes to the USB

memory mode.

If the system has been turned off while the

USB memory was playing, press the

POWER button to restart the USB memory.

Play information

Information about the audio files being

played is shown on the display screen of

the vehicle’s audio system. Touch “Browse”

to display the list of folders and files on the

USB device. Touch the name of a song on

the screen to begin playing that song.

SEEK/TRACK buttons

Press the SEEK/TRACK button while

an audio file on the USB device is playing to

return to the beginning of the current track.

Press the SEEK/TRACK button sev-

eral times to skip backward several tracks.

LHA4006

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Press the SEEK/TRACK while an audio

file on the USB device is playing to advance

one track. Press the SEEK/TRACK

several times to skip forward several

tracks. If the last track in a folder on the USB

device is skipped, the first track of the next

folder is played.

Random and repeat play mode

While files on a USB device are playing, the

play pattern can be altered so that songs

are repeated or played randomly.

Random

Touch the “Random” key to apply a random

play pattern to the USB device. When the

Random mode is active, the icon will illumi-

nate. By touching the “Random” key again,

the ”Random Folder” key appears. By

touching the “Random” key once more, the

“Random All” key appears. To cancel Ran-

dom mode, touch the “Random” key until

no icons are illuminated.

Repeat

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat

play pattern to the USB device. When the

Repeat mode is active, the icon will illumi-

nate. By touching the “Repeat” key again,

the ”Repeat Track” key appears.By touching

the “Repeat” key once more, the “Repeat

Folder” key appears. . To cancel Repeat

mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no icons

are illuminated.

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION

WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

Connecting iPod®

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

LHA3794

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

CAUTION

∙ Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB port.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the

port.

For additional information, refer to your de-

vice manufacturer’s owner information re-

garding the proper use and care of the

device.

To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that

the iPod® can be controlled with the audio

system controls and display screen, use

the USB connection port located on the

instrument panel below the heater and air

conditioner controls. Connect the iPod®-

specific end of the cable to the iPod® and

the USB end of the cable to the USB con-

nection port on the vehicle. If your iPod®

supports charging via a USB connection,its

battery will be charged while connected to

the vehicle with the ignition switch in the

ACC or ON position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®

can only be operated by the vehicle audio

controls.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,

remove the USB end of the cable from the

USB connection port on the vehicle, then

remove the cable from the iPod®.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

∙ iPod® Classic - 5th Generation (firmware

version 1.3.0 or later)

∙ iPod® Classic - 6th Generation (firm-

ware version 2.0.1 or later)

∙ iPod® Classic - 7th Generation (firmware

version 2.0.4 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware

version 1.3.1 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware

version 1.1.3 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware

version 1.1.3 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware

version 1.0.4 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware

version 1.0.2 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware

version 1.1 or later)

∙ iPod® Touch - 2nd generation (firmware

version 4.2.1 or later)

∙ iPod® Touch - 3rd generation (firmware

version 5.1 or later) (minimum iOS 5.0

required for smartphone integration)

∙ iPod® Touch - 4th generation (firmware

version 5.1 or later) (minimum iOS 5.0

required for smartphone integration)

∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or

later)

∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or

later) (minimum iOS 5.0 required for

smartphone integration)

∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)

(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smart-

phone integration)

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)

(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smart-

phone integration)

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up-

dated to the version indicated above.

Audio main operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position. Press the MEDIA button repeat-

edly to switch to the iPod® mode.

If the system has been turned off while the

iPod® was playing, pressing the but-

ton will start the iPod®.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons

When the SEEK/CAT button or

TRACK button is pressed for less than

1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the

next track or the beginning of the current

track on the iPod® will be played.

When the SEEK/CAT button or

TRACK button is pressed for more than

1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the

iPod® will play while fast forwarding or re-

winding. When the button is released, the

iPod® will return to the normal play speed.

REPEAT (RPT)

When the RPT button is pressed while a

track is being played, the play pattern can

be changed as follows:

Repeat Off →1 Track Repeat →All Repeat →

Repeat Off

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be

repeated.

All Repeat: all songs in the current list are

repeated.

Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is ap-

plied.

RANDOM (RDM)

When the RDM button is pressed while a

track is being played, the play pattern can

be changed as follows:

Shuffle Off →Track Shuffle →Shuffle Off

Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list

will be played randomly.

Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list

will be played randomly.

Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is ap-

plied.

BACK button

When the BACK button is pressed, it

returns to the previous menu.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so

equipped)

Connecting iPod®

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

∙ Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB port.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the

port.

For additional information, refer to your de-

vice manufacturer’s owner information re-

garding the proper use and care of the

device.

To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that

the iPod® can be controlled with the audio

system controls and display screen, use

the USB connection port located on the

instrument panel below the heater and air

conditioner controls. Connect the iPod®-

specific end of the cable to the iPod® and

the USB end of the cable to the USB con-

nection port on the vehicle. If your iPod®

supports charging via a USB connection,its

battery will be charged while connected to

the vehicle with the ignition switch in the

ACC or ON position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®

can only be operated by the vehicle audio

controls.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,

remove the USB end of the cable from the

USB connection port on the vehicle, then

remove the cable from the iPod®.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

∙ iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware

version 1.3.0 or later)

∙ iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware

version 2.0.1 or later)

∙ iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware

version 2.0.4 or later)

∙ iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware

version 4.2.1 or later)*

∙ iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware

version 5.1 or later)

LHA3794

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware

version 5.1 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware

version 1.3.1 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware

version 1.1.3 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware

version 1.1.3 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware

version 1.0.4 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware

version 1.0.2 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware

version 1.1 or later)

∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or

later)

∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or

later)

∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)

∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)

* Some features of this iPod® may not be

fully functional.

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up-

dated to the version indicated above.

Audio main operation

AUX button

When the AUX button is pressed with the

system off and the iPod® connected, the

system will turn on. If another audio source

is playing and the iPod® is connected, press

the AUX button repeatedly until the center

display changes to the iPod® mode.

Interface

The interface for iPod® operation shown on

the vehicle’s audio system display screen is

similar to the iPod® interface. Use the

touch-screen, BACK button or the

scrolling knob to navigate the menus on

the screen.

When the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu”

key to bring up the iPod® interface.

Depending on the iPod® model, the follow-

ing items may be available on the menu list

screen. For additional information, refer to

the iPod® Owner’s Manual regarding each

menu item.

LHA4007 LHA2907

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

∙ Playlists

∙ Artists

∙ Albums

∙ Genres

∙ Songs

∙ Composers

∙ Audiobooks

∙ Podcasts

∙ Update Music Library (if so equipped)

Shuffle and repeat play mode

While the iPod® is playing, the play pattern

can be altered so that songs are repeated

or played randomly.

Shuffle

Touch the “Shuffle” key to apply a random

play pattern to the iPod®. When the Shuffle

mode is active, the text is illuminated.

Touching the “Shuffle” key once more will

display the “Shuffle songs” key. To cancel

Shuffle mode, touch the “Shuffle” key again

until the text is no longer illuminated.

Repeat

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat

play pattern to the iPod®. When the repeat

mode is active, the text is illuminated.

Touching the “Repeat” key once more will

display the “Repeat song” key. To cancel Re-

peat mode, touch the “Repeat” key again

until the text is no longer illuminated.

SEEK/TRACK buttons

When the SEEK or TRACK but-

ton is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds

while the iPod® is playing, the next track or

the beginning of the current track on the

iPod® will be played.

When the SEEK or TRACK but-

ton is pressed for more than 1.5 seconds

while the iPod® is playing, the iPod® will play

while fast forwarding or rewinding. When

the button is released, the iPod® will return

to the normal play speed.

Scrolling menus

While navigating long lists of artists, al-

bums or songs in the music menu, it is

possible to scroll the list by the first charac-

ter in the name. To activate character in-

dexing, touch and hold the “A-Z” key in the

upper right corner of the screen. Turn the

TUNE/SCROLL knob to choose the number

or letter to jump to in the list and then press

the ENTER/AUDIO button.

If no character is selected after a few sec-

onds, the display returns to normal.

LHA2279

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio

device that is capable of playing audio files,

the device can be connected to the vehi-

cle’s audio system so that the audio files on

the device play through the vehicle’s

speakers.

Connecting Bluetooth® audio

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device

to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Select “Bluetooth”.

3. Select “Add Phone or Device”. This

same screen can be accessed to re-

move, replace or select a different

Bluetooth® device.

4. The system acknowledges the com-

mand and asks you to initiate connect-

ing from the phone handset.

5. The system will display a PIN on the

screen and request confirmation that it

matches the one on the handset.

NOTE:

The connecting procedure of the cellular

phone varies according to each cellular

phone model. For additional informa-

tion, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instruc-

tions on connecting NISSAN recom-

mended cellular phones.

Audio main operation

To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode,

press the MEDIA button repeatedly until the

Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the

screen.

The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are

displayed on the screen. Use the Preset 3

button for play and the Preset 4 button for

pause.

LHA2775

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so

equipped)

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio

device that is capable of playing audio files,

the device can be connected to the vehi-

cle’s audio system so that the audio files on

the device play through the vehicle’s

speakers.

Connecting Bluetooth® audio

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device

to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

5. The system acknowledges the com-

mand and asks you to initiate connect-

ing from the phone handset.

NOTE:

The connecting procedure of the cellular

phone varies according to each cellular

phone model. For additional informa-

tion, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instruc-

tions on connecting NISSAN recom-

mended cellular phones.

LHA3711 LHA2844

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Audio main operation

To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode,

press the AUX button repeatedly until the

Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the

screen.

The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are

displayed on the screen.

CD CARE AND CLEANING

∙ Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend

the disc. Never touch the surface of the

disc.

∙ Always place the discs in the storage

case when they are not being used.

∙ To clean a disc, wipe the surface from

the center to the outer edge using a

clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc

using a circular motion.

∙ Do not use a conventional record

cleaner or alcohol intended for indus-

trial use.

∙ A new disc may be rough on the inner

and outer edges. Remove the rough

edges by rubbing the inner and outer

edges with the side of a pen or pencil as

illustrated.

LHA0049

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL

The audio system can be operated using

the controls on the steering wheel.

1. SOURCE switch

2. Menu control switch/ENTER button

3. switches

4. Volume control switch

SOURCE switch

With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, push the SOURCE switch to turn

the audio system on.

Push the SOURCE switch to change the

mode in the following sequence:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →(XM1→XM2→XM3 (satel-

lite, if so equipped))→(SXM1→SXM→(satel-

lite radio, if so equipped) →SXM2 (satellite

radio, if so equipped)→SXM3 (satellite radio,

if so equipped) →CD* →USB/iPod®*→

Bluetooth® Audio* →Audio App*→AUX* →

AM.

* These modes are only available when

compatible media storage is inserted into

the device or connected to the system.

switches

Use the switches on the steer-

ing wheel to navigate to the “Audio” display

menu in the vehicle information display.

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch to increase

or decrease the volume.

Menu control

switch/ENTER

button

While the display is showing a map or audio

screen,tilt the Menu Control switch upward

or downward to select a station, track, CD

or folder. For most audio sources, tilting the

switch up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

provides a different function than a tilting

up/down for less than 1.5 seconds.

AM and FM

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the preset station.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

to seek up or down to the next station.

XM/SXM (if so equipped)

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the preset station.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

to go to the next or previous channel.

iPod®

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

LHA3812

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

to increase or decrease the folder num-

ber (if playing compressed audio files).

USB

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

to increase or decrease the folder num-

ber.

Bluetooth® Audio

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

skip ahead or back to the next song.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

to reverse or fast forward the current

song.

ANTENNA

The antenna cannot be shortened, but can

be removed.When you need to remove the

antenna, turn the antenna rod counter-

clockwise.

To install the antenna rod,turn the antenna

rod clockwise and hand tighten.

CAUTION

∙ Always properly tighten the antenna

rod during installation or the antenna

rod may break during vehicle

operation.

∙ Be sure that the antenna is removed

before the vehicle enters an auto-

matic car wash.

This vehicle is equipped with Smartphone

Integration technology. This allows many

compatible Smartphone applications to

be displayed and easily controlled through

the vehicle’s touch-screen. This feature is

an option on navigation system equipped

vehicles. For additional information, refer to

the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s

Manual.

NISSANCONNECT® MOBILE APPS (if

so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89

NissanConnect® Services is a suite of tele-

matics tools that provide emergency pre-

paredness, remote access, customizable

alerts and convenience services. This fea-

ture is an option on navigation system

equipped vehicles. For additional informa-

tion, refer to the separate NissanConnect®

Owner’s Manual.

Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant

can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes

Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free

mode to reduce user distraction. In this

mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interac-

tion by voice control. After connecting a

compatible Apple device by using

Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated

from the TALK switch on the steering

wheel.

Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered

in the U.S. and other countries.

∙ Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as

displaying pictures or opening apps,

may not be available while driving.

∙ For best results, always update your de-

vice to the latest software version.

∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible. Close the windows to elimi-

nate the surrounding noises (traffic

noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which

may prevent the system from recogniz-

ing the voice commands correctly.

∙ For functions that can be used in Siri

Eyes Free, please refer to the Apple

website.

REQUIREMENTS

Siri is only available on the iPhone® 4S or

later. Devices released before iPhone® 4S

are not supported by the Siri Eyes Free sys-

tem. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for de-

tails about device compatibility.

Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please

check phone settings.

If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be

accessible from the lock screen. Please

check phone settings.

For best results, always update your device

to the latest software version.

NISSANCONNECT® SERVICES (if so

equipped)

SIRI® EYES FREE

4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SIRI® ACTIVATION

Siri® Eyes Free function can be activated by

pushing TALK switch on the steering

wheel.

Models with navigation system

1. Connect an Siri Eyes Free enabled

iPhone® to the vehicle. For additional

information, refer to “Connecting pro-

cedure” in this section.

2. After the Bluetooth® connection is es-

tablished, push and hold the

TALK switch to activate the Siri Eyes

Free function.

Models without navigation system

1. Connect a Siri Eyes Free enabled

iPhone® to the vehicle. For additional

information, refer to “Initialization” in

this section.

2. After the Bluetooth® connection is es-

tablished, the switch operation select

screen is displayed.

3. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” for

Siri Eyes Free activation Switch action

can also be changed from the

Bluetooth® settings menu. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing

Siri Eyes Free Settings (models without

navigation system)” in this section.

OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE

1. Push or push and hold the TALK

switch.

2. Speak your command and then listen

to the Siri Eyes Free reply.

After starting Siri Eyes Free, push the

TALK switch again within 5 seconds of the

end of the Siri Eyes Free announcement to

extend the session.

Example 1 – Playing music

1. Push or push and hold the TALK

switch.

2. Say “Play (artist name, song name,

etc.)”.

3. Your vehicle will automatically change

to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode*

when the music starts playing. Mode

selection is determined by the phone.

* If the iPhone® is also connected with the

USB cable.

If the audio track does not start playing

automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try

changing the track or audio source to re-

sume playback.

NOTE:

For best results, use the native music

app. Performance of music control func-

tion while using Podcasts, Audiobook or

other 3rd party music apps may vary and

is controlled by the iPhone®.

Example2–Replying to text messages

1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected

and “Show Notifications” of the iPhone®

settings is enabled, the vehicle will dis-

play a notification for new incoming

text messages.

LHA4005

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91

2. After reading the message, push or

push and hold the TALK switch to

reply using Siri Eyes Free.

3. After a beep sounds, say “Text mes-

sage” or a similar command to reply

using Siri Eyes Free.

CHANGING SIRI® EYES FREE

SETTINGS (models without

Navigation System)

Settings for Siri® Eyes Free can be found in

the Bluetooth® settings menu. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Bluetooth® set-

tings” in this section.

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE/FOLDER or

TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

“Bluetooth” and then press the

ENTER/SETTING button.

3. Use the TUNE/FOLDER or

TUNE/SCROLL knob to select “Siri” and

then press the ENTER/SETTING button.

4. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” us-

ing the TUNE/FOLDER or

TUNE/SCROLL knob and then press

the ENTER/SETTING button.

CHANGING SIRI® EYES FREE

SETTINGS (models with

Navigation System)

Settings for Siri® Eyes Free can be found in

the Bluetooth® settings menu. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Bluetooth® set-

tings” in this section.

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Phone settings” key.

5. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” to

set the activation.

4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot access Siri Eyes Free from

switch on the steering wheel

Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.

Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.

Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.

Models without navigation system:

Check the settings for Siri Eyes Free activation on the vehicle audio system. If the setting is “Long Press”, you must push

and hold the TALK switch on the steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds to start Siri Eyes Free. If the setting is

“Short Press”, a short push and release of the switch should start Siri Eyes Free.

Audio Source does not change auto-

matically to iPod® or Bluetooth® Au-

dio mode

For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or

other 3rd party music apps may vary.

For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may de-

grade performance.

Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select

switch on the steering wheel.

Play, pause, next track, previous track

or play timer does not work

For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or

other 3rd party music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.

Cannot hear any music/audio being

played back from a connected

iPhone®

Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.

Cannot hear map turn-by-turn direc-

tion guidance from a connected

iPhone®

Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.

Cannot receive text message notifi-

cations on the vehicle audio system

Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name,

like “My Car”. Press the info button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.

Cannot reply to text message notifi-

cations by Siri Eyes Free

After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Push or push and hold the TALK switch on

the steering wheel for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93

WARNING

∙ The Mobile Entertainment System is

designed for rear seat passenger

viewing only.

∙ It is unlawful in most jurisdictions for

a person to drive a motor vehicle

which is equipped with a television

viewer or screen that is located in the

motor vehicle at any point forward of

the back of the driver’s seat, or that is

visible, directly or indirectly, to the

driver while operating the vehicle.

∙ In the interest of safety, the monitors

should never be installed where they

will be visible, directly or indirectly, by

the operator of the motor vehicle.

∙ If your vehicle is equipped with a wire-

less rear seat audio system or any

other wireless infrared device, make

sure it is powered off when operating

the Rear Seat Entertainment System.

If both systems are powered on at the

same time, the two systems may ob-

struct each other, possibly creating

undesirable audio interference

through the wireless headphones.

∙ For safety reasons, when changing

video discs it is recommended that

the vehicle is not in motion, and that

you do not allow children to unfasten

safety belts to change discs or make

any adjustments to the system. Sys-

tem adjustments can be accom-

plished using the remote control unit,

while safety belts remain fastened.

CAUTION

∙ Be sure to run the vehicle engine while

using the system. Using this system

without running the engine can result

in a battery drain. To avoid the risk of

battery drain, please remember to

turn off the system when the vehicle

is not in use. Do not touch the inner

pins of the jacks on the front panel.

Electrostatic discharge may cause

permanent damage to the system.

NOTE:

Depending on the USB device, it may or

may not charge when connected to the

USB connection port. Not all devices are

able to charge when connected to the

USB connection port.

Each monitor includes a built-in dual chan-

nel infrared transmitter for use with wire-

less headphones. The wireless head-

phones must be used within a line of sight

from the transmitter as infrared transmis-

sion, like visible light, travels only in a

straight line.

When placing the headphones on your

head, make sure to observe the Left and

Right orientation. The headphones must

be oriented correctly (facing forward) in or-

der to receive the audio signal. Press the

power button on the headphones, then se-

lect channel “A” to listen to monitor A, or

channel “B” to listen to monitor B. Adjust the

audio level using the volume control on

each headphone.

There is a 3.5mm stereo headphone out-

put jack on each monitor which can be

used with any standard stereo headphone

with an in-line volume control (wired head-

phones sold separately).

The system includes a built-in infrared re-

ceiver for use with the included wireless

remote control. For additional information,

refer to “Remote control operation” in this

section.

NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT

SYSTEM (MES) (if so equipped)

4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. Status lights

2. Disc Compartment Slot

3. IR Sensor/Transmitter

4. Monitor Adjustment

5. TFT LCD Panel

6. USB Port

7. Audio Video Output Jack

8. Headphone Output Jack

9. Audio Video Input Jacks

10. I/O Port Covers

11. Lever Lock and Release Latch

FRONT PANEL BUTTONS

CAUTION

∙ Do not use any harsh solvents or

chemicals when cleaning the unit.

∙ Do not use any abrasive cleaners that

may scratch the screen. Use only a

lightly dampened lint free cloth to

wipe the screen if it is dirty.

∙ Position LCD monitor in the fully

closed position when not in use.

∙ Before using the monitor, ensure lever

lock and release latch is engaged in

the normal viewing position 䊊

∙ Do not put pressure on the screen.

∙ Caution children to avoid touching the

screen, as it may become dirty or

damaged.

Status lights

The status lights illuminate if there is no

disc present in the unit.

Disc Compartment Slot

Insert a disc to play.

LHA3804

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95

IR Sensor/Transmitter

The IR sensor allows the remote control to

operate the monitor. The IR transmitter

provides audio to IR wireless headphones.

Monitor Adjustment

The monitor is hinged to allow the user to

manually adjust the viewing angle of the

LCD panel 䊊

TFT LCD Panel

7–inch TFT LCD Panel.

USB Port

Play videos, music, and images stored on

most USB devices. It also allows for charg-

ing some USB devices.

Audio Video Output Jack

Connect to an external audio/video moni-

tor using a 3.5mm A/V connector (sold

separately).

Headphone Output Jack

Connect wired headphones using a 3.5mm

stereo connector. Headphones must in-

clude in-line volume control in order to ad-

just the volume level.

Audio Video Input Jacks

Connect to an external audio/video source

using RCA type connectors (sold sepa-

rately).

I/O Port Covers

Gently pull down on the I/O covers to ex-

pose the ports. Keep the ports covered

when not in use.

Lever Lock & Release Latch

The lever lock and release latch located

behind the monitor limits the monitor

angle (normal viewing 䊊

A). Sliding the latch

to the left will allow the monitor to open to

the service position 䊊

4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. POWER button

2. UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT buttons

3. PLAY button

4. STOP button

5. PAUSE button PLAY button

6. MENU/SELECT button

7. EJECT button

8. SOURCE button

FRONT PANEL BUTTONS

OPERATION

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT buttons

These buttons are used to navigate the

contents of the display menus.

POWER buttons

Press this button to turn the monitor on or

off.

SOURCE button

Press this button to cycle between monitor

A audio/video sources and monitor B

audio/video sources.

EJECT buttons

Press this button to eject the disc.

PLAY button

Press this button to play the media.

STOP button

Press this button to stop media playback.

PAUSE button

Press this button to pause media playback.

MENU/SELECT button

Press this button to access the DVD OSD

menu. Press the SETUP button on the re-

mote control to exit the DVD OSD menu.

For additional information, refer to “How to

use the DVD OSD Menu” in this section.

LHA3845

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97

WIRELESS HEADPHONE

OPERATION

Installing the batteries

Before attempting to operate the head-

phones, install the batteries as described

below.

1. Remove headphone battery cover 䊊

2. Install two “AAA” batteries into the

headphones. Make sure the proper po-

larity (+ or –) is observed.

3. Reinstall headphone battery cover.

Headphone operation

Press the power button 䊊

Aon the head-

phones to turn on and off the headphones.

The red LED will illuminate when the head-

phone is turned on. Set the select switch 䊊

to “A” or “B” for use with the “A” monitor or “B”

monitor respectively. Use the volume

thumb wheel䊊

Cto adjust the volume level

for the headphone audio.

NOTE:

If the headphones are accidentally left

on and system is powered off, a battery

saver feature will automatically turn off

the headphones after approximately

3 minutes.

LHA3846 LHA3847 LHA3810

4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION

∙ Always ensure that the batteries are

inserted with the positive and nega-

tive terminals in the correct direction

as shown in the battery

compartment.

∙ Different types of batteries have dif-

ferent characteristics. Do not mix dif-

ferent types.

∙ Remove the batteries if the head-

phones are not used for a month or

longer.

REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION

Before attempting to operate your remote

control, install the batteries described be-

low.

1. Turn the remote control face down.

Press down on the ridged area of the

battery cover and slide it off.

2. Install two “AAA” batteries. Make sure

that proper polarity (+ or —) is observed.

3. Slide the cover back into place until it

clicks.

NOTE:

The remote control will only operate this

device. It is not a universal remote con-

trol and will not control other equipment.

WARNING

∙ Keep the batteries out of the reach of

children. Should the batteries be

swallowed, immediately consult a

doctor. Also, when disposing of used

batteries, please comply with govern-

mental regulations or environmental

public institution rules that apply in

your country/area.

LHA3848

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99

CAUTION

∙ Always ensure that the batteries are

inserted with the positive and nega-

tive terminals in the correct direction

as shown in the battery

compartment.

∙ Different types of batteries have dif-

ferent characteristics. Do not mix dif-

ferent types.

∙ Do not mix old and new batteries. Mix-

ing old and new batteries will shorten

battery life and/or cause chemical

leaks from the old batteries.

∙ When batteries fail to function, re-

place them immediately.

∙ Remove the batteries if the remote

control is not used for a month or

longer.

REMOTE CONTROL BUTTONS

1. POWER button

2. SOURCE button

3. SETUP button

4. EJECT button

5. DVD-B button

6. SOUND AROUND SELECT button

7. PIX button

8. REPEAT button

9. RIGHT button

10. ENTER button

11. A-B button

12. R-S button

13. ERASE/ADD button

14. AUDIO button

15. ANGLE button

16. GO TO button

17. DISPLAY button

18. PROGRAM button

19. RANDOM button

20. 3D button

21. PBC (Video CD only) button

22. ZOOM button

23. NEXT button

24. PREV button

LHA4093

4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

25. FF (Fast forward) button

26. FR (Fast rewind) button

27. STOP button

28. PLAY/PAUSE button

29. Number Keys

30. SUBTITLE button

31. TITLE button

32. CH-SEARCH/SKIP button

33. AUTO MEMORY button

34. DOWN button

35. RETURN button

36. LEFT button

37. UP button

38. MENU button

39. MUTE button

40. SOUND AROUND ON/OFF button

41. DVD-A button

NOTE:

The following remote control functions

do not apply to this model: A-B and Pro-

gram.

POWER button

Press this button to turn the monitor on.

Press this button again to turn the monitor

off.

SOURCE button

Press this button to cycle between monitor

A audio/video sources and monitor B

audio/video sources.

SETUP button

Press this button to navigate the DVD OSD

menu. For additional information, refer to

“How to use the DVD OSD menu” in this

section.

EJECT button

Press this button to eject the disc.

DVD–B button

Press this button to transmit the remote

control codes and functions to operate

monitor B.

SOUND AROUND SELECT button

Selects a FM transmitter channel.

PIX button

Press this button to access the picture ad-

justment menu and select between

BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST, SATURATION,

HUE, SHARPNESS, IR HEADPHONE, LAN-

GUAGE, and RESET. Press the

or buttons to adjust the screen.

REPEAT button

Press this button to select between differ-

ent repeat modes.

ENTER button

Press this button to make a selection or

begin playback of the media.

RIGHT button

Press this button to navigate right when

displaying a menu or file list.

A-B button

Press the A-B button once to set point A

and then press again to set point B. Play-

back will now repeat between point A and

point B.

R-S button

Non-functioning.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101

ERASE / ADD button

Non-functioning.

AUDIO button

Press this button to select and listen to

different audio streams (this function only

applies to DVD titles that support multiple

audio streams).

ANGLE button

Press this button to select different viewing

angles (this function only applies to DVD

titles that support multiple angles).

GO TO button

Non-functioning.

DISPLAY button

Press this button to display various infor-

mation including title, chapter/track,

elapsed time, time remaining, or turn off

the display.

PROGRAM button

Edit a playback program containing de-

sired titles in the DVD or tracks in the CD-

DA.

RANDOM button

Press this button to play content in a ran-

dom order.

3D button

Press this button to select between several

audio effects. DVD mode: Concert, Living

Room, Hall, Bathroom, Cave, Arena, Church,

and Off.

PBC (Video CD only) button

Press this button to run the playback con-

trol on or off.

ZOOM button

Press this button to zoom in or out when

displaying images or playing DVDs. The

zoom range for images is from 50% to

200%. The zoom range for DVDs is from 1/4

size to 4x the original size.

NEXT button

Press this button to select the next chapter,

track, or file.

PREV button

Press this button to select the previous

chapter, track, or file.

FF (Fast forward) button

Press this button to search media for-

wards.

FR (Fast rewind) button

Press this button to search media back-

wards.

STOP button

Press this button once to stop playback

(press play to resume playback). Press this

button twice to perform a full stop (press

play to start playback from the beginning).

PLAY/PAUSE button

Press this button to begin media playback.

Press this button again to pause media

playback.

Number Keys

0—9

SUBTITLE button

Press this button to select and display sub-

titles (this function only applies to DVD titles

that support subtitles).

4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

TITLE button

Press this button to navigate the title menu

if included on the disc.

CH- SEARCH/SKIP button

Non-functioning.

AUTO MEMORY button

Non-functioning.

DOWN button

Press this button to navigate down when

displaying a menu or file list.

RETURN button

Press this button to return to a previous

menu screen.

LEFT button

Press this button to navigate left when dis-

playing a menu or file list.

UP button

Press this button to navigate up when dis-

playing a menu or file list.

MENU button

Press this button to go to the root menu if

included on the disc.

MUTE button

Press this button to mute the audio when

playing discs or playing files from a USB

device. Press this button again to resume

audio.

SOUND AROUND ON/OFF

Turns the FM transmitter ON/OFF.

DVD–A button

Press this button to transmit the remote

control codes and functions to operate

monitor A.

GENERAL OPERATING

INSTRUCTIONS

Turning the monitor ON or OFF

1. Press the POWER button on the front

panel or the remote control to turn the

monitor on or off. When powered on,

the front panel controls will illuminate.

2. After the monitor has been turned on

and is displaying a picture, adjust the

viewing angle by pivoting the screen to

optimize the picture quality.

3. Remember to turn the monitor off and

return the LCD monitor to the fully

closed (upright) position when not in

use.

Listening through vehicle

speakers

Press the AUX button on the factory radio

and toggle through AUX screens to select

VTRF — Jack to listen to the audio from

monitor A.

Sharing sources between Monitor

A and Monitor B

The source button on your monitor unit or

remote control allows viewing monitor A

video on monitor B and vice versa. Press

the source button to cycle through avail-

able video sources.

Disc/DVD Basic Operation

To get the most use out of each disc, make

sure you read this section completely.

For additional information, refer to “CD care

and cleaning” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103

Regional coding

Both the DVD player and discs are coded by

region. These regional codes must match

in order for the disc to play. The system is

preset to the region code designated for

your area by the DVD Copy Control Asso-

ciation. Other regions may not be played in

this system.

Supported Disc Types

∙ DVD-Video: DVD contains video

∙ DVD +/- R: DVD contains video

∙ CD-DA: CD contains audio

∙ CD-Video: CD contains video

∙ CD-R/+RW: CD contains audio

Unsupported Disc Types

Before you load a disc, make sure that it is

compatible with the player. Note that the

following disc CANNOT be used with this

system: Optical disc- CD-1, CD-ROM, and

DVD-ROM Mini disc- CDG (audio only, not

graphics), and Blu-ray (list is not all inclu-

sive).

Loading and Playing Discs

Press the POWER button to turn the moni-

tor on. Insert the disc about halfway into

the disc compartment slot, with the disc’s

label facing the rear of the vehicle. Do NOT

insert the disc at an angle. The Disc must

be inserted straight into the player.

The disc will load automatically and begin

to play. Some discs may start at the root

menu, where playback must be selected to

start a movie. Depending on the disc and

playback location on the disc, a “ ”icon

may be displayed in the upper left-hand

corner of the screen indicating that play-

back is not possible during certain times.

Additional information on Media

Compatibility

This system is compatible with the follow-

ing media formats:

Format Extension

Audio MP3 .mp3

WMA .wma

Video

AVI .avi

MPEG-1 .mpg

MPEG-2 .mpg

Image JPEG .jpg

Due to ongoing technological advance-

ments, some USB flash drives may be in-

compatible with this system.

∙ The text information of some audio and

video files may not be correctly dis-

played.

∙ There may be a slight delay before play-

back of files using a USB flash drive with

complex folder hierarchies.

∙ Some audio, video, and image files may

be incompatible with this system due

to file characteristics,file format,record-

ing software used, directory structure,

and/or the type of audio/video encod-

ing used.

HOW TO USE THE DVD OSD MENU

This section describes how to set and ad-

just settings using On-Screen Display

(OSD) Menu. You can use the OSD menu to

adjust all the settings. Follow the steps out-

lined below to select the desired function.

4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

General Setup Page

Press the SETUP button on the remote

control. Use the or and

the or buttons to navi-

gate the Setup Page. Press ENTER to select

and then to return to the sub-

–menu. To cancel the Setup Display, press

the SETUP button on the remote.

OSD Language

The OSD Lang sub-menu allows the user to

select the language for the on-screen dis-

play. When the OSD Lang option is high-

lighted, press the button once

and then use the or but-

tons on the remote control to select the

desired language. The user can select Eng-

lish, Simplified/Traditional Chinese, French,

German, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, or

Korean for the OSD language. Press ENTER

to select and then the button to

return to the sub-menu.

Angle Mark

The angle mark is an option for different

viewing angles on the DVD. When the Angle

Mark option is highlighted, press

the button once and then use

the or buttons on the re-

mote control to turn the angle mark set-

ting on or off. Press ENTER to select and

then the button to return to the

sub-menu.

LHA3851 LHA3852 LHA3853

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105

Speaker Setup Page

Downmix— When the Downmix option is

highlighted, press the button

once and then use the

or buttons on the remote control

to select between Stereo or LT/RT. Press

ENTER to select and then the but-

ton to return to the sub-menu.

Video Setup Page

Video Quality — When the Quality option is

highlighted, press ENTER and then use

the or and the

or buttons on the remote control

to select between the various video quality

settings. Press ENTER to select and then

the button to return to the sub-

menu.

Video Quality Setup

Option Description Range De-

fault

Sharp-

ness

Adjust to

soften or

sharpen the

picture.

Low/

Med/

High

Low

Bright-

ness

Adjust to

brighten or

darken the

picture.

-20 —

+20 00

LHA3854 LHA3855 LHA3856

4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Option Description Range De-

fault

Contrast

Adjust to in-

crease or de-

crease picture

contrast.

-16 —

+16 00

Gamma

Adjust to in-

crease or de-

crease the

picture

gamma.

Low/

Med/

High/

None

Hue

Adjust to in-

crease or de-

crease the

color hue.

-09 —

+09 00

Satura-

tion

Adjust to in-

crease or de-

crease color

intensity.

-09 —

+09 00

Luma

Delay

Adjust to

change the

Luma delay.

0T or 1T 1T

Preference Page

If a disc or USB device is playing,press STOP

twice (full stop). Press the SETUP button on

the remote control. Use the

or and the or

buttons on the remote control to navigate

the Setup Page. Press ENTER to select and

then the to return to the sub-

menu.

Audio

The Audio sub-menu allows the user to

select the audio stream in the desired lan-

guage for playback. When the Audio option

is highlighted, press the button

once and then use the

or buttons on the remote control

to select the desired language. The user

can select English, French, Spanish, Chi-

nese, Japanese, German, Portuguese, Ital-

ian, Korean, Russian or Thai for the audio

stream language. Press ENTER to select

and then the button to return to

the sub-menu. The DVD title must include

LHA3857 LHA3858

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107

the desired audio stream in order for it to

be heard during playback.

Subtitle

The Subtitle sub-menu allows the user to

select the subtitle in the desired language

for playback. When the Subtitle option is

highlighted, press the button

once and then use the

or buttons on the remote control

to select the desired language. The user

can select English, French, Spanish, Chi-

nese, Japanese, German, Portuguese, Ital-

ian, Korean, Russian, Thai or OFF for the

subtitle language. Press ENTER to select

and then the button to return to

the sub-menu. The DVD title must include

the desired audio stream in order for it to

be heard during playback.

LHA3859

4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Disc Menu

The Disc Menu sub-menu allows the user

to select the desired language of the DVD

disc menu. When the Disc Menu option is

highlighted, press the button

once and then use the

or buttons on the remote control

to select the desired language. The user

can select English, French, Spanish, Chi-

nese, Japanese, German, Portuguese, Ital-

ian, Korean, Russian or Thai for the Disc

Menu language. Press ENTER to select and

then the button to return to the

sub-menu. The DVD title must include the

desired menu language in order for it to be

displayed during playback.

Default

This section of the Setup Menu allows the

user to restore all controls and values to

the default levels. When the Default option

is highlighted, press the button

once and then press ENTER to perform the

reset. This will not affect parental control

setting.

LHA3860 LHA3861

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109

Parental

This section of the Setup Menu allows the

user to select the level of movie content

playback from KID SAFE to ADULT. The pa-

rental control function allows you to limit

viewing to your preference. The rating lev-

els range from 1 to 8 and are country de-

pendent. The lower rating number, the

stricter the playback limitation is. When the

Parental option is highlighted, press

the button once and then use

the or buttons on the re-

mote control to select the desired parental

control setting and press ENTER. A pass-

word is required to change the Parental

settings. Using the remote control, enter

the password (0000) and press ENTER to

confirm the setting and return to the sub-

menu.

HOW TO USE THE MONITOR OSD

This section describes how to set and ad-

just the following monitor settings using

the monitor on-screen display (OSD) Menu:

∙ Press the PIX button on the remote con-

trol to select between the options in the

table below.

∙ After selecting the desired option, use

the or buttons on the

remote control to adjust the setting.

LHA3862 LHA3863

4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Option Descrip-

tion Range Default

Bright-

ness

Adjust to

brighten

or darken

the

picture.

0 — 100 50

Contrast

Adjust to

increase

or de-

crease

picture

contrast.

0 — 100 50

Satura-

tion

Adjust to

increase

or de-

crease

color

intensity.

0 — 100 50

Hue

Adjust to

increase

or de-

crease

the color

hue.

0 — 100 50

Option Descrip-

tion Range Default

Sharp-

ness

Adjust to

soften or

sharpen

the

picture.

0 — 100 50

IR Head-

phone

Select on

or off to

turn the

IR head-

phone

audio

output

on or off.

ON or

OFF ON

Language

Set lan-

guage of

the

monitor

OSD

menu.

English,

French,

Spanish,

Portu-

guese

English

Option Descrip-

tion Range Default

Reset

Resets

the

monitor

OSD

settings

to default

values.

Press Up

or Down;

“OK” will

displayed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111

PLAYING A CD

Insert a disc into the unit with label facing

the rear of vehicle and select monitor A

mode (if using monitor A) or monitor B

mode (if using monitor B) using the front

controls or the remote control.

When playing an audio CD, the information

screen appears automatically. It can dis-

play the current track number along with

the amount of time the track has been

playing, the amount of time remaining for

the track playing, the total amount of time

elapsed so far, or the total amount of time

remaining.

Display

Press the DISPLAY button on the remote

control to select the desired type of display

setting. The single elapsed time of the cur-

rent track is displayed by default.

Press DISPLAY (1x)

“Single Remain” is displayed along with the

current track playing and the amount of

time remaining for the current track.

Press DISPLAY (2x)

“Total Elapsed” is displayed along with the

current track playing and the total amount

of elapsed time.

Press DISPLAY (3x)

“Total Remain” is displayed along with the

current track playing and the total amount

of time remaining.

Press the DISPLAY button again to display

the elapsed time of the current track.

Skipping Tracks

Press the NEXT button on the remote con-

trol to select to the next track. Press the

PREV button one time to select the begin-

ning of the current track. Press the PREV

button two times to select the previous

track.

Repeat Modes

To access the repeat mode options, press

the REPEAT button on the remote control.

The repeat mode options are as follows:

∙REPEAT ALL: Repeat the entire

disc (default).

∙REPEAT ONE: Repeat the current

track.

∙ REPEAT OFF: Playback stops after the

disc in its entirety.

Random Mode

You can choose what order the tracks will

be played. To access the random play

mode, press the RANDOM button on the

remote control. All tracks on the disc will

playback in random order. Press RANDOM

again to cancel random mode.

Direct Track Access

Press the number keys on the remote con-

trol (0–9) to access a track directly. For ex-

ample, to go to track 14, press “1”,”4”, then

ENTER on the remote control.

LHA3864

4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

PLAYING AUDIO FILES

MP3 and WMA are formats for storing digi-

tal audio. A CD quality song can be com-

pressed into the MP3 or WMA format with

very little loss of quality, while talking up

much less storage space. Encoded discs

and USB devices that include MP3 or WMA

audio files can be played on this system.

Insert a disc or USB device into the unit and

select monitor A mode (if using monitor A)

or monitor B (if using monitor B) using the

front panel controls or the remote control.

Using a USB Device

Insert a USB device into the USB connec-

tion port. When inserting a USB device, the

top side of the devices should face up-

wards.

When an MP3/WMA encoded disc or USB

device is inserted, the information screen

appears automatically and playback will

begin.

Display

During audio file playback, press the DIS-

PLAY button on the remote control to se-

lect between the file list and currently play-

ing file.

Selecting Files

1. To change files when a file is playing,

press the or buttons

on the remote control to display the file

list, and then press the

or buttons to select the de-

sired file.

2. Once the desired file is highlighted,

press the ENTER button on the remote

control to select it.

Selecting Folders

1. To select folders when a file is playing,

press the button on the re-

mote control to display the list. Press

the or buttons to se-

lect the desired folder.

2. Press the button to access

the previous level (go up one level) or,

press the button to access

the next level (go down one level).

3. Once the desired folder is highlighted,

press the ENTER button on the remote

control to select it.

Skipping Files

Press the NEXT button on the remote con-

trol to select to the next file. Press the PREV

button one time to select the beginning of

the current file. Press the PREV button two

times to select the previous file.

Repeat Modes

To access the repeat mode options, press

the REPEAT button on the remote control.

The repeat mode options are as follows:

∙REPEAT ALL: Repeat the entire

disc or USB device (default).

LHA3865

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113

∙ REPEAT FOLDER: Repeat the cur-

rent folder

∙REPEAT ONE: Repeat the current

file.

∙ REPEAT OFF: Playback stops after the

disc or USB device is played in its en-

tirety.

Random Mode

You can choose what order the files will be

played. To access the random play mode,

press the RANDOM button on the remote

control. The files in the current folder will

playback in random order. Press RANDOM

again to cancel random mode.

Direct File Access

Press the number keys on the remote con-

trol (0–9) to access a file directly. For ex-

ample, to go to track 14, press “1”,”4”, then

ENTER on the remote control.

PLAYING IMAGE FILES

Insert a disc or USB device into the unit and

select monitor A mode (if using monitor A)

or monitor B (if using monitor B) using the

front panel controls or the remote control.

Using a USB Device

Insert a USB device into the USB connec-

tion port. When inserting a USB device, the

top side of the devices should face up-

wards.

When a disc or USB device with JPG files is

inserted, the slideshow will begin auto-

matically. When a disc or USB device with

mixed audio/video/image files is inserted,

the file list screen may appear first.

Selecting Files

1. To select files during the slideshow,

press the MENU button remote control

to access the file list. Press the

or buttons on the remote con-

trol to select the desired file.

2. Once the desired file is highlighted,

press the ENTER button on the remote

control to select it.

Selecting Folders

1. To select folders during the slideshow,

press the MENU button on the remote

control to access the list.

2. Press the button to access

the previous level (go up one level) or,

press the button to access

the next level (go down one level).

3. Once the desired folder is highlighted,

press the ENTER button on the remote

control to select it.

LHA3866

4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Repeat Modes

To access the repeat mode options, press

the REPEAT button on the remote control.

The repeat mode options are as follows:

∙REPEAT ALL: Repeat the entire

disc or USB device (default).

∙REPEAT FOLDER: Repeat the cur-

rent folder

∙REPEAT ONE: Repeat the current

file.

∙ REPEAT OFF: Playback stops after the

disc or USB device is played in its en-

tirety.

Thumbnail Views

1. Press the STOP button on the remote

control during the slideshow to display

images in thumbnail mode. Press

the or and

the or buttons on the

remote control to select the desired

language.

2. Once the desired image is highlighted,

press the ENTER button on the remote

control to select it.

Rotating Images

During the slideshow, press the

button on the remote control to rotate the

image 90° clockwise. Press the

button to rotate the image 90° counter-

clockwise.

Inverting Images

During the slideshow, press the

button on the remote control to invert the

image (Up-Down).

Mirroring Images

During the slideshow, press

the button on the remote control

to mirror the image (Left-Right).

Direct File Access

Press the number keys on the remote con-

trol (0–9) to access a file directly. For ex-

ample, to go to track 14, press “1”,”4”, then

ENTER on the remote control.

PLAYING VIDEO FILES

Insert a disc or USB device into the unit and

select monitor A mode (if using monitor A)

or monitor B (if using monitor B) using the

front panel controls or the remote control.

Using a USB Device

Insert a USB device into the USB connec-

tion port. When inserting a USB device, the

top side of the device should face upwards.

LHA3867

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115

When a disc or USB device with video files is

inserted, playback will begin automatically.

When a disc or USB device with mixed

audio/video/image files is inserted, the file

list screen may appear first.

Selecting Files

1. To select files during the video play-

back, press the MENU button on the

remote control to access the file list.

Press the or buttons

on the remote control to select the de-

sired file.

2. Once the desired file is highlighted,

press the ENTER button on the remote

control to select it.

Selecting Folders

1. To select folders during video playback,

press the MENU button on the remote

control to access the list.

2. Press the button to access

the previous level (go up one level) or,

press the button to access

the next level (go down one level).

3. Once the desired folder is highlighted,

press the ENTER button on the remote

control to select it.

Skipping Files

Press the NEXT button on the remote con-

trol to select to the next file. Press the PREV

button one time to select the beginning of

the current file. Press the PREV button two

times to select the previous file.

Repeat Modes

To access the repeat mode options, press

the REPEAT button on the remote control.

The repeat mode options are as follows:

∙REPEAT ALL: Repeat the entire

disc or USB device (default).

∙REPEAT FOLDER: Repeat the cur-

rent folder

∙REPEAT ONE: Repeat the current

file.

∙ REPEAT OFF: Playback stops after the

disc or USB device is played in its en-

tirety.

Direct File Access

Press the number keys on the remote con-

trol (0–9) to access a file directly. For ex-

ample, to go to track 14, press “1”,”4”, then

ENTER on the remote control.

CHARGING A USB DEVICE

Plug the USB cable (not supplied) into the

USB connection port and then connect the

other end to the USB device.

NOTE:

Depending on the device, it may or may

not charge when connected to the USB

port. Not all devices are able to charge

when connected to the USB port.

CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL

AUXILIARY A/V SOURCE — INPUT

An external A/V source such as a media

player, video game, or other audio/video

device may be connected to the RCA type

jacks on the front of the monitor. Connect

the external audio/video source to the RCA

type input jacks on the front of the monitor

using RCA type connectors (sold sepa-

rately).

Yellow: Video input

Red: Audio-right channel input

White: Audio-left channel input

The system will automatically select the

auxiliary input mode when the RCA type

connectors are inserted into the input

4-116 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

jacks. The auxiliary input connection over-

rides disc and USB playback.

The system provides priority for each of the

following device inputs:

1. External RCA A/V input

2. USB port

3. Disc playback

For example if a disc is playing and a USB

device is plugged in, the USB device will

take priority over disc playback. The exter-

nal RCA A/V input connections have prior-

ity over both USB port and disc playback.

CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL A/V

MONITOR — OUTPUT

An external audio/video monitor may be

connected to the 3.5mm A/V connector

(sold separately).

NOTE:

Use the 3.5mm A/V cable made specifi-

cally for the device. An optional adapter

(sold separately) may be used to convert

the 3.5mm A/V output to the standard

RCA jacks.

SELECTING MONITOR A OR B AS

THE SOURCE

It is possible to select monitor B as the

source from monitor A and vice versa. This

will allow content that is playing on monitor

B to be displayed on monitor A.

Monitor A:

To select monitor B as the source for moni-

tor A, press the source button on the front

panel or the remote control until “MONITOR

B” is displayed.

Monitor B:

To select monitor A as the source for moni-

tor B, press the source button on the front

panel or the remote control until “MONITOR

A” is displayed.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Remedy

Monitor does

not power on.

Is ignition switch turned to the

ON or ACC position?

Are batteries installed in the re-

mote control?

Check the remote control to

make sure “DVD-A” button is

pressed for controlling monitor

A and “DVD-B” button is pressed

for controlling monitor B.

Symptom Remedy

Remote con-

trol does not

function.

Verify that the batteries in the

remote control are good.

Verify that the remote sensor

lens is not obstructed.

Disc will not

play.

Insert the disc with label side

facing the rear of the vehicle.

Check if the disc is defective by

trying another disc.

Check the type of disc being

played. This unit only plays DVD

(Single, Dual Layer), DVD-R/+R,

DVD+R Dual layer, DVD-RW/+RW,

CD, CD-R, and CD-RW.

Both the unit and DVD discs are

coded by region. If the region

codes don’t match, the DVD

can’tbeplayed.

Disc plays, but

stops

intermittently.

The disc is dirty and needs

cleaning.

Condensation has formed in-

side the unit. Remove the disc

and allow unit to dry out.

No picture.

Check the signal source is

connected.

Check the menu source setting.

Match your monitor mode with

the source correctly.

Distorted

picture.

Check the disc for fingerprints

and clean with a soft cloths,

wiping from center to edge.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117

Symptom Remedy

Cannot ad-

vance through

a DVD movie.

You cannot advance through

the opening credits and warn-

ing information that appears at

the beginning of DVDs because

the disc is programmed to pro-

hibit these actions.

No sound or

distorted

sound.

Make sure that the external me-

dia device is connected

properly, and all cables are se-

curely inserted into the appro-

priate jacks.

Verify that the batteries in the

headphones are good.

If you are using the wireless

headphones, make sure you

turn on the power and select

thecorrectmonitor(AorB).

Is volume turned on the head-

phones?

Is anything blocking the path

between the monitor IR sensor

and headphones?

When placing the headphones

on your head, make sure to ob-

serve the Left and Right

orientation. The headphones

must be oriented correctly (fac-

ing forward) in order to receive

the audio signal.

Symptom Remedy

Monitor feels

warm.

When the monitor is in use for a

long period of time, the surface

will be warm. This is normal.

Player does

not respond

to all com-

mands during

playback.

Some operations are not per-

mitted by the DVD.

For additional information, refer

to the specific instructions in-

cluded with the DVD.

When a DVD is

inserted, a Pa-

rental Setting

message is

displayed, pro-

hibiting DVD

movie

playback.

Using the remote control, enter

the 4–digit Parental Password

(0000) and then press Enter.

After the Pa-

rental Pass-

word is

entered, a

Password In-

correct mes-

sage is dis-

played and

DVD movie will

not play.

If the incorrect Parental Pass-

word is entered more than two

times, the until will stop play-

back and return to the

splashscreen. Using the remote

control, press Play to initiate

playback and display the Paren-

tal Setting message. Using the

remote control, enter the 4–digit

Parental Password (0000) and

then press Enter.

SPECIFICATIONS

LCD Backlight LED

Resolution 480x3(RGB) x234

Display 7”TFT LCD Panel

DVD Mechanism Slot-In Loader

Supported Disc

DVD (Single, Dual Layer),

DVD-R/+R, DVD-R/+R Dual

layer, DVD-RW/+RW, CD,

CD-R, CD-RW

Sources Internal CD/DVD, USB Flash

Memory, External A/V Input

I/O Ports

USB 2.0 port, 3.5mm A/V

Output Jack, 3.5mm Head-

phone Jack, RCA Type A/V

Input Jacks

Frequency Re-

sponse

20Hz — 20kHz

Headphone (Audio

Out)

Output Level: 2Vpp (input

0dB 1kHz)

Load Impedance: 10kΩ

Video Display Sys-

tem

NTSC/PAL

Video Out Output Level: 1Vpp (±20%)

Load Impedance: 75Ω

Wireless Audio

Dual channel infrared audio

transmitter, supports stereo

headphone operation

IR Channels

Channels

A :2.3/2.8 MHz

B: 3.2/3.8 MHz

4-118 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

FCC NOTICE

This device has been tested and found to

comply with the limits for a Class B digital

device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide rea-

sonable protection against harmful inter-

ference in a residential installation. This de-

vice generates, uses, and can radiate radio

frequency energy, and if not installed and

used in accordance with the instructions,

may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However, there is no

guarantee that interference will not occur

in a particular installation. If this device

does cause unacceptable interference to

radio or television reception, which can be

determined by turning the device off and

on, the user is encouraged to try to correct

the interference by one or more of the fol-

lowing measures:

∙ Reorient or relocate the receiving an-

tenna.

∙ Increase the separation between the

device and receiver.

∙ Connect the device into an outlet on a

circuit different from that to which the

receiver is connected.

∙ Consult your dealer or an experienced

radio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING

WARNING

∙ To assure continued FCC compliance,

the user must use the provided

grounded power supply cord and the

shielded video interface cable with

bonded ferrite cores.

∙ Any unauthorized change or modifi-

cations to this device would void the

user’s authority to operate this

device.

ITE NOTICE

This Class B digital apparatus complies

with Canadian ICES-003.

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference,

and (2) this device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

This device and its antenna(s) must not be

co-located or operation in conjunction

with any other antenna or transmitter.

Under Industry Canada regulations, this ra-

dio transmitter may only operate using an

antenna or a type and maximum (or lesser)

gain approved for the transmitter by Indus-

try Canada. To reduce potential radio inter-

ference to other users, the antenna type

and its gain should be so chosen that the

equivalent isotropically radiated power

(e.i.r.p) is not more than that necessary for

successful communication.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119

WEEE NOTICE

Disposal of Old Electrical & Electronic

Equipment (Applicable in the European

Union and other European countries with

separate collection systems).

This symbol on the product or on its pack-

aging indicates that the device shall not be

treated as household waste. Instead, it

shall be handed over to the applicable col-

lection point for the recycling of electrical

and electronic equipment By ensuring this

device is disposed of correctly, you will help

prevent potential negative consequences

for the environment and human health,

which could otherwise be caused by inap-

propriate waste handling of this device.

The recycling of material will help to con-

serve natural resources. For additional in-

formation about recycling of this device,

please contact your local city office, your

household waste disposal service or the

shop where you purchased the device. Ap-

plicable accessory: remote control.

MACROVISION NOTICE

This product incorporates copyright pro-

tection technology that is protected by

method claims of certain U.S. patents and

other intellectual property rights owned by

Macrovision Corporation and other rights

owners. Use of this copyright protection

technology must be authorized by Macro-

vision Corporation, and is intended for

home and other limited viewing used only

unless otherwise authorized by Macrovi-

sion Corporation. Reverse engineering or

disassembly is prohibited.

DOLBY DIGITAL

Manufactured under license from Dolby

Laboratories.

Dolby and the double-D symbol are regis-

tered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

LHA3869 LHA3870

4-120 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When installing a CB, ham radio or car

phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe

the following precautions; otherwise, the

new equipment may adversely affect the

engine control system and other electronic

parts.

WARNING

∙ A cellular phone should not be used

for any purpose while driving so full

attention may be given to vehicle op-

eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit

the use of cellular phones while

driving.

∙ If you must make a call while your ve-

hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-

lar phone operational mode (if so

equipped) is highly recommended.

Exercise extreme caution at all times

so full attention may be given to ve-

hicle operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while talking

on the phone, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

∙ Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control

modules.

∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic con-

trol system harnesses. Do not route

the antenna wire next to any harness.

∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave

ratio as recommended by the

manufacturer.

∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

∙ For additional information, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

WARNING

∙ Use a phone after stopping your ve-

hicle in a safe location. If you have to

use a phone while driving, exercise ex-

treme caution at all times so full at-

tention may be given to vehicle

operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while talking

on the phone, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-

tery, use a phone after starting the

engine.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121

Your NISSAN is equipped with the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If

you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled

cellular phone, you can set up the wireless

connection between your cellular phone

and the in-vehicle phone module. With

Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone

call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to

the in-vehicle phone module, no other

phone connecting procedure is required.

Your phone is automatically connected

with the in-vehicle phone module when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-

sition with the previously connected cellu-

lar phone turned on and carried in the ve-

hicle.

NOTE:

Some devices require the user to accept

connections to other Bluetooth® de-

vices. If your phone does not connect au-

tomatic ally to the system, consult the

phone’s Owner’s Manual for details on

device operation.

You can connect up to five different

Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-

vehicle phone module. However, you can

talk on only one cellular phone at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System, refer to the following notes.

∙ Set up the wireless connection be-

tween a compatible cellular phone and

the in-vehicle phone module before us-

ing the hands-free phone system.

LHA3780

4-122 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular

phones may not be recognized or work

properly. Please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list and connecting in-

structions.

∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular

service area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive a cellular signal;

such as in a tunnel, in an under-

ground parking garage, near a tall

building or in a mountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to pre-

vent it from being dialed.

∙ When the radio wave condition is not

ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it

may be difficult to hear the other per-

son’s voice during a call.

∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an

area surrounded by metal or far away

from the in-vehicle phone module to

prevent tone quality degradation and

wireless connection disruption.

∙ While a cellular phone is connected

through the Bluetooth® wireless con-

nection, the battery power of the cellu-

lar phone may discharge quicker than

usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System cannot charge cellular

phones.

∙ Some cellular phones or other devices

may cause interference or a buzzing

noise to come from the audio system

speakers. Storing the device in a differ-

ent location may reduce or eliminate

the noise.

∙ For additional information, refer to the

cellular phone Owner’s Manual regard-

ing the telephone charges, cellular

phone antenna and body, etc.

∙ For additional information, refer to

“Troubleshooting guide” in this section.

You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for trouble-

shooting help if the hands-free phone

system seems to be malfunctioning.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only

the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-

tenna, modification, or attachments

could damage the transmitter and may

violate FCC regulations.

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference

and

2. this device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian

Interference-Causing Equipment Regu-

lations.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-123

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and licensed

to Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM

The system allows hands-free operation of

the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands

may not be available so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, NISSANVoice Recognition is initial-

ized, which takes a few seconds. If the

button is pressed before the initialization

completes, the system will announce

“Hands-free phone system not ready” and

will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the

NISSAN Voice Recognition System, observe

the following:

∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible. Keep all vents pointed away

from the microphone and close the

windows to eliminate surrounding

noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds,

etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing voice commands cor-

rectly.

∙ Wait until the tone sounds before

speaking a command. Otherwise, the

command will not be received properly.

∙ Start speaking a command within

5 seconds after the tone sounds.

∙ Speak in a natural voice without paus-

ing between words.

∙ For calling contacts by name, please

say both the first and last name of the

contact for better recognition.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,

press and release the button located

on the steering wheel. After the tone

sounds, speak a command.

The command given is picked up by the

microphone, and voice feedback is given

when the command is accepted.

∙ If you need to hear the available com-

mands for the current menu again, say

“Help” and the system will repeat them.

∙ If a command is not recognized, the

system announces, “Command not

recognized. Please try again.” Make sure

the command is said exactly as

prompted by the system and repeat

the command in a clear voice.

∙ If you want to go back to the previous

command, you can say “Go back” or

“Correction” any time the system is

waiting for a response.

∙ You can cancel a command when the

system is waiting for a response by say-

ing, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system an-

nounces “Cancel” and ends the Voice

Recognition session. You can also press

and hold the button on the steer-

ing wheel for 5 seconds at any time to

end the Voice Recognition session.

Whenever the Voice Recognition ses-

sion is canceled, a double beep is

played to indicate you have exited the

system.

4-124 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the

voice feedback, push the volume con-

trol switches (+ or -) on the steering

wheel while being provided with feed-

back. You can also use the radio volume

control knob.

Voice Prompt Interrupt

In most cases you can interrupt the voice

feedback to speak the next command by

pressing the button on the steering

wheel. After interrupting the system, wait

for a beep before speaking your command.

One Shot Call

To use the system faster, you may speak

the second level commands with the main

menu command on the main menu. For

example, press the button and after

the tone say, “Call Redial”.

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System are located on

the steering wheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to initi-

ate a Voice Recognition ses-

sion or answer an incoming

call.

You can also use the

button to interrupt the sys-

tem feedback and give a

command at once. For addi-

tional information, refer to

“Voice Commands” and “Dur-

ing a call” in this section.

PHONE/END

While the voice recognition

system is active, press and

hold the button for

5 seconds to quit the voice

recognition system at any

time.

Tuning switch

While using the voice recogni-

tion system, tilt the tuning

switch up or down to manu-

ally control the phone system.

LHA3781

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-125

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If

the vehicle starts moving during the pro-

cedure, the procedure will be canceled.

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL or

TUNE/FOLDER knob to select

“Bluetooth” and then press the

ENTER/SETTING button.

Menu Item Result

Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect device.

On Turns Bluetooth® functionality on

Off Turns Bluetooth® functionality off

Add Phone or Device Upon pressing this button, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. operate the Bluetooth® phone to enter the PIN and

complete the connection process.

Replace Phone Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows the user to keep any voicetags that were recorded

using the previous phone if vehicle is equipped with voice recognition.

The connecting procedure varies according to each phone. For additional information, refer to the phone’s Owner’s Manual. You can also

visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth or call the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for instructions on

connecting recommended cellular phones.

LHA2775

4-126 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

VOICE COMMANDS

Voice commands can be used to operate

the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Press the button to bring up the

phone command menu. The available op-

tions are:

∙ Call

∙ Phonebook

∙ Recent Calls

∙ Messaging

∙ Select Phone or Device

NOTE:

For Apple iPhones, text messages can

only be sent through Siri®

“Call”

For additional information, refer to “Making

a call” in this section.

“Phonebook”

The following commands are available un-

der “Phonebook”:

∙ (a name)

Say a name in the phonebook to bring

up a list of options for that phonebook

entry. The system will say the name it

interpreted based on the voice com-

mand provided. If the name is incorrect,

say “Correction” to hear another name.

Once the correct phonebook entry is

identified, say “Dial” to dial the number

or “Send Text” to send a text message to

that number. Say “Record Name” to re-

cord a name for the phonebook entry.

Say “Delete Recording” to delete a re-

corded name for the phonebook entry.

∙ List Names

Speak this command to have the sys-

tem list the names in the phonebook

one by one alphabetically. Say “Dial” to

dial the number of the current name or

“Send Text” to send a text message to

that number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previ-

ous Entry” to move through the list al-

phabetically. Say “Record Name” to re-

cord a name for the current phonebook

entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a

recorded name for the current phone-

book entry.

∙ Transfer Entry (if so equipped)

This command can be used to transfer

multiple contacts at a time. To enable

manual contact transfer capability, set

“Phonebook Download” to “Off” in the

Setting menu. The ability to transfer

contacts via the OPP Bluetooth® profile

depends on your mobile phone. For ad-

ditional information, refer to your

phone’s Owner’s Manual.

∙ Delete Entry (if so equipped)

Speak this command to delete an entry

in the phonebook. Choose an entry to

delete by speaking the desired name or

say “List Names”.

“Recent Calls”

The following commands are available un-

der “Recent Calls”:

∙ Incoming Calls

Speak this command to list the last five

incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is

from an entry in the phonebook, the

name will be displayed. Otherwise, the

phone number of the incoming call will

be displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number. Say “Next

Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move

through the list of incoming calls.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-127

∙ Missed Calls

Speak this command to list the last five

missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is

from an entry in the phonebook, the

name will be displayed. Otherwise, the

phone number of the missed call will be

displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number. Say “Next

Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move

through the list of missed calls.

∙ Outgoing Calls

Speak this command to list the last five

outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the

call was to an entry in the phonebook,

the name will be displayed. Otherwise,

the phone number of the outgoing call

will be displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number. Say “Next

Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move

through the list of outgoing calls.

∙ Redial

Speak this command to call the last

number dialed.

∙ Call Back

Speak this command to call the num-

ber of the last incoming call to the ve-

hicle.

“Messaging”

Speak this command to access text mes-

saging functions. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Text messaging” in this sec-

tion.

“Select Phone or Device”

Speak this command to select a phone to

use from a list of those phones connected

to the vehicle.

MAKING A CALL

To make a call from a phone connected to

the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System:

1. Press the button.

2. The system will prompt you for a com-

mand. Say “Call”.

3. Select one of the available voice com-

mands to continue:

∙ “(a name)” – Speak the name of a

phonebook entry to place a call to that

entry. The system will respond with the

name it interpreted from your com-

mand and will prompt you to confirm

that the name is correct. Say “Dial” to

initiate the call or “Correction” to hear

another name from the phonebook.

∙ “Number” – Speak this command to

place a call by inputting numbers.

For 7- and 10-digit phone numbers,

speak the numbers. When finished, say

“Dial” to initiate the call. Say “Correction”

at any time in the process to correct a

misspoken or misinterpreted number.

For phone numbers with more digits or

special characters, say “Special Num-

ber”, then speak the digits. Up to 24 dig-

its can be entered. Available special

characters are “star”, “pound”, “plus” and

“pause”. When finished, say “Dial” to initi-

ate the call. Say “Correction” at any time

in the process to correct a misspoken

or misinterpreted number or character.

∙ “Redial” – Speak this command to dial

the number of the last outgoing call.

The system will display “Redialing

<name/number>”. The name of the

phonebook entry will be displayed if it

available, otherwise the number being

redialed will be displayed.

4-128 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ “Call Back” – Speak this command to

dial the number of the last incoming

call. The system will display “Calling

back <name/number>”. The name of

the phonebook entry will be displayed if

it available, otherwise the number be-

ing called back will be displayed.

RECEIVING A CALL

When a call is received by the phone con-

nected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System, the call information is

displayed on either the vehicle information

display (if so equipped) or both the vehicle

information display (if so equipped) and the

control panel display.

Press the button to accept the call.

Press the button to reject the call.

DURING A CALL

While a call is active, press the button

to access additional options. Speak one of

the following commands:

∙ “Send” – Speak this command followed

by the digits to enter digits during the

phone call.

∙ “Mute On” or “Mute Off” – Speak the

command to mute or unmute the sys-

tem.

∙ “Transfer Call” – Speak this command to

transfer the call to the handset. To

transfer the call back from the handset

to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System, press the button and

confirm when prompted.

If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System allows for call

waiting functionality. If a call is received

while another call is already active, a mes-

sage will be displayed on the screen. Press

the button to hold the active call and

switch to the second call. Press the

button to reject the second call.

While the second call is active, pressing

the button will allow the same com-

mands that are available during any call as

well as two additional commands:

∙ “Switch Call” – Speak this command to

hold the second call and switch back to

the original call.

∙ “End Other Call” – Speak this command

to stay with the second call and end the

original call.

Press the button to accept the call.

Press the button to reject the call.

ENDING A CALL

To end an active call, press the but-

ton.

TEXT MESSAGING

WARNING

∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-

strict the use of “Text-to-Speech.”

Check local regulations before using

the feature.

∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-

strict the use of some of the applica-

tions and features, such as social net-

working and texting. Check local

regulations for any requirements.

∙ Use the text messaging feature after

stopping your vehicle in a safe loca-

tion. If you have to use the feature

while driving, exercise extreme cau-

tion at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while using

the text messaging feature, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-129

NOTE:

Many phones may require special per-

mission to enable text messaging. Check

the phone’s screen during Bluetooth®

pairing. For some phones, you may need

to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s

Bluetooth® menu for text messages to

appear on the headunit. Please consult

you phone’s Owner’s manual. Text mes-

sage integration requires that the phone

support MAP (Message Access Profile)

for both receiving and sending text mes-

sages. Some phones may not support all

text messaging features. For additional

information, refer to

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat-

ibility information, as well as your de-

vice’s Owner’s manual.

The system allows for the sending and re-

ceiving of text messages through the ve-

hicle interface.

Sending a text message:

1. Press the button.

2. Say “Messaging”.

3. Say “Send Text”.

4. The system will provide a list of avail-

able commands in order to determine

the recipient of the text message.

Choose from the following:

∙ (A name)

∙ Number

∙ Incoming Calls

∙ Outgoing Calls

∙ Missed Calls

If “Incoming Calls”, “Outgoing Calls”, or

“Missed Calls” is selected, the following

additional commands will be dis-

played:

∙ Send Text

∙ Next Entry

∙ Previous Entry

For additional information about these

options, refer to “Voice commands” in

this section.

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system

prompts for which message to send.

Five predefined messages are avail-

able as well as three custom mes-

sages. To choose one of the predefined

messages, speak one of the following:

∙ “Driving, can’t text”

∙ “Call me”

∙ “On my way”

∙ “Running late”

∙ “Okay”

To send one of the custom messages, say

“Custom Message”. If more than one cus-

tom message is stored, the system will

prompt for the number of the desired cus-

tom message. For additional information

on setting and managing custom text

messages, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in

this section.

Reading a received text message:

1. Press the button.

2. Say “Messaging”.

3. Say “Read Text”.

The text message, sender and delivery

time are shown on the screen. Use the tun-

ing switch on the steering wheel to scroll

through all text messages if more than one

are available. Press the button to exit

the text message screen. Press the

button to access the following options for

replying to the text message:

4-130 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ Call Back

Speak this command to call the sender

of the text message using the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

∙ Send Text

Speak this command to send a text

message response to the sender of the

text message.

∙ Read Text

Speak this command to read the text

message again.

∙ Previous Text

Speak this command to move to the

previous text message (if available).

∙ Next Text

Speak this command to move to the

next text message (if available).

Siri® Eyes Free

If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,

it can also be used to create custom mes-

sages that are sent through the phone. For

additional information, refer to Siri® Eyes

Free in this section.

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed if the

vehicle speed is less than 5 mph

(8 km/h).

NOTE:

For Apple iPhones, text messages can

only be sent through Siri.

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS

To access and adjust the settings for the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL or

TUNE/FOLDER knob to select

“Bluetooth” and then press the

ENTER/SETTING button:

∙ Bluetooth

Select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle’s

Bluetooth® system on or off.

LHA2894

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-131

∙ Add Phone or Device

For additional information, refer to

“Connecting procedure” in this section.

∙ Delete Phone or Device

Select to delete a phone from the dis-

played list. The system will ask to con-

firm before deleting the phone.

∙ Replace Phone

Select to replace a phone from the dis-

played list. When a selection is made,

the system will ask to confirm before

proceeding. The recorded phonebook

for the phone being deleted will be

saved as long as the new phone’s

phonebook is the same as the old

phone’s phonebook.

∙ Select Phone or Device

Select to connect to a previously con-

nected phone from the displayed list.

∙ Phonebook Download

Select to turn on or off the automatic

download of a connected phone’s

phonebook.

∙ Show Incoming Calls

Select “Driver Only” to have incoming

call information displayed only in the

vehicle information display (if so

equipped). Select “Both” to have incom-

ing call information displayed in both

the vehicle information display (if so

equipped) and the center display

screen.

∙ Siri®

Press the button operation for

Siri® Eyes Free function from “Short

Press” and “Long Press” For additional

information, refer to “Siri® Eyes Free” in

this section. “Siri” is displayed only when

a Siri Eyes Free enabled iPhone® is con-

nected to the vehicle.

∙ Text Message

Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s text

messaging feature.

∙ New Text Sound

Select to adjust the volume of the

sound that plays when a new text is

received by a phone connected to the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

The setting all the way to the left indi-

cates that the new text sound will be

muted.

∙ Show Incoming Text

Select “Driver Only” to have incoming

text messages displayed only in the ve-

hicle information display (if so

equipped). Select “Both” to have incom-

ing text messages displayed in both the

vehicle information display (if so

equipped) and the center display

screen. Select “None” to have no display

of incoming text messages.

∙ Edit Custom Messages

Select to set a custom message that

will be available with the standard op-

tions when sending a text message. To

set a custom message, send a text

message to your own phone number

while the phone is connected to the

system. Three custom messages can

be set. Custom messages can only be

set while the vehicle is stationary.

4-132 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ Auto Reply

Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply

function. When enabled, the vehicle will

automatically send a predefined text

message to the sender when a text

message is received while driving.

∙ Auto Reply Message

Select to choose the message that is

sent when the Auto Reply function is

enabled. Choose from “I’m Driving” or

one of the three custom messages

stored in the system.

∙ Vehicle Signature On/Off

Select to choose whether or not the

vehicle signature is added to outgoing

text messages from the vehicle. This

message cannot be changed or cus-

tomized.

MANUAL CONTROL

While using the Voice Recognition system,

it is possible to select menu options by

using the steering wheel controls instead

of speaking voice commands. To activate

manual control mode, press the but-

ton on the steering wheel to access the

phone menu and then push either up or

down on the tuning switch .

The manual control mode does not allow

dialing a phone number by digits. The user

may select an entry from the Phonebook

or Recent Calls lists. To reactivate Voice

Recognition, exit the manual control mode

by pressing and holding the button.

At that time, pressing the button will

start the Hands Free Phone System.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-133

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all

voice commands without difficulty. If prob-

lems are encountered, try the following so-

lutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number,

try each solution in turn, starting with num-

ber 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “Voice commands” in this

section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in

the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on).

NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from

the phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be

confirmed by using the “List Names” command. For additional information, refer to “Voice Commands”

in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy.

4-134 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

∙ Use a phone after stopping your ve-

hicle in a safe location. If you have to

use a phone while driving, exercise ex-

treme caution at all times so full at-

tention may be given to vehicle

operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while talking

on the phone, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-

tery, use a phone after starting the

engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If

you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled

cellular phone, you can set up the wireless

connection between your cellular phone

and the in-vehicle phone module. With

Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone

call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to

the in-vehicle phone module, no other

phone connecting procedure is required.

Your phone is automatically reconnected

LHA3782

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-135

with the in-vehicle phone module when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-

sition with the connected cellular phone

turned on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to five different

Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-

vehicle phone module. However, you can

talk on only one cellular phone at a time.

NISSAN Voice Recognition system sup-

ports the phone commands, so dialing a

phone number using your voice is possible.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Voice Recognition System” in this section.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System, refer to the following notes.

∙ Set up the wireless connection be-

tween a cellular phone and the in-

vehicle phone module before using the

hands-free phone system.

∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular

phones may not be recognized by the

in-vehicle phone module. Please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list and connecting.

∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular

service area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive cellular signal;

such as in a tunnel, in an under-

ground parking garage, near a tall

building or in a mountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to pre-

vent it from being dialed.

∙ When the radio wave condition is not

ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it

may be difficult to hear the other per-

son’s voice during a call.

∙ Immediately after the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position, it may be im-

possible to receive a call for a short pe-

riod of time.

∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an

area surrounded by metal or far away

from the in-vehicle phone module to

prevent tone quality degradation and

wireless connection disruption.

∙ While a cellular phone is connected

through the Bluetooth® wireless con-

nection, the battery power of the cellu-

lar phone may discharge quicker than

usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System cannot charge cellular

phones.

∙ Some cellular phones or other devices

may cause interference or a buzzing

noise to come from the audio system

speakers. Storing the device in a differ-

ent location may reduce or eliminate

the noise.

∙ For additional information, refer to the

cellular phone owner’s manual regard-

ing the battery, battery charging and

cellular phone operations.

∙ The signal strength display on the

monitor will not coincide with the signal

strength display of some cellular

phones.

∙ For additional information, refer to

“Troubleshooting guide” in this section.

You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for trouble-

shooting help if the hands-free phone

system seems to be malfunctioning.

4-136 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only

the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-

tenna, modification, or attachments

could damage the transmitter and may

violate FCC regulations.

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference

and

2. this device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian

Interference-Causing Equipment Regu-

lations.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and licensed

to Bosch.

VOICE COMMANDS

You can use voice commands to operate

various Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem features using the NISSAN Voice Rec-

ognition System. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition

System” in this section.

Voice Prompt Interrupt

While using the Voice Recognition system,

the system voice can be interrupted to al-

low the user to speak commands. While

the system is speaking, press the

button on the steering wheel. The system

voice will stop and a tone will be heard.

After the tone, speak desired command

(displayed on the touch-screen).

One Shot Call

To use the system faster, you may speak

the second level commands with the main

menu command on the main menu. For

example, press the button and after

the tone say, “Call Redial”.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-137

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If

the vehicle starts moving during the pro-

cedure, the procedure will be canceled.

1. Press the [ ] button on the control

panel.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

5. Initiate the connecting process from

the handset. The system will display

the message: “Confirm on your

Bluetooth device that the pin XXXXXX is

displayed”. If the PIN is displayed on

your Bluetooth® device, select

“Yes/Pair” to complete the pairing pro-

cess.

For additional information, refer to the

Bluetooth® device’s Owner’s Manual.

VEHICLE PHONEBOOK

To access the vehicle phonebook:

1. Press the button on the control

panel.

2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.

3. Choose the desired entry from the dis-

played list.

4. The number of the entry will be dis-

played on the screen. Touch the num-

ber to initiate dialing.

NOTE:

To scroll quickly through the list, touch

the “A-Z” key in the upper right corner of

the screen. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob

to choose a letter or number and then

press ENTER/AUDIO. The list will move to

the first entry that begins with that num-

ber or letter.

LHA3712

4-138 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MAKING A CALL

To make a call, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the button on the control

panel. The “Phone” screen will appear

on the display.

2. Select one of the following options to

make a call:

∙ “Phonebook”: Select the name from an

entry stored in the vehicle phonebook.

∙ “Call Lists”: Select the name from the

incoming, outgoing or missed.

∙ “Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call from

the vehicle.

∙“ ”: Input the phone number manu-

ally using a keypad displayed on the

screen. For additional information, refer

to “How to use the touch-screen” in this

section.

RECEIVING A CALL

When a call is placed to the connected

phone, the display will change to phone

mode.

To accept the incoming call, either:

∙ Press the button on the steering

wheel, or

∙ Touch the icon on the screen.

To reject the incoming call, either:

∙ Press the button on the steering

wheel, or

∙ Touch the icon on the screen.

DURING A CALL

While a call is active, the following options

are available on the screen:

∙ “Handset”

Select this option to switch control of

the phone call over to the handset.

∙ “Mute Mic.”

Select this option to mute the micro-

phone. Select again to unmute the mi-

crophone.

∙ Phone icon

Select to end the phone call.

ENDING A CALL

To end a phone call, select the phone

icon on the screen or press the but-

ton on the steering wheel.

TEXT MESSAGING

WARNING

∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-

strict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.

Check local regulations before using

this feature.

∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-

strict the use of some of the applica-

tions and features, such as social net-

working and texting. Check local

regulations for any requirements.

∙ Use the text messaging feature after

stopping your vehicle in a safe loca-

tion. If you have to use the feature

while driving, exercise extreme cau-

tion at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while using

the text messaging feature, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-139

NOTE:

This feature is automatically disabled if

the connected device does not support

the Message Access Profile (MAP). For

additional information, refer to the

phone’s Owner’s Manual for details and

instructions.

NOTE:

Many phones may require special permis-

sion to enable text messaging. Check the

phone’s screen during Bluetooth® pairing.

For some phones, you may need to enable

‘Notifications’ in the phone’s Bluetooth®

menu for text messages to appear on the

headunit. For additional information, refer

to your phone’s Owner’s manual. Text mes-

sage integration requires that the phone

support MAP (Message Access Profile) for

both receiving and sending text messages.

Some phones may not support all text mes-

saging features. For additional information,

refer to www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility

information, as well as your device’s Own-

er’s manual.

The system allows for the sending and re-

ceiving of text messages through the ve-

hicle interface.

Sending a text message:

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

4. The system will provide a list of avail-

able commands in order to determine

the recipient of the text message.

Choose from the following:

∙ To (a name)

∙ Enter Number

∙ Missed Calls

∙ Incoming Calls

∙ Outgoing Calls

For additional information, refer to

“Voice commands” in this section.

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system

prompts for which message to send.

Nine predefined messages are avail-

able as well as three custom mes-

sages. To choose one of the predefined

messages, speak one of the following

after the tone:

∙ “Driving, can’t text”

∙ “Call me”

∙ “On my way”

∙ “Running late”

∙ “Okay”

∙ “Yes”

∙ “No”

∙ “Where are you?”

∙ “When?”

∙ “Custom Messages”

To send one of the custom messages,

say “Custom Messages”. If more than

one custom message is stored, the

system will prompt for the number of

the desired custom message. For ad-

ditional information, refer to

“Bluetooth® settings” in this section.

4-140 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Reading a received text message:

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.

The text message, sender and delivery

time are shown on the screen. Use the tun-

ing switch to scroll through all text mes-

sages if more than one are available. Press

the button to exit the text message

screen. Press the button to access

the following options for replying to the text

message:

∙ Call Back

Speak this command to call the sender

of the text message using the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

∙ Send Text

Speak this command to send a text

message response to the sender of the

text message.

∙ Read Text

Speak this command to read the text

message again.

∙ Previous Text

Speak this command to move to the

previous text message (if available).

∙ Next Text

Speak this command to move to the

next text message (if available).

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed if the

vehicle speed is less than 5 mph

(8 km/h).

NOTE:

iPhones® can only send text messages

via Siri® Eyes Free.

Making custom messages with Siri® Eyes

Free

If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,

it can also be used to create custom mes-

sages. For additional information, refer to

“Siri® Eyes Free” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-141

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS

To access the phone settings:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

Menu Item Result

Phone Settings For additional information, refer to “Phone settings” in this section.

Connect New Device Select to connect a new Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Select Connected Device Select to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Replace Connected Device Select to replace a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Delete Connected Device Select to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Bluetooth Select to toggle Bluetooth® on and off.

LHA2844

4-142 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

PHONE SETTINGS

To access the phone settings:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and ad-

just the following settings as desired:

∙ Start Siri® by:

Touch “Short Press” or “Long Press” to

set how Siri® is operated on the steering

wheel.

∙ Sort Phonebook By:

Touch “First Name” or “Last Name” to

choose how phonebook entries are al-

phabetically displayed on the screen.

∙ Use Phonebook From:

Touch “Handset” to use the phone’s

phonebook. Touch “SIM” to use the

phonebook on the SIM card. Select

“Both” to use both sources.

∙ Download Phonebook Now:

Touch to download the phonebook to

the vehicle from the chosen source.

∙ Record Name for Phonebook Entry:

Touch to record a name for a phone-

book entry for use with the NISSAN

Voice Recognition System.

∙ Phone Notifications for:

Touch “Driver” to have phone notifica-

tions shown in the vehicle information

display (if so equipped). Select “Both” to

have phone notifications shown in both

the vehicle information display (if so

equipped) and the center display

screen.

∙ Text Messaging:

Touch to toggle the text message func-

tionality on or off.

∙ Show Incoming Text for:

Touch “Driver” to have incoming text no-

tifications shown in the vehicle informa-

tion display (if so equipped). Touch

“Both” to have text notifications shown

in both the vehicle information display

(if so equipped) and the center display

screen. Touch “Off” to turn off all text

notifications.

∙ Auto Reply:

Touch to toggle the auto reply function-

ality on or off.

∙ Auto Reply Message:

Touch to indicate preferred message to

be sent when “Auto Reply” function is

activated.

∙ Use Vehicle’s Signature:

Touch to toggle on or off the addition of

the vehicle signature to outgoing mes-

sages.

∙ Custom Text Messages:

Touch this option to select a custom

message to edit. There are 4 customer

message slots available.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-143

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all

voice commands without difficulty. If prob-

lems are encountered, try the following so-

lutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number,

try each solution in turn, starting with num-

ber 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition” in

this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in

the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on).

NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from

the phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. For additional

information, refer to “Vehicle phonebook” in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy.

4-144 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system al-

lows hands-free operation of the systems

equipped on this vehicle, such as the

phone and navigation systems.

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,

press the button located on the

steering wheel. When prompted, speak the

command for the system you wish to acti-

vate. The command given is picked up by

the microphone and performed when it is

properly recognized. NISSAN Voice Recog-

nition will provide a voice response as well

as a message in the center display to in-

form you of the command results.

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,

which takes a few seconds. When com-

pleted, the system is ready to accept voice

commands. If the button is pressed

before the initialization completes, the sys-

tem will announce: “Voice Recognition Sys-

tem not ready. Please wait.”

Giving voice commands

1. Press the button.

2. The system announces: “Please say a

category like phone or a command like

points of interest followed by a brand

name”. A list of available commands is

then spoken by the system.

3. After the tone sounds and the face icon

on the display changes, speak a com-

mand. Available commands are dis-

cussed in this section.

4. Voice and display feedback are pro-

vided when the command is accepted.

∙ If the command is not recognized, the

system announces: “Command not

recognized”. Repeat the command in a

clear voice.

∙ If you want to cancel the command or

go back to the previous menu of com-

mands, press the button. The sys-

tem will announce: “Canceling Voice

Recognition” or “Go back” depending on

the current menu level.

∙ Press the button to move back

through the menus displayed on the

screen.

∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the

voice feedback, use the volume control

switches on the steering wheel or the

volume knob on the control panel.

∙ The voice command screen can also be

accessed using the control panel dis-

play:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Voice Commands” key.

LHA3783

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-145

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of NISSAN

Voice Recognition, observe the following:

∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible. Close the windows to elimi-

nate the surrounding noises (traffic

noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which

may prevent the system from recogniz-

ing the voice commands correctly.

∙ Wait until a tone sounds before speak-

ing a command. Otherwise, the com-

mand will not be received properly.

∙ Start speaking a command within

3.5 seconds after the tone sounds.

∙ Speak in a natural voice without paus-

ing between words.

SYSTEM FEATURES

NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the

following systems:

∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

∙ Navigation

∙ Audio

∙ Information

∙ My Apps

For additional information, refer to the

separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a cer-

tain way to speak numbers in voice com-

mands. Refer to the following examples.

General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be

used for “0”.

Phone numbers

Speak phone numbers according to the

following example. For 1-800-662-6200, say

dial number and then speak the phone

number in any of the following formats:

∙ “one eight oh oh six six two six two oh

oh”

∙ “one eight hundred six six two six two oh

oh”

∙ “one eight zero zero six six two six two

oh oh”

For the best voice recognition phone dial-

ing results, say phone numbers as single

digits. Also, full numbers can only be spo-

ken for “800”. For example, you cannot say

555-6000 as “five five five six thousand”.

LHA4373

4-146 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE

PHONE SYSTEM VOICE

COMMANDS

To access the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System voice commands:

1. Press the button.

2. Say “Call” and then a name in the ve-

hicle phonebook to call that entry. Oth-

erwise, say “Phone” to access various

phone commands.

If the Bluetooth® has been set to “Off”, the

system announces: “Bluetooth® is off.

Would you like to turn Bluetooth® on?”

If no phone is connected to the system and

the vehicle is stationary, the system an-

nounces: “There is no phone connected.

Would you like to connect a phone now?”

Say “Yes” to connect a phone. All further

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

voice commands are only available if a

phone is connected.

If a phone is connected and Bluetooth® is

set to “On”, the following voice commands

are available:

∙ Call (a name)

Speak the name of the contact in

which you are trying to call. System will

confirm correct contact. Say “Dial” to

initiate dialing.

∙ Dial Number

Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed.

After the number is entered, say “Dial”

to initiate dialing. Say “Correction” to

correct the number entered. Say “Go

Back” to return to the main menu.

∙ List Phonebook

Starting with the first alphabetical en-

try in the vehicle phonebook, the sys-

tem prompts for an additional com-

mand. Say “Dial” to call the number of

the phonebook entry. Say “Send Text”

to send a text message to the number

of the phonebook entry. Say “Next En-

try” to skip to the next alphabetical en-

try in the vehicle phonebook, where

the same options will then be available.

∙ Recent Calls

The system prompts for an additional

command. Say “Missed Calls”, “Incom-

ing Calls” or “Outgoing Calls” to display

a list of such calls on the screen.

Speak the number of the entry dis-

played on the screen to dial that num-

ber or say “Next Page” to view entries

on the next page (if available).

∙ Redial

Redials the last called number.

∙ Read Text

Reads an incoming text message. For

additional information, refer to

“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem with Navigation System” in this

section.

∙ Send Text

Sends a text message. For additional

information, refer to “Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System with Navi-

gation System” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-147

∙ Select Phone

The system replies “Please use manual

controls to continue”. Use manual con-

trols to change the active phone from

among the listed phones connected

to the vehicle.

∙ Siri®

The system replies “Starting Siri”. For

additional information, refer to “Oper-

ating Siri Eyes Free” in this section.

For additional information, refer to

“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

with Navigation System” in this section.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE

COMMANDS

The following voice commands are avail-

able for the Navigation System:

∙ Street Address (address)

∙ Points of Interest (name)

∙ POI by Category

∙ Home

∙ Address Book

∙ Previous Destinations

∙ Enter Address in Steps

∙ Cancel Route

For additional information about these

commands, refer to the separate

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS

To access the audio system voice com-

mands:

1. Press the button.

2. Say “Audio”

3. Speak a command from the following

available commands:

∙ Play (AM, FM, etc.)

Allows user to select radio band

∙ Tune AM (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desired

AM frequency

∙ Tune FM (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desired

FM frequency

∙ SXM channel (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desired

SXM station (if so equipped)

∙ CD Track (number)

Allows user to select track to be played

∙ Play Song (name)

Allows user to select song name to be

played

∙ Play Artist (name)

Allows user to select artist to be played

∙ Play Album (name)

Allows user to select album name to

be played

For additional information, refer to “Audio

system” in this section.

4-148 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS

The following voice commands are avail-

able for the information functions of the

navigation system:

∙ Traffic

∙ Fuel Prices

∙ Stocks

∙ Movie Listings

∙ Current Weather

∙ Weather Map

∙ 5—dayForecast

∙ 6 — hour Forecast

∙ Connect to Voice Menu

∙ Additional Commands

For additional information, refer to the

separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

MY APPS VOICE COMMANDS

Many Apps can be accessed using this

voice command. For additional informa-

tion, refer to the separate NissanConnect®

Owners Manual.

HELP VOICE COMMANDS

The following voice commands can be

spoken to have the system provide in-

structions and tips for using the NISSAN

Voice Recognition System.

∙ List Commands

∙ What Can I Say?

∙ General Help

∙ Go Back

∙ Quit

∙ Exit

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-149

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all

voice commands without difficulty. If prob-

lems are encountered, follow the solutions

given in this guide for the appropriate error.

Where the solutions are listed by number,

try each solution in turn, starting with num-

ber one, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message Solution

The system responds “Command

Not Recognized” or the system fails

to recognize the command

correctly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help”

menu.

2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.

3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on).

NOTE:

If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.

4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

4-150 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MEMO

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-151

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ..........5-2

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..............5-2

Three-way catalyst (if so equipped) ...........5-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)........................................5-3

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions ..................................5-6

Avoiding collision and rollover ................5-7

Off-roadrecovery ............................5-7

Rapid air pressure loss .......................5-8

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ...........5-8

Driving safety precautions ....................5-9

Push-button ignition switch .....................5-11

Operating range.............................5-12

Push-button ignition switch positions .......5-12

Emergency engine shut off ..................5-13

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery

discharge ...................................5-13

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .........5-14

Before starting the engine......................5-14

Starting the engine (gasoline engine only) ......5-15

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ........5-16

Starting the engine (diesel only) ................5-16

Driving the vehicle ..............................5-16

Engine protection mode.....................5-16

Automatic transmission (A/T) ............... 5-17

Parking brake ..................................5-22

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) .......5-23

BSW system operation ......................5-25

How to enable/disable the BSW system .....5-26

BSW system limitations......................5-27

BSW driving situations .......................5-28

System temporarily unavailable .............5-31

System maintenance........................5-32

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . 5-33

RCTA system operation......................5-34

How to enable/disable the RCTA

system ......................................5-36

RCTA system limitations .....................5-37

System temporarily unavailable .............5-39

System maintenance........................5-40

Cruise control ..................................5-41

Precautions on cruise control................5-41

Cruise control operations....................5-42

Break-in schedule ..............................5-43

Fuel efficient driving tips ........................5-43

Increasing fuel economy .......................5-45

Using 4–wheel drive (4WD) (if so equipped)......5-45

Transfer case shifting procedures ...........5-46

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

system (if so equipped) .........................5-52

Eco Drive Report (if so equipped) ...............5-54

Parking/parking on hills ........................5-55

Power steering .................................5-56

Brake system...................................5-56

Brake precautions ...........................5-56

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ..............5-57

Brake Assist .................................5-58

Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS) system.........5-59

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .........5-60

Brake force distribution......................5-61

Hill descent control system (if so equipped).....5-62

Hill start assist system..........................5-63

Front and rear sonar system (if so equipped) . . .5-64

System operation ...........................5-65

How to enable/disable the sonar

system ......................................5-67

Sonar limitations ............................5-68

System maintenance........................5-69

Cold weather driving ...........................5-69

Freeing a frozen door lock ...................5-69

Antifreeze ...................................5-69

Battery......................................5-69

Draining of coolant water....................5-70

Tire equipment ..............................5-70

Special winter equipment ...................5-70

Driving on snow or ice .......................5-70

Engine block heater (if so equipped) .........5-71

WARNING

∙ Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-

tance of others alone in your vehicle.

Pets should also not be left alone.

They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadvertent

operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-

gerous. It can cause unconsciousness

or death.

∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all

windows fully open, and have the ve-

hicle inspected immediately.

∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

∙ Do not park the vehicle with the en-

gine running for any extended length

of time.

∙ Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,

doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)

closed while driving, otherwise ex-

haust gases could be drawn into the

passenger compartment. If you must

drive with one of these open, follow

these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-

ton to off and the fan control dial to

high to circulate the air.

∙ If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer

through the seal on the liftgate or the

body, follow the manufacturer’s rec-

ommendation to prevent carbon

monoxide entry into the vehicle.

∙ The exhaust system and body should

be inspected by a qualified mechanic

whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering into the passenger

compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving

damage to the exhaust system,

underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST (if so

equipped)

The three-way catalyst is an emission con-

trol device installed in the exhaust system.

Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst

are burned at high temperatures to help

reduce pollutants.

WARNING

∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, ani-

mals or flammable materials away

from the exhaust system

components.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND

DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They may

ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously re-

duce the three-way catalyst’s ability

to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems can cause overrich

fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep

driving if the engine misfires, or if no-

ticeable loss of performance or other

unusual operating conditions are de-

tected. Have the vehicle inspected

promptly. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low

fuel level. Running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, damag-

ing the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not race the engine while warming

it up.

∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to

start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, you

should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as pos-

sible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-

tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is

the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-

rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation

has not reached the level to trigger illumi-

nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously illu-

minated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as

the malfunction exists. When the malfunc-

tion indicator is illuminated, the system

may not be able to detect or signal low tire

pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions

may occur for a variety of reasons, includ-

ing the installation of replacement or alter-

nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-

erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Starting and driving 5-3

Additional information:

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

does not monitor the tire pressure of

the spare tire.

∙ The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above

16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may

not detect a sudden drop in tire pres-

sure (for example, a flat tire while driv-

ing).

∙ The low tire pressure warning light does

not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure is adjusted. After your tires are

inflated to the recommended pressure,

the vehicle must be driven at speeds

above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the

TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure

warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge

to check the tire pressure.

∙ The “Tire Pressure Low – Add Air” warn-

ing appears in the vehicle information

display when the low tire pressure

warning light is illuminated and low tire

pressure is detected. The “Tire Pressure

Low – Add Air” warning turns off when

the low tire pressure warning light turns

off.

∙ The “Tire Pressure Low – Add Air” warn-

ing does not appear if the low tire pres-

sure warning light illuminates to indi-

cate a TPMS malfunction.

∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending

on the heat caused by the vehicle’s op-

eration and the outside temperature.

Do not reduce the tire pressure after

driving because the tire pressure rises

after driving. Low outside temperature

can lower the temperature of the air

inside the tire which can cause a lower

tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to

illuminate. If the warning light illumi-

nates, check the tire pressure for all four

tires.

∙ The Tire and Loading Information label

is located in the driver’s door opening.

For additional information, refer to “Low tire

pressure warning light” in the “Instruments

and controls” section and “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙

If the low tire pressure warning light il-

luminates while driving, avoid sudden

steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,

reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to

a safe location and stop the vehicle as

soon as possible. Driving with under-

inflated tires may permanently damage

the tires and increase the likelihood of

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an accident

and could result in serious personal in-

jury. Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the rec-

ommended COLD tire pressure shown

on the Tire and Loading Information la-

bel to turn the low tire pressure warning

light off. If you have a flat tire, replace it

with a spare tire as soon as possible.

(For additional information, refer to

“Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”

section for changing a flat tire.)

5-4 Starting and driving

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, when a

spare tire is mounted or a wheel is

replaced, tire pressure will not be indi-

cated, the TPMS will not function and

the low tire pressure warning light will

flash for approximately 1 minute. The

light will remain on after 1 minute.

Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS

system reset as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any

metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win-

dows. This may cause poor reception of

the signals from the tire pressure sen-

sors, and the TPMS will not function

properly.

Some devices and transmitters may tem-

porarily interfere with the operation of the

TPMS and cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate.

Some examples are:

∙ Facilities or electric devices using simi-

lar radio frequencies are near the ve-

hicle.

∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequen-

cies is being used in or near the vehicle.

∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or

a DC/AC converter is being used in or

near the vehicle.

The low tire pressure warning light may

illuminate in the following cases:

∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel

and tire without TPMS.

∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the

ID has not been registered.

∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by

NISSAN.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

Starting and driving 5-5

TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert

WARNING

After rotating the tires, do not use the

Easy-Fill Tire Alert to adjust the tire

pressure. Instead use a gauge to adjust

the tires to the correct pressure in ac-

cordance with Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label.

When adding air to an under-inflated tire,

the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides

visual and audible signals outside the ve-

hicle to help you inflate the tires to the rec-

ommended COLD tire pressure.

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.

2. Apply the parking brake and place the

shift lever to the P (Park) position.

3. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition. Do not start the engine.

Operation

1. Add air to the tire.

2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica-

tors will start flashing.

3. When the designated pressure is

reached, the horn beeps once and the

hazard indicators stop flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire.

∙ If the tire is over-inflated more than

approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn

beeps and the hazard indicators

flash three times.To correct the pres-

sure, push the core of the valve stem

on the tire briefly to release pressure.

When the pressure reaches the des-

ignated pressure, the horn beeps

once.

∙ If the hazard indicator does not flash

within approximately 15 seconds af-

ter starting to inflate the tire, it indi-

cates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is

not operating.

∙ The TPMS will not activate the Easy-

Fill Tire Alert under the following con-

ditions:

– If there is interference from an exter-

nal device or transmitter.

– The air pressure from the inflation

device is not sufficient to inflate the

tire.

– There is a malfunction in the TPMS

system.

– There is a malfunction in the horn or

hazard indicators.

– The identification code of the tires

pressure sensor is not registered to

the system.

– The battery of the tire pressure sen-

sor is low.

∙ If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not op-

erate due toTPMS interference, move

the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward

or forward and try again.

If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a

tire pressure gauge.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS

Utility vehicles have a significantly

higher rollover rate than other types of

vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than

passenger cars to make them capable of

performing in a variety of on-pavement

and off-road applications. This gives them

a higher center of gravity than ordinary ve-

hicles. An advantage of higher ground

5-6 Starting and driving

clearance is a better view of the road, allow-

ing you to anticipate problems. However,

they are not designed for cornering at the

same speeds as conventional 2-wheel

drive vehicles any more than low-slung

sports cars are designed to perform satis-

factorily under off-road conditions. If at all

possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds.

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to

operate this vehicle correctly may result in

loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a roll-

over crash, an unbelted person is signifi-

cantly more likely to die than a person

wearing a seat belt.

For additional information, refer to “Driving

safety precautions” in this section.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss

of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.

Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive

speed, high speed cornering, or sudden

steering maneuvers, because these driving

practices could cause you to lose control of

your vehicle.

As with any vehicle, loss of control could

result in a collision with other vehicles or

objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,

particularly if the loss of control causes

the vehicle to slide sideways.

Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving

when tired. Never drive when under the in-

fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-

scription or over-the-counter drugs which

may cause drowsiness). Always wear your

seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section of this manual, and also in-

struct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,

an unbelted or improperly belted person

is significantly more likely to be injured

or killed than a person properly wearing

a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side

wheels may unintentionally leave the road

surface. If this occurs, maintain control of

the vehicle by following the procedure be-

low. Please note that this procedure is only

a general guide.The vehicle must be driven

as appropriate based on the conditions of

the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a

straight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow the

vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the

vehicle to follow the road while vehicle

speed is reduced. Do not attempt to

drive the vehicle back onto the road

surface until vehicle speed is reduced.

When it is safe to do so, gradually turn

the steering wheel until both tires return

to the road surface. When all tires are on

the road surface, steer the vehicle to

stay in the appropriate driving lane.

Starting and driving 5-7

∙ If you decide that it is not safe to re-

turn the vehicle to the road surface

based on vehicle, road or traffic con-

ditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a

stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can

occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged

due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air

pressure loss can also be caused by driving

on under-inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han-

dling and stability of the vehicle, especially

at highway speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by

maintaining the correct air pressure and

visually inspecting the tires for wear and

damage. For additional information, refer

to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses

air pressure or “blows-out” while driving,

maintain control of the vehicle by following

the procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The ve-

hicle must be driven as appropriate based

on the conditions of the vehicle, road and

traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air pres-

sure. Losing control of the vehicle may

cause a collision and result in personal

injury.

∙ The vehicle generally moves or pulls

in the direction of the flat tire.

∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.

∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a

straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow the

vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe

location off the road and away from

traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu-

ally stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers

and contact a roadside emergency

service to change the tire. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing a

flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alco-

hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream

reduces coordination, delays reaction

time and impairs judgement. Driving

after drinking alcohol increases the

likelihood of being involved in an acci-

dent injuring yourself and others. Addi-

tionally, if you are injured in an accident,

alcohol can increase the severity of the

injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How-

ever, you must choose not to drive under the

influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of

people are injured or killed in alcohol-related

collisions. Although the local laws vary on

what is considered to be legally intoxicated,

the fact is that alcohol affects all people dif-

ferently and most people underestimate the

effects of alcohol.

5-8 Starting and driving

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!

That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,

prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t

drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is

impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other

physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your NISSAN is designed for both normal

and off-road use. However, avoid driving in

deep water or mud as your NISSAN is

mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a

conventional off-road vehicle.

Remember that 2-wheel drive models are

less capable than 4-wheel drive models for

rough road driving and extrication when

stuck in deep snow or mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

∙ Drive carefully when off the road and

avoid dangerous areas. Every person

who drives or rides in this vehicle

should be seated with their seat belt

fastened. This will keep you and your

passengers in position when driving

over rough terrain.

∙ Do not drive across steep slopes. In-

stead drive either straight up or

straight down the slopes. Off-road ve-

hicles can tip over sideways much

more easily than they can forward or

backward.

∙ Many hills are too steep for any ve-

hicle. If you drive up them, you may

stall. If you drive down them, you may

not be able to control your speed. If

you drive across them, you may roll

over.

∙ Do not shift gears while driving on

downhill grades as this could cause

loss of control of the vehicle.

∙ Stay alert when driving to the top of a

hill. At the top there could be a drop-

off or other hazard that could cause

an accident.

∙ If your engine stalls or you cannot

make it to the top of a steep hill, never

attempt to turn around. Your vehicle

could tip or roll over. Always back

straight down in R (Reverse) gear and

apply brakes to control your speed.

∙ Heavy braking going down a hill could

cause your brakes to overheat and

fade, resulting in loss of control and

an accident. Apply brakes lightly and

use a low gear to control your speed.

∙ Unsecured cargo can be thrown

around when driving over rough ter-

rain. Properly secure all cargo so it will

not be thrown forward and cause in-

jury to you or your passengers.

∙ Secure heavy loads in the cargo area

as far forward and as low as possible.

Do not equip the vehicle with tires

larger than specified in this manual.

This could cause your vehicle to roll

over.

∙ Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel when driving off-road.

The steering wheel could move sud-

denly and injure your hands. Instead

drive with your fingers and thumbs on

the outside of the rim.

∙ Before operating the vehicle, ensure

that the driver and all passengers

have their seat belts fastened.

Starting and driving 5-9

∙ Lower your speed when encountering

strong crosswinds. With a higher cen-

ter of gravity, your NISSAN is more af-

fected by strong side winds. Slower

speeds ensure better vehicle control.

∙ Do not drive beyond the performance

capability of the tires, even with 4WD

engaged.

∙ For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with the

engine running. Doing so may result

in drivetrain damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could result

in serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

∙ Do not attempt to test a 4WD

equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna-

mometer (such as the dynamometers

used by some states for emissions

testing), or similar equipment even if

the other two wheels are raised off the

ground. Make sure you inform test fa-

cility personnel that your vehicle is

equipped with 4WD before it is placed

on a dynamometer. Using the wrong

test equipment may result in drive-

train damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in seri-

ous vehicle damage or personal

injury.

∙ Accelerating quickly, sharp steering

maneuvers or sudden braking may

cause loss of control.

∙ If at all possible, avoid sharp turning

maneuvers, particularly at high

speeds. Your NISSAN 4-wheel drive

vehicle has a higher center of gravity

than a passenger car. The vehicle is

not designed for cornering at the

same speeds as passenger cars. Fail-

ure to operate this vehicle correctly

could result in loss of control and/or a

rollover accident.

∙ Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction (bias, bias-

belted, or radial), and tread pattern on

all four wheels. Install tire chains on

the rear wheels when driving on slip-

pery roads and drive carefully.

∙ Be sure to check the brakes immedi-

ately after driving in mud or water. For

additional information, refer to “Wet

brakes” in this section.

∙ Avoid parking your vehicle on steep

hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it

rolls forward, backward or sideways,

you could be injured.

∙ Whenever you drive off-road through

sand, mud or water as deep as the

wheel hub, more frequent mainte-

nance may be required. For additional

information, refer to “Maintenance

schedules” in the “Maintenance and

schedules” section of this manual.

5-10 Starting and driving

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button igni-

tion switch while driving the vehicle ex-

cept in an emergency. (The engine will

stop when the ignition switch is pushed

three consecutive times in quick suc-

cession or the ignition switch is pushed

and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the

engine stops while the vehicle is being

driven, this could lead to a crash and

serious injury.

When the ignition switch is pushed without

depressing the brake pedal, the ignition

switch position will illuminate as follows:

Push center:

∙ Once to change to ACC.

∙ Two times to change to ON.

∙ Three times to return to OFF.

The ignition switch will automatically re-

turn to the LOCK position when any door is

either opened or closed with the switch in

the OFF position.

The ignition lock is designed so that the

ignition switch position cannot be placed

in the OFF position until the shift lever is

moved to the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed

toward the OFF position, proceed as fol-

lows:

1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park)

position.

2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition

switch position will change to the ON

position.

3. Push the ignition switch again to the

OFF position.

The shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in

the ON position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,

the push-button ignition switch cannot

be moved from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for opera-

tion are displayed in the meter. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display warnings and indicators” in

the “Instruments and controls” section of

this manual.

LSD2014

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

Starting and driving 5-11

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be

used when the Intelligent Key is within the

specified operating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost

discharged or strong radio waves are pres-

ent near the operating location, the Intelli-

gent Key system’s operating range be-

comes narrower and may not function

properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone, even some-

one who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to

push the ignition switch to start the engine.

The operating range of the engine start

function is inside of the vehicle 䊊

∙ The luggage area is not included in the

operating range, but the Intelligent Key

may function.

∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed on the

instrument panel, inside the glove box,

storage bin or door pocket, the Intelli-

gent Key may not function.

∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed near the

door or window outside the vehicle, the

Intelligent Key may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in

this position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it

is pushed to the ACC position while carry-

ing the Intelligent Key.

The ignition switch will lock when any door

is opened or closed with the ignition

switched off.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accesso-

ries, such as the radio, when the engine is

not running.

ACC has a battery saver feature that will

place the ignition switch in the OFF position

after a period of time under the following

conditions:

∙ All doors are closed.

∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).

∙ The hazard lamps are off.

∙ The turn signals are off.

The battery saver feature will be canceled if

any of the following occur:

∙ Any door is opened.

∙ The shift lever is moved out of P (Park).

∙ The ignition switch changes position.

∙ The hazard lamps are turned on.

LSD2456

5-12 Starting and driving

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system

and electrical accessories.

ON has a battery saver feature that will

place the ignition switch in the OFF posi-

tion, if the vehicle is not running, after some

time under the following conditions:

∙ All doors are closed.

∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).

∙ The hazard lamps are off.

∙ The turn signals are off.

The battery saver feature will be canceled if

any of the following occur:

∙ Any door is opened.

∙ The shift lever is moved out of the P

(Park) position.

∙ The ignition switch changes position.

∙ The hazard lamps are turned on.

∙ The turn signals are turned on.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the igni-

tion switch in the ACC or ON position

when the engine is not running for an

extended period. This can discharge the

battery.

OFF

The ignition switch is in the OFF position

when the engine is turned off using the

ignition switch. If equipped, the ignition

switch heart beat function (pulsed illumi-

nation) may activate for a period of time

when any door is unlocked and when the

door opened/closed status changes in the

OFF and ACC positions.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency

situation while driving, perform the follow-

ing procedure:

∙ Rapidly push the ignition switch three

consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec-

onds, or

∙ Push and hold the ignition switch for

more than 2 seconds.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

BATTERY DISCHARGE

If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key®

is discharged, or environmental conditions

interfere with the Intelligent Key operation,

start the engine according to the following

procedure:

1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) posi-

tion.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intel-

ligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will

sound.)

SSD0860

Starting and driving 5-13

After step 3 is performed, when the

ignition switch is pushed without de-

pressing the brake pedal, the ignition

switch position will change to the ON

position.

4. Push the ignition switch while depress-

ing the brake pedal within 10 seconds

after the chime sounds. The engine will

start.

NOTE:

∙When the ignition switch is pushed to

the ON position or the engine is

started by the above procedure, the

Intelligent Key battery discharge in-

dicator appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display even when the Intelli-

gent Key is inside the vehicle. This is

not a malfunction. To turn off the In-

telligent Key battery discharge indi-

cator, touch the ignition switch with

the Intelligent Key again.

∙If the Intelligent Key battery dis-

charge indicator appears, replace the

battery as soon as possible. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Battery

replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

will not allow the engine to start without

the use of the registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered

key (for example, when interference is

caused by another registered key, an auto-

mated toll road device or automatic pay-

ment device on the key ring), restart the

engine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position, and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the

device (which may have caused the in-

terference) separate from the regis-

tered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN

recommends placing the registered key on

a separate key ring to avoid interference

from other devices.

∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil,

coolant, brake fluid, Diesel Exhaust Fluid

(Diesel only) and windshield-washer

fluid as frequently as possible,or at least

whenever you refuel.

∙ Check that all windows and lights are

clean.

∙ Visually inspect tires for their appear-

ance and condition. Also check tires for

proper inflation.

∙ Check that all doors are closed.

∙ Position seat and adjust head

restraints/headrests.

∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passen-

gers to do likewise.

∙ Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position. For additional information,

refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights

and audible reminders” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this

manual.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

5-14 Starting and driving

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N

(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The starter is designed not to oper-

ate unless the shift lever is in either P

(Park) or N (Neutral).

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-

sition. Depress the brake pedal and

push the ignition switch to start the

engine.

To start the engine immediately, push

and release the ignition switch while

depressing the brake pedal with the

ignition switch in any position.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when re-

starting, depress the accelerator

pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the

floor) and while holding, crank the en-

gine. Release the accelerator pedal

when the engine starts.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start be-

cause it is flooded, depress the accel-

erator pedal all the way to the floor

and hold it. Push the ignition switch

to the ON position to start cranking

the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop

cranking by pushing the ignition

switch to the LOCK position. After

cranking the engine, release the ac-

celerator pedal. Crank the engine

with your foot off the accelerator

pedal by depressing the brake pedal

and pushing the ignition switch to

start the engine. If the engine starts,

but fails to run, repeat the above pro-

cedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more

than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine

does not start, push the ignition switch

to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds

before cranking again, otherwise the

starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least

30 seconds after starting. Do not race

the engine while warming it up.Drive at

a moderate speed for a short distance

first, especially in cold weather. In cold

weather, keep the engine running for a

minimum of 2 to 3 minutes before

shutting it off. Starting and stopping

the engine over a short period of time

may make the vehicle more difficult to

start.

5. To stop the engine, shift the shift lever

into the P (Park) position and push the

ignition switch to the OFF position.

In preparation for the next engine start, the

engine may have a slightly delayed shutoff

after placing the ignition switch in the OFF

position, depending on the driving condi-

tions.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. The vehicle is not driven regularly

and/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

STARTING THE ENGINE (gasoline

engine only)

Starting and driving 5-15

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so

equipped)

Vehicles started with the Remote Engine

Start require the ignition switch to be

placed in the ON position before the shift

lever can be moved from the P (Park) posi-

tion. To place the ignition switch in the ON

position, follow these steps:

1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on

you.

2. Apply the brake.

3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON

position.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section of this manual.

For additional information on starting your

diesel engine, refer to your Titan Diesel

Owner’s Manual.

ENGINE PROTECTION MODE

The engine has an engine protection mode

to reduce the chance of damage if the

coolant temperature becomes too high

(for example, when climbing steep grades

in high temperatures with heavy loads,

such as when towing a trailer). When the

engine temperature reaches a certain

level:

∙ The engine coolant temperature gauge

will move toward the H position.

∙ Engine power may be reduced.

∙ The air conditioning cooling function

may be automatically turned off for a

short time (the blower will continue to

operate).

Engine power and, under some conditions,

vehicle speed will decrease. Vehicle speed

can be controlled with the accelerator

pedal, but the vehicle may not accelerate at

the desired speed. The transmission will

downshift or upshift as it reaches pre-

scribed shift points. You can also shift

manually.

As driving conditions change and engine

coolant temperature is reduced, vehicle

speed can be increased using the accel-

STARTING THE ENGINE (diesel only) DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-16 Starting and driving

erator pedal, and the air conditioning cool-

ing function will automatically be turned

back on.

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may

also come on if the engine coolant tem-

perature is not reduced or the air condi-

tioning cooling function does not turn back

on. If only it remains on, you do not need to

have your vehicle towed, but have it in-

spected soon. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For

additional information, refer to “Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light (MIL)” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced en-

gine power and vehicle speed. The re-

duced speed may be lower than other

traffic, which could increase the chance

of a collision. Be especially careful when

driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a

safe driving speed, pull to the side of the

road in a safe area. Allow the engine to

cool and return to normal operation. For

additional information, refer to “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil

pressure warning light on could cause

serious damage to the engine almost

immediately. Such damage is not cov-

ered by warranty. Turn off the engine as

soon as it is safe to do so.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (A/T)

WARNING

∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), or D (Drive). Always

depress the brake pedal until shifting

is completed. Failure to do so could

cause you to lose control and have an

accident.

∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward

or reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D

(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-

versing. This could cause an accident

or damage the transmission.

∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift

to the N (Neutral) position while driv-

ing. Coasting with the transmission in

the N (Neutral) position may cause se-

rious damage to the transmission.

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

CAUTION

To avoid possible damage to your ve-

hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal. The

foot brake should be used for this

purpose

The A/T in your vehicle is electronically con-

trolled to produce maximum power and

smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures

for this transmission are shown on the fol-

lowing pages. Follow these procedures for

maximum vehicle performance and driv-

ing enjoyment.

Starting and driving 5-17

Starting the vehicle

WARNING

∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), or D (Drive). Always

depress the brake pedal until shifting

is completed. Failure to do so could

cause you to lose control and have an

accident.

∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward

or reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D

(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-

versing. This could cause an accident

or damage the transmission.

∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift

to the N (Neutral) position while driv-

ing. Coasting with the transmission in

the N (Neutral) position may cause se-

rious damage to the transmission.

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

CAUTION

To avoid possible damage to your ve-

hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal. The

foot brake should be used for this

purpose.

1. After starting the engine, fully depress

the foot brake pedal before moving the

shift lever out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed

and move the shift lever into a driving

gear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually

start the vehicle in motion.

The automatic transmission is designed

so the foot brake pedal MUST be de-

pressed before shifting from P (Park) to

any drive position while the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of

the P (Park) position and into any of the

other gear positions if the ignition

switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF posi-

tion.

To move the shift lever:

: Shift while depressing the brake

pedal

: Shift without depressing the brake

pedal

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the

brake pedal and move the shift lever out of

the P (Park) position.

LSD2468

5-18 Starting and driving

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift lever

is in any position while the engine is not

running. Failure to do so could cause

the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll

away and result in serious personal in-

jury or property damage.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or

ACC position for any reason while the ve-

hicle is in N (Neutral), or any D (Drive) posi-

tion, the ignition switch cannot be placed in

the LOCK position. Move the shift lever to

the P (Park) position, then the ignition

switch can be placed in the LOCK position.

P (Park)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use

the P (Park) position only when the ve-

hicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift lever position when

the vehicle is parked or when starting the

engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped.

The brake pedal should be depressed to

move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or

any drive position to P (Park).

Apply the parking brake. When parking on a

hill, apply the parking brake first, then move

the shift lever into the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use

the R (Reverse) position only when the

vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.

Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before selecting the R (Reverse)

position. The brake pedal must be de-

pressed to move the shift lever from P

(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to

R (Reverse).

N (Neutral)

Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-

gaged. The engine can be started in this

position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and

restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is

moving.

D (Drive)

Use this position for all normal forward

driving.

Manual shift mode

When the manual shift mode button is

pressed while driving, the transmission en-

ters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges

can be selected manually.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is

displayed on the position indicator in the

meter. After pressing the manual shift

mode button, the position indicator varies

depending on the gear position and ve-

hicle speed.

LSD2457

Starting and driving 5-19

Shift ranges up or down one by one as

follows:

M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6

←→ M7* ←→ D

*If so equipped

M7 (Seventh) (if so equipped)

Use this position for all normal forward

driving at highway speeds.

M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6

←→ M7

M7 will be displayed on the position indica-

tor in the meter.

M6 (Sixth)

Use this position for all normal forward

driving at highway speeds.

M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6

M6 will be displayed on the position indica-

tor in the meter

M5 (Fifth)

Use this position for all normal forward

driving at highway speeds.

M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5

M5 will be displayed on the position indica-

tor in the meter.

M4 (Fourth)

For driving up or down long slopes where

engine braking would be advantageous.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as

follows:

M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4

M4 will be displayed on the position indica-

tor in the meter.

M3 (Third)

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on

downhill grades.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as

follows:

M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3

M3 will be displayed on the position indica-

tor in the meter.

M2 (Second)

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on

downhill grades.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as

follows:

M1 ←→ M2

M2 will be displayed on the position indica-

tor in the meter.

M1 (First)

Use this position when climbing steep hills

slowly or driving slowly through deep snow,

sand or mud, or for maximum engine brak-

ing on steep downhill grades.

M1 will be displayed on the position indica-

tor on the meter.

∙ Remember not to drive at high speeds

for extended periods of time in lower

than M4 range. This reduces fuel

economy.

When shifting up

Push the shift switch to the + (up) side.

(Shifts to higher range.)

When shifting down

Push the shift switch to the ⫺(down) side.

(Shifts to lower range.)

∙ The transmission will automatically

downshift the gears. (For example, if you

select the 3rd range, the transmission

will shift down between the 3rd and 1st

gears.)

∙ Pushing the shift switch rapidly will shift

the ranges in succession.

5-20 Starting and driving

When canceling the manual shift mode

Press and hold the +(UP) button to return

the transmission to the normal driving

mode.

∙In the manual shift mode, the trans-

mission may not shift to the selected

gear immediately because of vehicle

speed. The transmission will up or

down shift when vehicle speed

matches the programmed transmis-

sion shift points. This helps maintain

driving performance and reduces the

chance of vehicle damage or loss of

control.

∙In the manual shift mode, the trans-

mission will not up shift to a higher

gear than is manually selected. When

the vehicle speed decreases, the

transmission automatically shifts

down and shifts to 1st gear before the

vehicle comes to a stop.

Shift lock release

If the battery is discharged, the shift lever

may not be moved from the P (Park) posi-

tion even with the brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift lever, release the shift

lock. The shift lever can be moved to N

(Neutral). However, for models without the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System, the

steering wheel will be locked unless the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

This allows the vehicle to be moved if the

battery is discharged.

To push the shift lock release, complete the

following procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover. If a

screwdriver is used to remove the

cover, it should be wrapped in a protec-

tive cloth to prevent damage to the

cover and surrounding plastic.

4. Insert a small object or finger in the

shift lock release slot and push.

5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position while holding the shift lock re-

lease.

6. Now the vehicle may be moved to the

desired location.

If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P

(Park), have the automatic transmission

system checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

LSD2594

Starting and driving 5-21

WARNING

If the shift lever cannot be moved from

the P (Park) position while the engine is

running and the brake pedal is de-

pressed, the stop lights may not work.

Malfunctioning stop lights could cause

an accident injuring yourself and

others.

Accelerator downshift

— in D (Drive) position —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the

accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts

the transmission down into a lower gear,

depending on the vehicle speed.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, please

note that the transmission will be locked in

any of the forward gears according to the

condition.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme

conditions, such as excessive wheel

spinning and subsequent hard braking,

the fail-safe system may be activated.

This will occur even if all electrical cir-

cuits are functioning properly. In this

case, place the ignition switch in the OFF

position and wait for 3 seconds. Then

place the ignition switch back in the ON

position. The vehicle should return to its

normal operating condition. If it does not

return to its normal operating condition,

have the transmission checked and re-

paired, if necessary. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

WARNING

∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so

can cause brake failure and lead to an

accident.

∙ Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of

the parking brake. When parking, be

sure the parking brake is fully

engaged.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

PARKING BRAKE

5-22 Starting and driving

To engage: Firmly depress the parking

brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-

sition.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal

and it will release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn-

ing light goes out.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the BSW

system could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ The BSW system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedures and is

not designed to prevent contact with

vehicles or objects. When changing

lanes, always use the side and rear

mirrors and turn and look in the direc-

tion your vehicle will move to ensure it

is safe to change lanes. Never rely

solely on the BSW system.

The BSW system helps alert the driver of

other vehicles in adjacent lanes when

changing lanes.

The BSW system uses radar sensors 䊊

installed near the rear bumper to detect

other vehicles in an adjacent lane.

LSD0158 LSD2619

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so

equipped)

Starting and driving 5-23

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on

either side of your vehicle within the detec-

tion zone shown as illustrated. This detec-

tion zone starts from the outside mirror of

your vehicle and extends approximately

10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and

approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

Detection zone

SSD1030

LSD2605

5-24 Starting and driving

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION

The BSW system operates above approxi-

mately 20 mph (32 km/h).

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the

detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indica-

tor light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is

then activated, the system chimes (twice)

and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light

flashes. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light

continues to flash until the detected ve-

hicle leaves the detection zone.

The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illumi-

nates for a few seconds when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position.

The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indi-

cator light is adjusted automatically de-

pending on the brightness of the ambient

light.

If a vehicle comes into the detection zone

after the driver activates the turn signal,

then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light

flashes and no chime sounds. For addi-

tional information, refer to “BSW driving

situations” in this section.

Starting and driving 5-25

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

BSW SYSTEM

When the BSW system is enabled in the

vehicle information display, the system can

be turned off temporarily by pushing the

warning systems switch. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Warning systems

switch” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the BSW system:

1. Press the button until “Settings”

displays in the vehicle information dis-

play. Use the button to select

“Driver Assistance” and press ENTER.

Select “Driving Aids” and press ENTER.

2. Select “Blind Spot (BSW)” and press the

ENTER button.

NOTE:

∙When enabling/disabling the system,

the system will retain current set-

tings even if the engine is restarted.

∙When the BSW system is turned on,

the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the

vehicle information display illumi-

nates.

LSD2607

5-26 Starting and driving

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the BSW system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ The BSW system cannot detect all ve-

hicles under all conditions.

∙ The radar sensors may not be able to

detect and activate BSW when certain

objects are present such as:

– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.

– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low

height vehicles, or high ground

clearance vehicles.

– Oncoming vehicles.

– Vehicles remaining in the detec-

tion zone when you accelerate

from a stop.

– A vehicle merging into an adjacent

lane at a speed approximately the

same as your vehicle.

– A vehicle approaching rapidly from

behind.

– A vehicle which your vehicle over-

takes rapidly.

– A vehicle that passes through the

detection zone quickly.

– When overtaking several vehicles

in a row, the vehicles after the first

vehicle may not be detected if they

are traveling close together.

∙ The radar sensor’s detection zone is

designed based on a standard lane

width. When driving in a wider lane,

the radar sensors may not detect ve-

hicles in an adjacent lane. When driv-

ing in a narrow lane, the radar sensors

may detect vehicles driving two lanes

away.

∙ The radar sensors are designed to ig-

nore most stationary objects; how-

ever, objects such as guardrails, walls,

foliage and parked vehicles may oc-

casionally be detected. This is a nor-

mal operation condition.

∙ The following conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles:

– Severe weather

– Road spray

– Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the

vehicle

∙ Do not attach stickers (including

transparent material), install accesso-

ries or apply additional paint near the

radar sensors. These conditions may

reduce the ability of the radar to de-

tect other vehicles.

∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume, open vehicle window)

will interfere with the chime sound,

and it may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-27

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS

Indicator on

Indicator off

Indicator

flashing

Another vehicle approaching

from behind

Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator

light illuminates if a vehicle enters the de-

tection zone from behind in an adjacent

lane.

Illustration 2: If the driver activates the

turn signal when another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

∙The radar sensors may not detect ve-

hicles which are approaching rapidly

from behind.

∙If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when the

other vehicle is detected.

Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind

LSD2299

Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind

LSD2300

5-28 Starting and driving

Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 3: The side indicator light illu-

minates if you overtake a vehicle and that

vehicle stays in the detection zone for ap-

proximately 2 seconds.

Illustration 4: If the driver activates the

turn signal while another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

∙When overtaking several vehicles in a

row, the vehicles after the first vehicle

may not be detected if they are trav-

eling close together.

∙The radar sensors may not detect

slower moving vehicles if they are

passed quickly.

∙If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when the

other vehicle is detected.

Illustration3–Overtaking another

vehicle

LSD2302

Illustration4–Overtaking another

vehicle

LSD2303

Starting and driving 5-29

Entering from the side

Illustration 5: The side indicator light illu-

minates if a vehicle enters the detection

zone from either side.

Illustration 6: If the driver activates the

turn signal while another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

∙If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when the

other vehicle is detected.

∙The radar sensors may not detect a

vehicle which is traveling at about the

same speed as your vehicle when it

enters the detection zone.

Illustration 5 – Entering from the side

LSD2305

Illustration 6 – Entering from the side

LSD2308

5-30 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the sys-

tem will be deactivated automatically. The

“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message

will appear and the blind spot indicator

(white) will blink 䊊

Ain the vehicle informa-

tion display.

The system is not available until the condi-

tions no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition

may also be caused by objects such as ice,

frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system (if so equipped) will also

stop working.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the system will resume automatically.

LSD2608

Starting and driving 5-31

Malfunction

If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn

off automatically. The system malfunction

warning message with the BSW/RCTA indi-

cator (orange) will appear in the vehicle in-

formation display.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system (if so equipped) will also

stop working.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en-

gine off and restart the engine. If the mes-

sage continues to appear, have the system

checked.It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors 䊊

1for the BSW and

RCTA systems are located near the rear

bumper. Always keep the area near the ra-

dar sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-

structing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing

the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transpar-

ent material), install accessories or apply

additional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around

the radar sensors. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around

the radar sensors is damaged due to a

collision.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

LSD2619

5-32 Starting and driving

For Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

Droit applicable: Canada 310

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-

eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation

est autorisée aux deux conditions suiv-

antes:

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,

même si le brouillage est susceptible

d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Bandes de fréquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz

Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the RCTA

system could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ The RCTA system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedures and is

not designed to prevent contact with

vehicles or objects. When backing out

of a parking space, always use the

side and rear mirrors and turn and

look in the direction your vehicle will

move. Never rely solely on the RCTA

system.

The RCTA system will assist you when

backing out from a parking space. When

the vehicle is in reverse, the system is de-

signed to detect other vehicles approach-

ing from the right or left of the vehicle. If the

system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)

(if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-33

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION

The RCTA system can help alert the driver

of an approaching vehicle when the driver

is backing out of a parking space.

When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and

the vehicle speed is less than approxi-

mately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is

operational.

If the radar detects an approaching vehicle

from the side, the system chimes a sound

(single beep) and the side BSW/RCTA indi-

cator light on the side of the vehicle is ap-

proaching from flashes.

LSD2605

5-34 Starting and driving

The RCTA system uses radar sensors 䊊

installed on both sides near the rear bum-

per to detect an approaching vehicle.

The radar sensors 䊊

1can detect an ap-

proaching vehicle from up to approxi-

mately 66 ft (20 m) away.

LSD2216 LSD2619

Starting and driving 5-35

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

RCTA SYSTEM

When the RCTA system is enabled in the

vehicle information display, the system can

be turned off temporarily by pushing the

Front and rear sonar system OFF switch.

For additional information, refer to “Front

and rear sonar system OFF switch” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the RCTA system:

1. Press the button until “Settings”

displays in the vehicle information dis-

play. Use the button to select

“Driver Assistance” and press ENTER.

Select “Driving Aids” and press ENTER.

2. Select “Blind Spot (BSW)” and press the

ENTER button.

NOTE:

When enabling/disabling the system,

the system setting will be retained even

if the engine is restarted.

LSD2607

5-36 Starting and driving

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the RCTA system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ Always check surroundings and turn

to check what is behind you before

backing up. The radar sensors detect

approaching (moving) vehicles. The

radar sensors cannot detect every

object such as:

– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,

animals or child-operated toy

vehicles

– A vehicle that is passing at speeds

greater than approximately

19 mph (30 km/h)

– A vehicle that is passing at speeds

lower than approximately 5 mph

(8 km/h)

∙ The radar sensors may not detect ap-

proaching vehicles in certain

situations:

– Illustration a: When a vehicle

parked next to you obstructs the

beam of the radar sensor.

LSD2173

Starting and driving 5-37

– Illustration b: When the vehicle is

parked in an angled parking space.

– Illustration c: When the vehicle is

parked on inclined ground.

– Illustration d: When an approach-

ing vehicle turns into your vehicle’s

parking lot aisle.

– Illustration e: When the angle

formed by your vehicle and ap-

proaching vehicle is small.

∙ The following conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles:

– Severe weather

– Road spray

– Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the

vehicle

∙ Do not attach stickers (including

transparent material), install accesso-

ries or apply additional paint near the

radar sensors. These conditions may

reduce the ability of the radar to de-

tect other vehicles.

∙ Excessive noise (e.g. audio system

volume, open vehicle window) will in-

terfere with the chime sound, and it

may not be heard.

NOTE:

In the case of several vehicles approach-

ing in a row (Illustration 1) or in the oppo-

site direction (Illustration 2), a chime may

not be sounded by the RCTA system af-

ter the first vehicle passes the sensors.

Illustration 1

LSD2043

Illustration 2

LSD2044

5-38 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the sys-

tem will be deactivated automatically. The

“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message

will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator

(white) will blink 䊊

Ain the vehicle informa-

tion display.

The systems are not available until the

conditions no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-

structing the radar sensors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system will also stop working.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the system will resume automatically.

LSD2608

Starting and driving 5-39

Malfunction

When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will

turn off automatically. The system mal-

function warning message with the

BSW/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in

the vehicle information display.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system (if so equipped) will also

stop working.

Action to take

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en-

gine off and restart the engine. If the mes-

sage continues to appear, have the system

checked.It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors 䊊

1for the BSW and

RCTA systems are located near the rear

bumper. Always keep the area near the ra-

dar sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-

structing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing

the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transpar-

ent material), install accessories or apply

additional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around

the radar sensors. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around

the radar sensors is damaged due to a

collision.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

LSD2619

5-40 Starting and driving

For Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

Droit applicable: Canada 310

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-

eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation

est autorisée aux deux conditions suiv-

antes:

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,

même si le brouillage est susceptible

d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Bandes de fréquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz

Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

1. CANCEL switch

2. ACCEL/RES switch

3. COAST/SET switch

4. ON/OFF switch

∙ If the cruise control system malfunc-

tions, it cancels automatically. The

(green) indicator light illuminates in the

vehicle information display then blinks

to warn the driver.

LSD2464

CRUISE CONTROL

Starting and driving 5-41

∙ If the (green) indicator light blinks,

push the ON/OFF switch off and have

the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

∙ The (green) indicator light may

blink when the ON/OFF switch is

pushed ON while pushing the

ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or CANCEL

switch. To properly set the cruise con-

trol system, use the following proce-

dures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driv-

ing under the following conditions:

∙ When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.

∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies

in speed.

∙ On winding or hilly roads.

∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

∙ In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed

between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with-

out keeping your foot on the accelerator

pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the

ON/OFF switch on. The (white) indi-

cator light in the vehicle information dis-

play will illuminate.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve-

hicle to the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it. The

(green) indicator light in the vehicle infor-

mation display will illuminate. Take your

foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle

maintains the set speed.

∙To pass another vehicle, depress the

accelerator pedal.When you release the

pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ-

ously set speed.

∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed when going up or down steep

hills. If this happens, drive without the

cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following three methods:

∙ Push the CANCEL switch; the indi-

cator light in the vehicle information

display goes out.

∙ Tap the brake pedal; the indicator

light goes out.

∙ Push the ON/OFF switch off. The

indicator light in the vehicle information

display goes out.

The cruise control is automatically can-

celed and the indicator light in the

vehicle information display goes out if:

∙ You depress the brake pedal while

pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST

switch. The preset speed is deleted

from memory.

∙ The vehicle slows down more than

8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.

∙ You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).

5-42 Starting and driving

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use

one of the following three methods:

∙

Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

and release the COAST/SET switch.

∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.

When the vehicle attains the speed you

desire, release the switch.

∙

Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed in-

creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use

one of the following three methods:

∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the COAST/SET switch and release it.

∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.

Release the switch when the vehicle

slows to the desired speed.

∙ Push and release the COAST/SET

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed decreases by about 1 mph

(1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle

returns to the last set cruising speed when

the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to ob-

tain maximum engine performance

and ensure the future reliability and

economy of your new vehicle. Failure to

follow these recommendations may re-

sult in shortened engine life and re-

duced engine performance.

∙ Avoid driving for long periods at con-

stant speed, either fast or slow, and do

not run the engine over 4,000 RPM.

∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any

gear.

∙ Avoid quick starts.

∙ Avoid hard braking as much as pos-

sible.

∙ Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles

(805 kilometers). Your engine, axle or

other parts could be damaged.

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient

Driving Tips to help you achieve the most

fuel economy from your vehicle.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake

Pedal Application

∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops.

∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and

brake application whenever possible.

∙ Maintain constant speed while com-

muting and coast whenever pos-

sible.

2. Maintain Constant Speed

∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and

minimize stops.

∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic

lights allows you to reduce your num-

ber of stops.

∙ Maintaining a steady speed can mini-

mize red light stops and improve fuel

efficiency.

3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher

Vehicle Speeds

∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to open windows to cool the

vehicle due to reduced engine load.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

Starting and driving 5-43

∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle

due to increased aerodynamic drag.

∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin

when the A/C is on reduces cooling

load.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-

tances

∙ Observing the speed limit and not

exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where

legally allowed) can improve fuel effi-

ciency due to reduced aerodynamic

drag.

∙ Maintaining a safe following distance

behind other vehicles reduces un-

necessary braking.

∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate

changes in speed permits reduced

braking and smooth acceleration

changes.

∙ Select a gear range suitable to road

conditions.

5. Use Cruise Control

∙ Using cruise control during highway

driving helps maintain a steady

speed.

∙ Cruise control is particularly effective

in providing fuel savings when driving

on flat terrains.

6. Plan for the Shortest Route

∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to

determine the best route to save

time.

7. Avoid Idling

∙ Shutting off your engine when safe

for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds

saves fuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll

Roads

∙ Automated passes permit drivers to

use special lanes to maintain cruis-

ing speed through the toll and avoid

stopping and starting.

9. Winter Warm Up

∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact

to fuel economy.

∙ Vehicles typically need no more than

30 seconds of idling at start-up to

effectively circulate the engine oil be-

fore driving.

∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal oper-

ating temperature more quickly

while driving versus idling.

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool

∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking

area or in the shade whenever pos-

sible.

∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening

the windows will help to reduce the

inside temperature faster, resulting in

reduced demand on your A/C sys-

tem.

5-44 Starting and driving

∙ Keep your engine tuned up.

∙ Follow the recommended scheduled

maintenance.

∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure. Low tire pressure increases

tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

∙ Keep the wheels in correct alignment.

Improper alignment increases tire wear

and lowers fuel economy.

∙ For vehicles equipped with , use

4H or 4L position only when necessary.

4-wheel drive operation lowers fuel

economy.

∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine

oil. For additional information, refer to

“Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-

tions” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

WARNING

∙ For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with the

engine running. Doing so may result

in drivetrain damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could result

in serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

∙ Do not attempt to test a 4WD

equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna-

mometer (such as the dynamometers

used by some states for emissions

testing), or similar equipment even if

the other two wheels are raised off the

ground. Make sure you inform test fa-

cility personnel that your vehicle is

equipped with 4WD before it is placed

on a dynamometer. Using the wrong

test equipment may result in drive-

train damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in seri-

ous vehicle damage or personal

injury.

CAUTION

∙ Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or

4LO position on dry hard surface

roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in

4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary

noise, tire wear and increased fuel

consumption.

If the 4WD warning light or vehicle in-

formation display warning message

turns on when you are driving on dry

hard surface roads:

– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD

shift switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position, stop the ve-

hicle, move the shift lever to the N

(Neutral) position with the brake

pedal depressed, and shift the

4WD shift switch to 2WD.

∙ If the warning light or vehicle infor-

mation display warning message is

still on after the above operation,

have your vehicle checked as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY USING 4–WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (if so

equipped)

Starting and driving 5-45

TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING

PROCEDURES

The part time 4WD system provides 3 posi-

tions (2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select

the desired drive mode according to the

driving conditions.

2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

4WD Shift

Switch Position Wheels Driven Indicator Light Use Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure

4WD shift Transfer 4LO position

2WD

Rear wheels For driving on dry, paved roads

(Economy drive)

Move the 4WD switch.

2WD <—> 4H

The 4WD shift indicator light will

indicate that the transfer shift po-

sition is engaged.

IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE

THE SHIFT LEVER TO THE N (NEU-

TRAL) POSITION IN THIS OPERA-

TION. PERFORM THIS OPERATION

WHEN DRIVING STRAIGHT.

4 wheels For driving on rocky, sandy or

snow-covered roads

N (Neutral)

May blink

N (Neutral) disengages the auto-

matic transmission (A/T) mechani-

cal parking lock, which will allow

the vehicle to roll. Do not leave the

transfer shift position in N (Neu-

tral).*2

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. With the brake pedal de-

pressed, move the shift lever

to the N (Neutral) position.

3. With the brake pedal de-

pressed, depress and turn the

4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H.

THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT

ENGAGE BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR

4LO TO 4H) UNLESS YOU HAVE

FIRST STOPPED THE VEHICLE, DE-

PRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL AND

MOVED THE SHIFT LEVER TO N

(NEUTRAL). *3

4LO

4 wheels

Illuminated

For use when maximum power

and traction is required (for ex-

ample: on steep grades or rocky,

sandy, muddy roads)

5-46 Starting and driving

*1: Before moving the shift lever from N (Neutral), wait until the 4LO indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shift

procedure is completed and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator

is on steady, the transfer gear may grind, not engage correctly or stay in the N (Neutral) position.

- If the 4WD warning light or vehicle information display warning message illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the

transfer case to the correct operating condition.

1. Turn off the engine by placing the ignition switch in the OFF position.

2. Start the engine.

- Check that the 4WD warning light or vehicle information display warning message turns off. If the 4WD light illuminates, have the

system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

3. Apply the parking brake, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position.

4. With the brake pedal depressed, move the 4WD shift switch to the desired mode.

- Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the shift lever from the N (Neutral) position.

*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition switch must be in the ON position and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to

take place and for the indicator lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no

indicator lights will be on or flashing.

*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light will also

turn on when 4LO is selected. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in this section.

The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the driving conditions. There are three types of drive

modes available: 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

Starting and driving 5-47

The 4WD shift switch electronically controls

the transfer case operation. Rotate the

switch to move between each mode: 2WD,

4H and 4LO.

To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicle

MUST be stationary, move the shift lever

to N (Neutral), and depress the brake

pedal. The switch must be pushed and

turned to select 4LO.

WARNING

∙ When parking, apply the parking

brake before stopping the engine and

make sure that the 4WD shift indica-

tor light is on and the Automatic

Transmission park (ATP) warning light

goes off. Otherwise, the vehicle could

unexpectedly move even if the A/T is

in the P position.

∙ The 4LO indicator light must stop

blinking and remain illuminated or

turn off before shifting the transmis-

sion into gear. If the shift lever is

shifted from the N (Neutral) position

to any other gear when the 4LO indi-

cator light is blinking, the vehicle may

move unexpectedly.

CAUTION

∙ Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-

tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

∙ The 4H position provides greater trac-

tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it will

cause increased fuel consumption

and higher oil temperatures, and

could damage drivetrain compo-

nents. Speeds over 62 mph

(100 km/h) in 4H is not recommended.

∙ The 4LO position provides maximum

power and traction. Avoid raising ve-

hicle speed excessively, as the maxi-

mum speed is approximately 31 mph

(50 km/h).

∙ When driving straight, shift the 4WD

shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.

Do not move the 4WD shift switch

when making a turn or reversing.

∙ Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-

tween 2WD and 4H) while driving on

steep downhill grades. Use the engine

brake and low A/T gears (M1 or M2) for

engine braking.

∙ Do not operate the 4WD shift switch

(between 2WD and 4H) with the rear

wheels spinning.

∙ Do not drive on dry hard surface roads

in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on

dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may

cause unnecessary noise and tire

wear. NISSAN recommends driving in

the 2WD position under these

conditions.

∙ The 4WD transfer case may not be

shifted between 4H and 4LO at low

ambient temperatures and the trans-

fer 4LO position indicator light may

blink even when the 4WD shift switch

is shifted. After driving for a while you

can change the 4WD transfer case be-

tween 4H and 4LO.

When driving on rough roads,

∙ Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

∙ Drive carefully according to the road

surface conditions.

When the vehicle is stuck,

∙ Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

∙ Place stones or wooden blocks under

the tires to free the vehicle.

5-48 Starting and driving

∙ Use the Electronic locking rear differen-

tial (E-Lock) system (if so equipped). For

additional information, refer to “Elec-

tronic locking rear differential (E-lock)

system” in this section.

∙ If it is difficult to free the vehicle, rock the

vehicle back and forth between reverse

and drive gears.

∙ If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, place

stones or wooden blocks under the

tires. Then try the recovery procedures

above. Tire chains may be effective.

CAUTION

∙ Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires

will sink deep into the mud, making it

difficult to free the vehicle.

∙ Avoid shifting gears with the engine

running at high speeds as this may

cause malfunction.

4WD shift switch operations

∙ Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the

2WD, 4H or 4LO position, depending on

driving conditions.

∙If the 4WD shift switch is operated

while making a turn, accelerating or

decelerating or if the key switch is

turned off while in the 4H or 4LO, you

may feel a jolt. This is not abnormal.

∙You may hear some noise as the sys-

tem shifts or engages. This is not ab-

normal.

CAUTION

∙ When driving straight, shift the 4WD

shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.

Do not move the 4WD shift switch

when making a turn or reversing.

∙ Do not shift the 4WD shift switch

while driving on steep downhill

grades. Use the engine brake and low

automatic transmission gears (M1 or

M2) for engine braking.

∙ Do not operate the 4WD shift switch

with the rear wheels spinning.

∙ Before placing the 4WD shift switch in

the 4H position from 2WD, ensure the

vehicle speed is less than 62 mph

(100 km/h). Failure to do so can dam-

age the 4WD system.

∙ Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-

tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

LSD2463

Starting and driving 5-49

4WD shift indicator light

The 4WD shift indicator light is located in

the vehicle information display.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift

indicator light will illuminate the position

selected by the 4WD shift switch.

∙The 4WD shift indicator light may

come on while shifting from one drive

mode to the other. When the shifting

is completed, the 4WD shift indicator

light will stay on.

∙ If the 4WD warning light or the vehicle

information display warning message

comes on, the 4WD indicator light goes

out.

CAUTION

∙ If the 4WD shift indicator light indica-

tion changes to 2WD when the 4WD

shift switch is shifted to the 4H posi-

tion at low ambient temperatures, the

2WD mode may be being engaged

due to malfunctioning drive system. If

the indicator does not return to nor-

mal and the 4WD warning light or the

vehicle information display warning

message comes on, have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD2328

5-50 Starting and driving

Warning light or warning message

Warning light (if so

equipped)

Warning message Warning light or warning

message comes on

when:

Trip computer (if so

equipped)

Vehicle information dis-

play (if so equipped)

Illuminates

4WD ERROR

4WD Error: See Owner’s

Manual

There is a malfunction in

the 4–wheel drive sys-

tem

— 4WD TIRES FRT & RR tire size differ-

ence: See Owner’s

Manual

The difference in wheel

rotation is large

The 4WD warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

It turns off soon after the engine is started.

If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD sys-

tem when the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the warning light will either re-

main illuminated or blink.

If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD

shift indicator light goes out.

If the “4WD TIRES” warning message comes

on, change the 4WD shift switch into 2WD

and do not drive fast.

CAUTION

∙ If the warning light or warning mes-

sage comes on during operation or

rapidly after stopping the vehicle for a

while, have your vehicle checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not

recommended when the 4WD warn-

ing light or warning message turns

on.

Starting and driving 5-51

∙ When the warning light or warning

message comes on, the 2WD mode

may be engaged even if the 4WD shift

switch is in 4H. Be especially careful

when driving. If corresponding parts

are malfunctioning, the 4WD mode

will not be engaged even if the 4WD

shift switch is shifted.

∙ Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or

4LO position on dry hard surface

roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in

4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary

noise, tire wear and increased fuel

consumption.

If the 4WD warning light or warning

message turns on when you are driv-

ing on dry hard surface roads:

– In the 4H position, shift the 4WD

shift switch to 2WD.

– In the 4LO position, stop the ve-

hicle, move the automatic trans-

mission shift lever to the N (Neu-

tral) position with the brake pedal

depressed, and shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

∙ If the warning light or warning mes-

sage is still on after the above opera-

tion, have your vehicle checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ The transfer case may be damaged if

you continue driving with the warning

light or warning message on.

The E-Lock system can provide additional

traction and should only be used when a

vehicle has become or is becoming stuck.

This system operates by electronically

“locking” the two rear drive wheels to-

gether, allowing them to turn at the same

speed. The system is used when it is not

possible to free a stuck vehicle even when

using the 4LO position (4-wheel drive ve-

hicles).

When added traction is required, activate

the E-Lock system by pushing the switch

on. For additional information, refer to

“Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

system switch” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual. Once the

system fully engages, the indicator light in

the instrument panel will remain on. When

the system is activated, both rear wheels

will engage, providing added traction.

The rear wheels may momentarily slip or

move to engage the system, and the sys-

tem will only engage up to approximately

4 mph (7 km/h). Once the vehicle is free, the

system should be turned off and driving

resumed.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is dis-

abled and the ABS light illuminates when

the E-Lock system is on.

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR

DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

5-52 Starting and driving

WARNING

∙ Never leave the E-Lock system on

when driving on paved or hard-

surfaced roads. Turning the vehicle

may result in the rear wheels slipping

and result in an accident and personal

injury. After using the E-Lock system

to free the vehicle, turn the system off.

∙ Use the E-Lock system only in an

emergency when it is not possible to

free a stuck vehicle even when using

4LO. Never use the E-Lock system on a

slippery road surface such as snow or

ice surface. Using the E-Lock system

when driving in these road conditions

may cause unexpected movement of

the vehicle during engine braking, ac-

celerating or turning, which may re-

sult in an accident and serious per-

sonal injury.

∙ Observe the above warnings. Other-

wise, loss of normal steering control

may result. This may result in an acci-

dent and serious personal injury.

CAUTION

∙ After using the E-Lock system, or dur-

ing normal driving, turn the switch off

to prevent possible damage to the

drivetrain components from ex-

tended use.

∙ Avoid quick starts while the E-Lock

system is in operation. Otherwise, the

drivetrain components could be

damaged.

∙ When the E-Lock system is in opera-

tion, turning the vehicle becomes dif-

ficult. This can be dangerous, espe-

cially at high speeds. Doing so could

damage the drivetrain components.

∙ Do not operate the E-Lock system

when the vehicle is turning or when

one side wheel is rotating. Otherwise,

the drivetrain components could be

damaged.

∙ The E-Lock system operates only

when the engine is running.

∙ In 4H mode, the E-Lock system does

not operate when the E-Lock system

switch is turned to the ON position.

(The E-Lock system indicator light will

flash.)

∙ Observe the above cautions. Other-

wise, loss of normal steering control

may result.

Starting and driving 5-53

When the ignition switch is in the OFF posi-

tion, ECO management display appears.

䊊

1Previous 5 times (History)

䊊

2Current fuel economy

䊊

3Best fuel economy

The result of ECO evaluation is displayed

30 seconds after the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position and the vehicle is

driven at least 1/3 miles (500 meters).

䊊

1The average fuel economy for the pre-

vious 5 times will be displayed.

䊊

2The average fuel economy since the

last reset will be displayed.

䊊

3The best fuel economy of the past his-

tory will be displayed.

The ECO drive report can be set to be ON or

OFF.

LSD2472

ECO DRIVE REPORT (if so equipped)

5-54 Starting and driving

WARNING

∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They may

ignite and cause a fire.

∙ Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the

transmission placed into P (Park). Fail-

ure to do so could cause the vehicle to

move unexpectedly or roll away and

result in an accident. Make sure the

shift lever has been pushed as far for-

ward as it can go and cannot be

moved without depressing the foot

brake pedal.

∙ Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-

sition.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling

into traffic when parked on an incline, it

is a good practice to turn the wheels as

illustrated.

∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and

move the vehicle forward until the curb

side wheel gently touches the curb.

∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb

and move the vehicle back until the

curb side wheel gently touches the

curb.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

Starting and driving 5-55

∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels toward the side of the

road so the vehicle will move away

from the center of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

The power assisted steering uses a hy-

draulic pump, driven by the engine, to as-

sist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks,

you will still have control of the vehicle.

However, much greater steering effort is

needed, especially in sharp turns and at

low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the steering will not work. Steering will

be harder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hy-

draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,

you will still have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal

while driving. This will overheat the brakes,

wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce

gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent

the brakes from overheating, reduce speed

and downshift to a lower gear before going

down a slope or long grade. Overheated

brakes may reduce braking performance

and could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or

downshifting. Abrupt braking or ac-

celerating could cause the wheels to

skid and result in an accident.

∙ If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power as-

sist for the brakes will not work. Brak-

ing will be harder.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

5-56 Starting and driving

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven

through water, the brakes may get wet. As

a result, your braking distance will be lon-

ger and the vehicle may pull to one side

during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly pressing the brake

pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until

the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving

the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes

function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever

the stopping effect of the parking brake is

weakened or whenever the parking brake

shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,

in order to assure the best braking perfor-

mance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle

service manual. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING

∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but

it cannot prevent accidents resulting

from careless or dangerous driving

techniques. It can help maintain ve-

hicle control during braking on slip-

pery surfaces. Remember that stop-

ping distances on slippery surfaces

will be longer than on normal sur-

faces even with ABS. Stopping dis-

tances may also be longer on rough,

gravel or snow covered roads, or if you

are using tire chains. Always maintain

a safe distance from the vehicle in

front of you. Ultimately, the driver is

responsible for safety.

∙ Tire type and condition may also af-

fect braking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make

sure that it is the proper size and

type as specified on the Tire and

Loading Information label. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Tire

and Loading Information label” in

the “Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

– For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels

do not lock during hard braking or when

braking on slippery surfaces. The system

detects the rotation speed at each wheel

and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-

vent each wheel from locking and sliding.

By preventing each wheel from locking, the

system helps the driver maintain steering

control and helps to minimize swerving

and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Depress the brake pedal with firm steady

pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The

Anti-lock Braking System will operate to

prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer

the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

Starting and driving 5-57

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping

distances.

Self-test feature

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in-

cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps,

hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start

the engine and move the vehicle at a low

speed in forward or reverse. When the self-

test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise

and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.

This is normal and does not indicate a mal-

function. If the computer senses a mal-

function, it switches the ABS off and illumi-

nates the ABS warning light on the

instrument panel. The brake system then

operates normally, but without anti-lock

assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during

the self-test or while driving, have the ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper-

ates at speeds above3-6mph(5-

10 km/h). The speed varies according to

road conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more

wheels are close to locking up, the actuator

rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-

sure. This action is similar to pumping the

brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa-

tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise

from under the hood or feel a vibration

from the actuator when it is operating. This

is normal and indicates that the ABS is op-

erating properly. However, the pulsation

may indicate that road conditions are haz-

ardous and extra care is required while

driving.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal

exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is

activated generating greater braking force

than a conventional brake booster even

with light pedal force.

WARNING

The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist

braking operation and is not a collision

warning or avoidance device. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely and be in control of the vehicle at

all times.

5-58 Starting and driving

∙ The ABLS system uses automatic brak-

ing to transfer power from a slipping

drive wheel to the wheel on the same

axle with more traction. The ABLS sys-

tem applies braking to the slipping

wheel, which helps redirect power to

the other wheel.

∙ On 4WD models the ABLS system oper-

ates in both 4H and 4LO modes. If 4WD

mode is engaged, the ABLS system op-

erates for both drive axles. On 2WD ve-

hicles, the ABLS system operates on the

drive axle only.

∙ The ABLS system is always on. In some

conditions, the system may automati-

cally turn the ABLS system off. If the sys-

tem is automatically turned off, normal

brake function will continue. ABLS will

function even when the VDC system is

turned off.

∙ The ABLS system does not operate if

both wheels on a drive axle are slipping.

WARNING

∙ The ABLS system helps provide in-

creased traction, but will not prevent

accidents due to abrupt steering op-

eration or by careless driving or dan-

gerous driving practices. Reduce ve-

hicle speed and be especially careful

when driving and cornering on slip-

pery surfaces. Always drive carefully.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN approved for your vehicle

or are extremely deteriorated, the

ABLS system may not operate prop-

erly. This could adversely affect ve-

hicle handling performance, and the

slip indicator light may illuminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the ABLS sys-

tem may not operate properly and the

slip indicator light may illuminate.

∙ If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are used,

the ABLS system may not operate

properly and the slip indicator light

may illuminate.

ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS)

SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-59

The VDC system uses various sensors to

monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.

Under certain driving conditions, the VDC

system helps to perform the following

functions:

∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce

wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel

so power is transferred to a non-

slipping drive wheel on the same axle.

∙ Controls brake pressure and engine

output to reduce drive wheel slip based

on vehicle speed (traction control func-

tion).

∙ If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into

4LO the indicator light will come

on and the VDC system will be turned

off. For additional information, refer to

“Using 4-wheel drive (4WD)” in this sec-

tion.

∙ Controls brake pressure at individual

wheels and engine output to help the

driver maintain control of the vehicle in

the following conditions:

– Understeer (vehicle tends to not fol-

low the steered path despite in-

creased steering input)

– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due

to certain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to

maintain control of the vehicle, but it can-

not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv-

ing situations.

When the VDC system operates, the

indicator in the instrument panel flashes

so note the following:

∙ The road may be slippery or the system

may determine some action is required

to help keep the vehicle on the steered

path.

∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal and hear a noise or vibration from

under the hood. This is normal and indi-

cates that the VDC system is working

properly.

∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the

road conditions.

For additional information, refer to “Slip in-

dicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

If a malfunction occurs in the system,

the indicator light will come on in the

instrument panel. The VDC system auto-

matically turns off when these indicator

lights are off.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the

VDC system. The indicator illumi-

nates to indicate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC switch is used to turn off the

system, the VDC system still operates to

prevent one drive wheel from slipping by

transferring power to a non-slipping drive

wheel. The indicator flashes if this oc-

curs. All other VDC functions are off and

the indicator will not flash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to

ON when the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position then back to the ON position.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea-

ture that tests the system each time you

start the engine and move the vehicle for-

ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When

the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk

noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal. This is normal and is not an indica-

tion of a malfunction.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

5-60 Starting and driving

WARNING

∙ The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but does

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or

by careless or dangerous driving

techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and

be especially careful when driving and

cornering on slippery surfaces and al-

ways drive carefully.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,

the VDC system may not operate

properly. This could adversely affect

vehicle handling performance, and

the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may

illuminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly and

the indicator light may

illuminate.

∙ If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the indi-

cator light may illuminate.

∙ When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator may

flash or the indicator light may

illuminate. Do not drive on these types

of roads.

∙ When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may illumi-

nate. This is not a malfunction. Re-

start the engine after driving onto a

stable surface.

∙ If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are used,

the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator may

flash or the indicator light may

illuminate.

∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION

During braking while driving through turns,

the system optimizes the distribution of

force to each of the front and rear wheels

depending on the radius of the turn.

WARNING

∙ The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but does

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or

by careless or dangerous driving

techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and

be especially careful when driving and

cornering on slippery surfaces and al-

ways drive carefully.

Starting and driving 5-61

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,

the VDC system may not operate

properly. This could adversely affect

vehicle handling performance, and

the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may

illuminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly and

the indicator light may

illuminate.

∙ If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the indi-

cator light may illuminate.

∙ When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator may

flash or the indicator light may

illuminate. Do not drive on these types

of roads.

∙ When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may illumi-

nate. This is not a malfunction. Re-

start the engine after driving onto a

stable surface.

∙ If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are used,

the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator may

flash or the indicator light may

illuminate.

∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

WARNING

∙ Never rely solely on the hill descent

control system to control vehicle

speed when driving on steep downhill

grades. Always drive carefully and at-

tentively when using the hill descent

control system and decelerate the ve-

hicle speed by depressing the brake

pedal if necessary. Be especially care-

ful when driving on frozen, muddy or

extremely steep downhill roads. Fail-

ure to control vehicle speed may re-

sult in a loss of control of the vehicle

and possible serious injury or death.

∙ The hill descent control may not con-

trol the vehicle speed on a hill under

all load or road conditions. Always be

prepared to depress the brake pedal

to control vehicle speed. Failure to do

so may result in a collision or serious

personal injury.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

5-62 Starting and driving

The hill descent control system can only be

activated when the 4H or 4LO position is

engaged.

The hill descent control system helps

maintain vehicle speed when driving under

15 mph (25 km/h) on steeper downhill

grades. Hill descent control is useful when

engine braking alone cannot control ve-

hicle speed. Hill descent control applies the

vehicle brakes to control vehicle speed al-

lowing the driver to concentrate on steer-

ing while reducing the burden of brake and

accelerator operation.

If the hill descent control system ON indica-

tor light is blinking, the hill descent control

is engaged; however, the hill descent con-

trol will not control the vehicle speed.

∙ Once the system is activated, the indi-

cator light will remain on in the instru-

ment panel. For additional information,

refer to “Hill descent control system ON

indicator light” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

∙ You may hear a noise from under the

hood or feel a vibration from the actua-

tor when it is operating. This indicates

that the hill descent control system is

working properly.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is de-

pressed while the hill descent control sys-

tem is on, the system will stop operating

temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or

brake pedal is released, the hill descent

control system begins to function again if

the hill descent control operating condi-

tions are fulfilled.

For the best results, when descending

steep downhill grades,the hill descent con-

trol switch should be ON and the shift lever

in M1 (First) for engine braking. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Hill descent

control switch” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

WARNING

∙ Never rely solely on the hill start assist

system to prevent the vehicle from

moving backward on a hill. Always

drive carefully and attentively. De-

press the brake pedal when the ve-

hicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be es-

pecially careful when stopped on a hill

on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to

prevent the vehicle from rolling back-

wards may result in a loss of control of

the vehicle and possible serious injury

or death.

∙ The hill start assist system is not de-

signed to hold the vehicle at a stand-

still on a hill. Depress the brake pedal

when the vehicle is stopped on a

steep hill. Failure to do so may cause

the vehicle to roll backwards and may

result in a collision or serious personal

injury.

∙ The hill start assist may not prevent

the vehicle from rolling backwards on

a hill under all load or road conditions.

Always be prepared to depress the

brake pedal to prevent the vehicle

from rolling backwards. Failure to do

so may result in a collision or serious

personal injury.

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-63

When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill

start assist system automatically keeps

the brakes applied. This helps prevents the

vehicle from rolling backward in the time it

takes the driver to release the brake pedal

and apply the accelerator when the vehicle

is stopped on a hill.

Hill start assist will operate automatically

under the following conditions:

∙ The shift lever is shifted to a forward or

reverse gear.

∙ The vehicle is stopped completely on a

hill by applying the brake.

The maximum holding time is 2 seconds.

After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll

back and hill start assist will stop operating

completely.

Hill start assist will not operate when the

shift lever is shifted into N (Neutral) or P

(Park) or on a flat and level road. When the

VDC warning light illuminates in the meter,

the hill start assist system will not operate.

The front and rear sonar system sounds a

tone to inform the driver of obstacles near

the bumper.

When the “DISPLAY” key is ON, the sonar

view will automatically appear in the meter.

WARNING

∙ The front and rear sonar system is a

convenience but it is not a substitute

for proper parking.

∙ The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other ma-

neuvers. Always look around and

check that it is safe to do so before

parking.

∙ Read and understand the limitations

of the front and rear sonar system as

contained in this section. The colors of

the corner sonar indicator and the

distance guide lines in the front/rear

view indicate different distances to

the object.

∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonic

sources such as an automatic car

wash, a truck’s compressed-air

brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect

the function of the system; this may

include reduced performance or a

false activation.

∙ This function is designed as an aid to

the driver in detecting large station-

ary objects to help avoid damaging

the vehicle.

LSD2465

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

5-64 Starting and driving

∙ The system is not designed to prevent

contact with small or moving objects.

Always move slowly. The system will

not detect small objects below the

bumper, and may not detect objects

close to the bumper or on the ground.

∙ The system may not detect the fol-

lowing objects: fluffy objects such as

snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.,

and thin objects such as rope, wire

and chain, etc., or wedge-shaped

objects.

If your vehicle sustains damage to the

bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or

bent, the sensing zone may be altered

causing inaccurate measurement of ob-

stacles or false alarms.

CAUTION

∙ Excessive noise (such as audio system

volume or an open vehicle window)

will interfere with the tone and it may

not be heard.

∙ Keep the sonar sensors (located on

the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice

and large accumulations of dirt. Do

not clean the sensors with sharp ob-

jects. If the sensors are covered, the

accuracy of the sonar function will be

diminished.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The system informs with a visual and au-

dible alert of front obstacles when the shift

lever is in the D (Drive) position and both

front and rear obstacles when the shift le-

ver is in the R (Reverse) position.

Sonar Operation Table

FR Sensor RR Sensor

Range Sound Display Sound Display

Px†x†

Roooo

Nx†x†

Doox †

o – Display/Beep when detect

† – Display on camera view

x – No Display and Beep

The system is deactivated at speeds above

6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower

speeds.

The intermittent tone will stop after 3 sec-

onds when an obstacle is detected by only

the corner sensor and the distance does

not change. The tone will stop when the

obstacle gets away from the vehicle.

When the object is detected, the indicator

(green) appears and blinks and the tone

sounds intermittently. When the vehicle

moves closer to the object, the color of the

indicator turns yellow and the rate of the

blinking increases. When the vehicle is very

close to the object, the indicator stops

blinking and turns red, and the tone

sounds continuously.

Starting and driving 5-65

When the corner of the vehicle moves

closer to an object, the corner sonar indi-

cator 䊊

Aappears.

The system indicators 䊊

Awill appear when

the vehicle moves closer to an object.

LSD2466 LSD2467

5-66 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

SONAR SYSTEM

The system is automatically activated

when the ignition is in the ON position and

the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the sonar system:

1. Push the Front and rear sonar system

OFF switch (the orange light will go out)

to turn the system off.

2. To turn the system back on, push the

switch (the orange light will illuminate)

and the system will be enabled. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Front and

rear sonar system OFF switch” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of

this manual.

NOTE:

The system will automatically be turned

on when the engine is restarted.

LSD2660

Starting and driving 5-67

SONAR LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the sonar system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other ma-

neuvers. Always turn and look back

before backing up. The sonar system

is not a substitute for proper

procedures.

∙ Read and understand the limitations

of the sonar system as contained in

this section. Inclement weather may

affect the function of the sonar sys-

tem; this may include reduced perfor-

mance or a false activation.

∙ This system is not designed to pre-

vent contact with small or moving

objects.

∙ The system is designed as an aid to

the driver in detecting large station-

ary objects to help avoid damaging

the vehicle. The system will not detect

small objects below the bumper, and

may not detect objects close to the

bumper or on the ground.

∙ The system is deactivated at speeds

above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reacti-

vated at lower speeds.

∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonic

sources such as an automatic car

wash, a truck’s compressed-air

brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect

the function of the system; this may

include reduced performance or a

false activation.

∙ The system is not designed to prevent

contact with small or moving objects.

Always move slowly. The system will

not detect small objects below the

bumper or on the ground.

∙ The system may not detect the fol-

lowing objects: fluffy objects such as

snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.,

and thin objects such as rope, wire

and chain, etc., or wedge-shaped

objects.

∙ The system may not detect objects at

speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and

may not detect certain angular or

moving objects.

∙ The system is deactivated at speeds

above 6 mph (10 km/h) and is reacti-

vated at lower speeds.

5-68 Starting and driving

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sonar sensors 䊊

1are located on the

front and rear bumpers. Always keep the

area near the sonar sensors clean.

The sonar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-

structing the sonar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing

the area around the sonar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transpar-

ent material), install accessories or apply

additional paint near the sonar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around

the sonar sensors. It is recommended that

you consult a NISSAN dealer if the area

around the sonar sensors is damaged due

to a collision.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply

de-icer through the key hole. If the lock

becomes frozen, heat the key before in-

serting it into the key hole or use the re-

mote keyless entry key fob (if so equipped).

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the

temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),

check the antifreeze to assure proper win-

ter protection. For additional information,

refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during

extremely cold weather conditions, the

battery fluid may freeze and damage the

battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,

the battery should be checked regularly.

For additional information, refer to “Battery”

in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

LSD2471

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Starting and driving 5-69

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without

anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, in-

cluding the engine block. Refill before oper-

ating the vehicle. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Changing engine coolant” in

the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry

pavement. However, the performance

of these tires will be substantially re-

duced in snowy and icy conditions. If

you operate your vehicle on snowy or

icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use

of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES

on all four wheels. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire

type, size, speed rating and availability

information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads,

studded tires may be used. However,

some U.S. states and Canadian prov-

inces prohibit their use. Check local,

state and provincial laws before install-

ing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow

tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For additional

information, refer to “Tire chains” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items

be carried in the vehicle during winter:

∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-

move ice and snow from the windows

and wiper blades.

∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under

the jack to give it firm support.

∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-

drifts.

∙ Extra washer fluid to refill the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” un-

der these conditions.Try to avoid driv-

ing on wet ice until the road is salted

or sanded.

∙ Whatever the condition, drive with

caution. Accelerate and slow down

with care. If accelerating or down-

shifting too fast, the drive wheels will

lose even more traction.

∙ Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

∙ Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch

of ice is seen ahead, brake before

reaching it. Try not to brake while on

the ice, and avoid any sudden steering

maneuvers.

5-70 Starting and driving

∙ Do not use the cruise control (if so

equipped) on slippery roads.

∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow

clear of the exhaust pipe and from

around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist

with cold temperature starting.

∙ Engine block heaters should be used

when the outside temperature is 0°F

(-17°C) or lower.

∙ Engine block heaters run continuously

while plugged into the correct voltage

electrical outlet.

WARNING

∙ Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical system

or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be

seriously injured by an electrical

shock if you use an ungrounded

connection.

∙ Disconnect and properly store the en-

gine block heater cord before starting

the engine. Damage to the cord could

result in an electrical shock and can

cause serious injury.

∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged

extension cord rated for at least 10 A.

Plug the extension cord into a Ground

Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,

grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to

use the proper extension cord or a

grounded outlet can result in a fire or

electrical shock and cause serious

personal injury.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine

block heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into

a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten-

sion cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground

Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,

grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be

plugged in for at least 2–4 hours, de-

pending on outside temperatures, to

properly warm the engine coolant. Use

an appropriate timer to turn the engine

block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and

properly store the cord to keep it away

from moving parts.

NOTE:

When using the engine block heater (if so

equipped) on an Applied Vehicle (engine

block heater is plugged in):

∙Vehicle should be parked on a level

surface.

∙If a level surface is not available, the

vehicle should be parked with the

front of the truck lower than the rear

(nose down).

CAUTION

Use of the engine block heater when

parked with the front of the vehicle

higher than the rear (5 degrees or more)

may cause the engine block heater to

become damaged and/or inoperative.

Starting and driving 5-71

MEMO

5-72 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ..................6-2

Emergency engine shut off ......................6-2

Flat tire ..........................................6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)........................................6-3

Changing a flat tire ...........................6-3

Jump starting ..................................6-14

Push starting ...................................6-16

If your vehicle overheats........................6-16

Towing your vehicle ............................6-17

Towing recommended by NISSAN ...........6-17

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck

vehicle) ......................................6-19

Push the switch on to warn other drivers

when you must stop or park under emer-

gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure

to move the vehicle well off the road.

∙ Do not use the hazard warning flash-

ers while moving on the highway un-

less unusual circumstances force you

to drive so slowly that your vehicle

might become a hazard to other

traffic.

∙ Turn signals do not work when the

hazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition

switch placed in any position.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use

of the hazard warning flasher switch

while driving.

To shut off the engine in an emergency

situation while driving, perform the follow-

ing procedure:

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch three consecutive times in less

than 1.5 seconds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignition

switch for more than 2 seconds.

LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

6-2 In case of emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It moni-

tors tire pressure of all tires except the

spare. When the low tire pressure warning

light is lit on vehicles equipped with a trip

computer (if so equipped), and the Tire

Pressure Low — Add Air warning appears in

the vehicle information display (if so

equipped), one or more of your tires is sig-

nificantly under-inflated. If equipped, the

system also displays pressure of all tires

(except the spare tire) on the display screen

by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is be-

ing driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS

will activate and warn you of it by the low

tire pressure warning light. This system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For addi-

tional information, refer to “Warning lights,

indicator lights and audible reminders” in

the “Instruments and controls” section and

“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙ If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-

ing with under-inflated tires may per-

manently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury.

Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light OFF. If you have a

flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as

soon as possible.

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, TPMS will

not function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately one minute. The light will re-

main on after one minute. Have your

tires replaced and/or TPMS system

reset as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for these services.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions

below:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

FLAT TIRE

In case of emergency 6-3

3. Park on a level surface and apply the

parking brake. Move the shift lever to P

(Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic

and to signal professional road assis-

tance personnel that you need assis-

tance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-

hicle and stand in a safe place, away

from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

∙ Make sure the parking brake is se-

curely applied and the shift lever is

shifted into P (Park).

∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is

hazardous.

∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic

is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro-

fessional road assistance.

A. Tire stoppers

B. Flat Tire

Blocking wheels

Place tire stoppers, supplied with jack, at

both the front and back of the wheel diago-

nally opposite the flat tire to prevent the

vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle

may move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools

(Crew and King Cab® models)

1. Fold up the right rear bench seat. For

additional information, refer to “Folding

the rear bench seat up” in the “Safety—

Seats, seat belts and supplemental re-

straint system” section of this manual.

LCE2142

6-4 In case of emergency

2. Remove the tire stopper bag 䊊

3. Release the straps 䊊

4. Collapse the jack to remove it from the

storage location. Loosen the jack with

your fingers until the jack is free.

5. Remove the jack and tool kit.

6. Assemble the pieces of the jack rod.

Find the oval-shaped opening above

the license plate, slightly to the left of

the middle (driver’s side). Pass the

T-shaped end of the jack rod through

the opening and direct it toward the

spare tire winch, located directly above

the spare tire.

CAUTION

Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is

designed to be inserted at an angle as

shown.

7. Fit the square end of the jack rod into

the square hole of the wheel nut

wrench to form a handle.

8. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod

into the T-shaped opening of the tire

winch. Apply pressure to keep the jack

rod engaged in the spare tire winch

and turn the jack rod counterclockwise

to lower the spare tire.

9. Once the spare tire is completely low-

ered, reach under the vehicle, guide the

retainer chain through the center of

the tire and carefully slide the tire from

under the rear of the vehicle.

LCE2374 WCE0150 WCE0151

In case of emergency 6-5

10. Securely store the flat tire beneath the

vehicle, from where the full size spare

was removed. To reinstall the wheel, re-

move the center cap (if so equipped)

and insert the retainer chain through

the wheel. Be sure the rubber spacer (if

so equipped) is centered on the wheel

before lifting. Use the assembled jack-

ing rod to slowly rotate the winch clock-

wise to raise the wheel to the vehicle.

11. To reinstall the jack and tool kit, reverse

steps 1 through 5.

NOTE:

Inspect the spacer every six years and

replace as necessary. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

CAUTION

∙ Be sure to center the spare tire sus-

pending plate on the wheel and then

lift the spare tire.

∙ Failure to use the spacer may allow

the chain to get stuck on the wheel

nut holes.

Getting the spare tire and tools

(Single Cab models)

1. Move the front passenger seat to ac-

cess the tools. For additional informa-

tion about seat functions, refer to “

Seats” in the “Safety–Seats, seat belts

and supplemental restraint system”

section of this manual.

2. Remove the lid from the tool storage

compartment.

3. Release the straps 䊊

4. Remove the tire stopper bag 䊊

5. Remove the tool kit and jack 䊊

LCE2280

6-6 In case of emergency

6. Assemble the pieces of the jack rod.

Find the oval-shaped opening above

the license plate, slightly to the left of

the middle (driver’s side). Pass the

T-shaped end of the jack rod through

the opening and direct it toward the

spare tire winch, located directly above

the spare tire.

CAUTION

Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is

designed to be inserted at an angle as

shown.

7. Fit the square end of the jack rod into

the square hole of the wheel nut

wrench to form a handle.

8. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod

into the T-shaped opening of the tire

winch. Apply pressure to keep the jack

rod engaged in the spare tire winch

and turn the jack rod counterclockwise

to lower the spare tire.

9. Once the spare tire is completely low-

ered, reach under the vehicle, guide the

retainer chain through the center of

the tire and carefully slide the tire from

under the rear of the vehicle.

10. Securely store the flat tire beneath the

vehicle, from where the full size spare

was removed. To reinstall the wheel, re-

move the center cap (if so equipped)

and insert the retainer chain through

the wheel. Be sure the rubber spacer (if

so equipped) is centered on the wheel

before lifting. Use the assembled jack-

ing rod to slowly rotate the winch clock-

wise to raise the wheel to the vehicle.

11. To reinstall the jack and tool kit, reverse

steps 1 through 5.

NOTE:

Inspect the spacer every six years and

replace as necessary. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

CAUTION

∙ Be sure to center the spare tire sus-

pending plate on the wheel and then

lift the spare tire.

∙ Failure to use the spacer may allow

the chain to get stuck on the wheel

nut holes.

WCE0150 WCE0151

In case of emergency 6-7

Getting the spare tire and tools

(King Cab® models not equipped

with rear seat)

1. Open the passenger side rear door and

remove the lid from the tool storage

compartment.

2. Release the straps 䊊

3. Remove the tire stopper bag 䊊

4. Lift the storage cover 䊊

Cto access the

jack.

5. Remove the tool kit and jack.

6. Assemble the pieces of the jack rod.

Find the oval-shaped opening above

the license plate, slightly to the left of

the middle (driver’s side). Pass the

T-shaped end of the jack rod through

the opening and direct it toward the

spare tire winch, located directly above

the spare tire.

CAUTION

Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is

designed to be inserted at an angle as

shown.

LCE2327 LCE2328 WCE0150

6-8 In case of emergency

7. Fit the square end of the jack rod into

the square hole of the wheel nut

wrench to form a handle.

8. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod

into the T-shaped opening of the tire

winch. Apply pressure to keep the jack

rod engaged in the spare tire winch

and turn the jack rod counterclockwise

to lower the spare tire.

9. Once the spare tire is completely low-

ered, reach under the vehicle, guide the

retainer chain through the center of

the tire and carefully slide the tire from

under the rear of the vehicle.

10. Securely store the flat tire beneath the

vehicle, from where the full size spare

was removed. To reinstall the wheel, re-

move the center cap (if so equipped)

and insert the retainer chain through

the wheel. Be sure the rubber spacer (if

so equipped) is centered on the wheel

before lifting. Use the assembled jack-

ing rod to slowly rotate the winch clock-

wise to raise the wheel to the vehicle.

11. To reinstall the jack and tool kit, reverse

steps 1 through 5.

NOTE:

Inspect the spacer every six years and

replace as necessary. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

CAUTION

∙ Be sure to center the spare tire sus-

pending plate on the wheel and then

lift the spare tire.

∙ Failure to use the spacer may allow

the chain to get stuck on the wheel

nut holes.

Removing bolt-on wheel caps (if

so equipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheel

caps or wheel covers. Doing so could

result in personal injury.

The wheel cap 䊊

1is only attached with the

wheel nuts and is separate from the wheel

䊊

To remove the wheel cap, remove the

wheel nuts after the jack is securely sup-

porting the vehicle and the tire clears the

ground.

WCE0151 LCE2367

In case of emergency 6-9

For additional information, refer to “Jacking

up vehicle and removing the damaged tire”

in this section.

Take care not to scratch the wheel cap or

wheel surface.

Jacking up vehicle and removing

the damaged tire (all models)

WARNING

∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is nec-

essary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

∙ Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use

the jack provided with your vehicle on

other vehicles. The jack is designed

for lifting only your vehicle during a

tire change.

∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for

jack support.

∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.

∙ Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the

vehicle to move. This is especially true

for vehicles with limited slip

differentials.

∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while it is on the jack.

∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s)

off the ground. It may cause the ve-

hicle to move.

6-10 In case of emergency

Always refer to the illustration for the cor-

rect placement and jack-up points for your

specific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached

to the jack body and the following in-

structions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two

turns by turning counterclockwise with

the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove

the wheel nuts until the tire is off the

ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the

jack-up point as illustrated so the top

of the jack contacts the vehicle at the

jack-up point. Align the jack head under

the arrow stamped on the side of the

frame or rear as shown.

The jack should be used on firm and

level ground.

WCE0152

In case of emergency 6-11

3. Install the assembled jack rod into the

jack as shown.

4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack

lever and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle

until the tire clears the ground.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then re-

move the tire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and

tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten

wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the

sequence illustrated (䊊

1,䊊

2,䊊

3,䊊

4,䊊

5,䊊

until they are tight.

LCE0087

WCE0063

6-12 In case of emergency

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the

wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel

nuts securely in the sequence illus-

trated (䊊

1,䊊

2,䊊

3,䊊

4,䊊

5,䊊

6). Lower the

vehicle completely.

WARNING

∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the

nuts to become loose.

∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel

nuts to the specified torque with a

torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

Non-XD models:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

XD models:

131 ft-lb (177 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened

to specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specifications at each lubrication inter-

val.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres-

sure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been

parked for 3 hours or more or driven less

than 1 mi. (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label af-

fixed to the driver side center pillar.

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD

tire pressure, the display (if so equipped)

of the tire pressure information may

show higher pressure than the COLD tire

pressure after the vehicle has been

driven more than 1 mi. (1.6 km). This is

because the tire pressure increases as

the tire temperature rises. This does not

indicate a system malfunction.

5. Securely store the tools and jacking

equipment in the vehicle. For additional

information, refer to the “Getting the

spare tire and tools (Crew and King

Cab® models),” “Getting the spare tire

and tools (Single Cab models)” or “Get-

ting the spare tire and tools (King Cab®

models not equipped with rear seat)” in

this section.

WARNING

∙ Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly

secured after use. Such items can be-

come dangerous projectiles in an ac-

cident or sudden stop.

∙ The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. For additional information,

refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

In case of emergency 6-13

To start your engine with a booster battery,

the instructions and precautions below

must be followed.

WARNING

∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting

in severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the battery.

Keep all sparks and flames away from

the battery.

∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a

corrosive sulfuric acid solution which

can cause severe burns. If the fluid

should come into contact with any-

thing, immediately flush the con-

tacted area with water.

∙ Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

∙ The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

∙ Whenever working on or near a bat-

tery, always wear suitable eye protec-

tors (for example, goggles or indus-

trial safety spectacles) and remove

rings, metal bands, or any other jew-

elry. Do not lean over the battery

when jump starting.

∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause

serious injury.

∙ Your vehicle has an automatic engine

cooling fan. It could come on at any

time. Keep hands and other objects

away from it.

JUMP STARTING

6-14 In case of emergency

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage

to the charging system and cause per-

sonal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another ve-

hicle, position the two vehicles to bring

their batteries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to

touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift

lever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces-

sary electrical systems (lights, heater,

air conditioner, etc.).

3. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

4. Ensure the vent caps are level and

tight.

5. Connect the jumper cables in the se-

quence illustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D).

CAUTION

∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to posi-

tive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body

ground (for example, strut mounting

bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to

the battery.

∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine

compartment and that the cable

clamps do not contact any other

metal.

6. Start the engine of the booster vehicle

and let it run for a few minutes.

7. Keep the engine speed of the booster

vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the

engine of the vehicle being jump

started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged

for more than 10 seconds. If the engine

does not start right away, place the ig-

nition switch in the OFF position and

wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

8. After starting the engine, carefully dis-

connect the negative cable and then

the positive cable.

LCE2223

In case of emergency 6-15

Do not attempt to start the engine by

pushing.

CAUTION

∙ Automatic transmission models can-

not be push-started or tow-started.

Attempting to do so may cause trans-

mission damage.

∙ Three way catalyst equipped models

should not be started by pushing

since the three way catalyst may be

damaged.

∙ Never try to start the vehicle by tow-

ing it; when the engine starts, the for-

ward surge could cause the vehicle to

collide with the tow vehicle.

WARNING

∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause en-

gine damage or a vehicle fire.

∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap while the engine is still

hot. When the radiator or coolant res-

ervoir cap is removed, pressurized hot

water will spurt out, possibly causing

serious injury.

∙ Do not open the hood if steam is com-

ing out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by

an extremely high temperature gauge

reading), or if you feel a lack of engine

power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the

following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap-

ply the parking brake and move the

shift lever to P (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the

windows, move the heater or air condi-

tioner temperature control to maxi-

mum hot and fan control to high

speed.

3. If engine overheating is caused by

climbing a long hill on a hot day, run the

engine at a fast idle (approximately

1,500 rpm) until the temperature gauge

indication returns to normal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen

for steam or coolant escaping from the

radiator before opening the hood. If

steam or coolant is escaping, turn off

the engine. Do not open the hood fur-

ther until no steam or coolant can be

seen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the

engine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

6. Visually check drive belts for damage

or looseness. Also check if the cooling

fan is running. The radiator hoses and

radiator should not leak water. If cool-

ant is leaking, the water pump belt is

missing or loose, or the cooling fan

does not run, stop the engine.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

6-16 In case of emergency

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or

the engine cooling fan. The engine cool-

ing fan can start at any time.

7. After the engine cools down, check the

coolant level in the engine coolant res-

ervoir tank with the engine running. Add

coolant to the engine coolant reservoir

tank if necessary. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional

and local regulations for towing must be

followed. Incorrect towing equipment

could damage your vehicle. Towing in-

structions are available from a NISSAN

dealer. Local service operators are gener-

ally familiar with the applicable laws and

procedures for towing. To assure proper

towing and to prevent accidental damage

to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends hav-

ing a service operator tow your vehicle. It is

advisable to have the service operator

carefully read the following precautions:

WARNING

∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

∙ Never get under your vehicle after it

has been lifted by a tow truck.

∙ If your vehicle has front recovery

hooks as original factory equipment,

do not remove or modify them. If it

was not equipped with front recovery

hooks, do not install them. Either ac-

tion could affect proper operation of

the front air bag system resulting in

injury or death.

CAUTION

∙ When towing, make sure that the

transmission, axles, steering system

and powertrain are in working condi-

tion. If any of these conditions apply,

dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be

used.

∙ Always attach safety chains before

towing.

For additional information, refer to "Flat

towing for 2-Wheel Drive (2WD) vehicle" or

"Flat towing for 4-Wheel Drive (4WD) ve-

hicle" in the "Technical and consumer infor-

mation" section of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle

based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi-

tional information, refer to the diagrams in

this section to ensure that your vehicle is

properly towed.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

In case of emergency 6-17

4WD models with automatic

transmission

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies

be used when towing your vehicle or place

the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow 4WD models equipped with

an automatic transmission with any of

the wheels on the ground as this may

cause serious and expensive damage

to the transfer case and transmission.

LCE2141

6-18 In case of emergency

2WD models with automatic

transmission

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be

towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the

ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed

truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

∙ Never tow automatic transmission

models with the rear wheels on the

ground or four wheels on the ground

(forward or backward), as this may

cause serious and expensive damage

to the transmission. If it is necessary

to tow the vehicle with the front

wheels raised always use towing dol-

lies under the rear wheels.

∙ When towing automatic transmission

models with the front wheels on the

ground or on towing dollies:

– Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position and secure the steering

wheel in a straight-ahead position

with a rope or similar device. Never

secure the steering wheel by plac-

ing the ignition switch in the LOCK

position. This may cause damage

to the lock mechanism (for models

with a steering lock mechanism).

When towing long distances or speeds in

excess of 60 mph (97 km/h), remove the

propeller shaft before towing to prevent

damage to the transmission. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

additional information.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a

stuck vehicle)

There are two options to recover a stuck

vehicle: pulling and rocking. For additional

information regarding these options,

please refer to the following sections.

LCE2311

In case of emergency 6-19

Pulling a stuck vehicle

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-

sonal injury or death when recovering a

stuck vehicle:

∙ Contact a professional towing service

to recover the vehicle if you have any

questions regarding the recovery

procedure.

∙ Attach recovery devices only to main

structural members of the vehicle or

the recovery hooks.

∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to

tow or free a stuck vehicle.

∙ Only use devices specifically designed

for vehicle recovery and follow the

manufacturer’s instructions.

∙ Always pull the recovery device

straight out from the front of the ve-

hicle. Never pull at an angle.

∙ Route recovery devices so they do not

touch any part of the vehicle except

the attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use a tow strap or other device de-

signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al-

ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode and

result in serious injury. Parts of your

vehicle could also overheat and be

damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system.

2. Activate the Electronic Locking Rear

Differential (E-Lock) system (if so

equipped). For additional information,

refer to “Electronic Locking Rear Differ-

ential (E-Lock) system” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

3. Make sure the area in front and behind

the vehicle is clear of obstructions.

4. Turn the steering wheel right and left to

clear an area around the front tires.

5. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and

backward.

∙ Shift back and forth between R (Re-

verse) and D (Drive).

∙ Apply the accelerator as little as pos-

sible to maintain the rocking motion.

∙ Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R (Reverse) and D

(Drive).

∙ Do not spin the tires above 34 mph

(55 km/h) or above 12 mph (20 km/h)

if the E–Lock system (if so equipped)

is engaged.

6. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a

few tries, contact a professional towing

service to remove the vehicle.

6-20 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ................................7-2

Washing......................................7-2

Waxing .......................................7-2

Removing spots ..............................7-3

Underbody ...................................7-3

Glass .........................................7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) .......7-3

Chromeparts................................7-3

Tire dressings ................................7-4

Cleaning interior.................................7-4

Air fresheners ................................7-4

Floor mats (if so equipped) ...................7-5

Seatbelts....................................7-6

Corrosion protection ............................ 7-7

Most common factors contributing to

vehicle corrosion .............................7-7

Environmental factors influence the

rate of corrosion.............................. 7-7

Protect your vehicle from corrosion .......... 7-7

In order to maintain the appearance of

your vehicle, it is important to take proper

care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, wash your

vehicle as soon as you can:

∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible dam-

age from acid rain.

∙ After driving on coastal roads.

∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles or

bugs get on the paint surface.

∙ When dust or mud builds up on the sur-

face.

Whenever possible, store or park your ve-

hicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in

a shady area or protect the vehicle with a

body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-

face when putting on or removing the

body cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us-

ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or

general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed

with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, es-

pecially brushless ones, use some

acid for cleaning. The acid may react

with some plastic vehicle compo-

nents, causing them to crack. This

could affect their appearance, and

also could cause them not to function

properly. Always check with your car

wash to confirm that acid is not used.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical de-

tergents, gasoline or solvents.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot,

as the surface may become

water-spotted.

∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of

clean water.

Inside edges, seams and folds on the

doors, hatches and hood are particularly

vulnerable to the effects of road salt. There-

fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.

Take care that the drain holes in the lower

edge of the door are open. Spray water

under the body and in the wheel wells to

loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the

vehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface

and helps retain new vehicle appearance.

Polishing is recommended to remove

built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath-

ered appearance before re-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing

the proper product.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions sup-

plied with the wax.

∙ Do not use a wax containing any abra-

sives, cutting compounds or cleaners

that may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive pol-

ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin-

ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,

insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible

from the surface of the paint to avoid last-

ing damage or staining. Special cleaning

products are available at a NISSAN dealer

or any automotive accessory store. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it

is necessary to clean the underbody regu-

larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from

building up and causing the acceleration of

corrosion on the underbody and suspen-

sion. Before the winter period and again in

the spring, the underseal must be checked

and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and

dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor-

mal for glass to become coated with a film

after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.

Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily

remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the win-

dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,

abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based

disinfectant cleaners. They could dam-

age the electrical conductors, radio an-

tenna elements or rear window de-

froster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so

equipped)

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge

dampened in a mild soap solution, espe-

cially during winter months in areas where

road salt is used. If not removed, road salt

can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the

wheels.

∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as

ambient temperature.

∙ Do not use chrome cleaner on any

wheel. Doing so can damage the

chrome-like coating on the wheel.

∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove

the cleaner within 15 minutes after

the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a

non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain

the finish.

CAUTION

Do not use chrome cleaner on any

wheel. Doing so can damage the

chrome-like coating on the wheel.

Appearance and care 7-3

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a

coating to the tires to help reduce discolor-

ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap-

plied to the tires, it may react with the coat-

ing and form a compound. This compound

may come off the tire while driving and

stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing,take the

following precautions:

∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The

coating on the tire dissolves more easily

than with an oil-based tire dressing.

∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire

tread/grooves (where it would be diffi-

cult to remove).

∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is

completely removed from the tire

tread/grooves.

∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by the tire dressing manufac-

turer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the

interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a

vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe

the vinyl and leather surfaces (if so

equipped) with a clean, soft cloth damp-

ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean

with a dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in

order to maintain the appearance of the

leather (if so equipped).

Before using any fabric protector, read the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Some

fabric protectors contain chemicals that

may stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to

clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can

damage the seat or occupant classifi-

cation sensor (if so equipped). This can

also affect the operation of the air bag

system and result in serious personal

injury.

CAUTION

∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any

similar material.

∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive

and damaging to leather surfaces

and should be removed promptly. Do

not use saddle soap, car waxes, pol-

ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,

detergents or ammonia-based clean-

ers as they may damage the leather’s

natural finish.

∙ Never use fabric protectors unless

recommended by the manufacturer.

∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may

damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that

could affect the vehicle interior. If you use

an air freshener, take the following precau-

tions:

∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause

permanent discoloration when they

contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place

the air freshener in a location that al-

lows it to hang free and not contact an

interior surface.

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip

on the vents. These products can cause

immediate damage and discoloration

when spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufactur-

er’s instructions before using the air fresh-

eners.

FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference that

may result in a collision, injury or death:

∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-

other floor mat in the driver front po-

sition or install them upside down or

backwards.

∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,

or equivalent floor mats, that are spe-

cifically designed for use in your ve-

hicle model and model year.

∙ Properly position the mats in the

floorwell using the floor mat position-

ing hook. For additional information,

refer to "Floor mat installation" in this

section.

∙ Make sure the floor mat does not in-

terfere with pedal operation.

∙ Periodically check the floor mats to

make sure they are properly installed.

∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior,

check the floor mats to make sure

they are properly installed.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and

make it easier to clean the interior. Mats

should be maintained with regular clean-

ing and replaced if they become exces-

sively worn.

Floor mat installation

Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat po-

sitioning hook(s). The number and shape of

the floor mat positioning hooks for each

seating position varies depending on the

vehicle.

LAI2087

Appearance and care 7-5

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,

follow the installation instructions provided

with the mat and the following:

1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the

shift lever in P (Park) position and with

the parking brake fully applied, position

the floor mat in the floorwell so that the

floor mat grommet holes are aligned

with the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into the

hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is

properly positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter-

fere with pedal operation. With the igni-

tion still in the OFF position, the shift

lever in the P (Park) position and with

the parking brake applied, fully apply

and release all pedals. The floor mat

must not interfere with pedal opera-

tion or prevent the pedal from return-

ing to its normal position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for details about installing the floor

mats in your vehicle.

The illustration shows the location of the

floor mat positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping

them with a sponge dampened in a mild

soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-

pletely in the shade before using them. For

additional information, refer to “Seat belt

maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system”

section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in

the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or

chemical solvents to clean the seat

belts, since these materials may se-

verely weaken the seat belt webbing.

Positioning hooks

LAI2088

7-6 Appearance and care

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

∙ The accumulation of moisture-

retaining dirt and debris in body panel

sections, cavities, and other areas.

∙ Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor traffic collisions.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on

the vehicle body underside can accelerate

corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry

completely inside the vehicle and should

be removed for drying to avoid floor panel

corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of

high relative humidity, especially those ar-

eas where the temperatures stay above

freezing and where atmospheric pollution

exists and road salt is used.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of

corrosion to those parts which are not well

ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in

the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt

use accelerates the corrosion process.

Road salt also accelerates the disintegra-

tion of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to

keep the vehicle clean.

∙ Always check for minor damage to the

paint and repair it as soon as possible.

∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the

doors open to avoid water accumula-

tion.

∙ Check the underbody for accumulation

of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with

water as soon as possible.

CAUTION

∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compart-

ment by washing it out with a hose.

Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or

broom.

∙ Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic com-

ponents inside the vehicle as this may

damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing

are extremely corrosive. They accelerate

corrosion and deterioration of underbody

components such as the exhaust system,

fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan

and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be

cleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust and

corrosion, which may be required in some

areas, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-7

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions .......................8-2

Engine compartment check locations...........8-3

Engine cooling system ..........................8-5

Checking engine coolant level ................8-6

Changing engine coolant.....................8-6

Engine oil........................................8-7

Checking engine oil level .....................8-7

Changing engine oil ..........................8-8

Changing engine oil filter .....................8-9

Fuel filter (CUMMINS 5.0L) ........................8-11

Fuel filter replacement (stage 1) ...............8-11

Fuel filter replacement (stage 2) ..............8-11

Draining water ...............................8-11

Fuel system priming..........................8-11

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF).....................8-11

Automatic regeneration ......................8-11

6-speed Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)

(diesel engine only) .............................8-12

7-speed Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)

(gasoline engine only) ..........................8-12

Power Steering Fluid (PSF) ......................8-12

Brake fluid ......................................8-13

Windshield-washer fluid ........................8-14

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir............8-14

Battery.........................................8-15

Jump starting ...............................8-16

Variable voltage control (if so equipped) ........8-17

Drive belt .......................................8-17

Spark plugs (gasoline engine only)..............8-18

Replacing spark plugs .......................8-18

Air cleaner......................................8-19

In-cabin microfilter ..........................8-19

Windshield wiper blades ........................8-20

Cleaning ....................................8-20

Replacing ...................................8-20

Brakes..........................................8-21

Fuses...........................................8-22

Engine compartment .......................8-22

Passenger compartment....................8-24

Battery replacement ...........................8-26

NISSAN Intelligent Key® ......................8-26

Lights ..........................................8-28

Headlights...................................8-28

Fog lights (if so equipped) ...................8-28

Daytime Running Light (DRL)

(if so equipped) ..............................8-29

Exterior and interior lights ...................8-31

Wheels and tires................................8-34

Tire pressure ................................8-34

Tire labeling .................................8-38

Types of tires ................................8-40

Tire chains ..................................8-41

Changing wheels and tires ..................8-42

When performing any inspection or main-

tenance work on your vehicle, always take

care to prevent serious accidental injury to

yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol-

lowing are general precautions which

should be closely observed.

WARNING

∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely and

block the wheels to prevent the ve-

hicle from moving. Move the shift le-

ver to P (Park)

∙ Be sure the ignition switch is in the

OFF or LOCK position when perform-

ing any parts replacement or repairs.

∙ If you must work with the engine run-

ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair

and tools away from moving fans,

belts and any other moving parts.

∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jew-

elry, such as rings, watches, etc. be-

fore working on your vehicle.

∙ Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

∙

The automatic engine cooling fan (if so

equipped) may come on at any time

without warning, even if the ignition

switch is in the OFF position and the

engine is not running. To avoid injury,

always disconnect the negative bat-

tery cable before working near the fan.

∙ If you must run the engine in an en-

closed space such as a garage, be sure

there is proper ventilation for exhaust

gases to escape.

∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is neces-

sary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and

battery.

∙

Because the fuel lines on gasoline en-

gine models are under high pressure

even when the engine is off, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.

CAUTION

∙ Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and

wait until it cools down.

∙

Avoid contact with used engine oil and

coolant. Improperly disposed engine

oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle

fluids can damage the environment. Al-

ways conform to local regulations for

disposal of vehicle fluid.

∙ Never leave the engine or automatic

transmission related component har-

nesses disconnected while the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

∙ Never connect or disconnect the bat-

tery or any transistorized component

while the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instruc-

tions regarding only those items which are

relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also

available. For additional information, refer

to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information” in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or

improper servicing may result in operating

difficulties or excessive emissions, and

could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt

about any servicing, it is recommended

that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

8-2 Do-it-yourself

VK56VD engine (non-XD model)

1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

2. Fuse box

3. Engine oil dipstick

4. Power steering fluid reservoir

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Air cleaner

8. Fuse/Fusible link box

9. Drive belt location

10. Radiator cap

11. Battery

12. Engine coolant reservoir

LDI3056

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

Do-it-yourself 8-3

VK56VD engine (XD model)

1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

2. Fuse box

3. Engine oil dipstick

4. Power steering fluid reservoir

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Air cleaner

8. Fuse/Fusible link box

9. Engine coolant reservoir

10. Drive belt location

11. Battery

12. Radiator cap

For additional information on the

Cummins 5.0L engine, refer to the “Titan

Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

LDI2973

8-4 Do-it-yourself

The engine cooling system is filled at the

factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%

Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to

provide year-round antifreeze and coolant

protection. The antifreeze solution con-

tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Addi-

tional engine cooling system additives are

not necessary.

WARNING

∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.

Wait until the engine and radiator cool

down. Serious burns could be caused

by high pressure fluid escaping from

the radiator. For additional informa-

tion on precautions, refer to “If your

vehicle overheats” found in the “In

case of emergency” section of this

manual.

∙ The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-

gine damage, it is recommended that

you use only a Genuine NISSAN radia-

tor cap.

CAUTION

∙ Never use any cooling system addi-

tives such as radiator sealer. Additives

may clog the cooling system and

cause damage to the engine, trans-

mission and/or cooling system.

∙

When adding or replacing coolant, it is

recommended that you use only Genu-

ine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equiva-

lent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted

to provide antifreeze protection to -34°

F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection

is needed due to weather where you

operate your vehicle, add Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant

(blue) concentrate following the direc-

tions on the container. If an equivalent

coolant other than Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is

used, follow the coolant manufactur-

er’s instructions to maintain minimum

antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C).

The use of other types of coolant solu-

tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent may damage the engine

cooling system.

∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill

coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

or 7 years. Mixing any other type of

coolant other than Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue),

including Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use

of non-distilled water may reduce the

life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-

ant. For additional information, refer

to the "Maintenance and schedules"

section of this manual.

For additional information on the

Cummins 5.0L engine cooling system, refer

to the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

Do-it-yourself 8-5

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir

when the engine is cold. If the coolant

level is below the MIN level 䊊

B, add coolant

to the MAX level 䊊

A. If the reservoir is empty,

check the coolant level in the radiator

when the engine is cold. If there is insuffi-

cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator

with coolant up to the filler opening and

also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX

level 䊊

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life ex-

pectancy of the factory-fill coolant is

105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing

any other type of coolant or the use of

non-distilled water may reduce the life ex-

pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Maintenance

and schedules” section of this manual.

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, have it checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

For additional information on the location

of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “En-

gine compartment check locations” in this

section.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine

coolant. The service procedure can be

found in the NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine over-

heating.

WARNING

∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the

engine is hot.

∙ Never remove the radiator or engine

coolant reservoir cap when the en-

gine is hot. Serious burns could be

caused by high pressure fluid escap-

ing from the radiator.

∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-

dren and pets.

VK56VD engine (non-XD model)

LDI3004

VK56VD engine (XD model)

LDI2823

8-6 Do-it-yourself

Engine coolant must be disposed of prop-

erly. Check your local regulations.

For additional information on changing the

Cummins 5.0L engine coolant, refer to the

“Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it

reaches operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than

15 minutes for the oil to drain back

into the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.

Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check

the oil level. It should be between the H

(High) and L (Low) marks 䊊

B. This is the

normal operating oil level range. If the

oil level is below the L (Low) mark 䊊

remove the oil filler cap and pour rec-

ommended oil through the opening.

Do not overfill 䊊

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the

break-in period,depending on the sever-

ity of operating conditions.

VK56VD engine

LDI2956

VK56VD engine

LDI0371

ENGINE OIL

Do-it-yourself 8-7

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly.

Operating the engine with an insuffi-

cient amount of oil can damage the en-

gine, and such damage is not covered

by warranty.

For additional information on checking the

Cummins 5.0L engine oil level, refer to the

“Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it

reaches operating temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait more than

15 minutes.

4. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊

Aby turning it

counterclockwise.

5. Place a large drain pan under the drain

plug 䊊

6. Remove the drain plug 䊊

Bwith a

wrench by turning it counterclockwise

and completely drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove

and replace it at this time. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing

engine oil filter” in this section.

∙

Waste oil must be disposed of properly.

∙Check your local regulations.

VK56VD engine

LDI2957

8-8 Do-it-yourself

WARNING

∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin

cancer.

∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The en-

gine oil may be hot.

7. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a

new washer. Securely tighten the drain

plug with a wrench. Do not use exces-

sive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:

25 ft-lb (34 N·m)

8. Refill engine with recommended oil

through the oil filler opening, then in-

stall the oil filler cap securely.

For additional information on drain

and refill capacity, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-

ties” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

The drain and refill capacity depends

on the oil temperature and drain time.

Use these specifications for reference

only. Always use the dipstick to deter-

mine when the proper amount of oil is

in the engine.

9. Start the engine. Check for leakage

around the drain plug and oil filter. Cor-

rect as required.

10. Turn the engine off and wait more than

15 minutes. Check the oil level with the

dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

For additional information on changing the

Cummins 5.0L engine oil, refer to the “Titan

Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Remove bolts 䊊

Aand skid plate.

Skid plate (Type A) (if so equipped)

LDI3005

Do-it-yourself 8-9

4. Place a large drain pan under the oil

filter 䊊

5. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter

wrench by turning it counterclockwise.

Then remove the oil filter by turning it

by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The en-

gine oil may be hot.

6. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface

with a clean rag.

Skid plate (Type B) (if so equipped)

LDI2875

Skid plate (Type C) (if so equipped)

LDI2876

VK56VD engine

LDI2958

8-10 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket mate-

rial remaining on the sealing surface of

the engine. Failure to do so could lead to

an oil leak and engine damage.

7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with

clean engine oil.

8. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resis-

tance is felt, then tighten an additional

2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:

13 ft-lb (18 N·m)

9. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the oil filter. Correct as required.

10. Install skid plate in reverse order of re-

moval.

11. Turn the engine off and wait more than

15 minutes. Check the oil level. Add en-

gine oil if necessary.

FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT (stage

For additional information, refer to the “Ti-

tan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT (stage

For additional information, refer to the “Ti-

tan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

DRAINING WATER

For additional information, refer to the “Ti-

tan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

FUEL SYSTEM PRIMING

For additional information, refer to the “Ti-

tan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

For additional information, refer to the “Ti-

tan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

AUTOMATIC REGENERATION

For additional information, refer to the “Ti-

tan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

FUEL FILTER (CUMMINS 5.0L) DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)

Do-it-yourself 8-11

When checking or replacement is required,

it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

CAUTION

∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN Matic K ATF. Do not mix with

other fluids.

∙ Do not use CVT fluid or manual trans-

mission fluid in this transmission.

Damage caused by the use of fluids

other than as recommended is not

covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to

Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF may also

damage the transmission. Damage

caused by the use of fluids other than

as recommended is not covered un-

der NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluid

is also described on caution labels located

in the engine compartment.

When checking or replacement is required,

it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

CAUTION

∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN Matic S ATF. Do not mix with

other fluids.

∙ Do not use CVT fluid or manual trans-

mission fluid in this transmission.

Damage caused by the use of fluids

other than as recommended is not

covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to

Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF may also

damage the transmission. Damage

caused by the use of fluids other than

as recommended is not covered un-

der NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluid

is also described on caution labels located

in the engine compartment.

Check the power steering fluid level when

the engine is stopped.

The fluid level should be between the COLD

MAX line and the COLD MIN line on the

power steering fluid reservoir at cold fluid

temperatures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C) or at

the HOT MAX line on the power steering

fluid reservoir at hot fluid temperatures of

122° - 176°F (50° - 80°C).

LDI3077

6-SPEED AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) (diesel

engine only)

7-SPEED AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF)

(gasoline engine only)

POWER STEERING FLUID (PSF)

8-12 Do-it-yourself

If the fluid is cold and is at or below the

COLD MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF II or

equivalent to the COLD MAX line. If the fluid

is hot and below the HOT MAX line, add

Genuine NISSAN PSF II or equivalent to the

HOT MAX line. Remove the cap and fill

through the opening.

CAUTION

∙ DO NOT OVERFILL.

∙ Do not reuse power steering fluid.

∙ Recommended fluid is Genuine

NISSAN PSF II or equivalent

WARNING

∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated

fluid may damage the brake system.

The use of improper fluids can dam-

age the brake system and affect the

vehicle’s stopping ability.

∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.

∙ Brake fluid is poisonous and should

be stored carefully in marked contain-

ers out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-

faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid

is spilled, immediately wash the surface

with water.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the

brake fluid is below the MIN line 䊊

B, the

brake warning light will illuminate. Add

brake fluid up to the MAX line 䊊

A. For addi-

tional information on recommended type

of brake fluid, refer to “Recommended

fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

If the brake fluid must be added frequently,

the brake system should be thoroughly

checked.It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI3088

BRAKE FLUID

Do-it-yourself 8-13

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

RESERVOIR

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir

periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid

when the low windshield-washer fluid

warning light (if so equipped) comes on or

the “Low Washer Fluid” warning message (if

so equipped) shows on the vehicle infor-

mation display.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,

lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the

windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir

opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for

better cleaning. In the winter season, add a

windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the

manufacturer’s instructions for the mix-

ture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when

driving conditions require an increased

amount of windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN

Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &

Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze

coolant for windshield-washer fluid.

This may result in damage to the

paint.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl

alcohol based washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s rec-

ommended levels before pouring the

fluid into the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir. Do not use the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir to mix the

washer fluid concentrate and water.

LDI2879

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

8-14 Do-it-yourself

∙ If the battery is labeled "do not open" it

is maintenance free and battery fluid

should not be checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

or a qualified specialist workshop to

confirm the battery’s performance.

∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of bak-

ing soda and water.

∙ Make certain the terminal connections

are clean and securely tightened.

∙ Push the ignition switch to the OFF po-

sition and wait 2 minutes before dis-

connecting the battery.

∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for

30 days or longer, disconnect the nega-

tive (-) battery terminal cable to prevent

discharge.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING

∙ Do not expose the battery to flames,

an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy-

drogen gas generated by the battery

is explosive. Explosive gases can

cause blindness or injury. Do not allow

battery fluid to contact your skin,

eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul-

furic acid can cause blindness or in-

jury. After touching a battery or bat-

tery cap, do not touch or rub your

eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If

the acid contacts your eyes, skin or

clothing, immediately flush with wa-

ter for at least 15 minutes and seek

medical attention.

∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid

in the battery is low. Low battery fluid

can cause a higher load on the battery

which can generate heat, reduce bat-

tery life, and in some cases lead to an

explosion.

∙ When working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protection

and remove all jewelry.

∙ Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after

handling.

∙ This vehicle uses a special battery. If

the 12-volt battery needs to be re-

placed, use a 12-volt battery of the

same design.

∙ Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent

caps tight and the battery level.

BATTERY

Do-it-yourself 8-15

1. Remove the vent caps with a screw-

driver as shown. Use a cloth to protect

the battery case.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is

necessary to add fluid, add only dis-

tilled water to bring the level up to the

bottom of the filler opening. Do not

overfill. Reinstall the vent caps.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or

under severe conditions require frequent

checks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump

starting” in the “In case of emergency” sec-

tion of this manual. If the engine does not

start by jump starting, the battery may

have to be replaced. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

WDI0224

WDI0529

8-16 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

∙ Do not ground accessories directly to

the battery terminal. Doing so will by-

pass the variable voltage control sys-

tem and the vehicle battery may not

charge completely.

∙ Use electrical accessories with the en-

gine running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable

voltage control system. This system mea-

sures the amount of electrical discharge

from the battery and controls voltage gen-

erated by the generator.

The current sensor is located near the bat-

tery along the negative battery cable. If you

add electrical accessories to your vehicle,

be sure to ground them to a suitable body

ground such as the frame or engine block

area.

1. Power steering fluid pump pulley

2. Automatic belt tensioner pulley

3. Water pump pulley

4. Cooling fan pulley

5. Air conditioner compressor pulley

6. Crankshaft pulley

7. Generator pulley

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF

or LOCK position before servicing drive

belt. The engine could rotate

unexpectedly.

LDI2132

VK56VD engine

WDI0661

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL (if so

equipped)

DRIVE BELT

Do-it-yourself 8-17

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un-

usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If

the belt is in poor condition or is loose,

have it replaced or adjusted. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for

condition and tension in accordance

with the maintenance schedule. For

additional information, refer to the

"Maintenance and schedules" section

of this manual.

For additional information on the Cum-

mins 5.0L engine drive belt, refer to the “Ti-

tan Diesel Owner’s Manual”. REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace iridium-

tipped spark plugs as frequently as con-

ventional type spark plugs because they

last much longer. Follow the maintenance

log shown in the “Maintenance and sched-

ules” section of this manual. Do not service

iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or

regapping.

∙Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch

are off and that the parking brake is

engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-

move the spark plugs. An incorrect

socket can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

LDI2972

SPARK PLUGS (gasoline engine

only)

8-18 Do-it-yourself

WARNING

∙ Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or

others to be burned. The air cleaner

not only cleans the air, it stops the

flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t

there, and the engine backfires, you

could be burned. Do not drive with the

air cleaner removed, and be careful

when working on the engine with the

air cleaner removed.

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body

or attempt to start the engine with

the air cleaner removed. Doing so

could result in serious injury.

To remove the filter from the air cleaner,

push the tabs and pull the cover upward.

The viscous paper type filter element

should not be cleaned and reused. Replace

the air filter according to the maintenance

log shown in the “Maintenance and sched-

ules” section of this manual.

When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside

of the air cleaner housing and the cover

with a damp cloth.

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner, make

sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the

housing and latch the tabs.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry

of airborne dust and pollen particles and

reduces some objectionable outside

odors. The filter is located behind the glove

box. For additional information on change

intervals, refer to “Gasoline standard main-

tenance" or "Diesel standard mainte-

nance" in the "Maintenance and sched-

ules" section of this manual.

If replacement is required, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

VK56VD engine

LDI2960

AIR CLEANER

Do-it-yourself 8-19

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using

the windshield-washer or if a wiper blade

chatters when running, wax or other mate-

rial may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a

washer solution or a mild detergent. Your

windshield is clean if beads do not form

when rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth

soaked in a washer solution or a mild de-

tergent. Then rinse the blades with clear

water. If your windshield is still not clear

after cleaning the blades and using the

wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can

damage the windshield and impair

driver vision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the wind-

shield.

2. Push and hold the release tab 䊊

A, and

then move the wiper blade down 䊊

the wiper arm to remove.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the

wiper arm until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

∙ After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when

the hood is opened.

∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact

the glass; otherwise the arms may be

damaged from wind pressure.

LDI2725

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-20 Do-it-yourself

Be careful not to let anything get into the

washer nozzle 䊊

D. This may cause clogging

or improper windshield–washer operation.

If something gets into the nozzle, remove it

with a needle or small pin 䊊

If the brakes do not operate properly, have

the brakes checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-

adjust every time the brake pedal is ap-

plied.

WARNING

Have your brake system checked if the

brake pedal height does not return to

normal. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have

audible wear indicators. When a brake pad

requires replacement, a high pitched

scraping or screeching sound will be heard

when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will

be heard whether or not the brake pedal is

depressed. Have the brakes checked as

soon as possible if the wear indicator

sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions,

occasional brake squeak, squeal or other

noise may be heard. Occasional brake

noise during light to moderate stops is nor-

mal and does not affect the function or

performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information on

the appropriate maintenance schedule re-

garding brake inspections, refer to "Gaso-

line standard maintenance" or "Diesel

standard maintenance" in the "Mainte-

nance and schedules" section of this

manual.

LDI2710

BRAKES

Do-it-yourself 8-21

Two types of fuses are used. Type 䊊

Aand

䊊

Bare used in the fuse boxes in the engine

compartment. Type 䊊

Bis used in the pas-

senger compartment fuse box.

Type 䊊

Bfuses are provided as spare fuses.

They are stored in the passenger compart-

ment fuse box.

Type 䊊

Afuses can be installed in the engine

compartment and passenger compart-

ment fuse boxes.

If a type 䊊

Afuse is used to replace a type 䊊

fuse, the type 䊊

Afuse will not be level with

the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration.

This will not affect the performance of the

fuse. Make sure the fuse is installed in the

fuse box securely.

Type 䊊

Bfuses cannot be used to replace

type 䊊

Afuses.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of higher or lower am-

perage rating than that specified on the

fuse box cover. This could damage the

electrical system or electronic control

units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come

on, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the

headlight switch are OFF.

LDI0455 LDI0457

VK56VD engine

LDI2962

FUSES

8-22 Do-it-yourself

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing

the tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

The fuse puller is located in the center

of the fuse block in the passenger

compartment.

VK56VD engine (non-XD model)

LDI3073

VK56VD engine (XD model)

LDI3074

Cummins 5.0L engine

LDI2882

Do-it-yourself 8-23

5. If the fuse is open 䊊

A, replace it with a

new fuse 䊊

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-

trical system checked and repaired. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Fusible links

If the electrical equipment does not oper-

ate and fuses are in good condition, check

the fusible links. If any of these fusible links

are melted, replace with only Genuine

NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of higher or lower am-

perage rating than that specified on the

fuse box cover. This could damage the

electrical system or electronic control

units or cause a fire.

LDI2826 LDI0456 LDI2883

8-24 Do-it-yourself

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the

headlight switch are OFF.

2. Open the glove box.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Locate the fuse that needs to be re-

placed.

5. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller

䊊

6. If the fuse is open 䊊

B, replace it with an

equivalent good fuse 䊊

7. Push the fuse box cover to install.

If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

LDI2884 LDI2760

Do-it-yourself 8-25

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swal-

low the battery or removed parts.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as

follows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the

Intelligent Key.

2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver 䊊

into the slit 䊊

Bof the corner and twist it

to separate the upper part from the

lower part. Place a cloth over the

screwdriver to protect the casing.

LDI2001

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

8-26 Do-it-yourself

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2032 or

equivalent.

∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and

electric terminals as doing so could

cause a malfunction.

∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Hold-

ing the battery across the contact

points will seriously deplete the stor-

age capacity.

∙ Make sure that the + side faces the

bottom of the lower part.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with

䊊

Cand 䊊

5. Operate the buttons to check the op-

eration.

If you need assistance with replacement, it

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Note:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

LDI2637

Do-it-yourself 8-27

HEADLIGHTS

For additional information on headlight

bulb replacement, refer to the instructions

outlined in this section.

Replacing the halogen headlight

bulb (if so equipped)

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type

which uses a replaceable headlight (halo-

gen) bulb. Because the headlight assembly

must be removed from the vehicle for bulb

replacement, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION

∙ Aiming is not necessary after replac-

ing the bulb. When aiming adjustment

is necessary, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ Do not leave the headlight assembly

open without a bulb installed for a

long period of time. Dust, moisture,

smoke, etc. entering the headlight

body may affect bulb performance.

Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly just before a replacement

bulb is installed.

∙ Only touch the base when handling

the bulb. Never touch the glass enve-

lope. Touching the glass could signifi-

cantly affect bulb life and/or head-

light performance.

∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is

scratched or the bulb is dropped.

∙ Use the same number and wattage as

shown in the chart.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens

of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car

wash. A temperature difference between

the inside and the outside of the lens

causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If

large drops of water collect inside the lens,

it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for servicing.

Replacing the LED headlight bulb

(if so equipped)

If LED headlight bulb replacement is re-

quired, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)

For additional information on fog light bulb

replacement, refer to the instructions out-

lined in this section.

LIGHTS

8-28 Do-it-yourself

Replacing the fog light bulb

CAUTION

∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is

scratched or the bulb is dropped.

∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch

the glass envelope.

∙ Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed as shown in the

chart.

∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the fog

light for a long period of time as dust,

moisture and smoke may enter the

fog light body and affect the perfor-

mance of the fog light.

NOTE:

The fog light is accessible in front of the

front tire and behind the bumper.

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF po-

sition and wait 2 minutes.

2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery

cable.

3. Disconnect the bulb connector.

4. Rotate the bulb 䊊

Acounterclockwise

and remove.

5. Remove by pulling it straight out of the

fog light assembly. Do not shake or ro-

tate the bulb when removing it. Do not

touch the glass envelope.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT (DRL) (if

so equipped)

For additional information on the DRL bulb

replacement, refer to the instructions out-

lined in this section.

Fog light (Type B) (if so equipped)

LDI2924

Do-it-yourself 8-29

Replacing the daytime running

light bulb (Canada only)

NOTE:

The daytime running light is accessible

in front of the front tire and behind the

bumper.

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF po-

sition and wait 2 minutes.

2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery

cable.

3. Disconnect the daytime running light

bulb connector.

4. Rotate the daytime running light bulb

䊊

Acounterclockwise and remove.

5. Remove by pulling it straight out of the

fog light assembly. Do not shake or ro-

tate the bulb when removing it. Do not

touch the glass envelope.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Fog light assembly (Type A)

(if so equipped) (Canada only)

LDI2925

Daytime running light (if so equipped)

(Canada only)

LDI2954

8-30 Do-it-yourself

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*

Low (Halogen) 55 H11

High (Halogen) 60 HB3

Turn/Park 28/8 7444NA

Side marker 5 W5W

Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*

Low — —

High (Halogen) 60 HB3

Daytime running/Park — —

Turn 28/8 7444NA

Side marker 5 W5W

Fog light assembly (Type A) (if so equipped) (Canada only)

Fog 35 H8

Daytime running 13 P13W

Fog light (Type B) (if so equipped) 55 H11

Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* — —

Puddle light (if so equipped)* — —

Rear combination light (Type A) (if so equipped)*

Stop 16 PW16W

Backup (reversing) 18 921

Turn/Tail 27/7 3057K

Rear combination light (Type B) (if so equipped)*

Stop — —

Backup (reversing) 18 921

Turn/Tail 27/7 3057K

Cargo (tailgate) (if so equipped) 18 921

High-mounted stop light*

Stop — —

Cargo (roof) — —

Under rail bed light (if so equipped)* — —

License plate light* — —

Map light (if so equipped)* 8 —

Room light (if so equipped)* 8 —

Footwell light (if so equipped)* 3.4 158

Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)* — —

Glove box light (if so equipped)* 1.4 —

* Always check with the Parts Department at

a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts informa-

tion.

* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for assistance.

Do-it-yourself 8-31

1. Headlight assembly

2. Map light (if so equipped)

3. Room light (if so equipped)

4. Door mirror turn signal light

(if so equipped)

5. Puddle light (if so equipped)

6. Fog light (if so equipped)

7. High-mount stop light

8. Under rail bed light (if so equipped)

9. License plate light

10. Rear combination light

LDI2890

8-32 Do-it-yourself

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.

When replacing a bulb, first remove the

lens, lamp and/or cover.

Indicates bulb removal

Indicates bulb installation

NOTE:

Rear combination light (Type B) (if so

equipped) bulb replacement procedure

is shown. Rear combination light (Type A)

(if so equipped) bulb replacement proce-

dure is similar.

To replace the rear combination light bulbs

perform the following procedure:

1. Remove the two fasteners 䊊

Aand pull

the rear combination light away from

the vehicle.

WDI0263

Rear combination light

LDI2951

Do-it-yourself 8-33

2. Remove harness connector and rotate

stop light bulb 䊊

Bcounterclockwise to

remove. Replace bulb if necessary.

3. Rotate reverse light bulb socket 䊊

counterclockwise to remove. Replace

bulb if necessary.

4. Rotate cargo (tailgate) light bulb socket

䊊

D(if so equipped) counterclockwise to

remove. Replace bulb if necessary.

5. Rotate turn/tail light bulb socket 䊊

counterclockwise to remove. Replace

bulb if necessary.

Reverse steps to install bulbs and rear

combination light.

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in

the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely af-

fect electric medical equipment.

Those who use a pacemaker

should contact the electric medi-

cal equipment manufacturer for

the possible influences before

use.

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

It monitors tire pressure of all four

tires except the spare. When the low

tire pressure warning light is lit and

the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”

warning appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display, one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated. If

equipped, the system also displays

pressure of all tires (except the spare

tire) on the display screen by send-

ing a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel.

The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above

16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system

may not detect a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example a flat tire while

driving).

For additional information, refer to

“Warning lights, indicator lights and

audible reminders” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section, “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”

in the “Starting and driving” section,

and “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including

the spare) often and always prior to

long distance trips. The recom-

mended tire pressure specifications

are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label or the Tire and

Loading Information label under the

Rear combination light

LDI2952

WHEELS AND TIRES

8-34 Do-it-yourself

“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire

and Loading Information label is af-

fixed to the driver side center pillar.

Tire pressures should be checked

regularly because:

∙ Most tires naturally lose air over

time.

∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other ob-

jects or if the vehicle strikes a

curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be

checked when the tires are cold. The

tires are considered COLD after the

vehicle has been parked for 3 or

more hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert

provides visual and audible signals

outside the vehicle for inflating tires

to the recommended COLD tire

pressure. For additional information,

refer to “TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire

Alert” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

Incorrect tire pressure, including

under inflation, may adversely af-

fect tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an

accident.

∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label. The vehicle weight

capacity is indicated on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

Do not load your vehicle beyond

this capacity. Overloading your

vehicle may result in reduced

tire life, unsafe operating condi-

tions due to premature tire fail-

ure, or unfavorable handling

characteristics and could also

lead to a serious accident. Load-

ing beyond the specified capac-

ity may also result in failure of

other vehicle components.

∙ Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure

gauge to ensure that the tire

pressures are at the specified

level.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-35

Tire and Loading Information

label

䊊

1Seating capacity: The maximum

number of occupants that can

be seated in the vehicle.

䊊

2Vehicle load limit: For additional

information, refer to “Vehicle

loading information” in the

“Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

䊊

3Original tire size: The size of the

tires originally installed on the

vehicle at the factory.

䊊

4Cold tire pressure: Inflate the

tires to this pressure when the

tires are cold. Tires are consid-

ered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours,

or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)

at moderate speeds. The rec-

ommended cold tire inflation is

set by the manufacturer to pro-

vide the best balance of tire

wear, vehicle handling, driveabil-

ity, tire noise, etc., up to the vehi-

cle’s GVWR.

䊊

5Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” in

this section.

䊊

6Spare tire size.

LDI2926

8-36 Do-it-yourself

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from

the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge

squarely onto the valve stem. Do

not press too hard or force the

valve stem sideways, or air will

escape.If the hissing sound of air

escaping from the tire is heard

while checking the pressure, re-

position the gauge to eliminate

this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the

gauge stem and compare to the

specification shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If

too much air is added, press the

core of the valve stem briefly

with the tip of the gauge stem to

release pressure. Recheck the

pressure and add or release air

as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other

tires, including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Infla-

tion Pressure

Front Original

Tire:

265/70R18 270 kPa, 39 psi

P265/70R18 250 kPa, 36 psi

P275/60R20 250 kPa, 36 psi

P275/70R18 240 kPa, 35 psi

Size Cold Tire Infla-

tion Pressure

LT245/75R17 450 kPa, 65 psi

LT275/65R18 450 kPa, 65 psi

LT265/60R20 450 kPa, 65 psi

Size Cold Tire Infla-

tion Pressure

Rear Original

Tire:

265/70R18 270 kPa, 39 psi

P265/70R18 250 kPa, 36 psi

P275/60R20 250 kPa, 36 psi

P275/70R18 240 kPa, 35 psi

LT245/75R17 500 kPa, 73 psi

LT275/65R18 450 kPa, 65 psi

LT265/60R20 480 kPa, 70 psi

Spare Tire: Full size

LDI0393

Do-it-yourself 8-37

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufac-

turers to place standardized infor-

mation on the sidewall of all tires.

This information identifies and de-

scribes the fundamental character-

istics of the tire and also provides the

Tire Identification Number (TIN) for

safety standard certification. The TIN

can be used to identify the tire in

case of a recall.

䊊

1Tire size (example: LT215/65R15

95H)

1. LT: The “LT” indicates the tire is

designed for light truck vehicles

(not all tires have this informa-

tion).

2. Three-digit number (215): This

number gives the width in milli-

meters of the tire from sidewall

edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This

number, known as the aspect

ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of

height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameter

in inches.

Example

WDI0394

Example

LDI2043

8-38 Do-it-yourself

6. Two- or three-digit number (95):

This number is the tire’s load in-

dex. It is a measurement of how

much weight each tire can sup-

port. You may not find this infor-

mation on all tires because it is

not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should

not drive the vehicle faster than

the tire speed rating.

䊊

2TIN (Tire Identification Number)

for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX

XXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De-

partment Of Transportation”.

The symbol can be placed

above, below or to the left or

right of the Tire Identification

Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s

identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional).

5. Four numbers represent the

week and year the tire was built.

For example, the numbers 3103

means the 31st week of 2003. If

these numbers are missing then

look on the other sidewall of the

tire.

Example

LDI2786

Do-it-yourself 8-39

䊊

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of

rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire

manufacturers also must indicate

the materials in the tire, which in-

clude steel, nylon, polyester and oth-

ers.

䊊

4Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire.Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure.

䊊

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maxi-

mum load in kilograms and pounds

that can be carried by the tire. When

replacing the tires on the vehicle, al-

ways use a tire that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tire.

䊊

6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires

an inner tube (“tube type”) or not

(“tubeless”).

䊊

7The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire

has radial structure.

䊊

8Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is

shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that

are defined throughout this section,

Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the

sidewall that contains a whitewall,

bears white lettering or bears

manufacturer, brand, and/or model

name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on

the other sidewall of the tire, or (2)

the outward facing sidewall of an

asymmetrical tire that has a particu-

lar side that must always face out-

ward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

∙ When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and

construction. A NISSAN dealer may be

able to help you with information

about tire type, size, speed rating and

availability.

∙ Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory

equipped tires, and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum

speed rating of the tire.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the low tire

pressure warning system.

∙ For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

8-40 Do-it-yourself

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some

models to provide good performance all

year, including snowy and icy road condi-

tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL

SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.

Snow tires have better snow traction than

All Season tires and may be more appropri-

ate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some

models to provide superior performance

on dry roads. Summer tire performance is

substantially reduced in snow and ice.

Summer tires do not have the tire traction

rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy

or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the

use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all

four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to

select tires equivalent in size and load rat-

ing to the original equipment tires. If you do

not, it can adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat-

ings than factory equipped tires and may

not match the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum speed

rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the

same size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, stud-

ded tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit

their use. Check local, state and provincial

laws before installing studded tires. Skid

and traction capabilities of studded snow

tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer

than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac-

cording to location. Check the local laws

before installing tire chains. When installing

tire chains, make sure they are the proper

size for the tires on your vehicle and are

installed according to the chain manufac-

turer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”

chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-

hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-

ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains

are designed to meet the minimum clear-

ances between the tire and the closest ve-

hicle suspension or body component re-

quired to accommodate the use of a

winter traction device (tire chains or

cables). The minimum clearances are de-

termined using the factory equipped tire

size. Other types may damage your vehicle.

Use chain tensioners when recommended

by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a

tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain

must be secured or removed to prevent

the possibility of whipping action damage

to the fenders or underbody. If possible,

avoid fully loading your vehicle when using

tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced

speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be

damaged and/or vehicle handling and

performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

rear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving

with chains in such conditions can cause

damage to the various mechanisms of the

vehicle due to some overstress.

Use only the 2WD range when driving on

clear paved roads.

Do-it-yourself 8-41

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the

tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

For additional information on tire re-

placing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”

in the “In case of emergency” section

of this manual.

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

Non-XD models:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

XD models:

131 ft-lb (177 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-

ened to specifications at all times.

It is recommended that wheel nuts

be tightened to specification at

each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

∙ Do not include the spare tire in

the tire rotation.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

∙ After rotating the tires, do not

use the Easy-Fill Tire Alert to ad-

just the tire pressure. Instead

use a gauge to adjust the tires

to the correct pressure in accor-

dance with Tire and Loading In-

formation label.

CAUTION

To ensure proper operation of the

Easy-Fill Tire Alert system after a

tire rotation, re-set and register

the sensor to their new installed

locations. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

WDI0258

8-42 Do-it-yourself

Tire wear and damage

1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WARNING

∙ Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking,

bulging or objects caught in the

tread. If excessive wear, cracks,

bulging or deep cuts are found,

the tire(s) should be replaced.

∙ The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When the

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

∙ Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician because

some tire damage may not be

obvious. Replace the tires as

necessary to prevent tire failure

and possible personal injury.

∙ Improper service of the spare

tire may result in serious per-

sonal injury. If it is necessary to

repair the spare tire, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size,

tread design, speed rating and load carry-

ing capacity as originally equipped. Rec-

ommended types and sizes are shown in

“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

∙ The use of tires other than those rec-

ommended or the mixed use of tires

of different brands, construction

(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread

patterns can adversely affect the ride,

braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system, ground clear-

ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire

chain clearance, speedometer cali-

bration, headlight aim and bumper

height. Some of these effects may

lead to accidents and could result in

serious personal injury.

∙ If your vehicle was originally

equipped with four tires that were the

same size and you are only replacing

two of the four tires, install the new

tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires

on the front axle may cause loss of

vehicle control in some driving condi-

tions and cause an accident and per-

sonal injury.

WDI0259

Do-it-yourself 8-43

∙ If the wheels are changed for any rea-

son, always replace with wheels

which have the same off-set dimen-

sion. Wheels of a different off-set

could cause premature tire wear, de-

grade vehicle handling characteris-

tics, affect the VDC system and/or in-

terference with the brake discs. Such

interference can lead to decreased

braking efficiency and/or early brake

pad/shoe wear. For additional infor-

mation on wheel-off set dimensions,

refer to “Wheels and tires” in the

“Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

will not function and the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash for ap-

proximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after 1 minute. Have your

tires replaced and/or TPMS system

reset as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if

it is not handled correctly. Be careful

when handling the TPMS sensor.

∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the

ID registration may be required. Con-

tact a NISSAN dealer for ID

registration.

∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not

specified by NISSAN. The valve stem

cap may become stuck.

∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are

correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve

may be clogged up with dirt and

cause a malfunction or loss of

pressure.

∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed

wheel or tire even if it has been re-

paired. Such wheels or tires could

have structural damage and could fail

without warning.

∙ The use of retread tires is not

recommended.

∙ For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

Four-wheel drive models

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted

or radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Failure to do so may result in a

circumference difference between tires

on the front and rear axles which will

cause excessive tire wear and may

damage the transmission, transfer case

and differential gears.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-

mended that all four tires be replaced with

tires of the same size, brand, construction

and tread pattern. The tire pressure and

wheel alignment should also be checked

and corrected as necessary. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle

handling and tire life. Even with regular use,

wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,

they should be balanced as required.

8-44 Do-it-yourself

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

∙For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Care of wheels

∙ Wash the wheels when washing the ve-

hicle to maintain their appearance.

∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when

the wheel is changed or the underside

of the vehicle is washed.

∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when

washing the wheels.

∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents

or corrosion. Such damage may cause

loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire

bead.

∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road

wheels to protect against road salt in

areas where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (FULL SIZE TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire)

When replacing a wheel without the TPMS

such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not

function.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a full

size spare that is a different size or brand

than the tires originally installed on the ve-

hicle. This full size spare tire is intended for

temporary use only and should be re-

placed at the first opportunity.

Observe the following precautions if the

FULL SIZE TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire

must be used. Otherwise, your vehicle

could be damaged or involved in an acci-

dent:

WARNING

∙ The TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire

should be used for emergency use

only. It should be replaced with the

standard tire at the first opportunity

to avoid possible tire or differential

damage.

∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY

FULL SIZE spare tire is installed. Avoid

sharp turns and abrupt braking while

driving. The vehicle driving perfor-

mance may be affected when driving

on wet or snow covered roads.

∙ When the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE

spare is installed, the following sys-

tems may not work correctly:

– Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

– Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

System

∙ Periodically check the TEMPORARY

FULL SIZE spare tire inflation pressure.

Always keep the TEMPORARY FULL

SIZE inflated to the pressure specifi-

cation shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

Do-it-yourself 8-45

∙ With the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare

tire installed do not drive the vehicle

at speeds faster than 50 mph

(80 km/h).

∙ When driving on roads covered with

snow or ice,the TEMPORARYFULL SIZE

spare tire should be used on the front

wheels and the original tire used on

the rear wheels. Use tire chains only

on the drive wheels.

∙ Do not use the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE

spare tire on other vehicles.

∙ Do not use 4WD when the TEMPO-

RARY FULL SIZE spare tire is installed

∙ Do not use more than one TEMPO-

RARY FULL SIZE spare tire at the same

time.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-

RARY FULL SIZE spare tire. Tire chains

will not fit properly and may cause

damage to the vehicle.

8-46 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements......................9-2

General maintenance ........................9-2

Scheduled maintenance .....................9-2

Where to go for service .......................9-2

General maintenance ...........................9-2

Explanation of general maintenance

items.........................................9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5

Emission control system maintenance:.......9-5

Chassis and body maintenance:..............9-6

Maintenance schedules .........................9-7

Additional maintenance items for

severe operating conditions ..................9-7

Oil change monitor (diesel engine only).......9-7

Gasoline standard maintenance.................9-8

Emission control system maintenance .......9-8

Chassis & body maintenance................9-10

Gasoline maintenance under severe

operating conditions ...........................9-12

Severe driving conditions ....................9-12

Diesel standard maintenance ..................9-13

Emission control system maintenance ......9-13

Chassis & body maintenance................9-15

Diesel maintenance under severe operating

conditions......................................9-17

Severe driving conditions ....................9-17

Oil change monitor..........................9-17

Maintenance log ...............................9-18

Your NISSAN has been designed to have

minimum maintenance requirements with

long service intervals to save you both time

and money; however, some day-to-day

and regular maintenance is essential to

maintain your NISSAN’s good mechanical

condition as well as its emissions and en-

gine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure

that the scheduled maintenance,as well as

general maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one

who can ensure that your vehicle receives

proper maintenance. You are a vital link in

the maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items

which should be checked during normal

day-to-day operation. They are essential

for proper vehicle operation. It is your re-

sponsibility to perform these maintenance

procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks

requires minimal mechanical skill and only

a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done

by you, a qualified technician or, if you pre-

fer, a NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

The maintenance items listed in this sec-

tion are required to be serviced at regular

intervals. However under severe driving

conditions, additional or more frequent

maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your

vehicle appears to malfunction, have the

systems checked and corrected. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-

cialists who are kept up-to-date with the

latest service information through techni-

cal bulletins, service tips and in-dealership

training programs. They are completely

qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles be-

fore they work on your vehicle rather than

after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN deal-

er’s service department performs excellent

service to meet the maintenance require-

ments on your vehicle — in a reliable and

economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of

the vehicle, general maintenance should

be performed regularly as prescribed in

this section. If you detect any unusual

sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to

check for the cause or have it checked

promptly. In addition, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think

that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or mainte-

nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-

nance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with“*”isfound in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be performed from time to time, unless

otherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that the

doors and engine hood operate properly.

Also ensure that all latches lock securely.

Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers

and links if necessary. Make sure that the

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

secondary latch keeps the hood from

opening when the primary latch is re-

leased.

When driving in areas using road salt or

other corrosive materials, check lubrica-

tion frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular

basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop

lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other

lights are all operating properly and in-

stalled securely. Also check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check-

ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are

missing, and check for any loose wheel

nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated ev-

ery 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge

often and always prior to long distance

trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all

tires, including the spare, to the pressure

specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts

or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components: Replace the

TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core

and cap when the tires are replaced due to

wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve-

hicle should pull to either side while driving

on a straight and level road, or if you detect

uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may

be a need for wheel alignment. If the steer-

ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high-

way speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in

the Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a

regular basis. Check the windshield at least

every six months for cracks or other dam-

age. Have a damaged windshield repaired

by a qualified repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for

cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked on a regular basis, such as

when performing scheduled maintenance,

cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for

smooth operation and make sure the

pedal does not bind or require uneven ef-

fort. Keep the floor mat away from the

pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) posi-

tion mechanism: On a fairly steep hill

check that your vehicle is held securely

with the shift lever in the P (Park) position

without applying any brakes.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes

down further than normal, the pedal feels

spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer

to stop, have your vehicle checked imme-

diately. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull

the vehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake

operation regularly. The vehicle should be

securely held on a fairly steep hill with only

the parking brake applied. If the parking

brake needs adjustment, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Seats: Check seat position controls such

as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to

ensure they operate smoothly and all

latches lock securely in every position.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Check that the head restraints/headrests

move up and down smoothly and the locks

(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched

positions.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat

belt system (for example, buckles, anchors,

adjusters and retractors) operate properly

and smoothly, and are installed securely.

Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,

wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering system, such as excessive free-

play, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all

warning lights and chimes are operating

properly.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check

that the wipers and washer operate prop-

erly and that the wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly

and in sufficient quantity when operating

the heater or air conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked periodically (for example, each

time you check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* (for serviceable batteries):

Check the fluid level in each cell. The fluid

should be at the bottom of the filler open-

ing. Vehicles operated in high tempera-

tures or under severe conditions require

frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake

fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines

on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant

level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive

belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after

parking the vehicle on a level surface with

the engine off. Wait more than 10 minutes

for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex-

haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,

cracks, deterioration and damage. Tighten

connections or replace parts as necessary.

For additional information, refer to “Exhaust

gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for

fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the

vehicle has been parked for a while. Water

dripping from the air conditioner after use

is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if

fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause

and have it corrected immediately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines:

Check the level when the fluid is cold, with

the engine off. Check the lines for proper

attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

Radiator and hoses Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,

leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.

Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor-

mation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently

exposed to corrosive substances such as

those used on icy roads or to control dust. It

is very important to remove these sub-

stances from the underbody, otherwise

rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel

lines and exhaust system. At the end of

winter, the underbody should be thor-

oughly flushed with plain water, in those

areas where mud and dirt may have accu-

mulated. For additional information, refer

to the “Appearance and care” section of this

manual.

Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that

there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to

give you a better understanding of the sched-

uled maintenance items that should be regu-

larly checked or replaced. The maintenance

schedule indicates at which mileage/time in-

tervals each item requires service.

Items marked with “*” are recommended

by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.

You are not required to perform mainte-

nance on these items in order to maintain

the warranties which come with your

NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in-

tervals are required.

When applicable, additional information

can be found in the “Do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

NOTE: NISSAN does not advocate the use

of non-OEM approved aftermarket flush-

ing systems and strongly advises against

performing these services on a NISSAN

product. Many of the aftermarket flushing

systems use non-OEM approved chemi-

cals or solvents, the use of which has not

been validated by NISSAN.

For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,

grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE:

Drive Belts*: Check engine drive belts for

wear, fraying or cracking and for proper

tension. Replace any damaged drive belts.

Engine Air Filter: Replace at specified in-

tervals. When driving for prolonged periods

in dusty conditions, check/replace the filter

more frequently.

Engine Coolant*:

Replace coolant at the

specified interval. When adding or replacing

coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent with the proper mixture. (For ad-

ditional information on the proper mixture

for your area, refer to Engine cooling system”

in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual

or the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.)

NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant or

the use of non-distilled water may reduce

the recommended service interval of the

coolant.

Engine Oil and Oil Filter: Replace engine

oil and oil filter at the specified intervals. For

recommended oil grade and viscosity refer

to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

Engine Valve Clearance* (gasoline en-

gine only): Inspect only if valve noise in-

creases. Adjust valve clearance if neces-

sary.

Evaporative Emissions Control Vapor

Lines* (gasoline engine only): Check va-

por lines for leaks or looseness. Tighten

connections or replace parts as necessary.

Fuel Filter (diesel engine only): Replace

the fuel filter and drain the water at the

specified intervals.

Fuel Lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping

and connections for leaks, looseness, or

deterioration. Tighten connections or re-

place parts as necessary.

CHASSIS AND BODY

MAINTENANCE:

Brake Lines and Cables: Visually inspect

for proper installation. Check for chafing,

cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.

Replace any deteriorated or damaged

parts immediately.

Brake Pads and Rotors: Check for wear,

deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any

deteriorated or damaged parts immedi-

ately.

Exhaust System: Visually inspect the ex-

haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,

cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten

connections or replace parts as necessary.

In-Cabin Microfilter: Replace at specified

intervals. When driving for prolonged peri-

ods in dusty conditions, replace the filter

more frequently.

Propeller Shaft(s): Check for damage,

looseness, and grease leakage.

(4WD/AWD/RWD).

Steering Gear and Linkage, Axle and Sus-

pension Parts, Drive Shaft Boots: Check

for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil

or grease. Under severe driving conditions,

inspect more frequently.

Tire Rotation: Tires should be rotated ev-

ery 5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the

instructions under “General maintenance”

in this section. When rotating tires, check

for damage and uneven wear. Replace if

necessary.

Transmission Fluid/Oil, Differential Oil,

Transfer Case Oil: Visually inspect for signs

of leakage at specified intervals.

Replace automatic transmission fluid at

specified intervals. (For diesel engine models)

If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top

carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads:

∙ Replace the differential oil every

20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.

∙ Replace the automatic transmission

fluid ever 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or

24 months. (For gasoline engine mod-

els)

Off-Road Maintenance: Check the follow-

ing items frequently whenever you drive

off-road through deep sand, mud or water:

∙ Brake pads and rotors

∙ Brake lines and hoses

∙ Differential, transmission and transfer

case oil

∙ Steering linkage

∙ Propeller shaft(s) and front drive shafts

∙ Engine air filter

∙ Clutch housing drain (4WD only)

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

To help ensure smooth, safe and economi-

cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte-

nance schedules that may be used, de-

pending upon the conditions in which you

usually drive. These schedules contain

both distance and time intervals, up to

120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For

most people, the odometer reading will in-

dicate when service is needed. However, if

you drive very little, your vehicle should be

serviced at the regular time intervals

shown in the schedule.

After 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/144 months, continue

maintenance at the same mileage/time

intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS

FOR SEVERE OPERATING

CONDITIONS

Additional maintenance items for severe

operating conditions should be per-

formed on vehicles that are driven under

especially demanding conditions. Addi-

tional maintenance items should be per-

formed if you primarily operate your vehicle

under the following conditions:

∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

in normal temperatures or less than

10 miles in freezing temperatures.

∙ Stop-and-go traffic in hot weather or

low speed driving for long distances.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions or on rough,

muddy or salt-spread roads.

∙ Towing a trailer, or using a camper or

car-top carrier.

OIL CHANGE MONITOR (diesel

engine only)

This vehicle is equipped with oil change

monitor. It calculates engine oil and filter

change interval base on driving conditions.

Driving in severe conditions will shorten the

engine oil and filter change interval. When

the Engine Oil – Service Due Now warning

appears in the vehicle information display,

the engine oil and filter need to be replaced.

NOTE:

For vehicles operated in Canada, both

standard and severe maintenance items

should be performed at every interval.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

The following tables show the standard

maintenance schedule. Depending upon

weather and atmospheric conditions,

varying road surfaces, individual driving

habits and vehicle usage, additional or

more frequent maintenance may be re-

quired. Maintenance beyond the last pe-

riod on the tables requires similar main-

tenance.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine coolant See NOTE (4)(5)

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Spark plugs (Iridium - tipped type) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000)

Intake and exhaust valve clearances See NOTE (6)

GASOLINE STANDARD

MAINTENANCE

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine coolant See NOTE (4)(5)

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Spark plugs (Iridium - tipped type) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000)

Intake and exhaust valve clearances See NOTE (6)

NOTE:

(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if

found damaged.

(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.

(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.

(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles

(120,000 km) or 60 months.

(5) It is recommended that you use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture

ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water

may reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant.

(6) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.

* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform

such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and

intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Brakelinesandcables IIIIII

Brake pads and rotors 夝IIIIII

Brake fluid 夝RRR

Automatic transmission fluid See NOTE (1)

Transfer fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (2) I IIIII

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension

parts 夝

III

Tire rotation See NOTE (3)

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models)

夝

IIIIII

Exhaust system 夝III

In-cabin microfilter RRRR

NISSAN Intelligent key® battery I R R R

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Brakelinesandcables IIIIII

Brake pads and rotors 夝IIIIII

Brake fluid 夝RRR

Automatic transmission fluid See NOTE (1)

Transfer fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (2) I IIIII

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension

parts 夝

III

Tire rotation See NOTE (3)

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models)

夝

IIIIII

Exhaust system 夝III

In-cabin microfilter RRRR

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery R R R R

NOTE:

Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance Under Severe Driving Conditions”.

(1) Periodic maintenance is not required under normal driving condition. If using under the severe condition such as towing a

trailer, using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)

or 24 months. NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic S automatic transmission fluid. Using automatic transmission

fluid that is not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic S may damage the transmission or impact transmission durability. Damage

caused by the use of fluid other than as recommended is not covered under the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

(2) If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every

20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.

(3) For additional information, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under

severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

∙ Repeated short trips of less than

10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-

tures remaining below freezing.

∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-

and-go “rush hour” traffic.

∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-

ing for long distance, such as police, taxi

or door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or a

car-top carrier.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval

Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months

Brake pads and rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension

parts

Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models) Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

GASOLINE MAINTENANCE UNDER

SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

The following tables show the standard maintenance schedule. Depending upon weather and atmospheric conditions, varying road

surfaces, individual driving habits and vehicle usage, additional or more frequent maintenance may be required. Maintenance beyond

the last period on the tables requires similar maintenance.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace, D = Drain water

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

Engine oil See NOTE (3) R R R R R R

Engine oil filter See NOTE (4) R R R R R R

Engine coolant Replace every 45,000 miles or 36 months

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTES (5) R/D R/D R/D R/D R/D R/D

DIESEL STANDARD MAINTENANCE

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

Engine oil See NOTE (3) R R R R R R

Engine oil filter See NOTE (4) R R R R R R

Engine coolant Replace every 45,000 miles or 36 months

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (5) R/D R/D R/D R/D R/D R/D

NOTE:

(1) Replace the drive belts if found damaged.

(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.

(3) If operating on biodiesel blends between 6% and 10% (B6 and B10), the oil should be changed at least every 8,000 miles

(12,875 km) or 6 months, whichever comes first.

(4) If operating on biodiesel blends between 6% and 10% (B6 and B10), the oil filter should be changed at least every 8,000 miles

(12,875 km) or 6 months, whichever comes first.

(5) Both Stage I and Stage II fuel filters.

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Brakelinesandcables IIIIII

Brake pads and rotors 夝IIIIII

Brake fluid 夝RRR

Automatic transmission fluid I R I R I R

Differentialgearoil SeeNOTE(1)IIIIII

Transfer fluid I IIIII

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension

parts 夝

III

Tire rotation See NOTE (2)

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models)

夝

IIIIII

Exhaust system 夝IIIIII

In-cabin microfilter RRRR

NISSAN Intelligent key® battery I R R R

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Brakelinesandcables IIIIII

Brake pads and rotors 夝IIIIII

Brake fluid 夝RRR

Automatic transmission fluid I R I R I R

Differentialgearoil SeeNOTE(1)IIIIII

Transfer fluid I IIIII

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension

parts 夝

III

Tire rotation See NOTE (2)

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models)

夝

IIIIII

Exhaust system 夝IIIIII

In-cabin microfilter RRRR

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery R R R R

NOTE:

Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance Under Severe Driving Conditions”.

(1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every

20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.

(2) For additional information, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under

severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

∙ Repeated short trips of less than

10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-

tures remaining below freezing.

∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-

and-go “rush hour” traffic.

∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-

ing for long distance, such as police, taxi

or door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or a

car-top carrier.

OIL CHANGE MONITOR

This vehicle is equipped with oil change

monitor. It calculates engine oil and filter

change interval base on driving conditions.

Driving in severe conditions will shorten the

engine oil and filter change interval. When

the Engine Oil – Service Due Now warning

appears in the vehicle information display,

the engine oil and filter need to be replaced.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval

Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months

Brake pads and rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension

parts

Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models) Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Engine oil and filter Replace Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or when the Engine Oil

– Service Due Now warning appears in the vehicle

information display

DIESEL MAINTENANCE UNDER

SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS

Maintenance and schedules 9-17

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

MAINTENANCE LOG

9-18 Maintenance and schedules

50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-19

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or

120 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

9-20 Maintenance and schedules

MEMO

Maintenance and schedules 9-21

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities ......................................10-2

Fuel recommendation.......................10-5

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendations (for gas engine only) .....10-7

Air conditioner system refrigerant and

oil recommendations .......................10-8

Specifications ..................................10-9

Engine ......................................10-9

Wheels and tires............................10-10

Dimensions and weights ....................10-11

When traveling or registering in another

country........................................ 10-17

Vehicle identification .......................... 10-17

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

plate ....................................... 10-17

Vehicle identification number

(chassis number) ........................... 10-17

Engine serial number.......................10-18

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ........10-18

Emission control information label .........10-19

Tire and Loading Information label .........10-20

Air conditioner specification label...........10-20

Installing front license plate....................10-21

Vehicle loading information ...................10-22

Terms ......................................10-22

Vehicle load capacity .......................10-23

Securing the load...........................10-25

Utili-track® channel system

(if so equipped) .............................10-26

Loading tips ................................10-33

Truck-camper loading information ............10-34

Crew cab models...........................10-34

King Cab® models ..........................10-34

Special Body vehicles.......................10-34

Location for center of gravity ...............10-34

Vehicle load weight capacity ...............10-35

Measurement of weights ...................10-35

Towing a trailer ................................10-36

Maximum load limits .......................10-36

Towing load/specification ..................10-40

Towing safety ..............................10-45

Flat towing for 2-Wheel Drive (2WD)

vehicle (if so equipped) .....................10-61

Flat towing for 4-Wheel Drive (4WD)

vehicle (if so equipped) .....................10-61

Snowplow....................................10-61

Uniform tire quality grading....................10-62

Emission control system warranty.............10-63

Reporting safety defects ......................10-64

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)

test (gas engine only)..........................10-65

Event Data Recorders (EDR)....................10-65

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information ...................................10-66

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different.When refilling, follow the procedure

described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Fuel

VK56VD 98.4 L 26 gal 21-5/8 gal • For additional information, refer to “Fuel Recommendation” in this

section.

Cummins 5.0 L — — — • For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/

lubricants and capacities” chart of the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

Engine oil *1

Drain and refill

*1 For additional

information, refer to

“Changing engine

oil” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of

this manual.

VK56VD

With oil

filter

change

6.5 L 6-7/8 qt 5-3/4 qt

Gasoline engine models:

• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended.

• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor oil

that matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional

information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in

this section.

Without

oil filter

change

6.2 L 6-1/2 qt 5-1/2 qt

Cummins 5.0 L — — —

Diesel engine models:

• For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/

lubricants and capacities” chart of the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

Engine coolant

with reservoir

VK56VD

Non-XD

model 15.23 L 4 gal 3-3/8 gal • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent

model 14.8 L 3-7/8 gal 3-1/4 gal

Cummins 5.0 L — — — • For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/

lubricants and capacities” chart of the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Automatic Trans-

mission Fluid (ATF)

6-speed (Diesel en-

gine only)

———

• Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF

• Using automatic transmission fluid that is not equivalent to Genu-

ine NISSAN Matic K ATF may damage the transmission or impact

transmission durability. Damage caused by the use of fluid other

than as recommended is not covered under the NISSAN New Ve-

hicle Limited Warranty.

7-speed (Gasoline en-

gine only)

• Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF

• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF ONLY in

NISSAN automatic transmissions. Do not mix with other fluids. Using

fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF may

damage the automatic transmission. Damage caused by the use of

fluid other than as recommended is not covered under the NISSAN

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Differential gear oil

Front

Non-XD

model 1.25 L 2-5/8 pt 2-1/4 pt • Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super-CT Synthetic GL-5

75W-90

• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid

Super-CT Synthetic GL-5 75W-90 ONLY in final drive.

Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to

Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super-CT Synthetic GL-5

75W-90 may damage the differential gear. Damage caused by the

use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under the

NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

model 1.51 L 3-1/4 pt 2-5/8 pt

Rear

Non-XD

model 2.3 L 4-7/8 pt 4 pt

model 2.6 L 5-1/2 pt 4-5/8 pt

Transfer fluid

Non-XD model 1.5 L 1-5/8 qt 1-3/8 qt

• Genuine NISSAN ATF D3M

• Using fluid other than Genuine NISSAN ATF D3M may cause dete-

rioration in driveability and transfer durability, and may damage the

transfer case. Damage caused by fluids other than as recom-

mended is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

XD model 1.8 L 1-7/8 qt 1-5/8 qt

Power Steering Fluid (PSF) — — — • Genuine NISSAN PSF II or equivalent.

Technical and consumer information 10-3

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Brake fluid — — —

• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *2 or equivalent DOT

*2 Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.

Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —

• HFC-134a (R-134a)

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refriger-

ant and oil recommendations” in this section.

Air conditioning system oil — — —

• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refriger-

ant and oil recommendations” in this section.

Windshield-washer fluid 4.5 L 1-1/4 gal 1 gal • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-

freeze fluid or equivalent.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Gas engine only

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) number (Research octane number

91).

CAUTION

∙ Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

∙ Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to

run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or

E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically

designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-

versely affect the emission control

devices and systems of the vehicle.

Damage caused by such fuel is not

covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-

tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl

manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using

fuel containing MMT may adversely

affect vehicle performance and ve-

hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-

ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-

tent, so you may have to consult your

gasoline retailer for more details.

Note that Federal and California laws

prohibit the use of MMT in reformu-

lated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage

for that region.

Diesel engine only

For additional information, refer to “Fuel

recommendation” in the “Titan Diesel Own-

er’s Manual”.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that

meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)

specifications where it is available. Many of

the automobile manufacturers developed

this specification to improve emission con-

trol system and vehicle performance. Ask

your service station manager if the gaso-

line meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing re-

formulated gasolines. These gasolines are

specially designed to reduce vehicle emis-

sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards

cleaner air and suggests that you use re-

formulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-

ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl

Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with

or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

fuels of which the oxygenate content and

the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-

not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask

your service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,

please take the following precautions as

the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle

performance problems and/or fuel system

damage.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

∙The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

∙If an oxygenate-blend other than

methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 10% oxygenate.

(MTBE may, however, be added up to

15%.)

∙E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxy-

genate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect

the emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle and should not be

used. Damage caused by such fuel is

not covered by the NISSAN New Ve-

hicle Limited Warranty.

∙If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable

amount of appropriate cosolvents

and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop-

erly formulated with appropriate co-

solvents and corrosion inhibitors,

such methanol blends may cause fuel

system damage and/or vehicle per-

formance problems. At this time, suf-

ficient data is not available to ensure

that all methanol blends are suitable

for use in NISSAN vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine

stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe-

rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,

immediately change to a non-oxygenate

fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during re-

fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates

can cause paint damage.

E–15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%

fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.

E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed

to run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in your

vehicle. U.S. government regulations re-

quire fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be

identified with small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbreviation

or the appropriate percentage for that re-

gion.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%

fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel

Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve-

hicle. U.S. government regulations require

fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and black

label with the common abbreviation or the

appropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMT

MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-

nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad-

ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the

use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may

adversely affect vehicle performance, in-

cluding the emissions control system. Note

that while some fuel pumps label MMT

content, not all do, so you may have to

consult your gasoline retailer for more de-

tails.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex-

ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane

booster, intake valve deposit removers,

etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of

these additives intended for gum, varnish

or deposit removal may contain active sol-

vents or similar ingredients that can be

harmful to the fuel system and engine.

10-6 Technical and consumer information

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can

cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”

(“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping

noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine

damage. If you detect a persistent heavy

spark knock even when using gasoline

of the stated octane rating, or if you hear

steady spark knock while holding a

steady speed on level roads, it is recom-

mended that you have a NISSAN dealer

correct the condition. Failure to correct

the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for

which NISSAN is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in

spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,

which may cause excessive fuel consump-

tion or engine damage. If any of the above

symptoms are encountered, have your ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills.This is not

a cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATIONS (for gas

engine only)

For diesel engine oil and oil filter recom-

mendations, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter

recommendations” section of the “Titan

Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade,

quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure

satisfactory engine life and performance.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in this section. NISSAN recommends the

use of an energy conserving oil in order to

improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the

American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-

cation or International Lubricant Standard-

ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)

certification and SAE viscosity standard.

These oils have the API certification mark

on the front of the container. Oils which do

not have the specified quality label should

not be used as they could cause engine

damage.

LTI2051

Technical and consumer information 10-7

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not

necessary when the proper oil type is used

and maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or

has been previously used should not be

used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness

changes with temperature. Because of

this, it is important to select the engine oil

viscosity based on the temperatures at

which the vehicle will be operated before

the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos-

ity other than that recommended could

cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a

high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When

replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or

its equivalent for the reason described in

“Change intervals.”

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for

your engine are based on the use of the

specified quality oils and filters. Using en-

gine oil and filters that are not of the speci-

fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil

and filter change intervals could reduce

engine life. Damage to the engine caused

by improper maintenance or use of incor-

rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is

not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-quality

engine oil when it was built.You do not have

to change the oil before the first recom-

mended change interval. Oil and filter

change intervals depend upon how you

use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions

may require more frequent oil and filter

changes:

∙ repeated short distance driving at cold

outside temperatures

∙ driving in dusty conditions

∙ extensive idling

∙ towing a trailer

∙ stop and go commuting

For additional information, refer to the

“Maintenance and schedules” section of

this manual.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND OIL

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your

NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the

refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and

NISSAN A/C system oil Type S (DH-PS) or

the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil

may cause severe damage to the air

conditioning system and may require

the replacement of all air conditioner

system components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s

ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does

not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain

government regulations require the recov-

ery and recycling of any refrigerant during

automotive air conditioner system service. A

NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians

and equipment needed to recover and re-

cycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer when servicing your air conditioner

system.

10-8 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE

Gas engine only

Model VK56VD

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 8-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 90°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.858 x 3.622 (98 x 92)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 338.78 (5,552)

Firing order 1–8–7–3–6–5–4–2

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.

A/T (in “N” position)

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle

speed)

CO%atidle

Spark plug DIKAR7B11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

Diesel engine only

For additional information, refer to “Engine” in the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

SPECIFICATIONS

Technical and consumer information 10-9

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel Type Offset in (mm) Size

Steel 1.73 (44) 17 x 7.5 J

0.98 (25) 18 x 8.0 J

Alloy

0.98 (25) 18 x 8.0 J

0.91 (23) 18 x 8.0 J

1.63 (41.5) 18 x 7.5 J

0.91(23) 20x8.0J

1.63 (41.5) 20 x 7.5 J

Tire type Performance type Size

Passenger

All season 265/70R18

All season P265/70R18

All season P275/60R20

All terrain P275/70/R18

Light truck

All season LT245/75R17

All terrain LT275/65R18

All season LT265/60R20

Wheel Type Offset in (mm) Size

Spare wheel type Performance type Size

Full size (Non Matching)

Steel

- 265/70R18

- P265/70R18

- LT245/75R17

Full size (Non Matching)

Alloy

- P275/60R20

Full size (Matching) Al-

loy

- P275/70R18

- P275/60R20

- LT275/60R20

- LT275/65R18

10-10 Technical and consumer information

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Non-XD single cab models

Models Units: in (mm)

Overall Length: 228.1 (5,794.2)

Overall width: 79.5 (2,020)

Overall height: 2WD S 74.5 (1,893)

2WD SV 74.6 (1,894)

4WD S 75.1 (1,907.9)

4WD SV 75.2 (1,908.9)

Front Track: S and SV 67.9 (1,725)

SL, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.1 (1,729)

Rear Track: S and SV 67.9 (1,725)

SL, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.1 (1,729)

Wheelbase: 139.8 (3,550)

Gross vehicle weight rating: Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on

the center pillar between the driver’s side front and

rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating:

Front:

Rear:

Technical and consumer information 10-11

XD single cab models

Models Units: in (mm)

Overall Length: 231 (5,866.5)

Overall width: 79.5 (2,020)

Overall height: 2WD with diesel engine 77.2 (1,960.5)

4WD with diesel engine 77.1 (1959.5)

2WD with gasoline engine 77.3 (1,962.5)

4WD with gasoline engine 77.2 (1,960.5)

Front Track: S and SV 68.4 (1,738)

SL, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.6 (1,743)

Rear Track: S and SV 68.3 (1,737)

SL, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.6 (1,742)

Wheelbase: 139.8 (3,550)

Gross vehicle weight rating: Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on

the center pillar between the driver’s side front and

rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating:

Front:

Rear:

10-12 Technical and consumer information

Non-XD crew cab models

Models Units: in (mm)

Overall Length: S, SV, SL and Platinum 228.1 (5,794.2)

Pro-4X 228.5 (5,804.1)

Overall width:

Tow mirrors extended 102.6 (2607.19)

Without overfenders S, SV and SL 79.5 (2,020)

With overfenders Pro-4X and Platinum 80.7 (2,049.6)

Overall height: 2WD S/SV 75.4 (1,915.1)

4WD S/SV 76.0 (1,929.7)

2WD SL/Platinum 75.6 (1,920.4)

4WD Pro-4X 77.2 (1,960.3)

4WD SL/Platinum 77.2 (1,959.7)

Front Track: S and SV 67.9 (1,725)

SL, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.1 (1,729)

Rear Track: S and SV 67.9 (1,725)

SL, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.1 (1,729)

Wheelbase: 139.8 (3,550)

Gross vehicle weight rating: Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on

the center pillar between the driver’s side front and

rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating:

Front:

Rear:

Technical and consumer information 10-13

XD crew cab models

Models Units: in (mm)

Overall Length:

Without front license plate bracket S, SV, SL and Platinum 242.7 (6,165.7)

Without front license plate bracket Pro-4X 243.6 (6,187.1)

With front license plate bracket S, SV, SL and Platinum 243.0 (6,172.6)

With front license plate bracket Pro-4X 243.9 (6,194.6)

Overall width:

Tow mirrors non-extended 98.2 (2,494)

Tow mirrors extended 103.9 (2,640)

Without overfenders S, SV and SL 79.5 (2,019.9)

With overfenders Pro-4X and Platinum 80.7 (2,048.9)

Overall height: 2WD/4WD S/SV 78.0 (1980)

4WD Pro-4X 78.3 (1,990)

2WD/4WD SL/Platinum 78.7 (2,000)

Front Track: S and SV 68.4 (1,738)

SL, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.6 (1,743)

Rear Track: S and SV 68.3 (1,737)

SL, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.6 (1,742)

Wheelbase: 151.6 (3,850)

Gross vehicle weight rating: Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on

the center pillar between the driver’s side front and

rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating:

Front:

Rear:

10-14 Technical and consumer information

Non-XD King Cab® models

Models Units: in (mm)

Overall Length: S and SV 228.1 (5,794.2)

Pro-4X 228.5 (5,804.1)

Overall width: S and SV 79.5 (2,020)

Pro-4X 80.7 (2,049.6)

Overall height: 2WD S 75.1 (1,906.6)

4WD S 75.7 (1,921.8)

2WD SV 75.1 (1,908)

4WD SV 75.7 (1,923.2)

Pro-4X 76.9 (1,953.2)

Front Track: S and SV 67.9 (1,725)

Pro-4X 68.1 (1,729)

Rear Track: S and SV 67.9 (1,725)

Pro-4X 68.1 (1,729)

Wheelbase: 139.8 (3,550)

Gross vehicle weight rating: Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on

the center pillar between the driver’s side front and

rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating:

Front:

Rear:

Technical and consumer information 10-15

XD King Cab® models

Models Units: in (mm)

Overall Length: S and SV 231.0 (5,866.5)

Pro-4X 231.8 (5887.9)

Overall width: S and SV 79.5 (2,020)

Pro-4X 80.7 (2,049.6)

Overall height: 2WD S and SV 77.7 (1,974.3)

4WD S and SV 77.7 (1,973.4)

4WD Pro-4X 78.1 (1,983.5)

Front Track: S and SV 68.4 (1,738)

Pro-4X 68.6 (1,743)

Rear Track: S and SV 68.4 (1,737)

Pro-4X 68.6 (1,742)

Wheelbase: 139.8 (3,550)

Gross vehicle weight rating: Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on

the center pillar between the driver’s side front and

rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating:

Front:

Rear:

10-16 Technical and consumer information

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-

hicle in another country, you should first

find out if the fuel available is suitable for

your vehicle's engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too

low may cause engine damage. All gaso-

line vehicles must be operated with un-

leaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking

your vehicle to areas where appropriate

fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of

your vehicle to another country, state,

province or district, it may be necessary

to modify the vehicle to meet local laws

and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle

emission control and safety standards

vary according to the country, state, prov-

ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica-

tions may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district

and registered, its modifications, trans-

portation and registration are the re-

sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re-

sponsible for any inconvenience that

may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number (VIN)

plate is attached as shown. This number is

the identification for your vehicle and is

used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is lo-

cated as shown.

LTI2195 LTI0086

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

Technical and consumer information 10-17

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The engine serial number is stamped on

the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION

LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi-

cation label is affixed as shown. This label

contains valuable vehicle information, such

as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of

manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

VK56VD

WTI0095

Cummins 5.0L

LTI2155

Type A (if so equipped)

LTI0135

10-18 Technical and consumer information

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is

attached to the underside of the hood as

shown.

Type B (if so equipped)

WTI0099

XD models

LTI2197

Except XD models

LTI2242

Technical and consumer information 10-19

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire

and Loading Information Label. The label is

located as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is af-

fixed to the underside of the hood as

shown.

LTI2196

XD models

LTI2198

Except XD models

LTI2243

10-20 Technical and consumer information

Use the following steps to mount the front

license plate:

1. Attach the license plate bracket on the

skid plate at the location marked (small

dimple) using self-tapping screws.

Use the following steps to mount the front

license plate:

1. Install two grommets 䊊

Ainto the

square holes in the front bumper.

2. Install the license plate bracket to the

front bumper with two tapping screws

䊊

Pro-4X

LTI2230

Except Pro-4x

LTI2225

Except Pro-4x

LTI2226

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

Technical and consumer information 10-21

WARNING

∙ It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside a ve-

hicle. In a collision, people riding

in these areas are more likely to

be seriously injured or killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in

any area of your vehicle that is

not equipped with seats and

seat belts.

∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself

with the following terms before

loading your vehicle:

∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of

your vehicle) - vehicle weight in-

cluding: standard and optional

equipment, fluids, emergency

tools, and spare tire assembly.

This weight does not include

passengers and cargo.

∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight

of passengers and cargo.

∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle,

passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer

tongue load and any other op-

tional equipment. This informa-

tion is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit

specified for the front or rear axle.

This information is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

rating) - The maximum total

weight rating of the vehicle, pas-

sengers, cargo, and trailer.

∙

Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,

Total load capacity - maximum to-

tal weight limit specified of the load

(passengers and cargo) for the ve-

hicle. This is the maximum com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo that can be loaded into the

vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow

a trailer, the trailer tongue weight

must be included as part of the

cargo load. This information is lo-

cated on the Tire and Loading In-

formation label.

∙ Cargo capacity - permissible

weight of cargo, the subtracted

weight of occupants from the

load limit.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

10-22 Technical and consumer information

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-

firm that you do not exceed the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

or the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) for your vehicle. Both the

GVWR and GAWR are located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

For additional information, refer to

“Measurement of weights” in this

section.

Do not exceed the load limit of your

vehicle shown as “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo” on

the Tire and Loading Information la-

bel. Do not exceed the number of

occupants shown as “Seating Ca-

pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label.

To get “the combined weight of oc-

cupants and cargo”, add the weight

of all occupants, then add the total

luggage weight. Examples are

shown in the following illustration.

Technical and consumer information 10-23

Steps for determining correct

load limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s

Tire and Loading Information la-

bel.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For ex-

ample, if the XXX amount equals

1,400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lbs. passengers in your ve-

hicle, the amount of available

cargo and luggage load capac-

ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) =

650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =

300 kg.)

Example

LTI2320

10-24 Technical and consumer information

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That

weight may not safely exceed

the available cargo and luggage

load capacity calculated in

step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will

be transferred to your vehicle.

Consult this manual to deter-

mine how this reduces the avail-

able cargo and luggage load ca-

pacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-

firm that you do not exceed the

GVWR or the GAWR for your vehicle.

For additional information, refer to

“Measurement of weights” in this

section.

Also check tires for proper inflation

pressures. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

SECURING THE LOAD

For your convenience, tie down hooks are

placed at each corner of the truck box.

These may be used to help secure cargo

loaded into the truck box.

WARNING

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

∙ Do not load your vehicle any heavier

than the GVWR or the maximum front

and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of

your vehicle can break, tire damage

could occur, or it can change the way

your vehicle handles. This could result

in loss of control and cause personal

injury.

LTI0102

Technical and consumer information 10-25

UTILI-TRACK® CHANNEL SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

1. Side channels

2. Header channel

3. Channel sections

4. Floor channels

WARNING

∙

Properly install and tighten the tie-

down cleats into the Utili-track® chan-

nel system. Also, do not attach any rope

or straps directly to the channel. Failure

to properly install the tie-down cleats

or attaching ropes or straps directly to

the channel can cause the cargo to be-

come unsecured. In a sudden stop or

collision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

NOTE:

If the bed liner storage bins (if so

equipped) are installed on the vehicle,

use type B cleats (if so equipped) in the

side channel locations. The use of type A

cleats (if so equipped) in the side channel

locations with the bed liner storage bins

installed will interfere with bed liner

storage bin lid operation. For additional

information on bed liner storage bins, re-

fer to “Storage” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

The Utili-track® channel system allows you

to move tie-down clamps in the bed to the

best location to secure a load.

The tie-down cleats must be installed so

the clamp is properly seated in the notches

in the rail. If the tie-down cleat is not seated

in the notches, it will not be flush with the

rail and cannot be properly tightened. The

bolt in the center of the cleat must be tight-

ened hand tight (20 – 40 in-lbs.)

Check the tightness of the tie-down cleat

periodically during a trip to make sure the

center bolt has not become loose.

Install the tie-down cleat as follows:

1. Remove the channel protectors by slid-

ing them out the back of the truck bed.

Properly store the channel protectors.

2. Loosen the center bolt completely.

LTI0107

10-26 Technical and consumer information

3. Insert the cleat into the channel per-

pendicular to the channel as shown.

Then rotate the cleat clockwise 90° and

slide it to the desired location.

4. Position the cleat so the nubs on the

bottom fully seat into the channel de-

tents.

Type A cleat (if so equipped)

LTI2185

Type B cleat (if so equipped)

LTI0103

Type A cleat (if so equipped)

LTI2186

Technical and consumer information 10-27

5. There should be no gap between the

bottom of the cleat and the top of the

channel. Tighten the center bolt hand

tight (20-40 in-lbs.).

Type B cleat (if so equipped)

LTI0104

Type A cleat (if so equipped)

LTI2187

10-28 Technical and consumer information

Type B cleat (if so equipped)

WTI0124

Technical and consumer information 10-29

Type A cleat (if so equipped)

LTI2188

10-30 Technical and consumer information

CAUTION

∙ Install only one cleat per section of

channel.

∙ Applying loads at angles to the cleats

greater then 45° or loads greater than

150 lbs. (header and floor channels) or

200 lbs. (side channels) may cause

damage to the channel or bed.

Type B cleat (if so equipped)

LTI0106

Technical and consumer information 10-31

Type A cleat (if so equipped) 1 correct installation, 2 incorrect installation

LTI2189

10-32 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

Do not install accessories over the gap

between the front and rear side chan-

nels. Doing this could affect the rear

structure in certain rear impacts, which

could result in serious injury.

LOADING TIPS

∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

∙ Do not load the front and rear

axle to the GAWR. Doing so will

exceed the GVWR.

WARNING

∙ Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent

it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the

seatbacks. In a sudden stop or

collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

∙ Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear

GAWRs. If you do, parts of your

vehicle can break, tire damage

could occur, or it can change the

way your vehicle handles. This

could result in loss of control

and cause personal injury.

∙ Overloading not only can

shorten the life of your vehicle

and the tire, but can also cause

unsafe vehicle handling and

longer braking distances. This

may cause a premature tire fail-

ure which could result in a seri-

ous accident and personal in-

jury. Failures caused by

overloading are not covered by

the vehicle’s warranty.

Type B cleat (if so equipped) 1 correct installation, 2 incorrect installation

LTI0123

Technical and consumer information 10-33

CREW CAB MODELS

Crew Cab short wheel base models

should not be used to carry a slide-in

camper.

KING CAB® MODELS

This information is provided for you to

properly install a slide-in camper and is

based on the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration regulations. It is rec-

ommended that, before installing the

camper, you carefully read the following in-

formation and ensure that the camper

meets the specifications.

This information may not apply to some

Canada model vehicles.

SPECIAL BODY VEHICLES

Some vehicles are equipped with commer-

cial or camper bodies. However, this Own-

er’s Manual does not cover these options.

For additional information, refer to the

body manufacturer’s instruction manual.

LOCATION FOR CENTER OF

GRAVITY

The illustration indicates the recom-

mended cargo center of gravity location.

Single Cab models:

L1 = 49.0 in (1,245 mm)

Crew Cab Non-XD models:

L1 = 33.8 in (858 mm)

Crew Cab XD models:

L1 = 47.2 in (1,200 mm)

King Cab® Non-XD models:

L1 = 39.6 in (1,005 mm)

King Cab® XD models:

L1 = 47.4 in (1,205 mm)

WARNING

Improper loading may be dangerous. If

a load is too far back, it can affect han-

dling characteristics. If a load is too far

forward, the front axle may be

overloaded.

WTI0195

TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING

INFORMATION

10-34 Technical and consumer information

When the truck is used to carry a slide-in

camper, the total cargo load of the truck

consists of the camper manufacturer’s

weight figure, plus:

∙ the weight of installed additional

camper equipment not included in the

camper manufacturer’s weight figure,

∙ the weight of camper cargo,

∙ and the weight of occupants in the

camper.

The total cargo load should not exceed the

truck’s pay load weight rating and the

camper’s center of gravity should fall within

the truck’s recommended center of gravity

location when installed.

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading can

adversely affect vehicle handling, brak-

ing and performance and may lead to

accidents.

VEHICLE LOAD WEIGHT CAPACITY

The vehicle payload weight capacity

shown on the Tire and Loading Information

label indicates the maximum total weight

of passengers, optional equipment (air

conditioning, trailer hitch, etc.) and cargo

that your vehicle is designed to carry.

For additional information, refer to “Tire and

Loading Information label” in this section.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the GVWR or the

GAWR for your vehicle. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Vehicle loading informa-

tion” in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-

sures. For additional information, refer to

the “Tire and Loading Information label” in

this section.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent

weight shifts that could affect the

balance of your vehicle.When the ve-

hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and

weigh the front and the rear wheels

separately to determine axle loads.

Individual axle loads should not ex-

ceed either of the gross axle weight

ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle

loads should not exceed the gross

vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These

ratings are given on the vehicle cer-

tification label. If weight ratings are

exceeded, move or remove items to

bring all weights below the ratings.

LTI0129

Technical and consumer information 10-35

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a

trailer and its cargo can adversely affect

vehicle handling, braking and perfor-

mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

∙ Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy

load for the first 500 miles (805 km).

Your engine, axle or other parts could

be damaged.

∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that

you tow a trailer, do not drive over

50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make

starts at full throttle. This helps the

engine and other parts of your vehicle

wear in at the heavier load.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used

primarily to carry passengers and cargo.

Remember that towing a trailer places ad-

ditional loads on your vehicle’s engine,

drive train, steering, braking and other sys-

tems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is avail-

able on the website at

www.nissanusa.com. This guide includes

information on trailer towing capability and

the special equipment required for proper

towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed

the value specified in the “Towing

Load/Specification” chart found in this sec-

tion. The total trailer load equals trailer

weight plus its cargo weight.

∙When towing a trailer load of

3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg) or more, trailers

with a brake system MUST be used.

The maximum GCWR should not exceed

the value specified in the following “Towing

Load/Specification” chart.

The GCWR equals the combined weight of

the towing vehicle (including passengers

and cargo) plus the total trailer load. Tow-

ing loads greater than these or using im-

proper towing equipment could adversely

affect vehicle handling, braking and perfor-

mance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is

not only related to the maximum trailer

loads, but also the places you plan to tow.

Tow weights appropriate for level highway

driving may have to be reduced for low

traction situations (for example, on slippery

boat ramps).

LTI0161

TOWING A TRAILER

10-36 Technical and consumer information

Temperature conditions can also affect

towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer

in high outside temperatures on graded

roads can affect engine performance and

cause overheating. The engine protection

mode, which helps reduce the chance of

engine damage, could activate and auto-

matically decrease engine power. Vehicle

speed may decrease under high load. Plan

your trip carefully to account for trailer and

vehicle load, weather and road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced en-

gine power and vehicle speed. The re-

duced speed may be lower than other

traffic, which could increase the chance

of a collision. Be especially careful when

driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a

safe driving speed, pull to the side of the

road in a safe area. Allow the engine to

cool and return to normal operation. For

additional information, refer to “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from im-

proper towing procedures is not cov-

ered by NISSAN warranties.

Tongue load

When using a weight carrying or a weight

distributing hitch, keep the tongue load be-

tween 10 - 15% of the total trailer load or use

the trailer tongue load specified by the

trailer manufacturer. The tongue load

must be within the maximum tongue load

limits shown in the following “Towing

Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue

load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo

to allow for proper tongue load.

WTI0160

Technical and consumer information 10-37

King pin load

When using a 5th wheel hitch, keep the

tongue load between 15 - 25% of the total

trailer load within the maximum king pin

load limits shown in the following “Towing

Load/Specification” chart. If the king pin

load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo

to allow for proper king pin load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight

(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle

Weight (GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label. The GVW equals the

combined weight of the unloaded vehicle,

passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue

load and any other optional equipment. In

addition, front or rear GAW must not ex-

ceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label.

Towing with Weight Distributing Class 4

Hitch

The Class 4 towing capacities shown in the

towing load specification charts are calcu-

lated per the SAE J2807 standards. Addi-

tional passengers, cargo and/or optional

equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will

add weight to the vehicle and reduce your

vehicle’s maximum towing capacity and

trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed

to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR,

Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined

Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be mea-

sured using platform type scales com-

monly found at truck stops, highway weigh

stations, building supply centers or salvage

yards.

Towing with Gooseneck Hitch

The gooseneck towing capacities are cal-

culated assuming a base vehicle with

driver and any options required to achieve

the rating. Additional passengers, cargo

and/or optional equipment, such as the

trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle

and reduce your vehicle’s maximum tow-

ing capacity and trailer tongue load.

CA0036

10-38 Technical and consumer information

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed

to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR,

Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined

Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be mea-

sured using platform type scales com-

monly found at truck stops, highway weigh

stations, building supply centers or salvage

yards.

To determine the available payload capac-

ity for tongue/king pin load, use the follow-

ing procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all

of the passengers and cargo that are

normally in the vehicle when towing a

trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from

the GVWR. The remaining amount is

the available maximum tongue/king

pin load.

To determine the available towing capacity,

use the following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the

"Towing Load/Specification" chart

found in this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight

from the GCWR.The remaining amount

is the available maximum towing ca-

pacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight,

weigh your trailer on a scale with all equip-

ment and cargo, that are normally in the

trailer when it is towed. Make sure the

Gross trailer weight is not more than the

Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the

trailer and is not more than the calculated

available maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the

scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle

Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not

more than Front Gross Axle Weight and

Rear Gross Axle Weight on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The

cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to

be moved or removed to meet the speci-

fied ratings.

Example:

∙ Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed

on a scale - including passengers,cargo

and hitch - 7,804 lbs. (3,540 kg).

∙ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-

bel - 8,990 lbs. (4,078 kg).

∙ Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)

from “Towing Load/Specification" chart

- 19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg).

∙ Maximum Trailer towing capacity from

“Towing Load/Specification" chart -

9,200 lbs. (4,173 kg).

8,990 lbs. (4,078 kg) GVWR

– 7,804 lbs. (3,540 kg) GVW

= 1,186 lbs. (538 kg) Available for tongue/

king pin weight

19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg) GCWR

– 7,804 lbs. (3,540 kg) GVW

= 11,644 lbs. (5,282 kg) Capacity available for

towing

1,186 lbs. (538 kg) Available tongue

weight

/ 11,644 lbs. (5,282 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less

than the maximum towing capacity due to

the passenger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Technical and consumer information 10-39

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight

between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or

within the trailer tongue weight specifica-

tion recommended by the trailer manufac-

turer. If the tongue weight becomes exces-

sive, rearrange the cargo to obtain the

proper tongue weight. Do not exceed the

maximum tongue weight specification

shown in the “Towing load/specification”

chart even if the calculated available

tongue weight is greater than 15%. If the

calculated tongue weight is less than 10%,

shift the trailer load forward until the trailer

tongue weight reaches 10% of the trailer

weight.

Always verify that available capacities are

within the required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

WARNING

The towing capacities provided in this

manual are for general reference only.

The safe towing capacity of your vehicle

is affected by dealer and factory in-

stalled options and passenger and

cargo loads. You must weigh the vehicle

and trailer as described in this manual

to determine the actual vehicle towing

capacity. Do not exceed the published

maximum towing capacity or the GCWR

or the GVWR shown on the

FMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can re-

sult in an accident causing serious per-

sonal injury or property damage.

NOTE:

The SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class

4 Hitch specifications are based on S and

SV grade models . The Gooseneck Hitch

specifications are based on SV grade

models.

Non-XD models — Single cab — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WD

Maximum Payload 1,940 lbs. (880.0 kg) 1,940 lbs. (880.0 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 9,740 lbs. (4,418.0 kg) 9,550 lbs. (4,331.8 kg)

Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 974 lbs. (441.8 kg) 955 lbs. (433.2 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg) 15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg)

10-40 Technical and consumer information

Non-XD models — Crew cab — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WD

Maximum Payload 1,590 lbs. (721.2 kg) 1,610 lbs. (730.3 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 9,400 lbs. (4,263.8 kg) 9,230 lbs. (4,186.7 kg)

Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 940 lbs. (426.4 kg) 923 lbs. (418.7 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg) 15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg)

Non-XD models — King Cab® — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WD

Maximum Payload 1,600 lbs. (725.7 kg) 1,630 lbs. (739.4 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 9,400 lbs. (4,263.8 kg) 9,240 lbs. (4,191.2 kg)

Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 940 lbs. (426.4 kg) 924 lbs. (419.1 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg) 15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg)

XD models — Single cab — Diesel engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WD

Maximum Payload 2,420 lbs. (1,097.7 kg) 2,330 lbs. (1,056.9 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 12,310 lbs. (5,583.7 kg) 12,030 lbs. (5,456.7kg)

Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 1,231 lbs. (558.4 kg) 1,203 lbs. (545.7 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg) 19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg)

XD models — Crew cab — Diesel engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WD

Maximum Payload 2,080 lbs. (943.5 kg) 2000 lbs. (907.2 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 12,310 lbs. (5,583.7 kg) 12,030 lbs. (5,456.7 kg)

Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 1,231 lbs. (558.4 kg) 1,203 lbs. (545.7 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg) 19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg)

Technical and consumer information 10-41

XD models — King Cab® — Diesel engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WD

Maximum Payload 2,290 lbs. (1,038.7 kg) 2,120 lbs. (961.6 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 12,510 lbs. (5,674.4 kg) 12,150 lbs. (5,511.1 kg)

Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 1,251 lbs. (567.4 kg) 1,215 lbs. (551.1 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg) 19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg)

XD models — Single Cab — Diesel engine towing load specification chart — Gooseneck Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WD

Maximum Payload 2,260 lbs. (1,028.5 kg) 2,170 lbs. (988.7 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 12,760 lbs. (5,790.9 kg) 12,480 lbs. (5,664.9 kg)

Maximum King pin load *2, *3 1,915 lbs. (868.6 kg) 1,873 lbs. (849.7 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg) 19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg)

XD models — Crew Cab — Diesel engine towing load specification chart — Gooseneck Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WD

Maximum Payload 1,930 lbs. (878.2 kg) 1,840 lbs. (839.0 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 11,900 lbs. (5,401.3 kg) 11,330 lbs. (5,140.1 kg)

Maximum King pin load *2, *3 1,786 lbs. (810.2 kg) 1,700 lbs. (771.0 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg) 19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg)

XD models — King Cab® — Diesel engine towing load specification chart — Gooseneck Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WD

Maximum Payload 2,130 lbs. (968.5 kg) 1,970 lbs. (895.9 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 12,630 lbs. (5,730.9 kg) 12,160 lbs. (5,519.3 kg)

Maximum King pin load *2, *3 1,895 lbs. (859.6 kg) 1,825 lbs. (827.9 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg) 19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg)

10-42 Technical and consumer information

XD models — Single cab — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WD

Maximum Payload 2,910 lbs. (1,319.9 kg) 2,850 lbs. (1,292.7 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 11,590 lbs. (5,257.1 kg) 11,330 lbs. (5,139.2 kg)

Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 1,159 lbs. (525.7 kg) 1,133 lbs. (513.9 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating*4 17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg) 17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)

XD models — Crew cab — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WD

Maximum Payload 2,590 lbs. (1,174.8 kg) 2,520 lbs. (1,143.0 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 11,270 lbs. (5,111.9 kg) 10,990 lbs. (4,985.0 kg)

Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 1,127 lbs. (511.2 kg) 1,099 lbs. (498.5 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating*4 17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg) 17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)

XD models — King Cab® — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WD

Maximum Payload 2,710 lbs. (1,229.2 kg) 2,560 lbs. (1,161.2 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 11,380 lbs. (5,161.9 kg) 11,040 lbs. (5,007.7 kg)

Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 1,138 lbs. (516.2 kg) 1,104 lbs. (500.8 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating*4 17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg) 17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)

XD models — Single cab — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — Gooseneck Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WD

Maximum Payload 2,690 lbs. (1,221.6 kg) 2,700 lbs. (1,225.0 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 11,710 lbs. (5,313.5 kg) 11,450 lbs. (5,194.4 kg)

Maximum King pin load *2, *3 1,757 lbs. (797.0 kg) 1,718 lbs. (779.2 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating*4 17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg) 17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)

Technical and consumer information 10-43

XD models — Crew cab — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — Gooseneck Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WD

Maximum Payload 2,440 lbs. (1,107.2 kg) 2,310 lbs. (1,052.3 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 11,390 lbs. (5,167.3 kg) 11,120 lbs. (5,044.4 kg)

Maximum King pin load *2, *3 1,709 lbs. (775.1 kg) 1,668 lbs. (756.7 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating*4 17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg) 17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)

XD models — King Cab® — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — Gooseneck Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WD

Maximum Payload 2,550 lbs. (1,161.0 kg) 2,430 lbs. (1,106.1 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 11,510 lbs. (5,221.1 kg) 11,180 lbs. (5,075.5 kg)

Maximum King pin load *2, *3 1,727 lbs. (783.2 kg) 1,678 lbs. (761.3 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating*4 17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg) 17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)

*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating.

Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing

capacity.

*2: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).

*3: The maximum towing capacity when using the Genuine NISSAN step bumper as a ball mount is 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg) and 500 lbs. (227 kg)

tongue load.

*4: The maximum gross combined weight rating for XD gasoline engine vehicles equipped with 20 inch wheels is 16,900 lbs. (7,666 kg).

10-44 Technical and consumer information

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Your vehicle may be equipped with an op-

tional trailer tow package. The trailer tow

package includes a receiver-type frame

mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the

maximum towing capacity of this vehicle

when the proper towing equipment is

used. Choose a proper ball mount and

hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be

towed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and

hitch balls are available at a NISSAN dealer.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the op-

tional trailer tow package, check the tow-

ing capacity of your bumper hitch or

receiver-type frame mounted hitch.

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and

trailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is

available at a NISSAN dealer. Make sure the

trailer hitch is securely attached to the ve-

hicle to help avoid personal injury or prop-

erty damage due to sway caused by cross-

winds, rough road surfaces or passing

trucks.

A hitch used for towing 5th wheel and

gooseneck trailers can also be installed on

your vehicle. Contact a professional sup-

plier of towing equipment to purchase and

have a 5th wheel or gooseneck hitch in-

stalled.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specific

weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-

pable of towing a trailer heavier than

the weight rating of the hitch compo-

nents. Never exceed the weight rating

of the hitch components. Doing so can

cause serious personal injury or prop-

erty damage.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and

weight rating for your trailer:

∙ The required hitch ball size is stamped

on most trailer couplers. Most hitch

balls also have the size printed on the

top of the ball.

∙ Choose the proper class hitch ball

based on the trailer weight.

∙ The diameter of the threaded shank of

the hitch ball must be matched to the

ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball

shank should be no more than 1/16”

smaller than the hole in the ball mount.

∙ The threaded shank of the hitch ball

must be long enough to be properly

secured to the ball mount.There should

be at least 2 threads showing beyond

the lock washer and nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount

and the ball mount is inserted into the

hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball

mount based on the trailer weight. Addi-

tionally, the ball mount should be chosen to

keep the trailer tongue level with the

ground.

Technical and consumer information 10-45

Bumper towing

The Genuine NISSAN step bumper has pro-

visions to install a trailer hitch ball and is

designed to tow trailers of a maximum

weight of 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).

NOTE:

The trailer hitch ball cannot be installed

on the step bumper if the receiver-type

frame mounted hitch is installed on the

vehicle.

To install a trailer hitch ball cut out the circle

in the center of the step bumper 䊊

A, then

remove it to install the trailer hitch ball.

Weight carrying hitches

A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball

mount is one that is designed to carry the

whole amount of tongue weight and gross

weight directly on the ball mount and on

the receiver.

Weight distribution hitch

This type of hitch is also called a “load-

leveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of bars

attach to the ball mount and to the trailer

to distribute the tongue weight (hitch

weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can’t

carry the full tongue weight of a given

trailer, and need some of the tongue

weight transferred through the frame and

pushing down on the front wheels. This

gives stability to the tow vehicle.

A weight-distributing hitch system (Class

IV) is recommended if you plan to tow trail-

ers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs.

(2,268 kg). Check with the trailer and towing

equipment manufacturers to determine if

they recommend the use of a weight-

distributing hitch system.

NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system may

affect the operation of trailer surge

brakes. If you are considering use of a

weight-distributing hitch system with a

surge brake-equipped trailer, check with

the surge brake, hitch or trailer manufac-

turer to determine if and how this can be

done.

Follow the instructions provided by the

manufacturer for installing and using the

weight-distributing hitch system.

General set-up instructions are as follows:

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level sur-

face. With the ignition on and the doors

closed, allow the vehicle to stand for

several minutes so that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference point

on the front and rear bumpers at the

center of the vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and ad-

just the hitch equalizers so that the

front bumper height is within 0 -

.5 inches (0 – 13 mm) of the reference

height measured in step 2. The rear

bumper should be no higher than the

reference height measured in step 2.

LTI2227

10-46 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distributing

hitch so the rear of the bumper is no

higher than the measured reference

height when the trailer is attached. If

the rear bumper is higher than the mea-

sured reference height when loaded,

the vehicle may handle unpredictably

which could cause a loss of vehicle con-

trol and cause serious personal injury or

property damage.

Sway control device

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buf-

feting caused by other vehicles can affect

trailer handling. Sway control devices may

be used to help control these affects. If you

choose to use one, contact a reputable

trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway

control device will work with the vehicle,

hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system.

Follow the instructions provided by the

manufacturer for installing and using the

sway control device.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow

trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lbs.

(907 kg).

Class II hitch

Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver,

ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to

tow trailers of a maximum weight of

3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg).

Class III hitch

Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver,

ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to

tow trailers of a maximum weight of

5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).

Class IV hitch

Class IV hitches are weight carrying (WC)

and weight distributing (WD) hitches de-

pending on the vehicle and hitch specifica-

tions. Not all Class IVhitches are rated to be

both. See the specific hitch for that infor-

mation. Class IV trailer hitch equipment (re-

ceiver, ball mount and hitch ball) used as

weight carrying are rated up to 10,000 lbs.

(4,535 kg) gross trailer weight (GTW) with a

maximum trailer tongue weight (TW) of

1,000 lbs. (453 kg). Class IV hitches used for

weight distributing are rated up to

14,000 lbs. (6,350 kg) gross trailer weight

(GTW) with a maximum trailer tongue

weight (TW) of 1,400 lbs. (635 kg). A Class IV

hitch usually has a 2" square receiver open-

ing. A higher class drawbar does not in-

crease the towing capacity of the hitch. To

use this class of hitch for weight distribu-

tion requires a weight distribution system.

Class IV hitches attach to the vehicle frame

only. A weight distributing hitch should be

used to tow trailers that weigh over

5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).

Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV

weigh distributing trailer hitch that has a

14,000 lbs. (6,350 kg) maximum weight rat-

ing, but your vehicle is only capable of tow-

ing the maximum trailer weights shown in

the “Towing Load/Specification” chart in

this section.

5th wheel/gooseneck

A 5th wheel or gooseneck trailer can be

towed by installing a 5th wheel or goose-

neck trailer hitch. These types of hitches

are mounted in the bed of the pick-up. A

professional trailer equipment supplier

should install these hitches as it is very im-

portant to mount the hitch correctly to dis-

tribute the king pin weight for the proper

load carrying and sway control perfor-

mance.

The king pin weight should be 15% of the

fully loaded trailer. Make sure the king pin

weight does not cause the gross vehicle

weight to exceed the Gross Maximum

Technical and consumer information 10-47

Weight Rating or the rear axle weight to

exceed the Rear Gross Axle Weight rating.

For additional information, refer to “Maxi-

mum load limits” in this section.

The weight of the trailer should not exceed

the maximum towing capacity for the ve-

hicle. For additional information, refer to

“Towing Load/Specification” chart in this

section.

Make sure the trailer design allows for the

correct vehicle to trailer clearances before

purchasing a 5th wheel trailer.

WARNING

∙ The hitch should not be attached to or

affect the operation of the impact-

absorbing bumper.

∙ Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle exhaust

system, brake system, etc. to install a

trailer hitch.

∙ To reduce the possibility of additional

damage if your vehicle is struck from

the rear, where practical, remove the

receiver when not in use.

∙ Regularly check that all trailer hitch

mounting bolts are securely

mounted.

∙ When towing with the hitch ball

mounted to the rear bumper, do not

make sharp turns. The trailer may

contact the bumper and cause dam-

age to the bumper or trailer.

∙ When towing a 5th wheel trailer, do

not make sharp turns while driving or

backing. The trailer may contact the

vehicle and cause damage to both the

trailer and vehicle.

CAUTION

∙ A 5th wheel hitch adapter is necessary

to use an aftermarket 5th wheel hitch.

A Genuine NISSAN 5th wheel hitch

adapter (as shown) may be available

at a NISSAN dealer.

∙ Ensure kit components are properly

stored when not in use. Improperly

stowed components could result in

serious personal injury during a colli-

sion or sudden stop.

LTI2305

10-48 Technical and consumer information

Gooseneck hitch ball and safety chain

anchor attachment installation

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Remove the gooseneck hitch ball and

safety chain anchor attachments from

the storage pouch.

3. Remove the center and both of the rear

caps from the puck plugs.

∙ Once removed, place the pucks in the

storage pouch for future use.

4. Lift the handle from the center of the

hitch ball and rotate 90° from the rest-

ing position.

LTI2209 LTI2160

Technical and consumer information 10-49

5. Position the ball bearings to the sides

of the truck bed and Insert the goose-

neck hitch ball into the center receiver

tube of the truck bed.

6. Rotate the handle 90° seat the handle

back to the original resting position. If

the handle does not seat fully, rotate

the hitch ball until the handle drops

into the original resting position.

7. Place the safety chain anchor attach-

ments into the q-turn pucks.

LTI2210 LTI2164 LTI2211

10-50 Technical and consumer information

8. Rotate the safety chain anchor attach-

ments 90° until the center of the an-

chor seats into place.

NOTE:

Removal of the gooseneck hitch ball and

safety chain anchor attachments are in

the reverse order of installation. To re-

move safety chain anchor attachment,

lift the center䊊

1, rotate 90°, and lift

safety chain anchor attachment away.

Tire pressures

∙ When towing a trailer, inflate the

vehicle tires to the recom-

mended cold tire pressure indi-

cated on the Tire and Loading In-

formation label.

∙ Trailer tire condition, size, load rat-

ing and proper inflation pressure

should be in accordance with the

trailer and tire manufacturer’s

specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between

your vehicle and the trailer. The safety

chains should be crossed and should be

attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle

bumper or axle. The safety chains can be

attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is

mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave

enough slack in the chains to permit turn-

ing corners.

LTI2212 LTI2192

Technical and consumer information 10-51

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electrical

system, a commercially available

power-type module/converter must be

used to provide power for all trailer

lighting. This unit uses the vehicle bat-

tery as a direct power source for all

trailer lights while using the vehicle tail

light, stop light and turn signal circuits

as a signal source. The

module/converter must draw no more

than 15 milliamps from the stop and tail

lamp circuits. Using a

module/converter that exceeds these

power requirements may damage the

vehicle’s electrical system. See a repu-

table trailer retailer to obtain the proper

equipment and to have it installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federal

and/or local regulations. For assistance in

hooking up trailer lights,it is recommended

that you contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-

table trailer retailer. Vehicles equipped with

the optional trailer tow package are

equipped with a 7-pin trailer harness con-

nector. If your trailer is equipped with a flat

4-pin connector, an adapter will be needed

to connect the trailer lights to the vehicle.

Adapters are available at auto parts stores

and hitch retailers.

Trailer brakes (if so equipped)

If your trailer is equipped with a braking

system, make sure it conforms to federal

and/or local regulations and that it is prop-

erly installed.

Vehicles equipped with a 7–pin trailer har-

ness connector are pre-wired for a trailer

brake controller. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for a trailer brake

adapter harness.

When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.

(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake

system MUST be used. However, most

states require a separate braking system

on trailers with a loaded weight above a

specific amount. Make sure the trailer

meets the local regulations and the regu-

lations where you plan to tow.

WARNING

The Gross Combined Weight Rating

(GCWR) must never exceed the vehicle

manufacturers recommendation.

Several types of braking systems are avail-

able.

Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator is

mounted on the trailer tongue with a hy-

draulic line running to each trailer wheel.

Surge brakes are activated by the trailer

pushing against the hitch ball when the

tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surge

brakes are common on rental trailers and

some boat trailers. In this type of system,

there is no hydraulic or electric connection

for brake operation between the tow ve-

hicle and the trailer.

CAUTION

Your factory trailer brake control unit

will not activate surge-style trailer

brakes

Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking

systems are activated by an electronic sig-

nal sent from a trailer brake controller (spe-

cial brake-sensing module). If electric trailer

brakes are used, refer to “Electric trailer

brake controller" in this section.

Have a professional supplier of towing

equipment make sure the trailer brakes are

properly installed and demonstrate proper

brake function testing.

10-52 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

The NISSAN trailer brake controller has

been verified to be compatible with

trailers having electric actuated drum

brakes (one to four axles) and electric-

over-hydraulic brakes. It will not acti-

vate hydraulic surge-style trailer brakes

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-

rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Electric trailer brake controller

Trailers equipped with electric brakes may

require the installation of an aftermarket

trailer brake controller.

Your vehicle is equipped with a connector

and jumper harness that is specifically de-

signed to be used when installing an after-

market brake controller.

To install the electric trailer brake controller

jumper harness, perform the following pro-

cedure:

1. Open the driver door. Move the seat to

the rearmost position.

example

LTI0117

Technical and consumer information 10-53

2. Apply the parking brake to access the

jumper harness connector.

3. Locate the jumper harness connector

under the lower portion of the instru-

ment panel. The connector is taped to

the wiring harness 䊊

Aas indicated.

Wire color designation for electric trailer

brake controller jumper harness.

WIRE COLOR NOTE

RED/GREEN Vehicle stop lamp

switch to trailer brake

controller.

BLACK Brake controller

ground (-).

BROWN/WHITE Trailer brake controller

switched output.

RED/BLUE Trailer brake controller

illumination.

RED Fused trailer brake

controller battery feed

(B+).

LTI0122 LTI2228

10-54 Technical and consumer information

4. Peel off the tape and connect the

jumper harness to the connector 䊊

5. Release the parking brake.

6. Install the aftermarket electric trailer

brake controller according to the

manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Gain –

2. Gain +

3. Manual control lever

4. Boost

Trailer brake controller unit (if so

equipped)

The Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU), lo-

cated on the lower instrument panel, is a

device that assists the vehicle in having

effective and smooth braking while towing

a trailer.

Operating modes:

∙Automatic mode: This is the normal

operation of the TBCU depending on

the gain and boost settings adjusted by

the customer. This mode will activate

when vehicle brake pedal is pressed.

∙Manual mode: This mode is initiated by

adjusting the manual control lever from

resting position. This mode will provide

output power to trailer brakes without

applying the vehicle brake pedal.

To determine the output operation of the

system:

∙Gain + and Gain - : Used to increase or

decrease the braking force supplied to

the trailer brakes. To adjust the gain,

press Gain + or Gain - to the desired

point (0-10). For example: gain setting

6.0 is a typical starting point for heavy

loads.

∙Boost: Used to adjust the feel of the

automatic brake event that occurs

when the vehicle brake pedal is applied.

To set up boost, press Boost button

once to display for current boost set-

ting (display for 3 seconds). Keep press-

ing to increase boost level until the de-

sired level (0-3) is achieved.

LTI2229 LTI2157

Technical and consumer information 10-55

∙Manual Control Lever: Provides brake

output power to trailer brakes without

applying the vehicle brake pedal. The

amount of brake output supplied corre-

sponds to the amount of pinch pres-

sure applied to the manual control

lever.

Prodigy® P2 initial screen at start up (15 seconds*) Boost off

Power to Prodigy® P2 with trailer connected and boost feature not

engaged

Boost level 1

Power to Prodigy® P2 with trailer connected and boost feature not

engaged

Boost level 2

Power to Prodigy® P2, trailer not connected Boost level 3

Gain feature is adjustable from to by increments

*if sustained for longer, check trailer connections or visit a dealer for service

10-56 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

Do not exceed Gross Combined Weight

Rating (GVWR). For additional informa-

tion about GVWR, refer to “Towing

Load/Specification” in this section of

the manual.

Pre-towing tips

∙ Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or un-

loaded trailer is hitched.Do not drive the

vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or

nose-down condition; check for im-

proper tongue load,overload, worn sus-

pension or other possible causes of ei-

ther condition.

∙ Always secure items in the trailer to pre-

vent load shift while driving.

∙ Keep the cargo load as low as possible

in the trailer to keep the trailer center of

gravity low.

∙ Load the trailer so approximately 60%

of the trailer load is in the front half and

40% is in the back half. Also make sure

the load is balanced side to side.

This graphic shows the suggested boost levels for different trailer sizes relative to the

vehicle size.

LTI2156

Technical and consumer information 10-57

∙ Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,

vehicle tire pressure, trailer light opera-

tion, and trailer wheel lug nuts every

time you attach a trailer to the vehicle.

∙ Be certain your rearview mirrors con-

form to all federal, state or local regula-

tions. If not, install any mirrors required

for towing before driving the vehicle.

∙ Determine the overall height of the ve-

hicle and trailer so the required clear-

ance is known.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding

of the vehicle’s behavior, you should prac-

tice turning, stopping and backing up in an

area which is free from traffic. Steering sta-

bility and braking performance will be

somewhat different than under normal

driving conditions.

∙ Always secure items in the trailer to pre-

vent load shift while driving.

∙ Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin

or lock to prevent the coupler from in-

advertently becoming unlatched.

∙ Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or

stops.

∙ Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

∙ Always drive your vehicle at a moderate

speed.

∙ When backing up, hold the bottom of

the steering wheel with one hand. Move

your hand in the direction in which you

want the trailer to go. Make small cor-

rections and back up slowly. If possible,

have someone guide you when you are

backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle

and trailer when parking. Parking on a

slope is not recommended; however, if you

must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector to the P

(Park) position before blocking the

wheels and applying the parking brake,

transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the

downhill side of the vehicle and trailer

wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place,

slowly release the brake pedal until the

blocks absorb the vehicle load.

4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Make sure the indicator light (if so

equipped) indicates the transfer case is

in 4H, 4LO,or 2H and that the ATP light is

off. If the indicator light is flashing,

or the ATP light is ON, make sure the

transmission is in P (Park) (A/T) and

turn the 4WD switch to 2WD or 4H. For

additional information, refer to “Auto-

matic transmission park warning light”

in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion and “Using 4-wheel drive (4WD)” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

7. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer

are clear from the blocks.

6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

7. Have someone retrieve and store the

blocks.

10-58 Technical and consumer information

∙ While going downhill, the weight of the

trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may

decrease overall stability. Therefore, to

maintain adequate control, reduce your

speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid

long or repeated use of the brakes

when descending a hill, as this reduces

their effectiveness and could cause

overheating. Shifting to a lower gear in-

stead provides “engine braking” and re-

duces the need to brake as frequently.

∙ If the engine coolant temperature rises

to a high temperature, refer to “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this owner’s

manual.

∙ Trailer towing requires more fuel than

normal circumstances.

∙ Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s

first 500 miles (805 km).

∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you

do tow, do not drive over 50 mph

(80 km/h).

∙ Have your vehicle serviced more often

than at intervals specified. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Mainte-

nance schedules” in the “Maintenance

and schedule” section of this manual.

∙ When making a turn, your trailer wheels

will be closer to the inside of the turn

than your vehicle wheels. To compen-

sate for this, make a larger than normal

turning radius during the turn.

∙ Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-

versely affect vehicle/trailer handling,

possibly causing vehicle sway. When

being passed by larger vehicles, be pre-

pared for possible changes in cross-

winds that could affect vehicle han-

dling.

Trailer Sway Assist:

To minimize trailer sway, your vehicle may

apply braking to individual wheels based

on input from your vehicle sensors and ve-

hicle speed. Trailer sway control is a func-

tion of the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system and is active when the VDC func-

tion is enabled.

CAUTION

If the VDC-OFF switch is on (meaning

VDC system OFF), the Trailer Sway As-

sist is also disabled

When Trailer Sway Assist is in operation, the

VDC warning light blinks.When vehicle con-

trol is regained, VDC warning light will turn

OFF.

For additional information about the VDC

system, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF switch” in the “Instruments and

controls” section and “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

If Trailer Sway Assist activates, do the fol-

lowing:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal

to allow the vehicle to coast and steer

as straight ahead as the road condi-

tions allow. This combination will help

stabilize the vehicle

CAUTION

Do not try to correct trailer sway by

steering or applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently ap-

ply the brakes and pull to the side of the

road in a safe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is

balanced. For additional information,

refer to “Pre-towing tips” in this section.

Technical and consumer information 10-59

NOTE:

Trailer Sway Assist cannot reduce trailer

sway in all situations.

∙ Be careful when passing other vehicles.

Passing while towing a trailer requires

considerably more distance than nor-

mal passing. Remember, the length of

the trailer must also pass the other ve-

hicle before you can safely change

lanes.

∙ Use the Tow Mode or downshift the

transmission to a lower gear for engine

braking when driving down steep or

long hills. This will help slow the vehicle

without applying the brakes.

∙ Avoid holding the brake pedal down too

long or too frequently. This could cause

the brakes to overheat, resulting in re-

duced braking efficiency.

∙ Increase your following distance to al-

low for greater stopping distances

while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops

and brake gradually.

∙ NISSAN recommends that the cruise

control (if so equipped) not be used

while towing a trailer.

∙ Some states or provinces have specific

regulations and speed limits for ve-

hicles that are towing trailers. Obey the

local speed limits.

∙ Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness

connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts

after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at

every break.

∙ When launching a boat, don’t allow the

water level to go over the exhaust tail

pipe or rear bumper.

∙ Make sure you disconnect the trailer

lights before backing the trailer into the

water or the trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil

should be replaced and transmission

oil/fluid should be changed more fre-

quently. For additional information, refer

to the “Do-it-yourself” section in this

manual.

Tow mode

Using tow mode is recommended when

pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy

load. Press the TOW MODE switch to acti-

vate tow mode. The indicator light on the

TOW MODE switch illuminates when tow

mode is selected. Press the TOW MODE

switch again to turn tow mode off. Tow

mode is automatically canceled when the

ignition switch is turned off.

Tow mode includes the following features:

∙ Grade logic — Adjusts transmission

shifts when pulling a trailer or hauling a

load up a grade.

∙ Downhill Speed Control (DSC) — auto-

matically downshifts when driving

down a grade with a trailer or heavy

load to help control vehicle speed.

Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no

trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not

cause any damage. However, fuel

economy may be reduced and the

transmission/engine driving characteris-

tics may feel unusual.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil

should be replaced and transmission

oil/fluid should be changed more fre-

quently. For additional information, refer

to the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

10-60 Technical and consumer information

FLAT TOWING FOR 2-WHEEL DRIVE

(2WD) VEHICLE (if so equipped)

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on

the ground is sometimes called flat towing.

This method is sometimes used when

towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-

hicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

∙ Never flat tow your 2WD vehicle.

∙ Never tow your 2WD vehicle with the

rear wheels on the ground. Doing so

may cause serious and expensive

damage to the powertrain.

∙ DO NOT tow your 2WD vehicle with all

four wheels on the ground (flat tow-

ing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal

transmission parts due to lack of

transmission lubrication.

∙ For emergency towing procedures re-

fer to “Towing recommended by

NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

FLAT TOWING FOR 4-WHEEL DRIVE

(4WD) VEHICLE (if so equipped)

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on

the ground is sometimes called flat towing.

This method is sometimes used when

towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-

hicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

∙ Never flat tow your 4WD vehicle.

∙ DO NOT tow your 4WD vehicle with

any wheels on the ground. Doing so

may cause serious and expensive

damage to the powertrain.

∙ For emergency towing procedures re-

fer to “Towing recommended by

NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

Automatic Transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with an auto-

matic transmission, an appropriate vehicle

dolly MUST be placed under the towed ve-

hicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the dolly

manufacturer’s recommendations when

using their product.

NISSAN does not make a snowplow for TI-

TAN and has not evaluated the suitability of

its trucks for use as snowplow platforms.

Instead, the snowplow manufacturers es-

tablish minimum vehicle requirements for

their various plow products and they make

the determination as to which vehicle plat-

forms are suitable, based on their indi-

vidual product specifications. Consult the

snowplow manufacturers and sellers con-

cerning the fitness of the TITAN for use with

their products. NISSAN advises caution

whenever installing aftermarket parts and

accessories because these products have

not been tested or certified by NISSAN.

Please reference the NISSAN Body Builder’s

guide for the appropriate upfit capacities

and requirements of the TITAN XD ‘Snow-

plow Prep’ package (if so equipped) or ‘HD

Front GAWR’ Package (if so equipped).

WARNING

∙ Installing a snowplow may affect ve-

hicle handling. This may cause the

driver to lose control of the vehicle

and could result in vehicle damage,

serious injury, or death.

SNOW PLOW

Technical and consumer information 10-61

∙ A snowplow attached may affect the

operation of the air bags. Use extreme

caution while driving and plowing to

avoid vehicle damage, serious injury,

or death.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual-

ity Grades: All passenger car tires must

conform to federal safety requirements in

addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where appli-

cable on the tire sidewall between tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-

ing based on the wear rate of the tire when

tested under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course. For ex-

ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one

and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the

government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use,

however, and may depart significantly from

the norm due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in road

characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to low-

est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-

sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-

ment as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test

surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire

is based on straight-ahead braking

traction tests, and does not include ac-

celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the high-

est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-

tance to the generation of heat, and its

ability to dissipate heat when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-

perature can cause the material of the tire

to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-

cessive temperature can lead to sudden

tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a

level of performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-

tor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on

the laboratory test wheel than the mini-

mum required by law.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

10-62 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly in-

flated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, under-inflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in combi-

nation, can cause heat build-up and

possible tire failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the

following emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty

Information Booklet which comes with

your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a

Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,

you may obtain a replacement by writing

to:

∙ Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty

Information Booklet which comes with

your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a

Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,

you may obtain a replacement by writing

to:

∙ Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

Technical and consumer information 10-63

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the Na-

tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin-

istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-

fying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints,

it may open an investigation, and if it

finds that a safety defect exists in a

group of vehicles, it may order a re-

call and remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you,

your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

go to http://www.safercar.gov; or

write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400

Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.

20590. You can also obtain other in-

formation about motor vehicle safety

from http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contact-

ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform Trans-

port Canada in addition to notifying

NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives com-

plaints, it may open an investigation,

and if it finds that a safety defect

exists in a group of vehicles, it may

request that NISSAN conduct a recall

campaign. However, Transport

Canada cannot become involved in

individual problems between you,

your dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s

Defect Investigations and Recalls Divi-

sion toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You

may also report safety defects online

at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-

Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-

cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers)

or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-

Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-

cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)

Additional information concerning

motor vehicle safety may be ob-

tained from Transport Canada’s

Road Safety Information Centre at

1-800-333-0371 or online at

www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English

speakers) or

www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere

(French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety con-

cerns please contact our Consumer

Information Centre toll free at 1-800-

387-0122.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

10-64 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

A vehicle equipped with 4-Wheel Drive

(4WD) should never be tested using a

two wheel dynamometer (such as the

dynamometers used by some states for

emissions testing), or similar equip-

ment. Make sure you inform the test fa-

cility personnel that your vehicle is

equipped with 4WD before it is placed

on a dynamometer. Using the wrong

test equipment may result in transmis-

sion damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in serious

vehicle damage or personal injury.

Due to legal requirements in some states

and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may

be required to be in what is called the

“ready condition” for an

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the

emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”

when it is driven through certain driving

patterns. Usually, the ready condition can

be obtained by ordinary usage of the ve-

hicle.

If a powertrain system component is re-

paired or the battery is disconnected, the

vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi-

tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the

vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test

readiness condition. Place the ignition

switch in the ON position without starting

the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds

and then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test

condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not

blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi-

tion is “ready”. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con-

dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

diesel engine only

For additional information, refer to the “Ti-

tan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data

Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an

EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle,data

that will assist in understanding how a ve-

hicle’s systems performed. The EDR is de-

signed to record data related to vehicle dy-

namics and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-

cord such data as:

∙ How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

∙ Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depress-

ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;

and,

∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling.

∙ Sounds are not recorded.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (gas

engine only)

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

Technical and consumer information 10-65

These data can help provide a better un-

derstanding of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data

are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-

trivial crash situation occurs; no data are

recorded by the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data (e.g.

name, gender, age and crash location) are

recorded. However, other parties, such as

law enforcement, could combine the EDR

data with the type of personally identifying

data routinely acquired during a crash in-

vestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to

the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN

dealer, other parties, such as law enforce-

ment, that have the special equipment,can

read the information if they have access to

the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be

accessed with the consent of the vehicle

owner or lessee or as otherwise required or

permitted by law.

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this

model year and prior can be purchased. A

Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for

your vehicle. This manual is the same one

used by the factory-trained technicians

working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be pur-

chased.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of Genu-

ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of Genu-

ine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN

Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this

model year and prior, please contact your

nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-

ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your

area, call the NISSAN Information Center at

1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep-

resentative will assist you.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

10-66 Technical and consumer information

11 Index

4WD.......................5-45

4WDwarninglight..............2-22

4-Wheel Drive .................5-45

Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS)

system .....................5-59

Aiming control, headlights . . . . . . . . .2-56

Air bag (See supplemental restraint

system) .....................1-55

Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact air

bagsystem).............1-62, 1-77

Air bag warning labels ............1-82

Airbagwarninglight.........1-83, 2-29

Air bag warning light,

supplemental ..............1-83, 2-29

Air cleaner ...................8-19

Air cleaner housing filter ..........8-19

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation . . . .4-39, 4-45

Air conditioner specification label . .10-20

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil

recommendations ............10-8

Air conditioner system refrigerant

recommendations ............10-8

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)

(if so equipped) ..............4-44

Heater and air conditioner

controls ..................4-45

Servicing air conditioner ........4-49

Air flow charts.................4-40

Alarm system

(See vehicle security system) .......2-48

Anchor point locations............1-33

Antenna ....................4-89

Antifreeze ...................5-69

Anti-lock brake warning light .......2-22

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ......5-57

Apps ......................4-89

Audible reminders ..............2-32

Audiosystem.................4-49

AMradioreception............4-50

Bluetooth® audio .........4-85,4-86

Bluetooth® streaming audio . .4-85, 4-86

Compact disc (CD)

player.............4-60,4-66,4-73

FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player....................4-58

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player................4-62,4-68

FMradioreception............4-50

iPod®Player.............4-79,4-82

iPod® player operation ......4-79,4-82

Radio ....................4-49

Steering wheel audio control

switch...................4-88

USBinterface............4-75,4-77

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection

Port.....................4-77

Autolightswitch...............2-55

Automatic

Automatic drive positioner. . . .3-41, 3-43

Automatic power window switch. . .2-88

Driving with automatic

transmission................5-17

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror ....3-32

Automatic door locks.............3-8

Automatic drive positioner. . . . . .3-41, 3-43

Automatic transmission fluid temperature

gauge ......................2-11

AUXjack....................4-70

Back button ...................4-7

Battery..................5-69,8-15

Charge warning light ..........2-25

Battery replacement ............8-26

Keyfob...................8-26

NISSAN Intelligent Key® .........8-26

Before starting the engine .........5-14

Belt(Seedrivebelt)..............8-17

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ..........5-23

Block heater

Engine....................5-71

Bluetooth® audio ...........4-85,4-86

Bluetooth® hands-free phone

system .................4-121, 4-135

Booster seats .................1-51

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ....5-57

Brakefluid.................8-13

Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-31

Brakesystem...............5-56

Brakewarninglight...........2-24

Brake wear indicators . . . . . . .2-32, 8-21

Parking brake operation .........5-22

Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

Brake assist ..................5-58

Brakefluid....................8-13

Brakes......................8-21

Brake system..................5-56

Break-in schedule ...............5-43

Brightness/contrast button .........4-9

Brightness control

Instrument panel .............2-58

Bulb check/instrument panel........2-22

Bulb replacement ...............8-31

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants....................10-2

Cargolightswitch...............2-59

Cargo

(See vehicle loading information) .....10-22

Car phone or CB radio ............4-121

CDcareandcleaning.............4-87

CD player

(See audio system) .......4-60,4-66,4-73

Check tire pressure ..............2-42

Childrestraints........1-26, 1-26, 1-28, 1-31

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren)System..............1-31

Precautions on child

restraints......1-28, 1-36, 1-42, 1-46, 1-51

Top tether strap anchor point

locations...................1-33

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-9

Chimes, audible reminders .........2-32

Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4

Climate control seat switch . . . . . . . . .2-60

Clock setting (models with Navigation

System)......................4-7

Clock setting (models without Navigation

System)..................4-59,4-64

C.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-18

Cold weather driving .............5-69

Compact disc (CD) player . . .4-60, 4-66, 4-73

Compass ....................2-18

Console light ..................2-91

Control panel buttons .............4-4

Back button .................4-7

Brightness/contrast button .......4-9

Enterbutton.................4-4

With navigation system . . . . . . . . . .4-4

Controls

Audio controls (steering wheel) ....4-88

Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-45

Heater and air conditioner controls

(manual)...................4-35

Coolant

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine coolant .........8-6

Checking engine coolant level ......8-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9

Corrosionprotection..............7-7

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . .5-41, 5-41, 5-42

Cupholders...................2-81

Curtain side-impact and rollover air

bag........................1-80

Daytime Running Light System . . .2-57, 8-29

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF).........8-11

Digital video disc DVD . . . . . . . . . . . .4-94

Dimensions and weights ..........10-11

Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-58

Display......................2-32

Display controls

(see control panel buttons) ..........4-4

Door locks ..................3-5,3-6

Door open warning light ...........2-25

Drivebelt.....................8-17

Drive positioner, Automatic . . . . . .3-41, 3-43

Driving

Coldweatherdriving...........5-69

Driving with automatic

transmission ................5-17

Precautions when starting and

driving ..................5-2,5-9

Driving the vehicle ...............5-16

Eco Drive Report................5-54

Economy - fuel.................5-45

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

system......................5-52

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

systemswitch.................2-67

Emergency engine shutoff .......5-13, 6-2

Emission control information label . . . .10-19

Emission control system warranty . . . .10-63

11-2

Engine

Before starting the engine ........5-14

Blockheater.................5-71

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine coolant .........8-6

Changing engine oil ............8-8

Changing engine oil filter .........8-9

Checking engine coolant level ......8-6

Checking engine oil level .........8-7

Engine compartment check

locations...................8-3

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9

Engine cooling system ..........8-5

Engine oil ...................8-7

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendation .............10-7

Engine oil pressure gauge .....2-11, 2-12

Engine oil pressure warning light . . .2-25

Engine oil viscosity ............10-8

Engine serial number ..........10-18

Engine specifications ...........10-9

Engine coolant temperature gauge ....2-9

Engine oil pressure gauge .......2-11, 2-12

Enterbutton...................4-4

EventDatarecorders............10-65

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).......5-2

Explanation of maintenance items .....9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance

items.......................9-5

Extended storage switch ..........2-74

Eyeglasscase.................2-80

Flashers

(See hazard warning flasher switch) ....6-2

Flattire......................6-3

Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-5

Fluid

Brakefluid..................8-13

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Engine coolant ...............8-5

Engine oil ...................8-7

Powersteeringfluid............8-12

Windshield-washer fluid .........8-14

F.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-18

Foglightswitch................2-59

Four-Wheel Drive ...............5-45

Front air bag system (See supplemental

restraint system) .............1-62, 1-77

Front and rear sonar system ........5-64

Front-door pocket...............2-75

Front power seat adjustment.........1-7

Frontseats....................1-3

Fuel

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Fuel economy ...............5-45

Fuel gauge .................2-10

Fueloctanerating.............10-7

Fuel recommendation ..........10-5

Loose fuel cap warning .........2-45

Fuel Cell Vehicle (FCV) System

Tire pressure ................8-34

Fuel efficient driving tips ...........5-43

Fuel-filler door .................3-25

Fuel gauge ...................2-10

Fuses.......................8-22

Fusiblelinks...................8-24

Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver . .2-92, 2-93, 2-94, 2-95, 2-95, 2-96

Gauge

Automatic transmission fluid

temperature gauge ............2-11

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9

Engine oil pressure gauge .....2-11, 2-12

Fuel gauge .................2-10

Odometer ..................2-8

Speedometer ................

2-8

Tachometer .................2-9

Trip computer ...............2-13

Trip odometer ................2-8

Voltmeter..................2-12

General maintenance .............9-2

Glovebox....................2-78

Grocery hooks .................2-84

Hands-free phone system,

Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121, 4-135

Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2

Headlight aiming control . . . . . . . . . .2-56

Headlight and turn signal switch......2-54

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-54

Headlights...................8-28

Headlights, aiming control. . . . . . . . . .2-56

11-3

Headrestraints.................1-12

Heatedrearseats...............2-62

Heatedseats..................2-61

Heated steering wheel switch .......2-63

Heater

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)

(if so equipped) ..............4-44

Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-45

Heater operation ..........4-37,4-46

Heater and air conditioner (automatic). .4-44

Hill descent control switch .........2-65

Hill descent control system .........5-62

Hill start assist system ............5-63

HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver . .2-92, 2-93, 2-94, 2-95, 2-95, 2-96

Hood .......................3-25

Hook

Luggage hook ...............2-85

Horn.......................2-59

Ignition switch

Push-button ignition switch .......5-11

Immobilizer system...........2-49,5-14

Important vehicle information label . . .10-18

In-cabinmicrofilter..............8-19

Increasing fuel economy ..........5-45

Indicator lights and audible reminders

(See warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders) ................2-22,2-29

Informationdisplay..............2-32

Inside automatic anti-glare mirror.....3-32

Instrument brightness control .......2-58

Instrument panel .............0-6,2-4

Instrument panel dimmer switch .....2-58

Intelligent Around View Monitor ......4-18

Intelligent Key system

Key operating range ............3-11

Key operation ................3-12

Mechanical key ...............3-4

Remote keyless entry operation ....3-15

Troubleshooting guide ..........3-20

Warning signals ..............3-20

Interiorlight...................2-90

iPod®Player...............4-79,4-82

ISOFIX child restraints .............1-31

Jumpstarting..............6-14,8-16

Key.........................3-2

Key fob battery replacement ........8-26

Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system

(See Intelligent Key system) .......3-15

Keys

NISSAN Intelligent Key® .......3-2,3-10

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

keys......................3-4

Labels

Air conditioner specification label . .10-20

C.M.V.S.S. certification label .......10-18

Emission control information label . .10-19

Engine serial number ..........10-18

F.M.V.S.S. certification label .......10-18

Tire and Loading Information label. .10-20

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-17

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

plate.....................10-17

Warning labels (for SRS) .........1-82

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren)System................1-31

License plate

Installing the license plate .......10-21

Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-83, 2-29

Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-31

Bulb check/instrument panel......2-22

Bulb replacement .............8-31

Charge warning light ...........2-25

Console light ................2-91

Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-31

Foglights..................8-28

oglightswitch..............2-59

Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-54

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-54

Headlights.................8-28

Interiorlight.................2-90

Lightbulbs.................8-28

Low tire pressure warning light.....2-26

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light ..................2-27, 2-43

Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-65

Personal lights ...............2-92

Security indicator light ..........2-31

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ..............2-22,2-29

11-4

Lights......................8-28

Maplights..................2-91

Lock

Child safety rear door lock ........3-9

Door locks ................3-5,3-6

Power door locks ..............3-6

Loose fuel cap warning ...........2-45

Low fuel warning light . .2-25, 2-28, 2-41, 2-42

Low tire pressure warning light.......2-26

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light ....................2-27,2-43

Luggage hook .................2-85

Luggage

(See vehicle loading information) .....10-22

Maintenance

General maintenance ...........9-2

Insidethevehicle..............9-3

Maintenance precautions.........8-2

Outsidethevehicle.............9-2

Seat belt maintenance ..........1-25

Under the hood and vehicle .......9-4

Maintenance log ................9-18

Maintenance requirements..........9-2

Maintenance schedules ............9-7

Malfunction indicator light. . . . . . .2-27, 2-30

Manual front seat adjustment ........1-5

Maplights....................2-91

Map pocket................2-75,2-76

Memory Seat...............3-41,3-43

Meters and gauges ............2-6,2-11

Instrument brightness control .....2-58

Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . .3-32

Outsidemirrors..............3-33

Rearview...................3-32

Vanitymirror................3-31

Mirrors......................3-32

Mobile apps ..................4-89

Moving Object Detection (MOD) ......4-30

NissanConnect®................4-89

NissanConnect® Services ..........4-90

NISSAN Intelligent Key® .........3-2,3-10

NISSAN mobile entertainment system

(MES) .......................4-94

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System..................2-49,5-14

NISSAN voice recognition system.....4-145

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . .10-7

Odometer ....................2-8

Oil

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine oil ............8-8

Changing engine oil filter .........8-9

Checking engine oil level .........8-7

Engine oil ...................8-7

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendation .............10-7

Engine oil viscosity ............10-8

One shot call . . . . . . . . . .4-124, 4-125, 4-137

Outsidemirrors................3-33

Overhead sunglasses holder ........2-80

Overheat

Ifyourvehicleoverheats.........6-16

Owner's manual order form ........10-66

Owner's manual/service manual order

information..................10-66

Parking

Parking brake operation .........5-22

Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-56

Parkingbrake..................5-22

Personal lights .................2-92

Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free

system.................4-121,4-135

Power

Front seat adjustment ...........1-7

Power door locks ..............3-6

Power outlet . . . . . . . . . .2-71, 2-71, 2-73

Powerrearwindows...........2-87

Powersteeringfluid............8-12

Power steering system .........5-56

Powerwindows..............2-86

Rearpowerwindows...........2-87

Powerinverterswitch............2-68

Poweroutlet............2-71, 2-71, 2-73

Powersteering.................5-56

Powersteeringfluid..............8-12

Precautions

Maintenance precautions.........8-2

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions.................5-6

11-5

Precautions on booster

seats.........1-28, 1-36, 1-42, 1-46, 1-51

Precautions on child

restraints......1-28, 1-36, 1-42, 1-46, 1-51

Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-17

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system .................1-55, 1-70

Precautions when starting and

driving ..................5-2,5-9

Push starting ..................6-16

Radio

Car phone or CB radio ..........4-121

FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player....................4-58

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player.................4-62,4-68

Steering wheel audio control

switch....................4-88

Rain sensor ...................2-52

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)

test.......................10-65

RearCrossTrafficAlert(RCTA)........5-33

Rearpowerwindows.............2-87

Rearseat.....................1-5

Rearslidingwindow .............2-89

Rear sonar system OFF switch .......2-69

Rearviewmirror................3-32

RearViewMonitor...............4-10

Rear window and/or outside mirror

defrosterswitch................2-53

Recommended Fluids ............10-2

Recorders

EventData.................10-65

Refrigerant recommendation........10-8

Registering a vehicle in another

country .....................10-17

Remote Engine Start ..........3-22,5-16

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-64

Safety

Child safety rear door lock ........3-9

Child seat belts . .1-28, 1-36, 1-42, 1-46, 1-51

Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-64

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment......1-5

Front power seat adjustment.......1-7

Seatback pockets ...............2-76

Seat belt

Childsafety.................1-26

Infants and small children ........1-26

InjuredPerson...............1-20

Largerchildren...............1-27

Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-17

Pregnant women .............1-20

Seat belt extenders ............1-25

Seat belt maintenance ..........1-25

Seatbelts................1-17, 7-6

Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-24

Three-point type with retractor. . . . .1-20

Seat belt extenders ..............1-25

Seatbeltwarninglight.........1-20, 2-25

Seats

Adjustment ..................1-3

Automatic drive positioner . . . .3-41, 3-43

Frontseats..................1-3

Heatedseats................2-61

Manual front seat adjustment ......1-5

Rearseat...................1-5

Security indicator light ............2-31

Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System), engine start ..........

2-49, 5-14

Security systems

Vehicle security system .........2-48

Self-adjusting brakes .............8-21

Service manual order form ........10-66

Servicing air conditioner ...........4-49

Shifting

Automatic transmission .........5-18

Shoulder belt height adjustment ......1-24

Side air bag system (See supplemental

side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag

systems).....................1-80

Siri® Eyes-Free .................4-90

Smartphone connectivity ..........4-89

Snowplow...................10-61

Spark plug replacement ...........8-18

Spark plugs ...................8-18

Specifications..................10-9

Speedometer ..................2-8

Speedometer and odometer.........2-7

SRS warning label ...............1-82

Stability control ................5-60

Standard maintenance ............9-8

Starting

Before starting the engine ........5-14

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14, 8-16

Precautions when starting and

driving ..................5-2,5-9

Push starting ................6-16

Starting the engine (diesel only) ......5-16

11-6

Starting the engine

(gasoline engine only).............5-15

Steering

Powersteeringfluid............8-12

Power steering system .........5-56

Steering wheel .................3-29

Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-88

Stoplight....................8-31

Storage.....................2-75

Storagetray ..................2-78

Sunglasses case ...............2-80

Sunglasses holder ..............2-80

Sunvisors....................3-30

Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-82

Supplemental air bag warning

light....................1-83, 2-29

Supplemental front impact air bag

system ...................1-62, 1-77

Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels . . . .1-82

Precautions on supplemental

restraint system ...........1-55, 1-70

Supplemental restraint system

(Supplemental air bag system) .......1-55

Switch

Autolightswitch..............2-55

Automatic power window switch . . .2-88

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

system switch ...............2-67

Foglightswitch..............2-59

Hazard warning flasher switch......6-2

Headlight aiming control . . . . . . . .2-56

Headlight and turn signal switch....2-54

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-54

Hill descent control switch .......2-65

Instrument brightness control .....2-58

Power door lock switch ..........3-6

Powerinverterswitch..........2-68

Rear sonar system OFF switch .....2-69

Tow mode switch .............2-70

Turn signal switch .............2-58

Tachometer ...................2-9

Tailgate..................3-37, 3-37

Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9

Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),

engine start ...............2-49,5-14

Three-waycatalyst...............5-2

Tie down hooks ................3-41

Tire

Flattire....................6-3

Spare tire .............6-4,6-6,8-45

Tire and Loading Information label. .10-20

Tire chains .................8-41

Tire pressure ................8-34

Tirerotation................8-42

Tires of 4-wheel drive...........8-44

Types of tires ................8-40

Uniform tire quality grading ......10-62

Wheels and tires ..........8-34,10-10

Wheel/tire size...............10-10

Tire pressure ..................8-34

Low tire pressure warning light. . . . .2-26

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)....................5-3,6-3

Towing

2-wheel drive models ...........6-19

Flattowing.................10-61

Towing load/specification .......10-40

Trailertowing...............10-36

Towingatrailer................10-36

Towingyourvehicle..............6-17

Tow mode switch ...............2-70

Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU) ....2-70

Transceiver

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . .2-92,

2-93, 2-94, 2-95, 2-95, 2-96

Transfer case..................5-46

Transmission

Driving with automatic

transmission................5-17

Travel (See registering a vehicle in another

country) .....................10-17

Trip computer .................2-13

Trip odometer ..................2-8

Troubleshooting guide

(NISSAN voice recognition system) . . . .4-150

Truckbox.................3-37,3-37

Truck - camper loading ...........10-34

Turn signal switch ...............2-58

Under seat storage bin ........2-77,2-80

Uniform tire quality grading ........10-62

USBinterface..................4-77

Audio file operation.........4-76,4-78

Using four wheel drive (4WD) ........5-45

Vanitymirror..................3-31

11-7

Variable voltage control system ......8-17

Vehicle dimensions and weights .....10-11

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch......................2-65

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . .5-60

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system. .5-60

Vehicle identification .............10-17

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-17

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

(Chassis number) ...............10-17

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

plate.......................10-17

Vehicle immobilizer system......2-49,5-14

Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . . .2-32

Vehicle loading information ........10-22

Vehiclerecovery.............6-19,6-20

Vehicle security system ...........2-48

Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System), engine start . .2-49, 5-14

Vents.......................4-35

Visors......................3-30

Voice Prompt Interrupt . . .4-124, 4-125, 4-137

Voice recognition system..........4-145

Voltmeter....................2-12

Warning

4WDwarninglight.............2-22

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-83, 2-29

Anti-lock brake warning light ......2-22

Battery charge warning light ......2-25

Brakewarninglight............2-24

Door open warning light .........2-25

Engine oil pressure warning light . . .2-25

Hazard warning flasher switch......6-2

Loose fuel cap warning .........2-45

Low fuel warning

light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25, 2-28, 2-41, 2-42

Low tire pressure warning light.....2-26

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light ..................2-27,2-43

Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-65

Passenger's seat belt warning light and

chime....................2-28

Seatbeltwarninglight.......1-20, 2-25

Supplemental air bag warning

light..................1-83, 2-29

Vehicle security system .........2-48

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ..............2-22,2-29

Warning labels (for SRS) .........1-82

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ................2-22,2-29

Audible reminders .........2-22,2-29

Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . .2-22, 2-29

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22, 2-29

Warninglights..............2-22,2-29

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders ....................2-21

Warning systems switch. . . . . . . . . . .2-64

Weights (See dimensions and weights) .10-11

Wheels and tires ............8-34,10-10

Wheel/tire size.................10-10

When traveling or registering in another

country .....................10-17

Windows ....................2-86

Locking passengers' windows .....2-87

Powerrearwindows...........2-87

Powerwindows..............2-86

Rearpowerwindows...........2-87

Rearslidingwindow ...........2-89

Windshield-washer fluid ...........8-14

Windshield wiper blades ...........8-20

Wiper

Wiper blades ................8-20

Wiper and washer switch ..........2-50

11-8

MEMO

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Gas engine only

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) number (Research octane number

91).

CAUTION

∙ Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

∙ Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to

run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or

E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically

designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-

versely affect the emission control

devices and systems of the vehicle.

Damage caused by such fuel is not

covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-

tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl

manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using

fuel containing MMT may adversely

affect vehicle performance and ve-

hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-

ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-

tent, so you may have to consult your

gasoline retailer for more details.

Note that Federal and California laws

prohibit the use of MMT in reformu-

lated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage

for that region.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

Diesel engine only

For additional information, refer to “Fuel

recommendation” in the “Titan Diesel Own-

er’s Manual”.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

Gas engine only

∙ Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN”

For additional information, refer to “Engine

oil and oil filter recommendations” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

Diesel engine only

For additional information, refer to “Engine

oil recommendation” in the “Titan Diesel

Owner’s Manual”.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:

Refer to the Tire and Loading Information

label.

The label is typically located on the driver

side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For

additional information, refer to “Wheels and

tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

2018 Nissan Titan And XD | Owner's Manual Maintenance Information USA Owner

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation